COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 A UIST OF -REBK ERENCES IN 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 COMPILED BY 
 
 WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 
 Chief of the Science and Technology Division 
 
 WITH INTRODUCTION BY 
 
 E. J. WALL 
 
 Associate Editor of ‘*American Photography”’ 
 
 NEW YORK — 
 1924 
 

 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 AEST SOT ARE EER ENCES 7UN 
 ELLE NE Wee ORK PRUBUCIGYVELBRARY 
 
 COMPILED BY 
 
 WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 
 
 WITH INTRODUCTION BY 
 
 Ee oWALL 
 
 Associate Editor of ‘‘American Photography’’ 
 
 NEW YORK 
 1924 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 es. yaa 5 
 , Lh AL iy ( Bethe bee 2 
 ' a ; Tig a Pt pate we i 7 
 Yr - ¥ 1 
 ACs ede, SEN stall , aay cK 
 ‘ f B he® ? ty v 
 Ne 
 \? 
 * 
 NOTE T* 
 
 This list includes books and periodical 
 articles available in the Reference Depart- 
 ment of The New York Public Library on 
 
 _ June 1, 1924. They may be consulted in the 
 Central Building at Fifth Avenue and Forty- 
 second Street. No attempt has been made to 
 cite references to patent records. 
 . 
 o< 
 24 
 4 - REPRINTED OCTOBER 1924 
 mi FROM THE . 
 ] BULLETIN OF THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 5 JUNE, JULY, AUGUST AND SEPTEMBER, 1924 
 PRINTED AT THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY : 
 form p188 [x-29-24 3c] _ eee 
 . . ae 
 f 
 e rh) BAe jot : a 4 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 A LIST OF REFERENCES IN THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 
 
 T is interesting to note that a print in the approximate colors of nature was 
 
 obtained before photography, as we now understand it, had become an 
 accomplished fact. J. T. Seebeck sent to the poet Goethe a note: “On the 
 chemical action of light and colored illumination,” in which he described the 
 reproduction of a spectrum in colors on damp silver chloride. This was pub- 
 lished by Goethe as an appendix to his “Zur Farbenlehre” (Tiibingen, 1810, 
 Bd. 2, p.717). Descriptions of Daguerre’s and Fox Talbot’s processes of 
 photography were published in 1839. 
 
 The Seebeck process attracted some attention in the early days, notably 
 from Sir John Herschel, E. Becquerel, Niepce de Saint Victor and Poitevin. 
 But excellent as are the results thus obtainable this process has become more 
 of a pretty laboratory experiment than a working method, because no means 
 have been found of making such pictures permanent. The process is based 
 on the fact that the “‘subchlorides”’ of silver, that is, the dark-colored products 
 of the action of light on white silver chloride, assume the colors of the incident 
 light. When silvered plates or homogeneous films of silver subchloride on 
 reflective surfaces are used, the colors are partly due to the formation of silver 
 in laminae, separated from one another by half the wave-length of the incident 
 light. Using paper supports involving no regular reflection, the colors become 
 the so-called “body colors,’ which may be looked upon as light-formed pig- 
 ments. Fixation of such pictures destroys in the former case the ordered sep- 
 aration of the laminae, and in the latter case the surface color and chemical 
 nature of each body pigment are altered. 
 
 J. Clerk Maxwell, the famous English physicist, was the first to suggest 
 the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by splitting up the 
 subject into its three component colors, red, green, and blue-violet, in accord- 
 ance with the Young-Helmholtz theory of trichromatic vision. He actually 
 attempted (Proc. Roy. Soc. 1859, v. 60, p. 404, 484) to reproduce a subject in 
 this manner by photographing it through liquid color filters of the above named 
 hues and projecting transparencies from the negatives through similarly 
 colored filters by means of three lanterns. The result was, of course, but an 
 evanescent picture and by no means perfect, for at that time there was no known 
 means for rendering the silver salts responsive to colors other than blue and 
 violet. Maxwell seems to have confined his attention solely to a projected 
 screen picture. 
 
 [aa 
 
4 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 To Ducos du Hauron and Charles Cros, two Frenchmen, belongs the 
 honor of having first outlined the possibility of producing prints in colors. 
 Though working quite independently of one another, they practically laid the 
 bases of modern practice, in two papers presented to the Société Frangaise de 
 Photographie on the same day (Bull. Soc. frang. Phot. 1869, tome 15, p. 122, 
 152). Du Hauron had, however, sent a paper to the Académie des Sciences as 
 early as 1862, in which he outlined his theory, but unfortunately this was re- 
 jected because no proofs of the correctness of his arguments were adduced. 
 
 The basis of these processes was again the splitting up of the subject into 
 the three fundamental colors and printing from the negatives in the comple- 
 mentary colors. Of recent years all that has been done is the perfection of 
 minor details of the process; the basic facts were determined once for all by 
 the above experimenters, who seem to have been entirely ignorant of Clerk 
 Maxwell’s work. 
 
 The sensitive surfaces of that time were very slow, initially sensitive only 
 to blue, violet and the ultra-violet, and the means for color-sensitizing, which 
 was mainly effected with chlorophyll, not very effective. It was not till H. W. 
 Vogel’s discovery of the theory of optical sensitizers (Berichte, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
 p. 1305) that marked color-sensitivity was possible. Vogel discovered that 
 the addition of certain anilin dyes to a photographic emulsion considerably 
 enhanced its sensitiveness to the less refrangible spectral rays. Up to this time 
 two collodion processes, either the wet or emulsion methods, were alone used, 
 and their comparative insensitiveness was a serious handicap. The introduc- 
 tion of the gelatine plate and the recent discovery of new and much more potent 
 color sensitizers, the isocyanins, have placed all three-color processes on a prac- 
 tical basis. 
 
 The superposition of aerial colored images, as in the chromoscope, the 
 principle of which was clearly outlined by du Hauron and Cros in their early 
 papers, is by no means sufficient from a practical point of view. A print in 
 colors is the great desideratum and although the many processes so far worked 
 out are in most cases satisfactory, yet the fact that three negatives and three 
 colored superposed pulls are required has undoubtedly militated against the 
 more general adoption of these methods by the average worker, for obviously 
 
 the chances of failure are increased sixfold. 
 
 Du Hauron outlined a possible method by means of which the three ex- 
 posures might be reduced to one. This was effected by the application of the 
 three selective color filters in microscopic dimensions to one surface, so as to 
 form a color mosaic of the subject, the color elements being of sufficient minute- 
 ness as to present, when viewed at the distance of normal vision, a homogeneous 
 grey. This is the principle of the screen-plate process, which was brought to 
 perfection by MM. Lumiére in 1907, in their Autochrome plate. In this, potato 
 starch grains, stained in accordance with the theoretical requirements, are dis- 
 tributed over a glass surface, there being approximately 4,000,000 per square 
 inch of surface. This color-mosaic is coated with an emulsion and the camera 
 exposure made through the color grains. The primary negative image thus - 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 5 
 
 obtained, which appears in the complementary colors, is dissolved and a posi- 
 tive is obtained in the colors of the original. Here again one meets with the 
 great disadvantage that the results are on glass. Nor is there any really satis- 
 factory method of making paper prints from Autochrome. If more than one 
 result is required a separate exposure has to be made for each. It is true that 
 it is possible to use the mosaic color filters on a separate surface and obtain an 
 ordinary negative, broken up into minute areas of varying density according 
 to the colors of the subject and from this to make any number of glass posi- 
 tives and bind the latter in register with a color mosaic filter and thus obtain 
 satisfactory reproductions; but they are still on glass. 
 
 The ideal process of color photography would possibly be one which would 
 give us a stable color image in the camera, from which any number of replicas 
 could be made. ‘The feasibility of some such process is proved by the fact that 
 many inorganic and organic colors fade or bleach out under the action of their 
 complementary colored rays. This is a fact known from the very earliest days 
 and many attempts have been made to work out a practicable process, using the 
 brilliant anilin colors as bases. Distinct and marked advances have been made. 
 But even at its best the camera exposures are inordinately long, extending over 
 many hours, and the fact that no means of completely ‘fixing’ the colors (that 
 is, destroying the fading properties), has made the bleach-out process more of 
 an interesting laboratory experiment than a work-a-day one. 
 
 Wilhelm Zenker (“Lehrbuch der Photochromie,” Berlin, 1868) outlined 
 the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by the regular reflec- 
 tion from silver laminae, deposited in a film at a separation of half the wave- 
 length of the incident light, whereby interference would be set up with color 
 formation. Otto Wiener (Wiedemann’s Annal. 1890, Bd. 40, p. 203) proved 
 experimentally that the formation of “standing waves” in a silver emulsion film, 
 by reflection of the incident light back on its own path from a mirror surface, 
 was possible. But to Gabriel Lippmann, of Paris, belongs the honor of having 
 first produced in a grainless film the laminary deposit of metallic silver 
 (Comptes rendus, 1891, tome 112, p. 274), showing the brilliant interference 
 colors that reproduced those of the original. The essentials for this process are 
 an emulsion of a silver salt in which the latter is in such a finely divided state 
 that the vehicle looks quite transparent. If such an emulsion on its glass sup- 
 port be placed in contact with a reflecting surface, metallic mercury being gen- 
 erally employed, the incident light is reflected back on the same path and gives 
 rise to the stationary waves, in which the ether particles vibrate to and fro with- 
 out any progressive movement. That is, the incident and reflected rays inter- 
 fere with one another and where their phase motions coincide there is increase 
 of ether vibration and consequent increase of light, while when they interfere 
 regularly with one another the vibrations are annulled, consequently there is 
 absence of light and no chemical action on the sensitive silver salt. 
 
 When these interference heliochromes are examined under suitable con- 
 ditions of lighting, they show an accuracy and brilliancy of coloring which is 
 very remarkable. Unfortunately this, too, remains but a laboratory experi- 
 
6 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 ment, for the extreme slowness of the emulsion (about 2,000 times less than 
 that of the normal slow plate) as well as the necessity of making the plates for 
 oneself, have barred the process from general practice. 
 
 The diffraction process, devised by Professor R. W. Wood, of Johns 
 Hopkins University (U. S. Patent 755, 983, 1904), involving the splitting up 
 of white light by diffraction gratings, although beautiful from a theoretical 
 point of view, is again only a laboratory process. ‘The results are on glass and 
 must be viewed in a particular manner in order that the colors may be seen. 
 These are superimposed spectral, not pigmentary, colors. To the same category 
 belong the prismatic dispersion process of Drac (English Patent 1,008, 1904) 
 which is actually based on a suggestion of Charles Cros (Les mondes, Feb., 
 1869); the micro-spectra methods of Lanchester (English Patent, 16,548, — 
 1895); and Rheinberg (Photographic journal, 1912, v. 52, p. 162), and others. 
 
 The future of color photography, from the amateur worker’s point of 
 view, lies on the laps of the Gods. There are, exclusive of the screen-plate 
 process, excellent methods which will give practically correct reproductions 
 of the colors of nature. But they are too tedious and call for more 
 care than the average worker will expend. The extraordinary facility with 
 which an ordinary black-and-white photograph can be obtained has completely 
 jaundiced the outlook of the average worker as regards color methods. He 
 must have one that will give him his color record with the same ease as in black 
 and white. : 
 
 The future of color photography lies in two directions: the one, in its more 
 widespread use in illustration; the other in the moving picture. The recent 
 advances in photomechanical printing processes, as in rotary-gravure and off- 
 set, should open up a still wider field for book illustration; for with these 
 methods the mechanical grain is so much reduced as to give a much more pleas- 
 ing and delicate reproduction than with the ordinary half-tone block, the grain 
 or network of which becomes, unless extreme care be used, very offensive in 
 three-color printing. 
 
 It is no exaggeration to state that the photographic end of these processes 
 is perfected — that there is practically no improvement to be made. The ad- 
 vance which must be made lies with the printing ink makers. Exactly how 
 improvement and perfection are to be attained is not easy to see. If perma- 
 nency of the colors in the pictures were not a vital point the problem could be 
 solved; but as it is demanded, and rightly too, that the inks shall be permanent 
 (that is, stable to light) the ink maker is heavily handicapped from the start. 
 The theoretical requirements for the three inks, red, yellow, and blue, are well 
 established and it is known that by the use of the brilliant coal tar colors these 
 requirements can be met. But though the advances of recent years in over- 
 coming the fugitiveness of the anilin lakes have been great, the problem has 
 not yet been solved and the ink maker has perforce to use more stable pigments, 
 which will not fulfill the fundamental requirements. Hence, unless handwork 
 or retouching, both expensive and tedious, are resorted to, the photographic — 
 work is unsatisfactory. . 
 
 ay t es, 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 7 
 
 It is more than probable that many will not agree with the writer in his 
 views as to motion pictures in colors. But that we shall have them in a few 
 years is a foregone conclusion. Many attempts have been made and there are 
 one or two methods which are theoretically perfect, but these are not commer- 
 cially adaptable and their adoption would necessitate a revolution in the method 
 of showing pictures in every theater. One or two processes are being tried out 
 at the present time with more or less success; but they are two-color methods 
 and are, therefore, so incomplete in color rendering as to seriously handicap 
 advances in this direction. Many will be able to recall the old Kinemacolor 
 process, a two-color process of projection in which the pictures were shown in 
 red and green in rapid succession, the effect depending upon the fusion of the 
 color in the brain of the observer. All the methods based on this persistence 
 and fusion of vision are hopeless, as one soon becomes conscious of an eye- 
 strain and retinal fatigue that is extremely trying. Those in which each pro- 
 jected picture appears as a complete color composite are not commercial 
 methods, because special apparatus is required for showing them. The future 
 of the motion picture in colors lies in a process which will give each minute pic- 
 ture complete in all the colors, and adaptable to any ordinary projector. 
 
 Many have advanced as an argument against the use of color in motion 
 pictures that it would detract from the picture — that is from the acting. This 
 always seems to me a weak argument, or else it shows a poor standard of act- 
 ing. Would it not be as legitimate to argue that the ordinary properties and 
 stage settings militate against the acting and the lines of the legitimate or speak- 
 ing drama? Yet one does not become conscious of these. If color is used, as 
 it should be, merely as a subsidiary and not the essential in the motion picture, 
 it should not detract from the silent drama. 
 
 It is impossible to omit some few words as to the value of this compila- 
 tion of references available in The New York Public Library. It is incalculable. 
 It places in the hands of the student of the subject a ready means of knowing 
 what has been done and said by others. And by its means it is possible to start 
 out on a line of research primed with past efforts, past successes, past failures, 
 so that months of useless and costly spade-work can be saved. — E. J. W. 
 
8 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 ay me 8 
 
 EIS 
 
 
 
 1761 
 
 1. Tiphaigne de la Roche, Charles Fran- 
 cois. Giphantia; or, A view of what has 
 passed, what is now passing, and, during 
 the present century, what will pass, in the 
 world. Translated from the original French 
 fof C. F. Tiphaigne de la Roche), with ex- 
 planatory notes. London: Robert Hors- 
 field, 1760-61. 2v.in 1. 12°. SB 
 
 See [part 1], p. 95-98 for a fanciful account of a 
 process suggesting Lippmann’s. These passages also 
 printed, with comments, in British journal of photog- 
 raphy, May 29, 1891, v. 38, p. 342, MFA. 
 
 “Thou knowest that the rays of light, reflected 
 from different bodies, make a picture and paint 
 the bodies upon all polished surfaces, on the retina 
 of the eye, for instance, on water, on glass. The 
 elementary spirits have studied to fix these transient 
 images; they have composed a most subtile matter, 
 very viscous, and proper to harden and dry, by the 
 help of which a picture is made in the twinkle of an 
 eye.” 
 
 1792 
 
 2. Wuensch, Christian Ernst. Versuche 
 und Beobachtungen tiber die Farben des 
 Lichtes... Leipzig: J. G. I. Breitkopf und 
 Comp,., 1792. xii, 114 p: illus,..8°. PES 
 
 Wiinsch (born 1744, died 1828), a professor in 
 the University of Leipzig, was probably the first to 
 prove the theory of the three visual primary colors. 
 An abstract of this section of the book may be found 
 in J. C. Fischer’s Geschichte der Physik, v. 7, 1806, 
 p. 50, of which the Library has a copy, PAB. There 
 is an abstract in English in British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photogra- 
 phy supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 
 
 1810 
 
 3. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von. Zur 
 Farbenlehre. Titibingen: J. G. Cotta, 1810. 
 2v.andatlas. 8° and 4°. PEX and f PEX 
 
 “Goethe took great interest in the work of Seebeck 
 and the best account of the experiments in question 
 is preserved in Goethe’s treatise on colour.” — Bolas. 
 
 4. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Von der 
 chemischen Action des Lichts und der 
 farbigen Beleuchtung. (In: J. W. von 
 Goethe, Zur Farbenlehre. Ttibingen, 1810. 
 8°. Bd. 2, p. 716+720.) PEX 
 
 1820 
 
 5. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Uber die un- 
 gleiche Erregung der Warme im prisma- 
 tischen Sonnenbilde. (Ko6onigliche Akade- 
 mie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen. 
 Berlin, 1820. Jahren 1818-19, p. 305-350.) 
 * EE 
 Also in Journal fiir Chemie und Physik, Halle, 
 1824, Bd. 40, p. 129-176, PAA. 
 
 1833 
 
 6. Brewster, Sir David. <A treatise on op- 
 tics. 1st American edition... Philadel- 
 phia: Carey, Lea, & Blanchard, 1833. 323; 
 OS pe iles ed aay PEB 
 
 Seebeck’s and Wollaston’s experiments on coloring 
 power of the spectrum described on p. 83. 
 
 1840 
 
 7. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
 A letter to the Rev. William Whewell... 
 on the chemical action of the solar rays. 
 (British Association for the Advancement 
 of Science. Report of the 9th meeting, 
 Birmingham, August, 1839. London, 1840. 
 part 2, p. 9-11.) * EC 
 
 ‘When a slip of sensitive paper is exposed to a 
 highly concentrated spectrum, a picture of it is rapidly 
 
 impressed on the paper, not merely in black, but in 
 colours.” 
 
 8. On the chemical action of the rays 
 of the solar spectrum on preparations of 
 silver and other substances, both metallic 
 and non-metallic, and on some _ photo- 
 graphic processes. illus. (Royal Society 
 of London. Philosophical transactions, 
 London, 1840, part 1, p. 1-59.) * EC 
 
 “The result was equally striking and unexpected. 
 A very intense photographic impression of the spec- 
 trum was rapidly formed, which, when withdrawn 
 and viewed in moderate daylight, was found to be 
 coloured with sombre, but unequivocal tints, imitating 
 those of the spectrum itself... I have not succeeded 
 in fixing these tints. They are, however, susceptible 
 of half fixing by the mere action of water, and may 
 be viewed at leisure in moderate daylight, or by 
 candlelight.” 
 
 
 
 1841 
 
 9. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
 Letter...dated July 31, 1841. (British As- 
 sociation for the Advancement of Science. 
 Report of the 11th meeting, Plymouth, 
 July, 1841, London, 1842, part 2, p. 40.) 
 . bod EM 
 Submits a number of photographs tinted with vege- 
 table coloring matters which have been eaten away 
 by the luminous rays of the spectrum. “A circum- 
 stance which, considering the great command of colour 
 which this new variety of the photographic art affords, 
 holds out no slight hope of a solution of the problem 
 of a photographic representation of natural objects 
 in their proper colours.” 
 
 10. Waller, Augustus. Experiments on the 
 coloured films formed by iodine, bromine, 
 and chlorine upon various metals. (Lon- 
 don, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophical 
 magazine, London, 1841, v. 21, p. baer sy 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 9 
 
 1843 
 
 11. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
 On the action of the rays of the solar spec- 
 trum on vegetable colours, and on some 
 new photographic processes. illus. (Royal 
 Society of London. Philosophical trans- 
 actions, London, 1842, part 1, p. 181-214.) 
 * EC 
 Also printed in London, Edinburgh & Dublin philo- 
 
 sophical magazine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 5-21, 107— 
 115, 246-252, OA. 
 
 12. Talbot, H. F. On the coloured rings 
 produced by iodine on silver, with remarks 
 on the history of photography. (London, 
 Edinburgh, and Dublin philosophical maga- 
 zine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 94-97.) OA 
 
 Also printed in Daguerreian journal, New York, 
 May 1, 1851, v. 1, p. 357-359, MFA (Humbphrey’s). 
 
 1848 
 
 13. Becquerel, Edmond. De l’image photo- 
 graphique colorée du spectre solaire. (An- 
 nales de chimie et de physique, Paris, 1848, 
 série 3, tome 22, p. 451-459.) PAA 
 
 German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
 Journal, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 110, p. 25-30, 3-VA, and in 
 Journal fiir praktische Chemie, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 2, 
 p. 358-365, PKA. Abstracted in the Comptes rendus 
 of the Académie des sciences, Paris, 1848, tome 26, 
 p. 181-183, *EO. English translation in Photographic 
 NEWS, London, 1859, v. 2, p. 302-303; v. 3, p. 14-15, 
 27-28, 62-63, MFA. 
 
 1849 
 
 14. Becquerel, Edmond. De l’image photo- 
 chromatique du spectre solaire et des images 
 colorées obtenues a la chambre obscure. 
 (Annales de chimie et de physique. Paris, 
 1849, série 3, tome 25, p. 447-474.) PAA 
 
 German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
 Journal, Jahrg.. 1849, Bd. 114, p. 44-56, 118-122, 
 3-VA, and in Journal fiir praktische ° Chemie, Jahrg. 
 1849, Bd. 3, p. 154-175, PKA. 
 
 1850 
 
 15. Colors produced by photography. (Da- 
 guerreian journal, New York, Dec. 2, 1850, 
 ae MFA (Humphrey’s) 
 
 Brief notes on the Becquerel process. 
 
 1851 
 
 16. The Daguerreian journal: devoted to 
 the daguerreian and photogenic arts. Also, 
 embracing the sciences, arts, and literature. 
 S. D. Humphrey, editor and publisher. v. 
 mieseno. 3 (Nov. 1, 1850—Dec. 15, 1851). 
 New York, 1850-51. 8°. MFA (Humphrey) 
 
 ‘Reprints papers by famous experimenters. See 
 articles on L. ill. For a commentary on Hill 
 see British journal of photography, March 6, 1903, 
 p. 184-185, MFA. 
 
 Dispel slzevie Ls. The natural colors. 
 
 
 
 (Photographic art journal, New York, 
 Feb:, 185], v.°1, p. 116-118.) MFA 
 18. Photographic researches and ma- 
 
 nipulations; including the substance of the 
 
 author’s Treatise on daguerreotype. New 
 
 Nor: Holman & Gray, 1851iv 15sp, “833 
 * C p.v.1036 
 
 19. The Hillotype. (Photographic art 
 journal, New York, Aug:, 1851, v.2, p. 76— 
 81.) MFA 
 
 20. Hunt, Robert. Heliochrome. (Hum- 
 
 phrey’s journal, New York, Nov. 15, 1851, 
 
 v. 8, p. 21-25.) MFA 
 From the London art journal. 
 
 Also printed in Photographic art journal, 
 York, Nov., 1851, v. 2, p. 291-294, MFA. 
 
 21. New and valuable discovery. Hillo- 
 types. (Daguerreian journal, New York, 
 1850-51, v. 1, p. 209-211, 241-242, 273-274, 
 SOP PaN ie, 1 L718, 20—2on 00k, hom Lae 
 145-147, 305, 312-314, 337-338.) MFA 
 
 Titles of articles vary. 
 
 22. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
 Abel. The heliochromotype of M. Niepce 
 dexSt.-Victor. -( Photographic. art joutnatl: 
 New York, July,-1851,. v.e2ip7" 32-37.) 
 MFA 
 
 New 
 
 Translation from La Lumiére. 
 
 23. Snelling, H. H. The Hillotype. |(By 
 H. H. Snelling. (Photographic art jour- 
 nal, New York, April, 1851, v2 1, pi-333— 
 340.) MFA 
 24. On taking daguerreotypes in the 
 
 natural colors. ,By H. Snelling.; 
 (Photographic art journal, New York, 
 
 
 
 April, 1851, v. 1, p. 208-211.) MFA 
 Comments on Hill process. 
 1852 
 
 25. La Chromo-photographie.; (Cosmos, 
 
 Paris, 1852, tome 1, p. 372-373.) VA 
 
 Briefly describes experiments of Niepce de Saint 
 Victor. 
 26. ,La Fixation des couleurs.; (Cosmos, 
 Paris, 1852, tome 2, p. 39-44, 89-91, 341- 
 343.) VA 
 Editorial discussion of the claims of Niepce de 
 Saint Victor, Becquerel, Campbell, and Hill. 
 27. The Hillotype.. (Photographicwgas: 
 journal, New York, Nov., 1852, v. 4, p. 293- 
 296.) MFA 
 
 28. ;Hillotypes.; (Photographic art jour- 
 nal, New York, Feb., 1852, v. 3, p. 131-132.) 
 MFA 
 Copy of defence published by the editor of the 
 Prattsville Advocate. 
 29. Hunt, Robert. On the possibility of 
 producing photographs in their natural 
 colours. (In his: Photography; a treatise 
 on the chemical changes produced by the 
 solar‘radiation... ~Neweyore 1552."012°. 
 p. 219-221.) MFC 
 
10 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1852, continued, 
 
 30. Mercury, pseud. Communication on 
 
 the Hillotype. (Photographic art journal, 
 
 New York, Dec., 1852, v. 4, p. ay 
 MFA 
 
 31. Mr. Hill and his manifesto. (Photo- 
 graphic art journal, New York, Oct., 1852, 
 
 v. 4, p. 249.) MFA 
 32. Morse, Samuel Finley Breese. Photo- 
 graphic colors. (National Intelligencer, 
 
 Washington, Oct. 8, 1852, v. 40, p. 2.) *A 
 
 “First: Mr. Hill has made the discovery of a proc- 
 ess for fixing the colors of the camera image, and, 
 although not so perfected in all its complicated parts 
 as to be equally true in the color of the various ob- 
 jects, is sufficiently developed in its results to give 
 assurance of its ultimate perfection... Fourth: Mr. 
 Hill’s process cannot be like M. Becquerel’s, for it is 
 stated that M. Becquerel ‘was never able to fix the 
 colors.’ ” 
 
 For discussion see Scientific American, Oct. 23, 
 HORE Giarecy genet gen mae! 
 
 Also printed in Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
 Nov. 1, 1852, v. 4, p. 217-219, MFA. 
 
 33. A Practical Daguerre, pseud. The Hil- 
 lotype; or, Daguerreotypes in the colors 
 
 of nature. (Photographic art journal, 
 New York, Jan., 1852, v. 3, p. 47-50.) MFA 
 
 1853 
 
 34. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. 
 (Humphrey’s journal, New York, 1853, v. 
 4, p. 362-364, 378-380; v. 5, p. 11-12, 41-44, 
 
 74-75, 96.) MFA 
 Last two instalments have the title: Hydrogen. 
 35. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. (Sci- 
 
 entific American, New York, Feb. 26, 1853, 
 v. 8, p. 186.) VA 
 
 Experiments with hydrogen and electricity to 
 hasten the Becquerel and Niepce processes. For 
 discussions see Cosmos, 1852-53, tome 2, p. 39-44, 
 89-91, 341-343, VA, and Dinglers polytechnisches 
 Journal, Jahrg. 1853, Bd. 127, p. 143-145; 1853, 
 Bd. 128, p. 49-51, 3-VA. 
 
 36. United States. — Patents Committee 
 (Senate, 32:2). Report...,on the memorial 
 of Levi L. Hill, in reference to his alleged 
 discovery in heliochrome, or sun-printing}. 
 
 March 3, 1853. ,;Washington, 1853.; 2 p. 
 8°. (U.S. 32. cong., Z. sess. Senate re- 
 port 427; serial 671.) * SBF 
 
 “Tt is believed that most of the philosophers, both 
 in Europe and America, long since gave up as hope- 
 less the search after this branch of science, which 
 has now been discovered by one of our citizens in 
 one of the wild valleys of the Catskill mountains, far 
 removed from the schools of art.’ 
 
 Reprinted in National intelligencer, March 4, 1853, 
 v. 4, p. 3. For discussions see Scientific American, 
 1853, v. 8, p. 224, 226, 380, VA. 
 
 1854 
 
 37. Becquerel, Edmond. Nouvelles re- 
 cherches sur les impressions colorées pro- 
 duites lors de l’action chimique de la lu- 
 
 miére (troisigme mémoire). (Annales de 
 chimie et de physique, Paris, 1854, série 3, 
 tome 42, p. 81-106.) PAA 
 
 Author’s abstract in Académie des _ sciences, 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, 1854, tome 39, p. 63-67, *EO. 
 
 38. Hunt, Robert. Researches on light in 
 its chemical relations; embracing a con- 
 sideration of all the ‘photographic proc- 
 esses. London: Longman, Brown, Green, 
 & Longmans, 1854. xx, 396 p. 2. ed. illus. 
 8°. MFC 
 
 An excellent resumé of early experiments on the 
 effects of light upon chemicals. See especially chap- 
 
 ter 13: On producing coloured pictures by the solar 
 radiations. 
 
 1855 
 
 39. Henderson, Peter. On_naturally- 
 colored photographs. (Humphrey’s jour- 
 nal, New York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 23— 
 25. ) MFA 
 
 40. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
 Abel. Recherches photographiques. Pho- 
 tographie sur verre. Héliochromie.. 
 Avec une préface biographique et des 
 notes par M. Ernest Lacan. Paris: Alexis 
 Gaudin et frére, 1855. xxiv, 140 p., 1 port. 
 8°. MFC 
 Contains the first three of his memoirs on _helio- 
 chromes presented to the French Academy of Sciences. 
 
 41. Ross, William. On naturally-colored 
 photographs. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
 York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 25-28.) MFA 
 
 A reply to letter by Peter Henderson. 
 
 42. On the probability of producing 
 actino-polychrome pictures. (Humphrey’s 
 journal, New York, March 1, 1855, v. 6, 
 p. 345-349.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1856 
 
 43. Hillotypes. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
 York, 1852, v. 4, p. 27, 219-224, 267-268, 285, 
 298- 301, 361- 362: 1855, v. 6, p. 290, 315-319, 
 321, 354; 1856, veGep: 97.) FA 
 
 Various letters and opinions concerning a his- 
 toric controversy. 
 
 44. Testud de Beauregard. Colored photo- 
 graphs obtained by simple exposure to 
 light, and a method of printing positives 
 without salts of silver. (Humphrey’s jour- 
 nal, New York, 1855, v. 7, p. 141-144, 172- 
 174; 1857, v. 9, p. 192.) MFA 
 
 Translated from the Bulletin of the Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. 
 
 Also eas: in Journal of photography, London, 
 1856, v. 2, p. 195-197, MFA. 
 
 1857 
 
 45. Antisell, Thomas. Hailotype. (Hum- 
 phrey’s journal, New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 
 324-325, 339.) MFA 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 11 
 
 1857, continued. 
 
 46. Hallotypes. (Humphrey’s journal, 
 New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 257-258, 289, 305, 
 321-325, 337-339; v. 9, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 47. Maxwell, James Clerk. 
 on colour, as perceived by the eye, with 
 remarks on colour-blindness. illus. (Royal 
 Society of Edinburgh. Transactions, Ed- 
 mpiren, 185/, vy. 21, p. 275-298.) SEC 
 
 See especially p. 284 for an early realization of 
 three-color work. 
 
 1859 
 
 48. Barrett, Thomas. Photographs in nat- 
 ural colours. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 om 1009, Vv. 2, p..56, 95.) MFA 
 
 Gives formula for developer used. 
 49. Garrod, Edward. Colour in photogra- 
 phy. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
 foieoe, ¥. 2, p. 287.) MFA 
 Secured colors on an ordinary plate. 
 50. Photographs in natural colors. (Hum- 
 phrey’s journal, New York, 1859, v. 11, p. 
 
 196-197, 286-287.) MFA 
 Becquerel process. 
 51. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
 
 tographic news, London, March 18, 1859, 
 wiae . 1/.) MFA 
 
 Fixing process claimed by a correspondent. 
 
 1860 
 
 52. Clarke, S. On the photogenic action 
 of colour. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, Liverpool, Nov. 1, 1860, v. 7, p. 313- 
 314.) MFA 
 
 53. Dove, H. W. Das Dichrooscope. (An- 
 nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1860, Serie 4, Bd. 20, p. 265-278.) PAA 
 
 Studies in light interference. 
 
 54. Gage, F. B. Vegetable and mineral 
 photography. (Humphrey’s journal, New 
 York, May 15, 1860, p. 22-23.) MFA 
 
 Prediction that photography in natural colors will 
 be realized. 
 55. Martel, Charles. Colour in its relation 
 to photography. illus. (Photographic 
 news, London, 1860, v. 4, p. 49-50, 61-62, 
 73-74, 97-98, 109-110, 121-122, 133-134, 144— 
 146, 157-158, 169-170, 181-182.) MFA 
 
 1862 
 
 56. Maxwell, James Clerk. On the theory 
 of three primary colours. (Royal Institu- 
 tion of Great Britain. Proceedings, 1858- 
 62, London, 1862, v. 3, p. 370-374.) *EC 
 
 “The first idea of three-colour work has always 
 “been hitherto ascribed to Collen, but in the 1895 Jahr- 
 buch published recently by Dr. Eder, he points out 
 that really the eae _ due to Clerk Maxwell, who read 
 a paper on May 17, 1861, before the Royal Institu- 
 tion, on the theory of the "three primary colours.” 
 British journal of photography, July 26, 1895, p. 475. 
 
 Experiments © 
 
 57. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
 Abel. On _ heliochromy. (Photographic 
 news, London, Feb. 28, 1862, v. 6, p. 101- 
 102.) MFA 
 
 For brief account of ies exhibition see above, 
 Sept. 12,1862, v.6, p. 433-434, 
 
 1863 
 
 58. Plé, Charles. Les images. photo- 
 graphiques reproduisant les couleurs na- 
 turelles des objets représentés. (Académie 
 des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Dept. 
 28, 1863, tome 57, p. 584.) * EO 
 
 For comments see Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
 Dec. 1, 1863, v. 15, p. 230, MEA. 
 
 59. Tillman, Samuel D. Heliochromy. 
 (Photographic news, London, June 5, 1863, 
 
 Were py es0-—27 15) ‘MFA 
 
 Points out obstacles. 
 
 1864 
 
 60. Photographs in natural colours at last. 
 (Photographic news, London, July 1, 1864, 
 v. 8, p. 319-320.) "MFA 
 
 “Oil of pinks” suggested in a spiritual seance. 
 
 1865 
 
 61. Calvert, F. Crace. On some of the 
 most important chemical discoveries made 
 within the last two years. Lecture 1, de- 
 livered on Tuesday, the 4th of April, 1865: 
 On the discoveries in chemistry applied to 
 arts and manufactures. (Society of Arts. 
 Journal,. London; Sept. 29, 1865. + 33.25; 
 689-693.) MFA 
 
 Deals chiefly with the investigations of Niepce de 
 Saint Victor. 
 
 62. Chevreul, E. Héliochromie. Com- 
 munication...relative a la note de M. 
 Niepce de Saint-Victor sur les noirs pro- 
 duits en photographie. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1865, 
 
 tome 61, p. 701-705.) * EO 
 
 63. Collen, Henry. Natural colour in pho- 
 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, Oct. 27, 1865, v. 12, p. SE 
 A 
 
 Suggests a three plate process. 
 
 64. —— Photography in natural colours. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 24, 1865, v. 12, p. 601.) MFA 
 
 Further explains his suggestions published in the 
 issue of Oct. 27, 1865. 
 
 65. Fowler, R. J. -Photographing in nat- 
 ural colours.; (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Nov. 10, 1865, v. 12, p. 575- 
 576.) MFA 
 
 Refers to experiments of Niepce de Saint Victor. 
 
12 THE NEW ‘YORE PUBLIC LIERARY 
 
 1865, continued. 
 
 66. Henderson, Peter. Photography in 
 
 natural colours. (Photog aD news, 
 
 London, Dec. 29, 1865, v. 9, p. 617-618.) 
 MFA 
 
 Account of author’s experiments. 
 
 67. Lacan, Ernest. Photography in col- 
 
 ours. (Photographic news, London, Dec. 
 
 29, 1865, v. 9, p. 616-617.) MFA 
 Poitevin process. 
 
 68. Photographs in natural colours. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 10, 1865, v. 12, p. 573-574.) MFA 
 
 Refers to investigations of Sir J. F. W. Herschel, 
 Robert Hunt, Edmond Becquerel, and Niepce de Saint 
 Victor. 
 
 69. Poitevin, L. A. Action simultanée de 
 la lumiére et des sels oxygénés sur le sous- 
 chlorure d’argent violet; application a 
 lobtention par la photographie des cou- 
 leurs naturelles sur papier. (Académie 
 des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Dec. 
 18, 1865, tome 61, p. 1111-1112.) * EO 
 
 70. Reynolds, Emerson J. MHeliochromy. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Deees, 1865, v: 12°9.616.) MFA 
 
 Reference to the researches of Dr. Reade and 
 Walter Crum. 
 
 71. Strutt, J. W. Photography in natural 
 colours. (Photographic news, London, 
 Nov. 24, 1865, v. 9, p. 564.) MFA 
 
 Obstacles to success stated. 
 
 72..Taylor, J. Trail. Historical notes on 
 photography in natural colours. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, Dec. 22, 1865, v. 9, 
 p. 604-606.) MFA 
 
 1866 
 
 73. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
 Photography in natural colours, etc. 
 (Phetographic news, London, Jan. 5, 1866, 
 v. 10, p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 74. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Félix 
 
 Abel. Mémoires sur l’héliochromie. (Aca- 
 démie des sciences. Comptes  rendus, 
 Paris, 1852-66.) * EO 
 
 Mémoire 1: June 2, 1851, tome 32, p. 834-841. 
 Mémoire 2: Feb. 9, 1852, tome 34, p. 215-218. Mé- 
 moire 3: Nov. 8, 1852, tome 35, p. 694-697. Mémoire 
 
 4: Feb. 10, 1862, tome 54, p. 281-284. 
 Jan. 12, 1865, tome 56, p. 90-93. 
 1866, tome 63, p. 567-569. 
 
 Mémoire 1 has the title: Extrait d’un mémoire sur 
 une relation existant entre la couleur de certaines 
 flammes colorées, avec les images héliographiques 
 colorées par la lumiére. 
 
 An English translation of memoir 3 in Scientific 
 American, Feb. 19, 1853, v. 8, p. 179, VA; of memoir 
 5, in Photographic NEWS, London, Jan. 30; VS637-vaess 
 p. 51-52, MFA; of memoir 6, in Photographic news, 
 London, "Nov. 13,0 1866.27; 10, p. 557-558, MFA. 
 
 Translation of memoir 3 also in Photographer art 
 pe. New York, Feb., 1853, yv. 5, p. 110-112, 
 
 Mémoire 5: 
 Mémoire 6: Oct. 1 
 
 ike tLes recherches photographiques.; 
 (Cosmos, Paris, Oct. 3, 1866, série 2, tome 
 4, p. 389-391.) VA 
 
 English translation in Photographic news, London, 
 
 Oct. 19, 1866, v. 10, p. 497-498, MFA, under title: 
 On obtaining black tones in heliochromic processes. 
 
 76. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
 
 tographic news, London, Feb. 16, 1866, v. 
 
 10)-p../ 3-74. MFA 
 Poitevin’s process. 
 
 Also printed in Humphrey’s journal, New York, 
 March 15, 1866, v. 17, p. 345-347, MFA. 
 
 
 
 77. Photography in colours. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, 1865, v. 9, p. 48, 84; 
 1866, v. 10, p. 555, 578.) MFA 
 
 M. Chambay of Mauritius claims to have been 
 successful in fixing colors. 
 
 78. Photography in natural colors. (Hum- 
 phrey’s journal, New York, Nov. 1, 1866, 
 ¥. 18, 7.201) MFA 
 
 Colors on ordinary plate observed after an eclipse. 
 
 1867 
 
 79. Becquerel, Edmond. La lumiére, ses 
 causes et ses effets. Paris: Didot fréres, 
 fils et cie, 1867-68. 2v. 8°. PEB 
 
 See v. 2, p. 209-234: Reproduction des couleurs 
 par l’action de la lumiére. 
 
 80. Paage, A. Photographs in natural col- 
 ours. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
 16, 1867, v. 11, p. 398.) MFA 
 
 Results of author’s experiments. 
 
 81. Van der Weyde, P. H. Coloured da- 
 guerreotypes by the reversed action of 
 light. (Photographic news, London, July 
 19, 1867, v. 11, p. 345.) MFA 
 
 1869 
 
 82. Cros, Charles. M. Cros’s solution of 
 the problem of photography in colours. 
 (Photographic news, London, Oct. 8, 1869, 
 v. 13, p. 483-485.) MFA 
 
 83. Ducos du Hauron, Louis. A new helio- 
 
 chromic process. (Photographic news, 
 
 London, July 2, 1869, v. 13, p. 319-320.) 
 MFA 
 
 Paper read before the Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. 
 
 1870 
 
 84. Grune, Wilhelm. Experiences of an 
 experimentalist. (Photographic news, 
 London, Jan. 14, 1870, v. 14, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 Collodion plates developed in camera. 
 
 85. Thomas, R. W. Is it possible to obtain: 
 photographs in colours? (Photographic 
 news, London, Dec. 23, 1870, v. 14, 6- 
 
 607.) MFA - 
 
 The author thinks not. 
 
COLOR PHOFOGRAPHY 13 
 
 1871 
 86. Schultz-Sellack, Carl. Photography in 
 colours. (Photographic news, London, 
 Jiitie 2a) lo7i. v.15, p. 291.) MFA 
 
 Color phenomena with silver salts. 
 
 87. Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 
 der Silberhaloidsalze und den Zusammen- 
 hang von optischer und chemischer Licht- 
 absorption. (Annalen der Physik und 
 Chemie, Leipzig, 1871, Bd. 143, p. ery e 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 1872 
 
 88. M. Niepce de St. Victor’s photographs 
 in colour. (Photographic news, London, 
 Feb. 16, 1872, v. 16, p. 84.) MFA 
 
 Brief account of pictures exhibited in London. 
 
 1873 
 
 89. Fowler, J. Bennett. Polychromatic 
 
 printing. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Oct. 10, 1873, v. 20, p. 488-489.) 
 MFA 
 
 . Reference to Vidal and Edwards processes. 
 
 90. Sutton, Thomas. Photo-polychromy. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 26, 1873, v. 20, p. 464.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to the Vidal process. 
 
 91. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber die 
 Lichtempfindlichkeit des Bromsilbers fiir 
 die sogenannten chemisch unwirksamen 
 Farben. (Deutsche chemische Gesell- 
 schaft. Berichte, Berlin, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
 p. 1302-1306.) PKA 
 
 92. W., A. J. Polychrome photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 167o.V."20, D. 85, 521.) MFA 
 
 Comments on the Vidal and Laroche processes. 
 
 1874 
 
 93. Bow, R. H. Effects of sunlight on the 
 colours of pigments. (Photographic news, 
 London, 1874, v. 18, p. 183-184, 195-196.) 
 
 MFA 
 94. Saint Florent, E. de. Photographs in 
 natural colours. (Photographic news, 
 
 London, 1873, v. 17, p. 505-506; 1874, v. 18, 
 p. 125, 175-176, 182-183.) MFA 
 
 Chemical formulas for a direct process. From 
 Bulletin of the Société francaise de photographie. 
 95. Spiller, John. Remarks on the asserted 
 influence of colouring matters on the re- 
 duction of silver salts. (Photographic 
 news, London, May 29, 1874, v. 18, p. 253- 
 254.) MFA 
 
 96. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. On the ac- 
 tion of colours upon bromide on silver. 
 (Photographic news; London, Sept. 18, 
 1374,"y, 18; p. 451-452.) MFA 
 
 
 
 97. Ueber die chemische Wirkung 
 des Sonnenspectrums auf Silberhaloid- 
 salze. (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, 
 
 Leipzig, 1874, Bd. 153, p. 218-250.) PAA 
 
 1875 
 
 98. Donisthorpe, Wordsworth. Producing 
 colour photographs. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1875, 
 Wi 22, p. 479.) MFA 
 
 A suggested three-color prism process. 
 
 1876 
 
 99. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. Dr. 
 Vogel’s colour theory. (Photographic 
 news, London, 1876, v. 20, p. 307-308, 323.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 100. Photography of the red and 
 ultra-red end of the spectrum. (Nature, 
 London, March 30, 1876, v. 13, p. 432.) OA 
 
 101. Cros, Charles. ,La photographie des 
 
 couleurs.; (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
 rendus, Paris, 1876, tome 82, p. 1514-1515; 
 1876, tome 83, Dp. 291.) EO 
 
 For criticisms of Edmond Becquerel see above, 
 tome 83, p. 11, 291-292. 
 
 102. Dumoulin, Eugéne. Les couleurs re- 
 
 produites en photographie. Historique, 
 théorie et pratique. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
 lars, 1876; 63 p., 1 table. 12°. (Actualités 
 scientifiques.) MFF p.v.10 
 
 103. Spiller, John. Photography in col- 
 ours. (Photographic news, London, July 
 21, 1876, v. 20, p. 344.) MFA 
 
 Protests against using the term color photography 
 to cover color block printing. 
 
 104. Waterhouse, James. On some facts 
 in support of Dr. Vogel’s colour theory. 
 
 (Photographic news, London, June 30, 
 1876, v. 20, p. 302-304.) MFA 
 1877 
 
 105. Albert, Josef. ,;Photography in nat-. 
 ural colors., (Nature, London, Nov. 29, 
 
 IOs fev eee) OA 
 Abstract only. 
 106. Vidal, Léon. Photochromy. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 
 1877, v. 24, p. 6.) MFA 
 
 1878 
 
 107. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 The acceleration of oxidation caused by 
 the least refrangible end of the spectrum. 
 (Royal Society of London. Proceedings, 
 London, 1878, -v. 27, p. 291-292.) * EC 
 
- apparences 
 
 14 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1878, continued. 
 
 108. Explanation of the action of 
 dyes on films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 don, July 5, 1878, v. 22, p. 319-320.) MFA 
 
 109. Husnik, Jaroslav. Photo-printing in 
 natural colours. (Photographic news, 
 London, 1878, v. 22, p. 123-125, SRE IER 
 
 
 
 1879 
 
 110. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 On the production of coloured spectra by 
 light. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
 ceedings, London, 1879, v. 29, p. fee 
 
 111. Cros, Charles. Les couleurs, le chro- 
 momeétre et la photographie des couleurs. 
 (Société francaise de physique. Séances, 
 Paris, année 1879, p. 35-39.) PAA 
 
 112. Sur la classification des cou- 
 leurs et sur les moyens de reproduire les 
 colorées par trois clichés 
 photographiques spéciaux. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1879, 
 tome 88, p. 119-122.) * EO 
 
 
 
 113. Photography in natural colours. 
 
 (Photographic news, London, May 16, 
 
 EEA 25.. 0.220.) MFA 
 Cros’s experiments. 
 
 114. Photography in natural colours. 
 
 (Photographic news, London, Aug. 29, 
 
 1879, v. 23, p. 414-415.) MFA 
 
 Comments on work of Abney and of Herr Albert. 
 
 115. Versnaeyen, M. K. Photography in 
 colours. (Photographic news, London, 
 March 21, 1879, v. 23, p. 140.) MFA 
 
 Bonnaud’s process. 
 
 116. Reproduction of colour by pho- 
 
 tography. (Photographic news, London, 
 
 May 30, 1879, v. 23, p. 254-255.) MFA 
 Work of Charles Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 
 
 117. Vidal, Léon. Lecture by M. Cros on 
 colour in photography. (Photographic 
 news, London, Aug. 1, 1879, v. 23, p. 367- 
 368.) MFA 
 
 118. The real state of the question of 
 the reproduction of natural colours by 
 means of photography. (Photographic 
 news, London, June 6, 1879, v. 23, p. 271- 
 
 ) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 272 
 1880 
 
 119. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
 tographic news, London, Feb. 27, 1880, v. 
 23,\D. 972) MFA 
 
 French “discovery”? proved not to be genuine. 
 120. Photography in natural colours. 
 (Photographic news, London, Dec. 3, 1880, 
 wees, p. 577.) MFA 
 
 Process of Ducos du Hauron and of Herr Albert. 
 
 1881 
 
 121. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 On the effect of the spectrum on the ha- 
 loid salts of silver, and on mixtures of the 
 same. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
 ceedings, London, 1881, v. 33, p. ede 
 
 122. On the spectrum impressed on 
 silver chloride and its bearing on silver 
 printing in photography. (Chemical news, 
 London, Oct. 14, 1881, v.- 44, p. pa 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 123. Cros, Charles, and J. CARPENTIER. Pho- 
 tographie des couleurs, par teinture de 
 couches d’albumine coagulée. (Académie 
 des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1881, 
 tome 92, p. 1504-1505.) * EO 
 
 1883 
 
 124. Sawyer, J. R. Photography in rela- 
 tion to colour. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 don, June 1, 1883, v. 27, p. 349-351.) MFA 
 
 125. Swinton, A. A. Campbell. The past, 
 present, and future of photography in nat- 
 ural colours. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Dec., 1883, v. 30, p. 776, 
 791-792.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1883, 
 v. 27, p. 805-806, 823-824, MFA; Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 194-197, 
 226-229, MFA. 
 
 1884 
 
 126. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Vogel’s method of colour photography. 
 (Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1884, 
 v. 28, p. 500-501.) MFA 
 
 127. Berkeley, Herbert B. A chapter in — 
 the history of coloured images. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 29, 
 1884, p. 551-552.) MFA 
 
 Controversial letter to Mr. W. E. Debenham in 
 which the author states that he produced various col- 
 ors on bromide plates as early as 1877. 
 
 128. Captain Abney, F.R.S. port. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 15, 1884, v, 31) optus MFA 
 
 129. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber das Verhal- 
 ten der Haloidverbindungen des Silbers 
 gegen das Sonnenspectrum und die Steige- 
 rung der Empfindlichkeit derselben gegen 
 einzelne Theile des Spectrums durch Farb- 
 stoffe und andere Substanzen. illus. 
 (Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
 ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math. — naturwis- 
 senschaftliche Classe, Wien, 1885, Jahrg. - 
 1884, Bd. 90, Abt. 2, p. 1097-1143.) * EF 
 
 English translation in Photographic news, London, 
 1885, v. 29, p. 145-146, 162-165, 227-228, 355-357, 
 420-421, 452-453, MFA. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 15 
 
 1884, continued. 
 
 130. The Eosine compound of silver, and 
 
 isochromatic plates. (Photographic news, 
 
 London, July 4, 1884, v. 28, p. ean mn 
 F 
 
 131. Léon Warnerke. port. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 1884, 
 wend D, 39.) MFA 
 
 132. Pim, Greenwood. ,Color photogra- 
 phy.; (Nature, London, March 31, 1884, 
 v. 29, p. 470.) OA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 
 
 133. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Investiga- 
 tions as to the action of eosine on photo- 
 graphic films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 don, May 23, 1884, v. 28, p. 325-326.) MFA 
 
 134. Vogel’s method of colour pho- 
 tography. (Photographic news, London, 
 Aug. 1, 1884, v. 28, p. 493-494.) MFA 
 
 135. Woods, C. Ray. The spectroscope 
 and its relation to photography. x. Pho- 
 tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, June 27, 1884, v. 28, 
 p. 405-406.) MFA 
 
 Historical review. 
 
 
 
 1885 
 
 136. Color photography. (Anthony’s pho- 
 tographic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, 
 p. 97-98.) MFA 
 
 ‘Reviews work of Becquerel and Niepce de Saint 
 Victor. 
 
 137. Mr. Carey Lea. port. (Anthony’s 
 photographic bulletin, ae York, 1885, -v. 
 16, p. 513-514.) 
 
 138. Rood, Ogden N. Photography in 
 color. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 353-355.) MFA 
 
 Tells of colors produced by the collodion process. 
 
 139. Stokes, G. G. On a remarkable phe- 
 nomenon of crystalline reflection. (Royal 
 Society of London. Proceedings, London, 
 1885, v. 38, p. 174-185.) * EC 
 
 140. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. A new 
 heliochromic principle. (Photographic 
 news, London, July 10, 1885, v. 29, p. ees 
 
 Suggestions for improving the Ducos du Hauron 
 process. 
 
 Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 547-548, MFA. 
 
 141. —— Uber den Zusammenhang zwischen 
 Absorption der Farbstoffe und deren sen- 
 sibilisirender Wirkung auf Bromsilber. 
 (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1885, N. F. Bd. 26, p. 527-530.) PAA 
 
 MFA 
 
 1886 
 
 142. Dawson, George. Photography in oil 
 colours. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 12, 1886, v. 33, p. 714.) MFA 
 
 Describes Pouncy’s process. 
 
 143. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber die Wirkung 
 verschiedener Farbstoffe auf das Verhal- 
 ten des Bromsilbers gegen das Sonnen- 
 spectrum und spektroskopische Messungen 
 uber den Zusammenhang der Absorption 
 und photographischer Sensibilisirung. illus. 
 (Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
 ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math.-naturwissen- 
 schaftliche Classe, Wien, 1886, Jahrg. 1885, 
 Ba 92,.Abt.-2, p: 1346-1372.) * EF 
 
 144. Herschel, A. S. On processes of pho- 
 tography in natural colours. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, April 30, 
 1886, v. 33, p. 271-273.) MFA 
 
 Traces early history with an account of the author’s 
 experiments on the effect of screens upon sensitive 
 plates. 
 
 Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1886, 
 v. 30, p. 283-285, 326-327, MFA. 
 
 Color-sensi- 
 illus. (Franklin 
 
 145. Ives, Frederic Eugene. 
 tive photographic plates. 
 
 
 
 Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, July, 1886, 
 v. 122, p. 4446.) VA 
 146. Correct color-tone photography 
 
 with ordinary gelatine bromide plates. 
 (Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadel- 
 phia, Aug., 1886, v. 122, p. 123-124.) VA 
 
 147. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber 
 einige Farbenwahrnehmungen und _ tber 
 Photographie in natiirlichen Farben. (An- 
 nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1886, N. F. Bd. 28, p. 130-135.) PAA 
 
 Brief abstract in Nature, London, Aug. 12, 1886, 
 Ve04, Dp. 394,04. 
 
 “Vogel proposed to sensitize plates specially for 
 each spectrum region...and instead of projecting the 
 pictures with colored lights he proposed to make as 
 many pigment prints as negatives, each in a color 
 complementary to the light which acted to produce 
 the respective negative, and to superpose them as in 
 the Collen method.” — F. E. Ives. 
 
 1887 
 
 148. Debenham, W. E. Pretended photog- 
 
 raphy in natural colours. (Photographic 
 
 news, London, July 15, 1887, v. 31, p. 437- 
 
 438.) MFA 
 Cellerier process. 
 
 Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 493-495, MFA. 
 
 149. Harrison, W. H. Colored chloride of 
 silver. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 723-725.) MFA 
 
 150. Harrison, William Jerome. History 
 of photography in colors. (In his: A his- 
 tory of photography. New York, 1887. 
 8°. p. 117-125.) MFC 
 
16 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1887, continued. 
 
 151. Lang, William, jr. Carey Lea’s pho- 
 tochloride of silver. (Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic journal, New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 
 495-497.) MFA 
 
 -152. The Latest thing in photography in 
 “natural colours.” (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 10, 1887, v. 34, p. 
 353-354.) MFA 
 
 Editorial claims that the Cellerier process of back- 
 ing a transparency with colored paper was originated 
 in a large measure by Aston in 1866. 
 
 153. Lea, Mathew Carey. Combinations 
 of silver chloride with other metallic chlo- 
 rides, (American journal of science, New 
 Haven, 1887, series 3, v. 34, p. Snr hs 
 
 Abstracted in Nature, London, Nov. 24, 1887, v. 
 37, p. 88, OA. 
 
 154. On red and purple chloride, bro- 
 mide and iodide of silver; on heliochromy 
 and on the latent photographic image. 
 (American journal of science, New Haven, 
 1887, series 3, v. 33, p. 349-364.) OA 
 
 Abstracted in Nature, London, May 19, 1887, 
 Vis. ps 64.-0A: 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 1, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 9-13, 
 MFA; Photographic news, 1887, 
 v. 31, p. 337-342, MFA. 
 
 155. Pearce, Charles E. Photography in 
 unnatural colours. A chapter from the 
 history of the past. (Photographic news, 
 London, June 10, 1887, v. 31, p. Se 
 
 Bitter attack on L. L. Hill. 
 
 
 
 London, June 3, 
 
 156. Professed photography in natural col- 
 ours. (Photographic news, London, 1887, 
 v. 31, p. 343, 353-354, 366, 381-382, pias 
 
 Discussions as to the merits of the Cellerier process. 
 
 157. Staats, Georg. Zur Kenntniss der 
 photochromatischen Eigenschaften des 
 Chlorsilbers. (Deutsche chemische Ge- 
 sellschaft. Berichte, 1887, Jahrg. 20, p. 
 2322-2323.) PKA 
 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 9, 1887, MFA; Chemical Society. Journal, 
 London, 1887, v. cee Abstracts, lor Ls j 
 
 “When a well polished plate of silver is dipped 
 into a five per cent. solution of iron chloride it ac- 
 quires a slate colour. The plate is taken out of the 
 solution after ten seconds, dried quickly (without 
 heating), and covered with red, emerald, orange, and 
 cornflower-blue glass. In sunshine the colours ap- 
 pear on the plate after a few minutes.” 
 
 1888 
 
 158. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Light and colour. (Society of Arts. Jour- 
 nal, London, 1888, v. 37, p. 80-83, 90-93, 99- 
 106, 113—123.) VA 
 
 . printed in Photographic news, London, 1889, 
 w.Go3, 9-10, 20-22, 69-71, 276-280, 348- 350, 412— 
 413, 429- 430, MFA. 
 
 159. Balfour, Graham. The coming pho- 
 tography in color — for good or evil. 
 (International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New Yous 1888, v. 1, p. 
 46-50.) MFA 
 
 Relation of color ere ce: to art. 
 
 160. Harding - Warner, W. Photography 
 in colors: (International annual of An- 
 thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
 1888, v. 1, p. 592-595.) MFA 
 
 a ate of the author and Samuel Powel about 
 0. 
 
 161. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Chlorophyl 
 and gelatine-bromide plates. illus. (Frank- 
 lin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, June, 
 1888, v. 125, p. 479-482.) VA 
 
 162. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
 Strutt. On the remarkable phenomenon of 
 crystalline reflexion described by Prof. 
 Stokes. (London, Edinburgh, and Dublin 
 philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
 ence, London, Sept., 1888, series 5, v. 26, 
 p. 256-265.) OA 
 
 1889 
 
 163. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Captain Ab- 
 ney on heliochromy. (Franklin Institute. 
 Journal, Philadelphia, Nov., 1889, v. 128, p. 
 339-341.) VA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of pre 
 London, Nov. 8, 1889, v. 36, p. 731-732, MFA 
 
 164. Heliochromy. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 21, 1888, v. 
 35, p. 806-807.) MFA 
 
 For corrections see s cteare te news, London, 
 Dec. ‘21, 1888, v2 32;3p2.8025 
 
 Also printed in ores news, London, Dec. 
 14, 1888, v. 32, p. 789-790, MFA, and in Franklin 
 seat. Journal, Philadelphia, 1889, v. 97, p. 54-58, 
 40 ‘ 
 
 
 
 . 165. Obernetter, E. Some considerations 
 
 of photography with color plates. illus. 
 (International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1889, v. 2, p. 
 175-177.) MFA 
 
 Experiments with coal-tar colors. 
 
 166. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
 Strutt. On achromatic interference-bands. 
 (London, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophi- 
 cal magazine and journal of science, Lon- 
 don, 1889, series 5, v. 28, p. 77-91, ee 
 
 1890 
 
 167. Bedding, Thomas. Coloured au nat- 
 urel. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 3, 1890, v. 37, p. 4.) MFA 
 
 “The paths of science are traversed by innumer- 
 able wild geese, whose pursuers appear incapable of 
 perceiving the hopelessness of their case. The photo- 
 graph in natural colours must, Sy Re ys oy be 
 classed with these evasive fowl.’’ 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 17 
 
 1890, continued. 
 
 168. Eder, Josef Maria. Photography in 
 natural colours as effected by Herr Franz 
 Veress, of Klausenburg. (Photographic 
 news, London, May 9, 1890, v. 34, p. ead 
 A 
 
 169. Gaedicke, J. Photography in colors. 
 (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
 York, 1890, v. 21, p. 357-358.) MFA 
 
 His experiments with Poitevin’s process. 
 
 170. Photography in natural colours. 
 (Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1890, 
 wero+; p. 618.) ‘MFA 
 
 A review of early methods; also reference to 
 Veress process. 
 
 Also printed in Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1890, v. 21, p. 328-330, MFA. 
 
 171. Gunther, Hermann E. Photography 
 in Germany. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 
 
 
 don, 1890, v. 34, p. 357, 610-611.) MFA 
 Experiments of Veress and Gaedicke. 
 
 172. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 
 
 in natural colours on silver plates. (Photo- 
 
 graphic news, London, Feb. 21, 1890, v. 34, 
 
 pnl53.) MFA 
 Differences between his process and those of Cros 
 
 and Ducos du Hauron. 
 
 173. Photography in natural colours. (Pho- 
 
 tographic news, London, 1890, v. 34, p. 217, 
 
 276-277, 448-450.) MFA 
 
 Newspaper Roe eadence regarding the Veress 
 process. 
 
 174. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Photo- 
 graphien in nattrlichen Farben. (Physi- 
 kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 
 
 lungen, Berlin, aps 13; 21890, Jahre9-p. 
 73-78.) PAA 
 
 (175. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Stehende 
 Lichtwellen und die Schwingungsrichtung 
 polarisirten Lichtes. illus. (Annalen der 
 Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1890, N. F. 
 Bd. 40, p. 203-243.) PAA 
 
 Investigations of the retention of colors by a sensi- 
 tized plate. 
 
 1891 
 
 176. Becquerel, Edmond. Observations... 
 sur la communication de M. Lippmann au 
 sujet de la reproduction photographique 
 des couleurs. (Académie des sciences. 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
 tizZ, p. 274-275.) * EO 
 
 177. —— Sur la reproduction photo- 
 graphique des couleurs.; (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 9, 
 1891, tome 112, p. 331.) * EO 
 
 ; Shows several reproductions taken forty years be- 
 ore. 
 
 178. Berget, Alphonse. La photographie 
 des couleurs. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 
 1891, tome 48, p. 33-40.) OA 
 
 Historical. Lippmann process. 
 
 179. —— Photographie des couleurs par 
 la méthode interférentielle de M. Lipp- 
 
 mann. Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
 1891. vi, 58 p. 12°. (Bibliothéque photo- 
 graphique.) MFF p.v.5 
 
 Bound with: G. Balagny, L’hydroquinone, Paris, 
 oS Ome liee. 
 
 180. Cornu, A. Sur une expérience récente, 
 déterminant la direction de la vibration 
 dans la lumiére polarisée. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 26, 
 1891, tome 112, p. 186-189.) * EO 
 
 181-182. Sur les objections faites a l’in- 
 terprétation des expériences de M. Wiener. 
 (Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, Feb. 16, 1891, tome 112, p. 365-370.) 
 
 
 
 * EO 
 183. Gothard, Eugen von. Ueber die 
 neueren Fortschritte der Heliochromie. 
 
 (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik ftir 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, 
 Jahrg. 5, p. 46-50.) MFA 
 
 Veress process. 
 
 184. Green, A. G., and others. Photogra- 
 phy in aniline colours. By A. G. Green, 
 GF. Gross and E. J. Bevan. / (Society,of 
 Arts. Journal, London, Jam, 23, 1891, v. 39, 
 p. 150-155.) VA 
 
 185. Harding- Warner, W. Pictures in 
 natural colors. (International annual of 
 Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
 York, 1891, v. 4, p. 205-207.) MFA 
 Describes Wothly type process of 1863-64. 
 
 186. Hatzfeld, Albert. La reproduction 
 photographique des couleurs. (Revue sci- 
 entifique, Paris, May 16, 1891, tome 47, p. 
 609-613.) OA 
 
 Historical. Lippmann process. 
 187. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 
 in the colors of nature. illus. (Franklin 
 
 Institute. 
 21.) 
 
 “Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1891, v. 38, p. 56-57, 103-104, 118-120, 
 137-138, MFA; and Anthony’ Ky photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 115-118, 146-148, 207- 
 210, 239- 242, MFA. 
 
 188. Photography in the colors of na- 
 ture. illus. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
 letin, New York, 1891, v. 22, p. at tei 
 
 Argument with H. W. Vogel as to priority of in- 
 vention. 
 
 189. —— Professor Lippmann’s helio-— 
 
 chromy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, 
 Philadelphia, Aug., 1891, v. 132, p. ata 
 
 Journal, jan, )89love 131,.0-4— 
 VA 
 
 
 
 190. Labatut. 
 raphie des couleurs. 
 
 ences. Comptes rendus, 
 1891, tome 113, p. 126-129.) 
 
 L’absorption et la photog- 
 (Académie des sci- 
 Paris, July 20, 
 
 * KO 
 
18 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1891, continued. 
 
 191. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
 des couleurs. (Académie des sciences. 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
 112, p. 274-275.) * EO 
 
 Also printed in Revue scientifique, Paris, Feb. 7, 
 1891, tome 47, p. 161-162, OA. 
 
 For an English translation see British journal of 
 photography, Feb. 20, 1891, v. 38, p. 121, MFA. 
 This also includes account of interview with M. Lipp- 
 mann by the representative of the London Daily News. 
 
 
 
 192. Photographie des couleurs du 
 spectre solaire. (L’Astronomie, Paris, 
 1891, année 10, p. 87-88.) OMA 
 193. Mascart, Eleuthére Elie Nicolas. Traité 
 
 Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
 Vaan atlas. 6 and 4”, 
 PEB and t}} PEB 
 
 See tome 2, p. 577-578 for discussion of color 
 effects on photographic plate. 
 
 d’optique. 
 1889-93. 
 
 194. The New discoveries in heliochromy. 
 illus. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 216-219.) MFA 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 195. Ogonowski, E., conte. La photochro- 
 mie. Tirage d’épreuves photographiques 
 
 en couleurs. Paris: Gauthier - Villars et 
 mis 1SsOl” 2p.) 30 po.) Ltables 12%.) CBRib- 
 liotheque photographique.) MFF p.v.20 
 
 Bound with: C. O’Madden, 
 voyage. Paris, 1890. 12°. 
 196. Photographing in colours. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 27, 
 18915-v. 38;.p.. 135) MFA 
 
 Comments by The Lancet on the Lippmann process. 
 
 197. Photography in colours. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 20, 
 1891, v.38, p. 113.) MFA 
 
 Description of and comments on Lippmann process. 
 
 198. Scott, Albert W. Natural colors on 
 the lantern screen. (Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1891, v. 22, 
 p. 118-119.) MFA 
 
 Verak process. 
 
 199. Some of the difficulties of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, 1891, v. 38, p. 273, 306-307.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 200. Thwing, Charles B. Color photogra- 
 phy by Lippmann’s process. .(American 
 journal of science, New Haven, Conn., 
 1891, series 3, v. 42, p. 388-390.) OA 
 
 Modifications of the process. 
 
 201. Vidal, Léon. Photographic methods 
 of obtaining polychromatic impressions. 
 (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
 York, 1891, v. 22, p. 698-700, 725-728.) 
 MFA 
 
 Le photographe en 
 
 Describes well-known methods. 
 
 202. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Dr. Lipp- 
 
 mann’s photographs in natural colors. 
 (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
 York, 1891, v. 22, p. 166-167.) MFA 
 
 ‘(Anthony’s 
 
 
 
 203. Photography in natural colors. 
 photographic bulletin, New 
 York, 1891, v. 22, p. 680-683.) MFA 
 
 Argument with F. E. Ives as to priority. 
 
 204. Winstanley, D. Heliochromy. (An- 
 thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
 1891, v. 22, p. 85-87.) MFA 
 
 Explains his method of printing with silver salt. * 
 
 205. Zenker, Wilhelm. Die Entstehung 
 der Farben in der Photochemie. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik fiir 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, Jahrg. 5, 
 p. 294-303.) MFA 
 
 1892 
 
 206. Boothroyd, Jabez. Backing of plates 
 and color sensitive films. (International 
 annual of Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1892, v. 5, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 207. Colour in the camera. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, May 6, 1892, 
 v. 39, p. 295.) MFA 
 Account of lecture by Frederic E. Ives at Associa- 
 tion Hall,. Philadelphia, under the auspices of the 
 Photographic Society of Philadelphia. 
 208. Colour photography “an established 
 fact.” (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 8, 1892, v. 39, p. 26-27.) MFA 
 
 Copy of article in Philadelphia Public Ledger re- 
 garding an illustrated lecture by Frederic E. Ives at 
 the Franklin Institute. 
 
 209. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The helio- 
 chromoscope. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
 nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1893, v. 135, p. 35- 
 41.) VA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, | 
 London, Nov. 25, 1892, v. 39, p. 758-759, MFA. 
 
 210. Krone, Hermann. Ueber Farbenpho- 
 togramme von Spectren. (Annalen der 
 Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1892, N. F. 
 Bd. 46, p. 426-430.) PAA 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 211. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
 des couleurs. illus. (Conservatoire des 
 arts et métiers. Annales, Paris, 1892, série 
 2, tome 4, p. 161-172.) VA 
 
 212. La photographie des couleurs. 
 (Revue scientifique, Paris, 1892, tome 50, 
 p. 33-35.) OA 
 
 213. ——- La photographie des couleurs, 
 son principe, ses progrés les plus récents. 
 illus. (Revue générale des sciences, Paris, 
 1892, tome 3, p. 41-45.) OA 
 
 214. —— Photographies colorées du spectre, 
 sur albumine et sur gélatine bichromatées. 
 (Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, Oct. 24, 1892, tome 115, p. 575.) * EO 
 
 215; Sur la photographie des couleurs. 
 (Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, April 25, 1892, tome 114, p. opp! 
 
 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 19 
 
 1892, continued. 
 
 216. Meslin, G. Sur la photographie des 
 couleurs. (Annales de chimie et de phy- 
 sique, Paris, 1892, série 6, tome 27, p. 369- 
 391.) PAA 
 On the theory of the Lippmann process. 
 
 217. Photography in natural colours up to 
 date. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 19, 1892, v. 39, p. 114-115.) 
 . MFA 
 Describes the process of Dr. Raphael Kopp. 
 218. Stolze, F. Color effect in the picture 
 and photography. (Anthony’s_ photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1892, v. 23, 
 p. 680-683, 719-722.) MFA 
 
 General principles of color. 
 
 219. Vidal, Léon. La photogravure en re- 
 lief et en creux. La photochromographie 
 et leurs applications a l’industrie du livre. 
 (Conservatoire des arts et métiers. An- 
 nales, Paris, 1892, série 2, tome 4, p. 192- 
 211.) VA 
 
 1893 
 
 220. Colour photography, an interview 
 with Mr. Frederic Ives. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1893, v. 
 
 40, supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 
 221. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Composite 
 heliochromy. illus. (Society of Arts. 
 
 Journal, London, May 19, 1893, v. 41, p. 
 663-672.) VA 
 With discussion. 
 Reprinted in British journal 7 photography, 1893, 
 v. 40, p. 328-330, 344-347, MFA 
 222. The ee ere Lipomann col- 
 our photography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Dec. 15, 1893, v. 40, p. 
 798-799.) MFA 
 
 223. MM. Lumiére’s experiments in ‘“col- 
 our photography.” (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 26, 1893, v. 40, 
 Bozo. ) MFA 
 Gives formulae for emulsion and developer. 
 224. Mareschal, G. Les progrés de la pho- 
 tographie des ‘couleurs. (Le Génie civil, 
 Paris, June 24, 1893, tome 23, p. 125-126.) 
 
 
 
 Lumiére formulas for working Lippmann process. 
 
 225. Warnerke, Léon. Photographs in 
 natural colours produced by the improved 
 process of L. Lumiére, after Professor 
 Lippmann’s interference method. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 10, 
 1893, v. 40, p. 718.) MFA 
 
 oe editorial comments see Oct. 20, 1893, v. 40, 
 p. ' 
 
 1894 
 
 226. Dillaye, Frédéric. La chromophotog- 
 raphie. illus. (In his: Les nouveautés 
 eee prep nidues 1894. Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 
 142-154.) MFA 
 
 - Dp. 5-/.) 
 
 
 
 UAL, Photochromographie. illus. (In 
 his: Les nouveautés photographiques 1894. 
 Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 247-258.) MFA 
 
 228. Dunmore, Edward. Colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 10, 1894, v. 41, p. 504.) MFA 
 
 Suggests “suitably coloured films of gelatine, pro- 
 duced by the aforesaid triple negatives, superposed on 
 each other, and the result examined as a transpar- 
 ency.” 
 
 229. Fourtier, H. Photography in colors. 
 (International annual of Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. 
 215-216.) MFA 
 
 230. Gitchell, Corwin. Photography in 
 colors. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 221-223.) MFA 
 
 Ives’ process. 
 
 231. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photography in 
 colors. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 50-51.) MFA 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 232. Hopkins. Photography in colors — 
 the method as practiced by R. D. Gray. 
 illus. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 40-43.) MFA 
 
 233. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Color screens 
 for composite heliochromy. illus. (Ameri- 
 can annual of photography for 1895, New 
 York, 1894, p. 241-244a.) MFA 
 
 234. Composite heliochromy. illus. 
 (Technology quarterly, Boston, 1894, v. 7, 
 p. 317-323.) VDA 
 
 Abstract in Journal of the Society of Chemical In- 
 oe London, Nov. 30, 1895, v. 14, p. 987-988, 
 
 
 
 
 
 2a5: The Lumiére- Lippmann color 
 photography. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
 nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1894, v., 137, p. 16— 
 
 21.) VA 
 
 236. The Lumiére-Valenta-Lippmann 
 colour photographs. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 5, 1894, Mey 
 
 Paper read before the Photographic Society of 
 Great Britain. 
 
 
 
 237. —— Vasenimnengere ute Heliochromie. 
 illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik fiir 1894, Halle a. S., 
 1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 215-233.) MFA 
 
 Describes kromoscope. 
 
 238. Ives’s_ stereoscopic photo - chromo- 
 scope. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 14, 1894, v. 41, p. 790.) MFA 
 
 239. Joly, John. On colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 20, 1894, v. 41, p. 457-459.) MFA 
 Paper read before the Photographic Convention of 
 the United Kingdom. 
 With discussion. 
 
20 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1894, continued. 
 
 240. Lectures on colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 4, 1894, v. 41, p. 282-283.) MFA 
 
 Account of two lectures by E. J. Wall in London. 
 Contains a brief history of color photography. 
 
 241. Lippmann, Gabriel. Sur la théorie de 
 la photographie des couleurs simples et 
 composées par la méthode interférentielle. 
 (Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, Jan. 15, 1894, tome 118, p. celine 8 
 
 Also printed in Journal de physique, Paris, ae 
 série 3, tome 3, p. 97-107, PAA. 
 
 242. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Die 
 neuesten Fortschritte der Chromophotog- 
 raphie und die Theorie der Lippmann’schen 
 Versuche. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir Photog- 
 raphie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1894, 
 Halle a. S., 1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 73-82.) MFA 
 
 Theory of Lippmann process. 
 
 243. Valenta, Eduard. Photography in 
 natural colors. (Anthony’s photographic 
 bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. ete. 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 244. Vidal, Léon. Applications of the 
 stereochromoscope to the arts and sci- 
 ences. illus. (American annual of pho- 
 tography for 1895, New York, 1894, p. 238- 
 240.) MFA 
 
 245. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. The his- 
 tory of color-sensitive (iso-chromatic or 
 ortho-chromatic) photography. (Interna- 
 tional annual of Anthony’s photographic 
 bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. ey 
 
 246. Ward, Catherine Weed. Gabriel Lipp- 
 mann. port. (Anthony’s photographic 
 bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 296- 
 299.) MFA 
 
 247. Warnerke, Léon. Photographs in 
 natural colors, by the process of L. Lumi- 
 ére. (Smithsonian Institution. Report for 
 1893, Washington, 1894, p. 163-164.) *EA 
 
 248. Wilson, Edward L. Wilson’s cyclo- 
 pedic photography; a complete hand-book 
 of the terms, processes, formule and ap- 
 pliances available in photography...for 
 ready reference. New York: Edward L. 
 Wilson, 1894. viii, (1)18-494 p. illus. 8°. 
 
 MFD 
 
 See p. 182-187 for heliochrome processes of Niepce 
 de Saint Victor and Becquerel. 
 
 1895 
 
 249. Bayley, R. Child. Emulsion for the 
 Lippmann process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 21, 1895, v. 42, 
 p. 388-389.) MFA 
 
 250. —— Lippmann’s process of color pho- 
 tography. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
 letin, New York, 1895, v. 26, p. oe 
 
 Bole Lippmann’s process of colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 31, 1895, v. 42, p. 342- 
 343.) MFA 
 
 
 
 For editorial comment see June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
 353-355. 
 
 252. Berthier, A. Manuel de photochromie 
 interférentielle; procédés de reproduction 
 directe des couleurs. Paris: Gauthier- 
 Villars et fils, 1895. 2° plo 109m sees 
 (Bibliotheque photographique.) MFV 
 
 253. Dillaye, Frédéric. Chassis 4 mercure 
 pour la chromophotographie. illus. (In 
 his: Les nouveautés photographiques 1895. 
 Paris, 1895. 8°. p. 90-95.) M 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 254. Du Bois-Reymond, Cl. Eine Demon- 
 stration der neuen farbigen Photographien 
 von Dr. Joly in Dublin. (Physikalische | 
 Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, 
 Berlin, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 73-76.) PAA 
 
 255. The First direct portrait in colors. 
 
 (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, New 
 
 York, 1895, v. 26,.p. 309. FA 
 Claim of E. Bierstadt for picture taken in 1890. 
 
 256. Gelatine emulsion for the Lippmann 
 colour process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
 353-355.) MFA 
 
 257. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Feb. 15, 1895, v. 42, p. 103- 
 105.) MFA 
 
 Lecture before the Society of Amateur Photog- 
 raphers of New York. ‘‘The editor of a well-known 
 photographic magazine has quite recently asserted 
 that the natural colours have not yet been reproduced 
 as seen upon the ground glass of the camera; but, 
 if that editor is here tonight, he will have an oppor- 
 tunity to see in the photo-chromoscope a more perfect 
 reproduction of coloured objects than he ever saw on 
 the ground glass of the camera, because it is free 
 from granulation, and, being in stereoscopic relief, 
 looks like the very object itself.” 
 
 258. Colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
 1895, v. 42, p. 599-600.) MFA 
 
 
 
 Abstract of a paper read before the American 
 Association for the Advancement of Science. 
 
 259. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 La photographie des couleurs, ses méthodes 
 et ses résultats. (Revue générale des sci- 
 ences, Paris, 1895, tome 6, p. ee ey 
 
 
 
 260. Sur la photographie en couleurs, 
 par la méthode indirecte. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1895, 
 tome 120, p. 875-876.) *EO 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 71 
 
 1895, continued. 
 
 261. McFarland, John Horace. Practical 
 color-process work. illus. (American 
 annual of photography for 1896, New 
 York, 1895, p. 209-211.) MFA | 
 
 Has colored plate by Coloritype process. 
 
 262. Neuhauss, Richard. Ueber die Pho- 
 tographie in nattirlichen Farben. (Physi- 
 kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 
 lungen, Berlin, Feb. 8, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 
 17-24.) PAA 
 
 Discusses Zenker’s theory as applied to Lippmann 
 process. 
 
 Also printed in Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 
 Reproductionstechnik, 1895, Halle a. S., 1895, Jahrg. 
 9, p. 186-192, MFA. 
 
 263. Photographs in natural colors — Mc- 
 Donotype process. (Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, March 1, 1895, 
 v. 26, p. 73-75.) "MFA 
 
 264. Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud. The 
 heliogabotype. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 25, 1895, v. 42, p. 
 680-681.) MFA 
 
 Facetious account of proceedings of the Turkey- 
 town Hypo Club. From the American journal of pho- 
 tography. 
 
 265. Wall, Edward John. A note on col- 
 our-sensitive plates and screens. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 14, 
 1895, v. 42, p. 375-376.) MFA 
 
 266. —— Photography in colours. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1895, v. 42, p. 474-476, 484.) MFA 
 
 Describes the Joly process, the Niewenglowski 
 heliochromoscope, Nachet’s stereochromoscope, Zink’s 
 photo-polychromoscope, and _ the poly-photochromo 
 stereoscopic camera. 
 
 267. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Farbenpho- 
 tographie durch Korperfarben und me- 
 chanische Farbenanpassung in der Natur. 
 (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1895, N. F. Bd. 55, p. 225-281.) PAA 
 
 Discusses Seebeck, Becquerel, Poitevin, and Carey- 
 Lea processes. 
 
 Also printed in Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik fiir 1896, Hal lem ava 11996; 
 Jahrg. 10, p. 55-107, MFA. 
 
 1896 
 
 - 268. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Becquerel’s colour photographs. (Nature. 
 London, June 11, 1896, v. 54, p. 125.) OA 
 
 Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 
 
 269. Bothamley, C. H. Becquerel’s and 
 Lippmann’s colour photographs. (Nature, 
 London, May 28, 1896, v. 54, p. 77.) OA 
 
 Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 
 
 270. Direct trichromatic half-tone nega- 
 tives. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 9, 1896, v. 43, p. le RRS 
 
 271. Eder, Josef Maria. Coloured screens 
 for orthochromatic and three-colour work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 16, 1896, v. 43, p. 660.) MFA 
 
 272. Gibson, J. Stewart. Photography of 
 
 color. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 
 New York, 1896, v. 27, p. 184-191.) MFA 
 General principles. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1896, v. 43, p. 345-346, 362-363, MFA. 
 
 273. Glan, Paul. Zur Photographie in 
 naturahnlichen Farben. (Annalen der 
 Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1896, N. F. 
 Bd. 58, p. 402-404.) PAA 
 
 Use of the spectrotelescope. 
 
 274. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The perfected 
 photo-chromoscope. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 17, 1896, 
 v. 43, p. 38-41.) MFA 
 
 oe of lecture delivered before the Camera 
 ub. 
 
 275. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 
 raphy in natural colours. illus. (Royal 
 Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
 Dublin, 1896, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 3 
 E 
 
 276. Joly’s translucent coloured screens. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 May 1, 1896, v. 43, supplement, p. 39-40.) 
 MFA 
 
 277. Kelvin (1st baron), William Thom- 
 son. On Lippmann’s colour photography 
 with obliquely incident light. (Nature, 
 London, May 7, 1896, v. 54, p. 12-13.) OA 
 
 278. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
 raphy. (Royal Institution of Great Brit- 
 ain. Proceedings, London, April 17, 1896, 
 Vorkoe Ds cLol—156.) EC 
 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, 
 April 24, 1896, v. 43, p. 265, MFA. 
 
 Also printed in Nature, London, April 30, 1896, 
 v 53, p. 617-618, OA. 
 
 279. On colour photography by the 
 interferential method. (Royal Society of 
 London. Proceedings, 1896, v. 60, p. 10- 
 13°) * EC 
 
 280. McDonough’s improvements in pho- 
 tographic coloured screens. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Aug. 28, 1896, 
 v. 43, p. 551-552.) MFA 
 
 Quotes his patent claims. 
 
 
 
 281. McDonough’s improvements in and 
 relating to colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 14, 
 1896, vi 43 p25235 MFA 
 
 Quotes his patent claims. 
 
 282. Meldola, R. Becquerel and Lipp- 
 mann’s colour photographs. (Nature, Lon- 
 don, May 4, 1896, v. 54, p. 28.) OA 
 
 Believes that effects shown in these processes are 
 due to the same cause. For comments see p. 77, 125 
 
ae THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1896, continued. 
 
 283. Neuhauss, Richard. Die Photogra- 
 phie in natirlichen Farben. (Jahrbuch fir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1896, Halle a. S., 1896, Jahrg. 10, p. 20- 
 23.) MFA 
 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 284. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Anew 
 stereochromoscope. illus. (International 
 annual of Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1896, v. 8, p. 221-222.) MFA 
 
 285. Photographs in colours: Lumiére’s 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. on 
 
 286. Photographs in natural colours: Selle’s 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. 182-183.) 
 
 MFA 
 287. Photography in colours at Newquay. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 18, 1896, v. 43, p. 602-603.) MFA 
 
 Comments on Mr. J. W. Bennetto. 
 
 288. “Photography in natural colours” (?) 
 
 —a challenge. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1896, v. 43, p. He 
 M 
 
 A challenge to Bennetto ‘‘to make good.” 
 
 289. Richard, Georges Adolphe. Photog- 
 raphie en couleurs; substitution de cou- 
 
 leurs organiques a l’argent réduit des 
 épreuves photographiques. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1896, 
 tome 122, p. 609-611, 687.) * EO 
 290. Sachse, Julius Friedrich. The Joly 
 process of color photography. (American 
 Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Phila- 
 
 delphia, 1896, v. 35, p. 119-122.) * EA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 28, 1896, v. 43, p. 553-554, MFA. 
 
 291. Schuett, F. Innerer Bau und optisches 
 Verhalten der Lippmann’schen Photo- 
 graphien in natiirlichen Farben. illus. 
 (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leip- 
 
 zig, 1896, N. F. Bd. 57, p. 533-554.) PAA 
 
 292. Wall, Edward John. Chromatic pho- 
 tography. illus. (Society of Chemical In- 
 dustry. - Journal, London, June 30, 1896, 
 v. 15, p. 400-404.) VOA 
 
 Carey Lea, Lippmann, and three-color processes. 
 
 1897 
 
 293. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 peer eta DF in colours. (Nature, Lon- 
 don, Feb. 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 318-319.) OA 
 
 Discusses Chascaane process. Partly reprinted in 
 
 British journal of photography, London, Feb. 12, 
 1897, v. 44, p. 102-103, MFA. 
 
 Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
 12, 1897, v. 41, p. 103, MFA. 
 
 
 
 294. The scientific requirements of 
 colour photography. (Nature, London, 
 June 24, 1897, v. 56, p. 186.) OA 
 
 Abstract of lecture before the Oxford University 
 Junior Scientific Club. 
 
 295. The sensitiveness of the return 
 to light and colour. illus. (Royal Society 
 
 of London, Philosophical transactions, 
 London, 1897, series A, v. 190, p. mar 
 
 
 
 296. Bonacini, Carlo. La fotografia a 
 colori... Milano: U. Hoepli, 1897. xxxii, 
 422° p95. 11 pl. 4? MFV 
 
 297. Chassagne’s colour process described. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 9, 1897, v. 44, p. 226-227.) MFA 
 
 298. Colour photography: Baumgartner’s 
 improvements. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 1, 1897, v. 44, p. 11- 
 12.) MFA 
 
 299. Colour photography: Brasseur and 
 Sampolo’s process. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, April 2, 1897, v. 
 44, p. 217-219.) MFA 
 
 Description of their patent which involves a sensi- 
 tive film, sensitised as far as may be for the visible 
 rays of the spectrum, exposed under and in close con- 
 tact with a taking screen, having minute, closely ad- 
 jacent or adjoining areas of transparent colours of 
 the required or desired light-selecting absorption 
 powers. 
 
 300. “Colour without colour.” (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 10, 
 1897, v. 44, p. 793-794.) MFA 
 
 Describes Charles Henry’s experiments with thin 
 membranes and the effects of surface tension of 
 liquids. 
 
 301. A Criticism of M. Chassagne’s colour 
 photographs. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 5, 1897, v. 44, p. 146- 
 147.) MFA 
 
 302. Gamble, William. M. Chassagne’s 
 colour process. <A possible explanation. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 19, 1897, v. 44, p. 118-119.) MFA 
 
 303. Graby, A. Positifs instantanés en 
 deux teintes. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
 tome 13, p. 229-231.) MFA 
 
 304. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Le photo- 
 chromoscope. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
 tome 13, p. 451-456.) MFA 
 
 305. 
 
 
 
 Photochromoscope and stereo- 
 
 scopic folding chromogram. illus. (Pho- 
 tographic journal, London, Sept., 1897, 
 new series, v. 22, p. 35.) MFA 
 
 Brief description, with illustrations. 
 
 306. Ives’s method of illuminating photo- 
 chromoscope pictures. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
 1897, v. 44, p. 665-667.) MFA 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 22 
 
 1897, continued. 
 
 307. The Joly process of natural colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Nov. 5, 1897, v. 44, supple- 
 ment, p. 84.) MFA 
 
 Instructions issued by the Natural Colour Photog- 
 raphy [Co.] of Dublin. 
 
 308. Lambert, F. C. Photography in nat- 
 ural colors —a comparative sketch. (An- 
 thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
 1897, v. 28, p. 108-110.) MFA 
 
 Historical. 
 
 309. A New process of colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 15, 1897, v. 44, p. 661.) MFA 
 
 Dittmar process. 
 
 310. Photographic reproduction of colours. 
 (Nature, London, March 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 
 422.) OA 
 
 Account of exhibition of Hennekta. 
 
 311. Pretzl, A. D. Three colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1897, v. 44, p. 293-294, Beate 
 
 An excellent outline of Hibl’s Die Dreifarbenpho- 
 tographie. 
 
 312. Saint-Florent, E. de. Photographie 
 des couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
 25, 1897, année 7, p. 101.) MFA 
 
 Celloidine paper and gum solution for direct ex- 
 posure to sun. Not suitable for camera. 
 
 313. Smith, Stephen. The application of 
 the theory of colour. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 10, 1897, v. 44, 
 p. 791-793.) MFA 
 
 From the Transactions of the Edinburgh Photo- 
 graphic Society. 
 
 314. Vidal, Léon. Le chromoscope C. Na- 
 chet, instrument propre a la synthése des 
 couleurs obtenues analytiquement par la 
 photographie. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, 
 tome 13, p. 225-229.) MFA 
 
 315. Du role des écrans colorés dans 
 le chromographe et le chromoscope. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1897, série 2, tome 13, p. aaa 
 
 Le photochromoscope. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1897, série 2, tome 13, p. 546-547.) MFA 
 
 317. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Beobach- 
 tungen an farbigen Interferenzphotogra- 
 phien. (Physikalische Gesellschaft zu Ber- 
 lin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 1897, Jahrg. 
 16, p. 176-178.) PAA (Deutsche) 
 
 318. Wallon, Etienne. La découverte de la 
 
 
 
 316. 
 
 
 
 “méthode indirecte” (reproduction des 
 couleurs). (Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, série 2, tome 
 
 13, p. 547-550.) MFA 
 
 319. What is photography in natural col- 
 ours? (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 12, 1897, v. 44, p. 98-99.) 
 MFA 
 320. Wood, Sir Henry Trueman. Colour 
 photography. (Nature, London, July 8, 
 1397,:v.206;p. 223.) OA 
 
 Dansac-Chassagne process. 
 
 321. —— Photography in colours. (So- 
 
 ciety of Arts. Journal, London, Jan. 29, 
 
 1897, v. 45, p. 158-159.) VA 
 Dansac- Chassagne process. 
 
 Also printed in Nature, London, Feb. 4, 1897, 
 Soaps ole. OA, and Photographic news, London, Feb. 
 5, 1897, v. 41, p. 89, -MFA. 
 
 22. The production of colour by 
 photographic methods. (Society of Arts. 
 Journal, London, Feb. 26, 1897, v. 45, p. 
 278-287.) VA 
 With discussion. 
 Well written history of various experiments. 
 
 
 
 1898 
 
 323. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Colour photography at the Camera Club. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 8, 1898, v. 45, p. 218.) MFA 
 
 An abstract of his lecture on the Joly process. 
 
 324. The theory of colour vision ap- 
 plied to modern colour photography. illus. 
 (Royal Institution of Great Britain. Pro- 
 ceedings, London, 1898, v. 15, p. 802-809.) 
 
 *TEC 
 325, Three-colour photographic print- 
 ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
 April 29, 1898, v.46, p. 548-553.) VA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 Ives process. Reprinted in British journal of Fis 
 tography, supplement, May 6, 1898, p. 35-37, MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 326. The Bennetto process of colour pho- 
 tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1898, v. 45, p..776, 783, 
 799, 814.) MFA 
 
 327. Colour photography. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 1898, 
 ¥, 45-4 035.) MFA 
 
 Describes pictures by the Bennetto process but tells 
 nothing of process. 
 
 328. Colour photography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 
 45, p. 808-809.) MFA 
 
 Experiments by E. J. Wall and T. E. Freshwater; 
 also a discussion of Clerk Maxwell color theory. 
 
 329. Gamble, William. Colour processes. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Feb. 28, 
 1898, new series, v. 22, p. 167-170.) MFA 
 
 Special dark-slide for Lippmann process. Joly - 
 process. 
 
 330. Gibson, J. Stewart. Color photogra- 
 phy —the Joly process. illus. (American 
 
 annual of photography for 1899, New 
 York, 1898, p. 84-89.) MFA 
 
24 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1898, continued. 
 
 331. Graby, A. Direct instantaneous posi- 
 tives in two colours. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, 
 p. 53-54.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of a paper in Helios. ‘He endeavored 
 to substitute the mercuric mirror in the Lippmann 
 process by emulsifying silver in the film, thus pro- 
 viding each grain of bromide of silver with its own 
 mirror.’ 
 
 332. Gravier, Gras Les impressions en 
 couleurs et les méthodes photographiques 
 dites orthochromatiques. (Photo-gazette, 
 Paris, 1898, année 9, p. 26-30, 54-58, 84-88, 
 207-211, 229-232.) MFA 
 
 Processes of Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 
 
 333. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 theory of three-colour printing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1898, v. 
 45, p. 133-135, 167-168.) MFA 
 
 334. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
 tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, sup- 
 plement, p. 4-7.) MFA 
 Fundamental principles discussed in a paper read 
 before the Croyden Camera Club. 
 CELE The photochromoscope. illus. 
 (Royal Scottish Society of Arts. Transac- 
 tions, Edinburgh, 1898, v. 14, p. eae 
 
 
 
 336. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 
 
 raphy in natural colours. illus. (Royal 
 
 Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
 Dublin, 1898, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 
 
 * EC 
 
 Has interesting colored facsimiles. Abstracted in 
 
 Nature, v. 53, p. 91-93, OA, and in British journal 
 of photography, v. 42, p. 774-776, MFA. 
 
 337. Joly’s changing back for colour screen 
 photography. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 19, 1898, v. 45, 
 p. 539.) MFA 
 
 338. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
 Colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 45, 
 p. 815.) MF 
 
 Very brief references to the work of Clerk Max- 
 well, Dr. Joly, Lord Rayleigh, Zenker, Wiener, Cornu, 
 and Mascart. 
 
 339. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 
 2-4.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
 graphic Society. 
 
 340. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 Photographies en couleurs par la méthode 
 indirecte. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 
 14, p. 316-317.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in Photographic ays. London, Feb. 28, 
 1899, new series, v. 23, 173-174, MFA, and 
 British journal of bhoreoreea a London, "July 29, 1898, 
 v. 45, p. 486-487, MFA. 
 
 341. Mareschal, G. La photographie des 
 couleurs. (Photo- -gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 
 1898, année 8, p. 61-62. MFA 
 
 Geisler process. 
 
 342. Meyer’s camera for producing nega- 
 tives for use in three-colour printing. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 13, 1898, v. 45, p. 310.) MFA 
 
 343. Monpillard, Félix. Impression tri- 
 chrome: paysage obtenu d’aprés nature par 
 triple sélection. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 
 2, tome 14, p. 534-535.) MFA 
 
 344. Note sur les épreuves imprimées 
 en trois couleurs dans les ateliers de M. 
 Prieur, a Puteaux. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, série 
 
 
 
 2, tome 14, p. 409-412.) MFA 
 345. Neuhauss, Richard. Nachweis der 
 dinnen Zenker’schen Blattchen in den 
 
 nach Lippmann’s Verfahren aufgenom- 
 menen Farbenbildern. (Annalen der Phy- 
 sik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1898, N. F. Bd. 
 65, p. 164-172.) PAA 
 
 346. Neuen Untersuchungen tiber das 
 Lippmann’sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproduc- 
 tionstechnik ftir 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, 
 Jahrg. 12, p. 179-184.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 50-51; 1899, 
 v. 45, supplement, p. 57-58; 1900, v. 47, Journal, p. 
 26-27, 167, MFA. ' 
 347. Ueber die Photographie in natiir- 
 lichen Farben nach Lippmann’s Verfahren 
 und den Nachweis der dtinnen Zenker’- 
 schen Blattchen. (Physikalische Gesell- 
 schaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 
 1898, Jahrg. 17, p. 94-95.) PA 
 
 348. A New colour process. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Oct. 21, 1898, 
 v. 45, p. 678.) MFA 
 
 Brief description of the Dittmar process, which, it 
 is stated, “‘is hardly likely to be of much use, but is 
 of theoretical interest as a confirmation of Wiener’s 
 theory of ‘Korperfarben.’ ” 
 
 349. Noack. A three-colour printing proc- 
 ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 23, 1898, v. 45, p. 822.) MFA 
 
 350. La Photographie des couleurs et la 
 photochromie des métaux. (La Revue 
 technique, Paris, Oct. 10, 1898, vy. 19, p. 
 451.) VA 
 Abstract in Photographic news, London, Dec. 23, 
 1898, v. 42, p. 838, MFA. 
 351. Photography in colours. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 24, 
 1898, v. 45, p. 406.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to the claims of Herr Reichel. 
 
 352. Photography in natural colours. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 9, 1898, v. 45, p. 787.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to the Grenier-Villerd process. 
 “The colours appeared to be absolutely fixed, and, 
 if M. Grenier-Villerd is to be believed, the cost of the 
 same is considerably less than that of ordinary wall 
 paper.” 
 
 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 25 
 
 1898, continued. 
 
 353. Swan, J. W. Professor Joly’s process 
 of colour-photography: (English mechanic 
 and world of science, London, March 25, 
 1898, v. 67, p. 119.) VA 
 
 Reprinted in British journal of photography, April 
 1, 1898, supplement, p. 29-30, MFA. 
 
 354. Tallent, Alexander A. K. On rapid 
 
 dry plates for process work. Combined 
 
 screen and colour negatives for three col- 
 
 our printing. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 
 don, Dec. 23, 1898, new series, v. 23, p. 8l- 
 
 84.) MFA 
 With discussion. 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Nov. 25, 1898, v. 45, p. 764, MFA. 
 
 355. Valenta, Eduard. Untersuchungen 
 iiber das Sensibilisirungsvermogen ver- 
 schiedener Theerfarbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, Jahrg. 12, p. 255- 
 265.) MFA 
 
 356. Vidal, Léon. Moyen de préparer les 
 écrans colorés pour les reproductions tri- 
 chromes et de régler leur saturation. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 14, p. 85-89.) 
 MFA 
 
 357. Vieuille, G. The chromographoscope. 
 illus. (American annual of photography 
 
 for 1899, New York, 1898, p. 156-157.) MFA 
 
 358. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, Be 
 
 Describes different color effects produced by the 
 Lippmann process. 
 
 359. A review of triple printing 
 
 methods. (Photographic journal, London, 
 April 28, 1898, new series, v. 22, p. ? ae 
 
 
 
 360. Wallon, Etienne. Le chromographo- 
 scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1898, série 2, tome 14, p. 80- 
 83.) MFA 
 
 361. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Color pho- 
 tography by means of body colors, and 
 mechanical color adaptation in nature. 
 (Smithsonian Institution. Annual report 
 for 1896, Washington, 1898, p. Sy Sepa 
 
 1899 
 
 362. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 The colour sensations in terms of luminos- 
 ity. (Photographic journal, London, June 
 30, 1899, new series, v. 23, p. etna 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 
 
 
 
 363. Colours for tri-chromatic photo- 
 graphic printing. illus. (Photographic 
 journal, London, 1899, new series, v. 23, 
 p. 192-198, 288.) MFA 
 
 364. Becquerel, Edmond. The researches of 
 Edmond Becquerel on direct heliochromy. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1899, v. 46, p. 292-294, 309-311.) MFA 
 
 Except for a short introduction this article is a 
 translation of Becquerel’s paper before the Société 
 francaise de photographie in 1857. 
 
 365. Blanc, A. Procédés pour l’étude de 
 la photochromie interférentielle. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 469-471.) MFA 
 
 366. Boothroyd, Jabez. A few thoughts 
 on photographing in natural colors. (In- 
 ternational annual of Anthony’s photo- 
 graphic bulletin, New York, 1899, v. 11, 
 p. 72-76.) MFA 
 
 Difficulties to be overcome. 
 
 367. Brothers, Alfred. Photography: its 
 history, processes, apparatus, and materi- 
 als. Comprising working details of all 
 the more important methods. London: 
 Charles Griffin & Co., 1899. xviii, 367 p. 
 Zr ederey ptllusace.. MFE 
 oielEs history, p. 142-151. Kromoskop, p. 300- 
 
 368. C.. R. H. W. Vogel. (Société fran- 
 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 
 1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 165.) MFA 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 369. Clerc, Louis Philippe. La photogra- 
 
 phie des couleurs, avec une préface de 
 
 Gabriel Lippmann. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
 lars ,1899;. 190 p. 12°. (Encyclopédie 
 scientifique des aide-mémoire.) MFV 
 
 370. Fuerst Brothers. The Lippmann proc- 
 ess. (Professional photographer, Buffalo, 
 April, 1899, v. 4, p. 171-172.) MFA 
 
 Directions for working. 
 
 371. Grebe, C. On increasing the sensitive- 
 ness of substances by colouring. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, March 30, 1899, 
 new series, v. 23, p. 205-207.) MFA 
 
 372. Hermann Wilhelm Vogel. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Jan. 31, 1899, new 
 series, v. 23, p. 113-114.) MFA 
 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 373. The Ives Kromskop and color pho- 
 tography. (Professional photographer, 
 Buffalo, Oct., 1899, v. 4, p. 413-416.) MGA 
 
 374. Jones, Chapman. The Royal Photo- 
 graphic Society’s exhibition. (Nature, 
 London, Sept. 28, 1899, v. 60, p. 539.) OA 
 Brief reference to medal awarded to E. Sanger 
 Shepherd for his trichromatic light filters. 
 375. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
 The application of the diffraction grating 
 to photochromy. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 
 232.) MFA 
 
26 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1899, continued. : 
 
 376. The fundamental principles of 
 photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 28, 1899, v. 46, p. 262- 
 263.) MFA 
 
 Discusses the use of the terms “direct”? and ‘“‘in 
 direct”? as applied to color processes. 
 
 
 
 377. Kromskop color photography. (Pho- 
 tographic times, New York, 1899, v. 31, p. 
 164-167.) +MFA 
 
 378. Lambert, F.C. English notes — 
 recent-advances in three-color photogra- 
 phy. illus. (Anthony’s photographic bul- 
 letin, New York, 1899, v. 30, p. Sea 
 
 Abstract of lecture by E. Sanger Shepherd, describ- 
 ing his process. 
 
 Gabriel. Photographie 
 
 379, Lippmann, 
 (Société frangaise 
 
 directe des couleurs. 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, 
 série 2, tome 15, p. 116-118.) MFA 
 
 Translation in Photographic news, London, March 
 30, 1899, v. 22, p. 207, MFA. 
 
 380. The Melano chromoscope. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
 1899, v. 46, p. 822.) MFA 
 
 381. Monpillard, Félix. Sur la photogra- 
 phie indirecte des couleurs appliquée a la 
 microphotographie. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
 2, tome 15, p. 467-468.) MFA 
 
 382. Namias, Rodolfo. Obtention d’images 
 colorées monochromes et polychromes par 
 voie chimique. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, 
 tome 15, p. 565-573.) MFA 
 
 383. Neuhauss, Richard. Neue Untersu- 
 chungen tiber das Lippmann’sche Farben- 
 verfahren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1899, Halle 
 
 a. S., 1899, Jahrg. 13, p. 70-74.) MFA 
 384. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Prog- 
 ress in color photography. (Smithsonian 
 
 Institution. Annual report for 1898, Wash- 
 ington, 1899, p. 209-215.) * EA 
 
 385. Photography in natural colours. 
 (Photographic news, London, March 10, 
 1899, v. 43, p. 154-155.) MFA 
 
 Formulas for Lippmann process. 
 
 386. Photography in natural colours — Mr. 
 Friese-Greene’s system. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 17, 
 1899, v. 46, p. 729-730.) MFA 
 
 Copy of specifications. 
 
 387. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 3, 1899, v. 46, supplement, 
 p. 85-86.) MFA 
 
 Describes operation of the Cadett plates. 
 
 1899, new series, v. 23, p. 316-326.) 
 
 
 
 388. The photography of wer 
 (Photographic journal, London, Aug. 
 fire 
 
 With discussion. 
 Deals principally with the Cadett plates. 
 
 389. Practical three-colour lantern- 
 slide making. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 23, 1899, new series, v. 24, p. 95— 
 101. ) é MFA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 390. Vidal, Léon. Application des réseaux 
 de diffraction a la reproduction photo- 
 graphique des couleurs, par M. le profes- 
 seur Wood. illus. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
 2, tome 15, p. 267-272.) F 
 
 391. ——- Chromoscope Nachet a vision 
 simple. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
 15, p. 103-106.) MFA 
 
 392. Photographie trichrome. Re- 
 marques relatives a la production du vert. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 15, p. 538- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 541.) MFA 
 393. Photographie trichrome, procédé 
 pelliculaire. (Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
 15, p. 486-489.) MFA 
 394. —— Procédé pelliculaire d’impres- 
 
 sions trichromes pour projections et sté- 
 réoscope. (Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 2, tome 
 15, p. 306-311.) MFA 
 
 395. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Ursache und 
 Beseitigung eines Fehlers bei der Lipp- 
 mann’schen Farbenphotographie, zugleich 
 ein Beitrag zu ihrer Theorie. illus. (An- 
 nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1899, N. F. Bd. 69, p. 488-530.) PAA 
 
 396. Wood, Robert Williams. An applica- 
 tion of the diffraction grating to colour 
 photography. (London, Edinburgh & 
 Dublin philosophical magazine & journal 
 of science, London, April, 1899, series 5, 
 v. 47, p. 368-372.) OA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of pagent, 
 London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 229-230, MFA 
 
 1900 
 
 397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 On the estimation of the luminosity of 
 coloured surfaces used for colour discs. 
 
 illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
 July 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. ele, 
 FA 
 
 Paper read before the Royal Society. 
 
 398. Screens for three-colour work. 
 illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Jan. 27, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 121- ayn 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY | 27 
 
 1900, continued. 
 
 399. Barbieri, D. The history of photog- 
 raphy in natural colours. (British journal 
 of photography, London, July 27, 1900, v. 
 47, p. 474-475.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in American architect, Boston, 1900, 
 
 v. 69, p. 62-63, MQA. 
 400. Bolas, Thomas, and others. A hand- 
 book of photography in colours. Section 
 
 meisy) i nomas Bolas... Section mu. By 
 miexander A. K. Tallent... Section m1. 
 By Edgar Senior... London: Marion & 
 ere 3 D.1,, vill, 343 p., 3 pl. 12°. 
 MFV 
 
 401. Capt. Lascelles Davidson’s improve- 
 ments in cinematographs for taking and 
 projecting photographs in colours. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 7, 1900, v. 47, supplement, p. 94-95.) 
 MFA 
 
 402. Colour fallacies. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1899, v. 46, p. 114— 
 115, 190, 226-227, 290-291, 322-323; 1900, v. 
 47, p. 143, 159, 175.) MFA 
 
 Editorial discussion of papers by Messrs. aioe 
 cock and Zerban, as well as the claims of J. W. Ben 
 netto. 
 
 “An ordinary film of sensitive silver haloid in 
 gelatine, exposed and developed in the usual manner, 
 is just as likely, either itself to register the colours 
 of the original or to transmit them to a prepared 
 printing surface, as the moon is to yield a supply of 
 green cheese to Sir. Thomas Lipton for his many 
 shops, or the obese inhabitants of the farmyard pig- 
 stye are to take unto themselves wings and fly.” 
 
 403. Colour photography: Krayn’s system 
 of viewing the pictures. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 19, 
 1900, v. 47, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 404. Colour screens. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 13, 1900, v. 47, 
 p. 229.) MFA 
 
 405. Cundall, J. Tudor. The Joly, Wood, 
 and ‘Lippmann processes for producing 
 photographs in colour. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 6, 1900, v. 47, 
 supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 406. A Dark slide for the Lippmann proc- 
 ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, June 1, 1900, v. 47, supplement, ree 
 
 Apparatus sold by Penrose & Co., 
 
 407. Fawcett, E. Douglas. Amateurs and 
 the Lippmann process. illus. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, 1900, v. 44, p. 248- 
 249, 266-267, 279.) MFA 
 
 408. Forrest, Mark. The MacDonough 
 process of colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
 1900, v. 47, Colour photography supple: 
 ment, D; 69.) MFA 
 
 London. 
 
 
 
 409. The MacDonough process at 
 Milwaukee convention. (Anthony’s pho- 
 tographic bulletin, New York, 1900, v. 31, 
 p. 292-293.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Professional & amateur photog- 
 rapher, Buffalo, Aug., 1900, v. 5, p. 267-269, MFA. 
 
 410. Graby, A. Development of colour 
 photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 don, June 15, 1900, v. 44, p. 378.) MFA 
 
 411-412). Nouvelle méthode de pho- 
 tographie des couleurs. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1900, 
 série 2, tome 16, p. 274-276.) MFA 
 
 Translated in Camera craft, San Francisco, Oct., 
 1900, v. 1, p. 358, MFA. 
 
 
 
 413. Hinchley, J. W. Colour photography: 
 the Joly process. (Society of Chemical 
 Industry. Journal, London, Jan. 31, 1900, 
 v. 19, p. 5-6.) VOA 
 With discussion. 
 Devotes_ some space to the theory of color as laid 
 down by Clerk Maxwell. Part of this paper is re- 
 
 printed in British journal of photography, Feb. 23, 
 1900, p. 119-121, MFA. 
 
 414. Howdill, Charles B. The Joly proc- 
 ess for reproducing stained-glass windows. 
 (Photographic news, London, May 4, 1900, 
 v. 44, p. 285-286.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 4, 1900, v. 47, supplement, Dp. 30, JIRA: 
 
 Author’s name misspelled in British journal of 
 photography. 
 
 415. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 combination of colours. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 12, 
 1900, v. 47, p. 23-25.) MFA 
 
 416. Procédé trichrome produisant 
 des images transparentes pour projections 
 et stéréoscopes. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, série 
 2, tome 15, p. 511-519, 587-594; 1900, série 
 2, tome 16, p. 31-35.) MFA 
 
 
 
 417. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics 
 
 of trichromatic photography. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Nov. 30, 1900, 
 new series, v. 25, p. 99-120.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 1900, v. 47, p. 742-746, 757-759, 773-776, 788-790; 
 LOOT. 48, p. 47, 127, 141- 143, 190-191, 223-224, 
 430, 511- Hes MFA; Photographic NEWS, London, 
 1900, v. 44, p. 764- 765, 781-782, 795-— 797, 809-811, 
 830- 832, 842— 844, MFA. 
 
 418. Ives improvements in photochromo- 
 scopic apparatus. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Sept. 7, 1900, v. 
 
 ) MFA 
 
 47, supplement, p. 71-72 
 Describes the patent. 
 
 419. Jones, Chapman. The effect of wave- 
 length on gradation. illus. (Photographic 
 journal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, 
 v. 24, p. 279-286.) MF 
 
28 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1900, continued. 
 
 420. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
 On the recent progress in direct photo- 
 chromy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1900, v. 47, p. 566, 597-598.) MFA 
 
 “To Zenker is due the principle, to Rayleigh is also 
 due independently the principle and also the idea 
 (lacking with Zenker) of a transition from principle 
 to method; to Lippmann is due the final method.” 
 
 421. Photography in natural colours. 
 (Nature, London, Aug. 2, 1900, v. 62, p. 
 316.) OA 
 
 A review of Zenker’s Lehrbuch der Photochromie, 
 1900. 
 
 
 
 422. Kromskop color photography. Phila- 
 
 delphia: Ives Kromskop Co. ,;1900.; 32 p. 
 Gace lO. MFF p.v.52, no.5 
 423. Kromskop color photography. illus. 
 
 (Professional and amateur photographer, 
 Buffalo, May, 1900, v. 5, p. 166-168.) MFA 
 
 424. L. Neue Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 9, 
 1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 631-632.) +MFA 
 
 Hesekiel process. 
 
 425. Loescher, Fritz. Photographie in na- 
 tiirlichen Farben unter Anwendung von 
 Beugungsgittern. (Photographische Chro- 
 nik, Halle a. S., 1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 295-296, 
 307-308.) +MFA 
 
 Wood’s process. 
 
 426. Lueppo-Cramer. Untersuchungen iiber 
 das Lippmann’sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 
 15, p. 23-37.) MFA 
 
 Reprinted from Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 00. 
 
 English translation in Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Oct. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. 82-85, MFA, 
 and British journal of photography, London, Sept. 14, 
 1900, v. 47, p. 583-584, MFA. 
 
 427. The McDonough-Joly process of pho- 
 tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 44, 
 p. 825.) MFA 
 
 428. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
 leurs: petit appareil d’amateur par M. L. 
 Ducos du Hauron. illus. (La Nature, 
 Paris, 1900, année 28, semestre 1, p. 188- 
 189.) OA 
 
 429. The Melano -chromoscope. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 12, 1900, v. 47, p. 25-26.) MFA 
 
 430. Monpillard, Félix. Note sur quelques 
 perfectionnements apportés par MM. Prieur 
 et Dubois dans l’industrie des impressions 
 trichromes. (Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 
 
 16, p. 320-327.) MFA 
 
 431. Namias, Rodolfo. Color pictures by 
 reaction, after exposure, and by substitu- 
 
 tion. (Anthony’s photographic bulletin, 
 New York, 1900, v. 31, p. 90-93.) MFA 
 432. ——— Printing in natural colors. (An- 
 
 thony’s photographic bulletin, New York, 
 1900, v. 31, p. 126.) MFA 
 
 433, Panchromatic emulsion for) eslour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Feb. 23, 1900, v. 47, p. 122.) 
 
 ; MFA 
 
 Use of glycinroth as a sensitizer for red. 
 
 434. Quentin, H. Notes pratiques sur 
 V’orthochromatisme. Emploi des plaques 
 orthochromatiques avec et sans écrans. 
 
 Paris: C. Mendel ,1900?). 45 pieiZ: 
 (Bibliothéque de la Photo-revue. no. 16.) 
 MFF p.v.44, no.11 
 
 435. Recent patents in colour photography. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1900, v. 47, p. 327-329, 539-540, 
 556-557, 572; supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 
 
 Specifications: Thorpe, Selle, Garchey, Butler, 
 Lascelle, Pollock. 
 436-437}. Shepherd, E. Sanger. The pho- 
 tography of colour. Cantor lectures. (So- 
 
 ciety of Arts. Journal, London, 1900, v. 48, 
 p. 758-766, 769-776, 781-788, 793-797.) VA 
 
 438. Thorp, Thomas. Grating films and 
 their application to colour photography. 
 illus. (Manchester Literary and Philo- 
 sophical Society. Memoirs, Manchester, 
 1900, v. 44, no. 12, p. 1-8.) * EC 
 
 439. Trichromatic photography by Hof- 
 mann’s process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 22, 1900, v. 47, 
 p. 389.) MFA 
 
 440. Trillat, A. Transformation de l’image 
 photographique d’un cliché en un état 
 lamellaire et phénoménes de colorations 
 qui en dérivent. (Académie des sciences. 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, 1900, tome 130, p. 
 170-172.) *EO 
 
 By chemical treatment colors may be produced on 
 a negative; these, however, bear no true relation to 
 the colors photographed. Abstract in Photographic 
 journal, London, March 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, 
 p. 205-206, MFA. 
 
 Also printed in Société frangaise de photographie. 
 Seana Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 16, p. 137-139, 
 
 441. Valenta, Eduard. Some more colour 
 sensitisers. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, March 2, 1900, v. 47, p. 133- 
 134.) MFA 
 
 442. Wallon, Etienne. Mélanochromo- 
 scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1900, série 2, tome 16, p. 5 
 62.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in Journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 28, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 180-182, MFA. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 29 
 
 1900, continued. 
 
 443. Ward, Henry Snowden. The Mc- 
 Donough-Joly process of colour photog- 
 raphy. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Dec. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. bares 
 
 FA 
 
 Has a list of related patents. 
 
 444. Watkins, Alfred. Hydroquinone and 
 colour impressions. (Photographic jour- 
 
 nal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, v. 
 24, p. 287-290.) MFA 
 
 445. Wood, Robert Williams. The diffrac- 
 tion process of color photography. illus. 
 (Science, New York, June 23, 1899, new 
 series, v. 9, p. 859-862.) OA 
 
 Stated to be a variation of the three-color process. 
 
 Also printed in Nature, London, June 29, 1899, 
 v. 60, p. 199-201, OA. 
 
 
 
 446. Diffraction process of colour 
 photography. illus. (Society of Arts. 
 Journal, London, Feb. 16, 1900, v. 48, p. 
 285-291.) VA 
 
 Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
 23, 1900, v. 44, p. 120-123, MFA. 
 
 447. Zenker, Wilhelm. Lehrbuch der Pho- 
 tochromie (Photographie der nattirlichen 
 Farben). Neu hrsg. von B. Schwalbe. 
 Braunschweig: F. Vieweg & Sohn, 1900. 
 si, tos p. 8°. MFV 
 
 1901 
 448. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 The photography of colour. illus. (So- 
 
 ciety of Chemical Industry. Journal, Lon- 
 don, Nov. 30, 1901, v. 20, p. SE 
 V 
 
 Underlying scientific principles which must be fol- 
 lowed to obtain success. 
 
 449. Barstow, Montagu. Colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1901, v. 48, p. 399, 430-431.) MFA 
 
 Two letters referring to the De Lubicz process, 
 but no details. 
 
 450. Brasseur, Charles L. A. The Sampolo- 
 Brasseur process of indirect colour-pho- 
 tography. illus. (Photographic journal, 
 London, May 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
 p. 265-269.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, April 19, 1901, v. 48, p. 252, MFA. 
 
 451. Buss, Otto. Lippo-Cramer’s Contra- 
 blau vom Standpunkte der Zenker’schen 
 Theorie. illus. (Jahrbuch fir Photogra- 
 phie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1901, 
 
 Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 37-44.) 
 MFA 
 
 452. Drecker, J. Referat tiber direkte Far- 
 
 benphotographie. (Physikalische Zeit- 
 
 schrift, Leipzig, 1901, Jahrg. 2, p. 4445.) 
 PAA 
 
 ' Explains theories of interference and absorption. 
 
 453. Dubois, Louis. La photographie des 
 couleurs et ses applications industrielles. 
 (Société industrielle du nord de la France. 
 Bulletin, Lille, 1901, année 29, p. 485-502.) 
 
 VA 
 
 454. Farmer, Howard. The optics of tri- 
 colour photography. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, June 31, 1901, new series, v. 
 25, p. 303-308.) 
 
 Abstract in British journal of Ep REID Lon- 
 don, June 7, 1901, v. 48, p. 365, MFA 
 
 455. —— The optics of trichromatic pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 47, p. 815; 
 1901, v. 48, p. 63, 68-69, 154.) MFA 
 
 456. Farmer, Howard, and Guy SyMMowns. 
 
 Practical tri-colour photography. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, June 21, 
 1901, new series, v. 25, p. 294-302.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 62-64, Journal, 
 p. 503-504, MFA. 
 
 457. Fawcett, E. Douglas. Ona suggested 
 advance in the practice of the line system 
 of three-colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 22, 
 1901, v. 48, p. 118-119.) MFA 
 
 Improvement on the Joly-McDonough processes, 
 claiming extreme simplicity of working and perfect 
 registration. 
 
 For discussion see 1901, v. 48, p. 140-141, 205. 
 
 458. Goddé, G. Photographie directe des 
 couleurs par la méthode interférentielle de 
 M. G. Lippmann — pratique du procédé. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1901, série 2, tome 17, p. 351- 
 306.) MFA 
 
 459. Grant, Thomas K. A practical proc- 
 ess of colour photography. (Photographic 
 news, London, Dec. 6, 1901, v. 45, p. 794— 
 795.) MFA 
 
 3-plate Lumiére process. 
 
 460. Hale, William H. Natural color pho- 
 tography — the Sanger Shepherd process. 
 (Photographic times, New York, 1901, v. 
 33, p. 104-107.) +MFA 
 
 461. Herschel, Sir William James. Colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 12, 1901, v. 48, p. 439- 
 441.) MFA 
 
 Presidential address to the sixteenth annual meet- 
 ing of the Photographic Convention of the United 
 Kingdom, Oxford, July 8, 1901. Describes Ives, 
 Shepherd, Joly- McDonough, and Lippmann processes, 
 with comments on the work of Zenker and Wiener. 
 
 Also printed in Smithsonian Institution. Annual 
 report for 1901, Washington, 1902, p. 313-316, *EA. 
 
 462. Hitchcock, Romyn. Tithonic rays 
 and early photographs in color. (Inter- 
 national annual of Anthony’s photographic 
 bulletin, New York, 1901, v. 13, p. 107- 
 109.) MFA 
 
30 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1901, continued. 
 
 463. Howdill, Charles B. The photogra- 
 phy of stained glass windows by the three- 
 colour process. (Photographic journal, 
 London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
 p. 342-344.) MFA 
 
 464. Husnik, Jaroslav. On colour sensi- 
 
 tizing in theory and practice. (Photo- 
 
 graphic journal, London, Oct. 31, 1901, new 
 
 series, v. 25, p. 364-365.) MFA 
 Abstract from Eder’s Jahrbuch, 1901. 
 
 465. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics of 
 tri- colour photography. (Photographic 
 journal, London, July 31, 1901, new series, 
 v. 25, p. 339- 340.) MFA 
 
 Revly to charges of Howard Farmer. 
 
 466. The optics of trichromatic pho- 
 tography. illus. (Photographic journal, 
 London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, p. 
 350-352.) MFA 
 
 467. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
 Notes on the development of interference 
 photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, 1900, v. 47, p. 612-613, 693- 
 694, 711-712; 1901, v. 48, p. 3-4, 21, 100-101, 
 116-117, 180, 230-231, 277-278.) MFA 
 
 Excellent outline with footnote references. Dis- 
 cusses the work of Neuhauss, Lippmann, Dittmar, 
 Delvalez, Kitz, Zenker, Becquerel, Rayleigh, Wiener, 
 Eder, Valenta, Thwing, Meslin, Schiitt. 
 
 468. Kenah, Arthur V. The McDonough- 
 Joly process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 1, 1901, v. 48, p. 
 140-141.) MFA 
 
 469. On a method of producing pho- 
 tographs in colour, suitable to the require- 
 ments of the amateur. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 
 1901, v. 48, p. 36-39.) MFA 
 
 McDonough and Joly processes exploited by The 
 Natural Color Photo. Co. of London. 
 
 470. Kuchinka, Eduard. Neuere Apparate 
 zur Herstellung von Farbenphotographien 
 nach dem Dreifarbenprocesse. illus. (Jahr- 
 buch ftir Photographie und Reproduc- 
 tionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
 Jahrg. 15, p. 257-273.) MFA 
 
 Ives and Ducos du Hauron processes. 
 
 
 
 
 
 471. Lueppo-Cramer. Fine grain and its 
 relation to colour sensitiveness. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
 1901, v. 48, p. 675.) MFA 
 
 472. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 Sur la photographie des couleurs. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1901, série 2, tome 17, p. 204— 
 211, 303-310, 441-449.) MFA 
 
 473. Miethe, Adolf. Das Heliochromo- 
 scope als Hilfsmittel im Dreifarbendrucke. 
 illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 
 1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 461-464.) MFA 
 
 474. Neuhauss, Richard. The Lippmann 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 24, 1901, v. 48, p. Spee Ee 
 
 475. Die Sensibilisirung der Gelatine- 
 platten fiir Lippmann’s Farbenverfahren. 
 (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik ftir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
 Jahre. 15, po Pis=1264 MFA 
 
 
 
 476. A Notable advance in color photog- 
 raphy. illus. (Smithsonian Institution. 
 Annual report for 1900, Washington, 2901, 
 p. 523-526.) * EA 
 
 Brasseur-Sampolo process. 
 
 477. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber Farben- 
 photographie mittels Beugungsgitter. illus. 
 (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
 Jahrg. 15, p. 177-187.) MFA 
 
 Wood’s process. 
 
 478. La Photographie des couleurs. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, 1901, année 11, p. 165-171, 
 189-198, 226-233.) MFA 
 
 Lippmann, Cros, and Ducos du Hauron processes 
 in detail. 
 
 479. Shearer, J. S. Screens for the Mc- 
 Donough-Joly process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, June 7, 1901, v. 
 48, p. 367.) MFA 
 
 For a comment by A. V. Kenah see issue for June 
 14, 1901, p. 383. 
 
 480. T., H. Herstellung farbiger Positive 
 nach Dreifarben - Negativen. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 9, 
 1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 29-30.) +,MFA 
 
 Lumiére process. 
 
 481. Tallent, Alexander A. K. The optics 
 of trichromatic photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 4, 
 1901, v. 48, p. 15-16.) MFA 
 
 482. Van Beek, H. Wesentliche Verbesse- 
 rung der Kamera, ftir gleichzeitige Auf- 
 nahme dreier farbiger Teilbilder bestimmt. 
 illus. (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
 S., Jan. 27, 1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 58-60.) -_MFA 
 
 . Szezepanik process. 
 
 483. Wall, Edward John. The optics of 
 trichromatic photography. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1901, v. 
 
 48, p. 231-233, 244-245.) MFA 
 1902 
 484. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 
 On colour photography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1902, v. 
 49, p. 111-112.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper on lenses read before the Camera 
 Club, with discussion. 
 
 a ae ee 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 3] 
 
 1902, continued. 
 
 485. Colour photography. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, July 25, 1902, 
 
 v. 49, p. 581-582.) MFA 
 Dr. Miethe’s process. 
 
 486. Colour photography. Dr. Neuhauss’s 
 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Jan. 31, 1902, v. 49, p. 81-82.) 
 MFA 
 
 487. Direct colour photographs. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1902, v. 
 49, p. 282, 1001.) MFA 
 
 A brief history of progress made. 
 
 488. Eder, Josef Maria. Spectralana- 
 lytische Studien tiber photographischen 
 Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Kaiserliche Aka- 
 demie der Wissenschaften. Denkschrif- 
 ten, Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche 
 Classe, Wien, 1902, Bd. 72, p. 633-663.) 
 
 * EF 
 
 Abstracted by E. J. Wall in British journal of 
 photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 228-229, 251- 
 252, 268-270, MFA, 
 
 489. System der Sensitometrie pho- 
 tographischer Platten. illus. (Kaiserliche 
 Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungs- 
 berichte: Mathematisch-naturwissenschaft- 
 liche Classe, Wien, 1899, Bd. 108, Abt. 11a, 
 p. 1407-1498; 1900, Bd. 109, Abt. 11a, p. 1103- 
 tizo, 1901, Ba. 110, Abt. ma, p. 1103-1124; 
 1902, Bd. 111, Abt. ma, p. 888-893.) *EF 
 
 490. Fritsch, Gustav. Trichromatic filters. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1001.) MFA 
 
 
 
 491. Goethe and colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, July 4, 
 1902, v. 49, p. 522-523.) “MFA 
 
 492. Gravier, Charles. Impressions poly- 
 chromes par les procédés photographiques. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. 
 letin, Paris, 1902, série 2, tome 18, p. 132- 
 136.) MFA 
 
 493. Hanneke, Paul. Direkte Farbenphotog- 
 raphie. (Photographische Kunst, Wochen- 
 Beilage, Miinchen, April 23, 1902, dahror, 
 Dp. 17-19.) +MFA 
 
 Vallot, Neuhauss, and Worel processes. 
 
 494. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photographs in 
 color. (International annual of Anthony’s 
 photographic bulletin, New York, 1902, v. 
 14, p. 183-185.) MFA 
 
 General description of McDonough process. 
 
 495. Johnson, George Lindsay. A century’s 
 progress in colour photography and the 
 knowledge of colour vision. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, March 31, 1902, 
 v. 42 new series, v. 26), p. 86-90.) MFA 
 
 Reprinted in Photographic times-bulletin, New 
 York, P1902, v. 34, p. 547-552, {MFA 
 
 Bul- - 
 
 496. The Lippmann process and colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, p. 61.) MFA 
 
 Brief abstract of article by R. Neuhauss in Liese- 
 gang’s photographischer Almanach, relating to possi- 
 bilities of color photography. 
 
 497. The Lumiére process of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Jan. 17, 1902, v. 49, p. 52-53.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Gives directions for preparing screens and printing 
 papers, with formulas for intensifier and reducer. 
 
 498. Miethe, Adolf. A new colour sensi- 
 
 tizer. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1002.) 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract only. 
 
 499. —— Plates and light-filters for ortho- 
 chromatic and tri-color photography. 
 (Camera craft, San Francisco, 1902, v. 4, 
 
 p. 199-207; v. 5, p. 9-11.) MFA 
 
 500. Mr. Sanger Shepherd’s new colour 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 19, 1902, v.49, p. 1004.) MFA 
 
 501. Monpillard, Félix. Sur la formation 
 des noirs, des gris et des demi-teintes dans 
 les synthéses trichromes industrielles; pro- 
 cédés en relief. illus. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1902, sé- 
 rie 2, tome 18, p. 169-184.) MFA 
 
 502. Neuhauss, Richard. Direkte Farben- 
 photographie durch Korperfarben. (Jahr- 
 buch ftir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik fiir 1902, Halle a. S., 1902, Jahrg. 
 16, p. 20-21.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
 S., 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 79-81, 93-96, MFA. 
 
 503. Nutting, P. G. The effect of light on 
 cyanin. (Nature, London, Aug. 28, 1902, 
 v. 66, p. 416.) OA 
 
 Abstract in Photographic journal, London, Aug. 30, 
 1902, new series, v. 26, p. 197-198, MFA. 
 
 504. The Physiological basis of three-col- 
 our work. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, v. 49, p. ih 
 
 An appreciation of the work of James Clerk Max- 
 well. 
 
 505. Plaskett, J. S. Photography in nat- 
 ural colors. illus. (Royal Canadian Insti- 
 tute. Transactions, Toronto, 1902, v. 7, p. 
 371-390.) * EC 
 
 506. Senior, Edgar. Mise en évidence de 
 l’existence des lames minces de Zenker 
 dans les chromophotographies du procédé 
 Lippmann. illus. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1902, série 
 2, tome 18, p. 441-446.) MFA 
 
 507. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
 raphy at the London Camera Club. (Pho- 
 tographic news, London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 
 46, p. 829-830.) MFA 
 
32 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1902, continued. 
 
 508. St. Photographie in Satarlichen Far- 
 ben auf Papier (Korperfarben). (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 6, 
 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 347-349.) +MFA 
 
 Worel’s process. 
 
 509. Thorpe’s Methode der Photographie 
 in naturlichen Farben. illus. (Jahrbuch 
 fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
 mix fur) 1902 Halle-a. 5.711902, Jahre. 16; 
 p. 229-237.) MFA 
 
 510. Three-colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 11, 
 1902, v. 49, p. 281-282.) MFA 
 
 Describes process of A. Miethe on Schelter and 
 Giesecke plates. 
 
 511. Verrill’s process for producing photo- 
 graphs in colors. (Wilson’s photographic 
 magazine, New York, April, 1902, v. 39, p. 
 124-127.) MFA 
 
 From an article in the Chicago Chronicle. Also in 
 British journal of photography, London, May 2, 1902, 
 v. 49, p. 349-350, MFA. 
 
 512. Vidal, Léon. Des pigments colorés 
 théoriques et pratiques pour les impres- 
 sions photo-trichromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1902, série 2, tome 18, p. 200-208.) MFA 
 
 513: A trichromatic carbon process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 19, 1902, v.49, p. 1002-1003.) MFA 
 
 514. Wallace, Robert James. Color pho- 
 tography. illus. (Photo-miniature, New 
 York, May, 1902, v. 4, p. 57-87.) MFA 
 
 Reviews older methods and gives details of super- 
 imposing of stained films. 
 
 515. Wallon, Etienne. Chromoscope a 
 vision libre de M. Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1902, série 2, tome 18, p.115- 
 118.) MFA 
 
 516. Worel, Karl. 
 colours (body colours) on paper. 
 graphic journal, London, July 31, 
 new series, v. 26, p. 183.) 
 
 
 
 (Photo- 
 1902, 
 MFA 
 517. Worel’s experiments in colour photog- 
 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 18, 1902, v. 49, p.562.) MFA 
 
 1903 
 518. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographic 
 journal, London, Aug., 1903, new series, 
 Vi 2/, 10s MFA 
 
 519. Another Miethe print. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1903, 
 vin, p. 102.) MFA 
 
 “This new plate is said to be about eight times as 
 sensitive for green and red as the older plate and 
 
 permits of equal exposures with Miethe’s filters for 
 the red and blue, and about one-half for the green.” 
 
 Photography in natural © 
 
 520. Arthur von Hibl. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v.27, p. 207.) MFA 
 
 521. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Notes on 
 the adaptation of light filters to plates for 
 three-colour work. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 11, 1903, v 
 50, p. 987-988.) MFA 
 
 522. Bosch, A. Photography in colors. 
 
 illus. (Scientific American, New York, 
 
 Sept. 12, 1903, v.89, p. 185-186.) VA 
 Deals principally with the Miethe process. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 16, 1903, v. 50, p. 828-830, MFA. 
 
 523. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Further ex- 
 periments with the Thames plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 
 1903, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 92-93.) MFA 
 
 524. Dalziel, Harvey. Three-colour print- 
 ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
 Feb. 20, 1903, v. 51, p. 292-299.) VA 
 
 Interesting comparison of chromo-lithography and 
 modern three-colour printing. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 13, 1903, v. 50, p. 205-208, MFA. 
 
 525. Dr. Miethe’s three-color process. 
 (Photo-era, Boston, April, 1903, v. 10, 
 p. 138-140.) MFA 
 
 526. Donath, Bruno. Der Projektions- 
 apparat der Urania fiir Dreifarbenphoto- 
 graphie. illus. (Zeitschrift fir wissen- 
 schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1903, 
 Bd. 1, p. 94-97.) PLC 
 
 527. Edouard Valenta. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v.27, p. 215.) MFA 
 
 528. The First photo-colour swindle. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 184-185.) MFA 
 
 Caustic comments on the Hill process which was 
 eerie referred to in the Daguerreian journal of 
 850-51. 
 
 529. Florence. Die Farbenphotographie 
 nach dem Dreifarbensystem. illus. (Pho- 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1901, 
 Jahrg. 8, p. 349-352, 399-401, 519-521, 643- 
 645; 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 105-108, 205-207, 320- 
 322, 437-439, 657-659; 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 
 118-120, 275-277.) MFA 
 
 530. Frederic Eugene Ives. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 
 
 531. Gabriel Lippmann. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 
 
 532. Gravier, Charles. 
 la chromophotographie. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1903, série 2, tome 19, p. 221-223.) MFA 
 
 Observations sur 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY ate: 
 
 1903, continued. 
 
 533. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Unter- 
 suchungen tiber die Sensibilisierung durch 
 Farbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1903, Halle 
 aes, panre. 17, p.. 128-131.) MFA 
 
 534. Josef Maria Eder. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v.27, p. 215.) MFA 
 
 535. Kaiserling, Carl. Three-colour pho- 
 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, April 10, 1903, v.50, p. ae. 
 FA 
 
 536. Kauffmann, Hugo. Uber den Ur- 
 sprung der Farbe bei organischen Stoffen. 
 (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
 graphie, Leipzig, 1903, Bd. 1, p. 60-71.) PLC 
 
 537. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v.27, p. 213.) MFA 
 
 538. Miethe, Adolf. Light-filters for three- 
 colour printing. (Photographic journal, 
 London, Aug., 1903, new series, v.27, p. 
 214-218. ) MFA 
 
 539. Natural colour portraiture. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 15, 
 1903, v.50, p. 383-384.) MFA 
 
 A plea to professional photographers to experiment. 
 
 540. Neuhauss, Richard. Weitere Unter- 
 suchungen wtber K6rperfarbenphotographie 
 (Ausbleichverfahren). (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
 tographie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
 13, taalle a. S., 1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 47-55.) 
 
 MFA 
 541. Norman, Albert. Photomicrography 
 in black and white and in colours. (Pho- 
 
 tographic journal, London, March 31, 1903, 
 new series, v.27, p. 68-73.) MFA 
 
 Experiments with Sanger Shepherd process. 
 
 542. Photography in colours. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 13, 1903, 
 M0.p. 121.) MFA 
 
 Miethe process. 
 
 543. Power, H. D’Arcy. Color photogra- 
 phy. A brief resumé of what has been 
 done and the future prospects of the proc- 
 ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, April, 
 1903, v.6, p. 240-244.) MFA 
 
 544. The Sanger Shepherd process of 
 
 making color photographs. (Camera craft, 
 
 San Francisco, Feb., 1903, v. 6, p. 169.) _ 
 MF 
 
 545. Pumphrey, Alfred. Colour photog- 
 raphy on paper within the reach of all. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1903, v.50, p. 176-177, 198-199, 218-219.) 
 
 Uses a celluloid gelatine film. Attacks the Sanger 
 Shepherd patent. 
 
 
 
 546. Sanger Shepherd & Co. Colour pho- 
 tography on paper. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 23, 1903, v. 50, 
 2/1) MFA 
 
 Abstract of booklet issued by the firm. 
 
 547. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Natural colour 
 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, Feb. 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 115.) 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract of lecture. 
 
 548. Sir W. de W. Abney. port. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
 series, v. 27, p. 205.) MFA 
 
 549. Stolze, F. Dreifarben - Projektions- 
 
 bilder und Dreifarbendruck. diagrs. (Pho- 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1903, 
 Jahrg. 10, p. 442-444, 455-457.) +MFA 
 
 Miethe’s process. 
 
 550. Talboys, Arthur Obey -Practicala color 
 
 photography. illus. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, 1903, v.6, p.109-115, 141-144, 
 192-197.) MFA 
 
 Three-color work for amateurs. 
 
 551. Triplice, pseud. Colour photography 
 on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, March 27, 1903, v.50, p. 257.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Claims that the Sanger Shepherd patent process is 
 not identical with that patented by Charles Cros in 
 1880. 
 
 552. Vidal, Léon. The Sanger-Shepherd 
 colour process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 9, 1903, v. 50, p. 22- 
 25%) ' MFA 
 
 553. Wall, Edward John. Colour photog- 
 raphy on paper, etc. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1903, v.50, p. 198, 
 236.) MFA 
 
 Comments on Mr. Alfred Pumphrey’s paper in 
 British journal of photography of Feb. 27, 1903. 
 554. Trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
 9, 1903, v. 50, p. 27-29.) MF A 
 
 A review of Hitibl’s Die Dreifarbenphotographie. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 March, 1903, v. 6, p. 208-210, MFA. 
 
 555. Worel, Karl. Direkte Photographie 
 in nattirlichen Farben (Korperfarben) auf 
 Papier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik ftir 1903, Halle a. S., 
 1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 68-70.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
 S., Oct. 21, 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 545-546, » IMA. 
 
 
 
 1904 
 
 556. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Some points connected with landscape 
 three-colour photography. illus. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 
 1904, v.51, p. 63-66.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
 March, 1904, new series, v. 28, p. 81-88, MFA. 
 
34 ; THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1904, continued. 
 
 557. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, 
 p. 449.) MFA 
 
 558. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The com- 
 posite print in three-colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 12, 1904, v. 51, p. 707.) MFA 
 
 559. ——- Some notes on three-colour work. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1904, v.51, p. 289-290, 342.) MFA 
 
 Author’s experiments with dyes. 
 
 560. Some peculiarities of dyes which 
 produce total spectrum sensitiveness. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 7, 1904, v. 51, p. 867-868.) MFA 
 
 561. Brown, George Edward. Dr. Miethe’s 
 methods of colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 10, 
 1904, v.51, p. 489-491.) MFA 
 
 562. Bull, A. J. Some spectroscopic ex- 
 periments with tricolour filters. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 13, 
 
 
 
 1904, v.51, p. 391-393.) MFA 
 SO3., bull, A. j:, and7A.. ¢. JOLtey.” | Lhe 
 functions of tricolour filters. illus. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, 1904, 
 v. 51, p. 47—50, 70-71.) MFA 
 
 564. Chapelain. Sur un nouvel appareil de 
 photochromie. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, 
 tome 20, p. 520-521.) MFA 
 
 3-negative process. 
 
 565. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Papier au char- 
 bon de M. Vaucamps pour le procédé tri- 
 chrome. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 
 20, p. 86-88.) MFA 
 
 566. Erste internationale Ausstellung fiir 
 
 Farbenphotographie in Paris. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
 Jahrg. 41, p. 251-255.) MFA 
 
 Account of exhibits. 
 
 567. Farmer, Howard, and Guy SyMMowns. 
 Irradiation in photography and its appli- 
 cation to direct screen colour work. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Aug., 
 1904, new series, v.28, p. 239-248.) MFA 
 
 568. Fritsch, Gustav. Die Retinaelemente 
 und die Dreifarbentheorie. 19 p., 1 pl. 
 (Koenigliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
 ten, Berlin. Abhandlungen, 1904: Anhang, 
 Physikalische Abhandlung 2.) * EE 
 
 569. Grun, Ernst. Colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 29, 1904, v.51, p. 99.) MFA 
 
 Experiment with the Cooper-Hewitt mercury lamp 
 and a red screen. “The undoubted fact remained 
 that red light was produced direct from blue, or per- 
 haps yellow, owing to change of wave length.” 
 
 570. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. A col- 
 our-sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 
 1904, v. 51, p. 846.) MFA 
 
 571. —— Die Farbenphotographie mit Hilfe 
 des Ausbleichverfahrens. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
 103-108.) MFA 
 
 572. Jan Szczepanik. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 21-22, 
 58-59.) MFA 
 
 An attack by Dr. Neuhauss and a defense by 
 William Gamble. 
 
 573. Jones, Chapman. Developments of 
 three-colour photographic processes. 
 (Nature, London, 1904, v. 70, p. 553-555, 
 578-580.) OA 
 
 General article. 
 
 574. Klein, Henry Oscar. Eine originelle 
 Dreifarbenmethode. (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
 tographie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 
 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 175- 
 1/704 MFA 
 
 575. Koenig, Ernst. Uber die Herstellung 
 
 von Pinachrom - Badeplatten. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
 Jahrg. 41, p. 116-117.) MFA 
 
 576. Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 
 der Leukobasen organischer Farbstoffe 
 und ihre Anwendung zur Herstellung pho- 
 tographischer Bilder. (Photographische 
 Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 6, 1904, Jahrg. 
 11, p. 591-594.) +MFA 
 
 577, Uber ein neues Kopierverfahren | 
 fiir die Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
 Jahrg. 41, p. 521-525.) MFA 
 
 Experiments with paper at laboratory of Meister 
 Lucius & Briining. 
 
 578. —— Ueber praktische Dreifarben- 
 
 Photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 
 
 Miinchen, 1903-04, Jahrg. 2, p. 1-14.) 
 +MFA 
 
 579. Weitere Untersuchungen in der 
 Reihe der Cyaninfarbstoffe. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
 Jahrg. 41, p. 108-116.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 580. Koenig’s colour filters. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, July 29, 1904, 
 v.51, p. 665.) MFA 
 
 581. Kuchinka, Eduard. Fortschritte und 
 neue Verfahren auf dem Gebiete der Far- 
 benphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 201- 
 210.) MFA 
 
 Prieur & Dubois,. Fraschbourg, Perscheid, Sanger- 
 Shepherd, Lascelles-Davidson cameras; also Gtirtner 
 process. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY a5 
 
 1904, continued. 
 582. Lenses for trichromatic work. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 
 
 March 18, 1904, v.51, p. 229.) MFA 
 
 583. Levy, Max. Screens for color work. 
 (American annual of photography 1905, 
 New York, 1904, p. 235-237.) MFA 
 
 584. The Lippmann process simplified. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 18, 1904, v. 51, p. 990.) MFA 
 
 M. Rothé overcomes the necessity of the mercury 
 dark slide. 
 
 585. Loebel, eee aid Un nouveau pro- 
 cédé de tirage trichrome par l’emploi des 
 leucobases. (Photo- -gazette, Paris, Nov. 
 25, 1904, année 15, p. 13-16.) MFA 
 
 586. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 A new method for the production of pho- 
 tographs in colours. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, July, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
 p. 226-228.) MFA 
 Announcement of the Autochrome process. 
 Also printed in British journal of pag gdaed 
 
 London, July 8, 1904, v. 51, p. 605, MFA, an 
 aoe erayt, an Francisco, Oct., 1904, p. 212, 
 FA, 
 
 587. Sur une nouvelle méthode d’ob- 
 tention de photographies en couleurs. 
 (Académie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, 1904, tome 138, p. 1337-1338.) *EO 
 
 Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
 eerie Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 333-334, 
 
 
 
 588. Vorlaufige Mitteilung tuber ein 
 neues Verfahren der Farbenphotographie. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 
 
 
 
 589. Meister Lucius & Briining. Portrait- . 
 
 studie. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, opp. p. 210.) MFA 
 
 Sample of work with Pinachrome plates back of 
 filters als by above firm. 
 
 590. Miethe, Adolf. The composition of 
 colour-filters for the production of por- 
 traits in natural colours. (British journal 
 of photography, London, May 27, 1904, v. 
 51, p. 432-435.) MFA 
 591. Dreifarbenphotographie nach der 
 Natur; nach den am photochemischen La- 
 boratorium der technischen Hochschule zu 
 Berlin angewandten Methoden. Halle a. 
 S.: W. Knapp, 1904. 80p.,1 pl. 8°. (En- 
 cyklopadie der Photographie. Heft ae 
 
 
 
 592. —— Dreifarbenphotographien auf Pa- 
 pier. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 
 
 Formula for his process. 
 
 593. Mitteilung tiber ein neues Verfah- 
 ren der Farbenphotographie von August 
 
 
 
 und Louis Lumiere. (Photographische 
 Chronik, Halle a. S.; Oct. 30, 1904, Jahrg. 
 Le esas 576- 578.) +MFA 
 
 Autochrome process. 
 
 
 
 594. Zu dem Urtel des Herrn Pro- 
 fessor Bruno Meyer iiber Naturfarben- 
 Photographien. (Photographische Chro- 
 nik, Halle a. S., Dec. 21, 1904, Jahrg. 11, 
 p. 681-683.) +MFA 
 
 595. Monpillard, Félix. Les couleurs chi- 
 miquement pures de la maison Lucius et 
 Bruning. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 
 20, p. 319-323.) MFA 
 
 596. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichverfah- 
 ren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Re- 
 productionstechnik ftir 1904, Halle a. S., 
 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 62-65.) MFA 
 
 597. New colour sensitisers. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London,:’April 15, 1904, 
 v.51, p. 306-307.) MFA 
 
 Directions for using Pinachrom sensitiser. 
 
 598; Newton, A. J., and A.J. Buri... The 
 practical testing of tri-colour filters. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1904, 
 new series, v. 28, p. 263-273.) MFA 
 
 Illustrations in color. 
 
 599. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber die Zen- 
 kerschen Streifen in nach Lippmanns Ver- 
 fahren hergestellten Photographieen sich 
 uberdeckender Spektra und ihre Bedeu- 
 tung fiir die Leistungsfahigkeit dieses Ver- 
 fahrens bei gemischten Farben. illus. 
 (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik ftir 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, 
 Jahrg. 18, p. 229-233.) MFA 
 
 600. Power, H. D’Arcy. Worel’s direct 
 color photography. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, Feb., 1904, v.8, p.124.) MFA 
 
 601. Precht, J. Dreifarbenprojektionsap- 
 parat. (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche 
 Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd. 2, p. 407- 
 410.) PLC 
 
 602. —— Einrichtung fir Dreifarbenpro- 
 jektion. illus. (Zeitschrift flr wissen- 
 schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, 
 Bd. 2, p. 60-63.) PLC 
 
 603. Precht, J., and Ericnh STENcER. Aus 
 der Praxis der Dreifarbenphotographie. 
 (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
 graphie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd.2, p. 410-413.) 
 
 PLC 
 604. R., H. Photographie directe des 
 couleurs sans appareil spécial. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1904, année 15, 
 p. 3-5.) MFA 
 
 E. Rothé’s adaptation of Lippmann process. 
 
 605. Rheinberg, Julius. A suggested plan 
 for photography in colours, without the 
 use of colour screens. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 1904, 
 v.51, p. 7-8.) MFA 
 
 Substitutes the artificial color screen of the Joly 
 process with real spectra. 
 
36 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1904, continued. 
 
 606. Rothé, E. Photographies en couleurs 
 obtenues par la méthode interférentielle 
 sans miroir de mercure. (Académie des 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, mp 
 tome 139, p. 565-567.) EO 
 
 Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
 cae Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 548-550, 
 
 607. Saint Florent, E. de. Note sur un 
 procédé de photographie en couleurs au 
 moyen du sous-chlorure d’argent. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1904, série 2, tome 20, p. 351-352.) 
 MFA 
 
 608. Satori, Karl. Einige Untersuchungen 
 von panchromatischen Platten fir Drei- 
 
 farbendruck. (Photographische Korres- 
 pondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 224-226.) 
 MFA 
 
 609. Selle, Gustav. Diaphragms for three- 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 29, 1904, v. 51, 
 p. 347.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to his patent. 
 
 610. Senior, Edgar. Colour sensitometers. 
 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, June 10, 1904, v.51, p. 504-506.) 
 MFA 
 
 Has portrait of the author. 
 
 611. South,C. W. ,;The solgram.; (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
 16, 1904, v.51, p. 1063.) MFA 
 
 612. Szczepanik, Jan. ,Process of colour 
 photography.,; (British journal of photog- 
 aie London, Feb. 19, 1904, v.51, p. 142.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 613. Three-colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March 
 18, 1904, v.51, p. 221-222.) MFA 
 
 Pinachrom sensitizer for red rays. Also German- 
 English patent for securing accurate registration of 
 superimposed images. 
 
 614. Traube, Artur. Lichtechte Farben- 
 photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., Dec. 14, 1904, Jahrg. 11, p. 668- 
 669.) +MFA 
 
 Reichel process. 
 
 615. Valenta, Eduard. Uber das Sensibili- 
 sieren von Kollodionemulsion fir die 
 Zwecke des Dreifarbendruckes. Athyl- 
 violett als Sensibilisator ftir Bromsilber- 
 gelatine - Trockenplatten. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
 125-128.) MFA 
 
 616. Wall, Edward John. Dr. Koenig’s 
 colour process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 14, 1904, v.51, p. 
 886-887.) MFA 
 
 
 
 617. Elementary three-colour work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1904, v.51, p. 666-667, 684-685.) MFA 
 
 618. Light filters for trichromatic 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 11, 1904, v.51, p. 
 208.) MFA 
 A translated abstract of article by E. Konig in 
 Photographische Mitteilungen. 
 619. Some notes on three-colour work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1904,v.51,"p2 3Z21,8362" MFA 
 
 Disputes T. Thorne Baker’s statements on sensi- 
 tisers. 
 
 620. Wall, E. J. port. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 10, 1904, v. 51, 
 p. 494.) MF A 
 
 621. Wallon, Etienne. Photographie des 
 couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 
 1904, année 14, p. 205-211.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome process. 
 
 
 
 
 
 622. Waterhouse, James. Experiences with 
 red sensitisers. illus. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, June, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
 p. 165-171.) MFA 
 
 623. Weidert, Fr. The latest in color 
 photography. (Photo-era, Boston, Sept., 
 1904, v.13, p. 165-166.) MFA 
 
 Slavik process. 
 
 624. Wood, Robert Williams. Recent im- 
 provements in the diffraction process of 
 colour-photography. illus. (Nature, Lon- 
 don, Oct. 20, 1904, v. 70, p. 614-616.) OA 
 
 1905 
 
 625. Aarland, G. Three-colour photogra- 
 phy. (Photographic journal, London, 
 May, 1905, new series, v.29, p. Vel 
 
 Abstract in British journal of ey a: 
 don, April 14, 1905, v. 52, p. 295, MFA. 
 
 626. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Three-colour work. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, 
 a 9/on MFA 
 Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
 graphic Society. 
 627. Why not take three-colour pho- 
 tographs? (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Aug., 1905, new series, v.29, p. 280- 
 281.) MFA 
 
 Recommends Sanger Shepherd camera to amateurs. 
 
 628. Acland, Sarah A. A visit to Gibraltar. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 9, 1905, v.52, p. 456.) MFA 
 
 “The bulk of the illustrations were three- colour 
 slides by the Senne shea pierce, and it is no 
 
 exaggeration to refer to Miss Acland’s work as the 
 finest which has ever been publicly shown.” 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 37 
 
 1905, continued. 
 
 629. The Angle of three-colour screens. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 3, 1905, v.52, p. 90-91.) MFA 
 
 630. Another process of color photogra- 
 phy. (Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
 1905, v.10, p. 167-168.) MFA 
 
 Process of Rudolph Isenmann. 
 
 631. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Spectro- 
 scopic photography in colour. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Jan.-Feb., 
 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 24-28.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of eorcarhp Lon- 
 Bones lane 16, 1905, v. 52, p. 31, MFA 
 
 632. Barker, Johnson. Colour photogra- 
 phy on paper. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Dec. 1, 1905, v. 52, p. 
 946-947.) MFA 
 
 Abstract. Superimposes yellow and red images on 
 a ferro-prussiate base. Detailed description. 
 
 633. Beckers, Fritz. Ueber Dreifarben- 
 
 photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 
 
 Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 108-112.) 
 Pinachrome process. +MFA 
 
 634. Bull, A. J. The principles of trichro- 
 matic photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1905, v.52, p.447- 
 449, 467.) MFA 
 
 Paper read before the Optical cdnvention. Covers 
 color-mixture curves, theories, negative records in- 
 tended to follow curves, relation of ordinary colors 
 and monochromatic colors as regards their reproduc- 
 tion, fundamental requirements of the reproduction 
 colors, and the mutual adjustment of filter records 
 and reproduction colors. 
 
 635. Butler, Edwin T. Tricolour photog- 
 raphy by means of a single exposure 
 camera and a simple method of printing. 
 illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
 June, 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 199-204.) 
 
 Brief abstract in British journal of hy ea eke, 
 London, May 12, 1905, v.52, p. 375, MFA 
 With Giseussion. 
 
 Sooecaunels. HH, and L. P. Crerc. Sur 
 l’accroissement de sensibilité de quelques 
 mixtions bichromatées sous l’influence de 
 diverses matiéres colorantes. (Société 
 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 377-379.) MFA 
 
 637. Colorprinte. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
 cisco, 1905, v. 10, p. 295-296, 379.) MFA 
 
 Invented by Dr. von Slavik, perfected by Dr. 
 Adolf Hesekiel. 
 
 638. Colour photography mysteries. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 Pento05, v.52, p. 902.) MFA 
 
 Criticism of Solgram process. 
 
 639. Davidson, Lascelles. The latest one- 
 plate colour process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, 
 p. 1030.) MFA 
 
 Bleaches a carbon print carrying proper mono- 
 chrome color densities. 
 
 640. Dillaye, Frédéric. Le procédé tri- 
 chrome et sa mise a la portée de tous. 
 
 (In his: Les nouveautés photographiques 
 1904-1905. Paris, 1905. 8°. p.282-298.) 
 MFA 
 
 Cros and Ducos du Hauron processes. 
 
 641. Direct three-colour negatives on dry 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 12, 1905, v.52, p. 368.) MFA 
 
 Loewenstamm and Hoffert experiments. 
 
 642. Dr. Miethe’s colour photography in 
 London. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 268- "369, 
 302311.) MFA 
 
 Brief description and photograph of the projection 
 apparatus. The titles of the above articles vary. 
 
 643. Dr. Smith’s three-colour plates. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 
 Sel oU Evade a t05.) "MFA 
 
 644. Eder, Josef Maria. Geschichte der 
 Photographie. Dritte ganzlich umgearbei- 
 tete und vermehrte Auflage. Halle a. S.: 
 Wilhelm Knapp, 1905. 2 pl. (i)vi-xvi, 
 484 p. illus. 8°. (Ausftihrliches Hand- 
 buch der Photographie. Bd. 1, Teil 1.) 
 MFC 
 
 See chapters 14, 46-47. Numerous references to 
 early experiments concerning the effects of light upon 
 chemicals. 
 
 645. Orthochromatische Wirkung einer 
 gefarbten Unterlage auf Bromsilbergela- 
 tine. Sensibilisierende Wirkung von Farb- 
 stoffen der Kongorot-Reihe. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1905, 
 Jahrg. 42, p. 311-315.) MFA 
 
 646. Farmer, Howard. A criticism of 
 three-colour photography. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 
 849-850, 868-870.) MFA 
 
 Abstract. “An indictment of three-colour photo- 
 graphic processes, so far as they are intended for 
 commercial use by professional photographers.’’ 
 
 647. Freshwater, T. E. Recent improve- 
 
 ments in the diffraction process of colour 
 
 photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 
 oe: Jan.-Feb., 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 3- 
 ) M 
 
 
 
 FA 
 
 648. Gamble, William. Cameras and other 
 apparatus for three-colour work. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, April, 1905, new 
 series, v. 29, p. 150-157.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, March 31, 1905, v.52, p. 256, MFA. 
 
 649. Gilles, E. Magasin pour procédé tri- 
 chrome, pouvant se placer d’une fagon mo- 
 bile sur des chambres ordinaires. (Soci- 
 été francaise de photographie. Bulletin. 
 Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 487-488.) 
 MFA 
 
 650. Gruen, Edward F. Three-colour prints. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, p. 1030-1031.) MFA 
 
 “The gelatine surface of the ordinary lantern slide, 
 bromide opal, or bromide paper is capable of receiving 
 three printings in successive colors.”’ 
 
38 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1905, continued. 
 
 651. Hansen, Fritz. Ein Freilicht-Atelier 
 fiir Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
 Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 13, 1905, Jahrg. 12, 
 p. 418-419.) +MFA 
 
 652. Husnik, Jaroslav. Ueber Dreifarben- 
 Naturaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch ftir Photo- 
 graphie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
 1905, Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 222- 
 225.) MFA 
 
 Von Hiibl’s process. 
 
 653. Jones, Chapman. The influence of 
 gradation on colour reproduction. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
 6, 1905 977,52, po: 13.) MFA 
 
 From Penrose’s process year-book, 1904-05. 
 
 654. Kieser, Karl. Uber die sensibillier- 
 renden Eigenschaften einiger Farbstoffe 
 einer neuen Farbstoffklasse. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
 zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 6-15.) PLC 
 
 655. Klein, Henry Oscar. Colour photog- 
 raphy with pigment films. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 29, 1905, 
 v. 52, p. 768-769.) MFA 
 
 Detailed instructions. 
 
 656. Koenig, Ernst. Colour photography 
 
 on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, March 10, 1905, v. 52, p. a 
 M 
 
 Pinatype process. 
 
 657. Pinachromy, concerning the light 
 sensitiveness of the leukobases of organic 
 dyestuffs and their application to the pro- 
 duction of photographic pictures. (Photo- 
 era, Boston, Feb., 1905, v. 14, p. 46-52.) 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 658. —— The practice of three -colour 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, p. aa Ea 
 
 Describes making of filters and the use of pina- 
 cyanol. 
 
 ' 659. Kuemmell, G. The bleaching out 
 process of colour photography. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
 1905,-v. 02, o. 4021.) MFA 
 
 660. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Zum 
 Problem der Mischfarbenphotographie 
 mittels stehender Lichtwellen. illus. 
 (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
 graphie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. LOS 
 
 Abstract in ss ot aka journal, London, July, 
 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 270-271, MFA, and Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. Sh Aug. 9, 1905, Jahrg. 
 12, p. 413-415, +MFA, 
 
 661. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
 des couleurs sur plaques sensibilisées aux 
 sels de chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 Nov. 25, 1905, année 16, p. 8-9.) MFA 
 
 Use of chromium salts in Lippmann process. 
 
 662. Photographies en couleurs du 
 spectre negatives par transmission. (Aca- 
 démie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
 Paris, June 5, 1905, tome 140, p. 1508-1509.) 
 
 * EO 
 
 London, July, 
 
 
 
 Abstract in Photographic journal, 
 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 271, MFA. 
 
 663. Photographs in colours from 
 negatives by the Lippmann process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 30, 1905, v. 52, p. 505.) MFA 
 
 Translation of paper read before the Paris Acad- 
 emy of Sciences. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
 1905, p. 133, MFA 
 
 
 
 664. Loebel, Leopold. 
 matiques. Ecrans colorés. Négatifs tri- 
 chromes. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 1905, année 15, p. 55-58, 76-79, 96-98.) 
 MFA 
 
 Plaques panchro- 
 
 Directions for amateurs. 
 
 665. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louris LuMIéRE. 
 Mitteilung tiber ein neues Verfahren der 
 Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
 Kunst, Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. pk 
 339.) +MFA 
 
 Autochrome process. 
 
 666. Lumiére, A., & ses Fils. Sensitized 
 plates for colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
 1905, v.52, p. 10.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of their English patent no. 22, 988, 1904, 
 for plates prepared with starch grains. 
 
 667. Maldiney. La photographie des cou- 
 leurs. Etat présent de la question. illus. 
 (Société d’émulation du Doubs. Mémoires, 
 Besancon, 1905, série 7, v. 8, p. 177-197.) 
 EN 
 
 668. Mareschal, G. Ou en est la photo- 
 
 graphie des couleurs? (Photo - gazette, 
 
 Paris, Dec. 25, 1905, année 16, p. 21-23.) 
 MFA 
 
 669. Monpillard, Félix. The accurate pro- 
 duction of selective colour filters. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 28, 
 1905, v.52, pvaoeen MFA 
 
 670. Etudes et recherches sur les 
 écrans colorés. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1905, série 2, 
 tome 21, p. 364-372.) - MFA 
 
 671. ——- La Pinatype, de la Farbwerke 
 vorm Meister Lucius und Briining. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 302-308.) 
 MFA 
 
 672. Namias, Rodolfo. Quelques observa- 
 tions sur la trichromie industrielle. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1905, série 2, tome 21, p. 44-48.) - 
 
 
 
 an 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 39 
 
 1905, continued. 
 
 673. Neue Verbesserungen im Diffraktions- 
 prozess auf dem Gebiete der Farbenpho- 
 
 tographie. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1905, Halle 
 a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 213-217.) MFA 
 
 Wood and Joly processes. 
 
 674. Ein Neuer Dreifarben-Projektionsap- 
 parat. (Photographische Chronik, Halle 
 peeeroian, 1,°1905, Jahrg. 12, py9-11.) 
 
 : +MFA 
 
 Miethe-Goerz apparatus. 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 21-22, MFA. 
 
 675. Neuhauss, Pichard. Ausbleichverfah- 
 ren. (Jahrbuch tur Photographie und Re- 
 productionstechnik fiir 1905, Halle a. S., 
 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 51-54.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of pe lass Lon- 
 don, May 2, 1905, v. 52, p. 367, MFA 
 
 676. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
 Zenkerschen Blattchen und die dZen- 
 kerschen Streifen in Farbenphotographien 
 nach Lippmann. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 493- 
 
 500, 564-568.) MFA 
 677. Payne, Arthur. Plates, filters, and 
 inks: their relative importance in three- 
 
 colour work. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1905, v. 52, p. 13-14.) 
 MFA 
 
 678. The Pinatype process of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Sept. 22, 1905, v. 52, ne 749- 
 753.) MFA 
 
 Directions from the handbook issued by Meister 
 Lucius and Brtining. For a discussion see British 
 journal of photography, Oct. 13, 1905, v. 52, p. 816. 
 
 679. Powrie, John H. Practical helio- 
 chromy for professional and amateur. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 29, 1905, v.52, p. 1029-1030.) MFA 
 
 Use of Powrie-Warner plates in adaptation of Joly- 
 McDonough process. 
 
 680. Precht, J.. and Ertcu Stencer. Uber 
 die chemische Farbenhelligkeit des Tages- 
 lichts. (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche 
 Photographie, Photophysik, und Photo- 
 chemie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd.3, p. Ha a 
 
 Translation in British journal of aed Sie 
 London, March 24, 1905, v.52, p. 226-227, MFA 
 
 681. Reising, H. Ein neuer Dreifarben- 
 projektionsapparat. illus. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
 zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 40-43.) PLC 
 
 Miethe’s apparatus. 
 
 682. Rothé, E. Nouvelles recherches sur 
 la photographie des couleurs. (Université 
 de Grenoble. Annales, Paris, 1905, v.17, 
 p. 511-523.) * EN 
 
 683. Schinzel, Karl. One-plate colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Aug. 4, 1905, v.52, p. 608- 
 609.) MFA 
 
 684. Schmidt, Hans. Three-colour nega- 
 tives. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 29; 1905, v.52, p. 1025-1026.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 685. Uber Farbenphotographie mit 
 besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Systems 
 N. P. G. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 518-522, 568- 
 572.) MFA 
 
 686. Spoerl, Hans. Reichels Dreifarben- 
 verfahren. (Photographische Kunst, Miin- 
 chen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 393-396.) (MFA 
 
 687. Stenger, Erich. Some notes on three- 
 colour work. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 8, 1905, v. 52, p./7/10— 
 
 
 
 711) MFA 
 688. —— Trichromatic work on ordinary 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, June 30, 1905, v.52, p.514.) MFA 
 689. Ueber das Abstimmen der Licht- 
 
 
 
 . filter fir Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 6, 
 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 625-629.) +MFA 
 
 690. Stolze, F. Ueber die Moglichkeit der 
 Dreifarbenphotographie durch eine einzige 
 
 Aufnahme. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 528-531, 541- 
 543.) +MFA 
 
 691. Three-colour direct on dry plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 19, 1905, v.52, p. 391.) MFA 
 
 Homocol sensitizer for bathing plates during warm 
 weather. 
 
 692. Three-colour portraiture from the 
 commercial standpoint. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Sept. 15, 1905, 
 v. 52, p. 723-724.) MFA 
 
 693. Townsend, C. F. Color photography 
 and the dark-room. (Camera & dark- 
 room, New York, Sept., 1905, v.8, p.279- 
 2015) MFA 
 
 694. Traube, Artur. Farbenphotographie. 
 
 (Photographische Chronik, Halle Gaps, 
 
 July 9, 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 358.) +MFA 
 J. H. Smith & Co. process. 
 
 695. Worel, Karl. Forschungen auf dem 
 Gebiete der Farbenphotographie. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik fiir 1905, Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 
 19, p. 7-10.) MFA 
 
 696. Zander, C. G. The complementary 
 colour reproduction process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
 1905, v. 52, p. 1028-1029.) MFA 
 
 Zander process. 
 
40 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1906 
 
 697. “Allochrome” and ‘“Panchromatic 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 14, 1906, v. 53, p. 737.) MFA 
 
 Plates made by Wratten & Wainwright, Croydon, 
 England. 
 
 9? 
 
 698. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Das Rot- 
 filter im Dreifarbenprozess. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, noe 
 Jahrg. 43, p. 167-168.) MF 
 
 Also printed in British journal of a 
 London, April 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 310-311, MFA 
 
 699. Spectro-photography and _ the 
 making of light filters, including control- 
 ling methods by the Abney colour disc. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 396.) MFA 
 
 700. Belin, Edouard. Méthode spectro- 
 sensitométrique. illus. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1906, 
 série 2, tome 22, p. *25-*32.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of eee aa 
 London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. 53, p. 630-632, MFA 
 
 701. Boardman, F. R. Artificial light in 
 colour portraiture. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 397-398.) MFA 
 
 Boardman arc lamps adopted by the Rotary Photo- 
 graphic Company. 
 
 
 
 702. Braham, A. C. Autotype trichrome 
 
 tissues. (Photographic journal, London, 
 
 May, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 178-181.) 
 MFA 
 
 7030.-—— . Lrichrome. Carbon. printing. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 566.) MFA 
 
 Detailed instructions. 
 
 704. Butler, Edwin T. Colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1906, v. 53, p. 158, 197.) MFA 
 
 States that after long experiment he has succeeded 
 
 in securing in his camera three-colour negatives of _ 
 
 equal size. 
 
 705. —— A colour-photography society. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 219.) MFA 
 
 Suggests organization of a society. 
 
 706. —— Tri-colour work with a single 
 exposure camera. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Feb. 23, 1906, v. 53, p. 
 145-146.) MFA 
 
 Describes his own process. 
 
 707. Chéron, André. La photographie des 
 couleurs par dispersion spectrale prisma- 
 
 tique. illus. (Société francaise de photog- 
 raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 
 23, Dp. 36-41.) MFA 
 
 , Also printed in La Nature, Paris, 1906, année 34, 
 
 semestre 2, p. 401-403, OA, and in British journal 
 of > Na ala London, Nov. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 904— 
 907, MFA 
 
 ‘née 16, p. 87-92.) 
 
 708. Cinematography in colours. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 27, 
 1906, v.53, p. 584.) MFA 
 
 709. Colour photography. (Photographic 
 news, London, 1906, v. 50, p. 976, 1020, 
 1040.) MFA 
 
 Lippmann process. Filters. 
 
 710. Colour photography without filters at 
 one exposure. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1906, v.53, p. 87- 
 88.) MFA 
 
 Drac process. 
 
 711. Comley, Henry J. Proposed society 
 of colour photographers. (British journal 
 of photography, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 558— 
 559, 599.) MFA 
 
 712. Coustet, Ernest. L’invention du pro- 
 cédé trichrome par éléments juxtaposés. 
 (Photo- -gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, an- 
 MFA 
 
 713. —— Photographie des couleurs par 
 décoloration. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 
 25, 1906, année 16, p. 166-172.) ‘MFA 
 
 Bleachout process. 
 
 714. Dark room illumination for working 
 red sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 27, 
 1906, v. 53, p. 592-593.) MFA 
 
 715. Day, T. Cuthbert. Colour and colour 
 photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
 don, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 50, p. 128.) MFA 
 
 Resumé of theory and practice. 
 
 716. Donath, Bruno. 
 Farbenphotographie. 
 Vieweg und Sohn, 1906. 
 its s, 
 
 Die Grundlagen der 
 Braunschweig: F. 
 viii, 166 p., 2 pl. 
 (Die Wissenschaft. No. 14.) 
 MFV 
 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, May 25, 1906, v. 53, p. 412, MFA. 
 
 717. Eder, Josef Maria. Trichromie und 
 Tetrachromie. (Photographische Korres- 
 pondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 477-478.) 
 
 MFA | 
 
 718. Farmer, Howard. The exhibition of 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 198.) MFA 
 
 A plea to keep the London exhibition intact. 
 
 719. Geisler, Louis. La photographie en 
 couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 1906, an- 
 née 16, p. 230-231; année 17, 1906, p. aa 
 26-28, 69- 720) MF 
 
 Nachet-Geisler process. 
 
 720. Three-colour screens and inks. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 24, 1906, v. 53, p. 667-669.) MFA 
 
 
 
 ' ia 
 Raw +; 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY A] 
 
 1906, continued. 
 
 721. Gravier, Charles. Méthode d’impres- 
 sion en couleurs la quadrichromie Zander. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 273- 
 274.) MFA 
 
 722. Grothuss, Theodor, Freiherr von. Ab- 
 handlungen tiber Elektrizitat und Licht. 
 Hrsg. von R. Luther und A. v. Oettingen. 
 Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann, 1906. 198 
 p., 1 1., 1 port. 12°. (Ostwald’s Klassiker 
 der exakten Wissenschaften. No. aes 
 
 During the early part of the nineteenth century 
 Grothuss made researches upon the nature of colored 
 light. See p. 100 et seq in above volume. 
 
 723. Gruen, Edward F. Colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 2, 1906, v. 53, p. 97-98.) MFA 
 
 Criticizes E. J. Wall’s account of the London exhi- 
 bition. 
 
 724. Haberkorn, Fritz. Eine Kamera fir 
 Dreifarbenaufnahmen nach der Natur. 
 
 illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 430-432.) MFA 
 
 725. Heicke, Richard. Direct enlargements 
 in monochrome and three-colour in gum 
 bichromate. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 305- 
 307.) MFA 
 
 726. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The ab- 
 
 sorption and sensitising spectrum of the 
 
 cyanins. illus. (Photographic journal, 
 
 London, March, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 
 
 133— 137.) MFA 
 From Eder’s Jahrbuch, 1905. 
 
 72i. The basis of three-colour photog- 
 raphy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 489-491, 627- 
 629, 693-695.) MFA 
 
 
 
 “Tt ought to be clear that the Young-Helmholtz. 
 
 theory of colour vision possesses no importance, for 
 the theory of three-colour photography, and that it is 
 therefore not correct to identify the physiological 
 fundamental colours with those of three-colour pho- 
 tography.”’ 
 
 728. 
 
 
 
 Ein Beitrag zur Photographie 
 farbiger Gegenstande. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
 Jahrg. 43, p. 157-167.) MFA 
 
 Good article on color sensitizing, with a colored 
 plate. . 
 729. Red sensitive plates. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 23, 1906, v.53, p. 147-148.) MFA 
 
 730. The “Uto” bleach-out process of 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Oct. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 787-788.) MFA 
 
 Describes his experiences with paper prepared by 
 Dr. J. H. Smith & Co., Zirich. 
 
 731. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
 in the diffraction process of color photog- 
 
 
 
 
 
 raphy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, Phila- 
 delphia, 1906, v. 161, p. 439-449.) VA 
 
 Invention of R. W. Wood of Johns Hopkins Uni- 
 versity in 1899. 
 
 Also printed in Physical review, New York, June, 
 1906, v. 22, p. 339-344, PAA; Photo-era, Boston, 
 Nov., 1906, v. 17, p. 285-295, MFA, and British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Aug. 3. 1906 V20535) DO: 
 609-612, MFA. 
 
 732. Koenig, Ernst. Further applications 
 of pinatype. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 30, 1906, wees be 
 246.) MFA 
 
 T3a% Natural-color photography... 
 Translated from the German, with addi- 
 tions, original tests and experiments, etc., 
 by +E. J. Wall...” With: color-chart, test- 
 results, and diagrams. London: Dawbarn 
 & Ward, Ltd. (1906.; 94 p. illus. 8°. MFV 
 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, July 13, 1906, v.53, p.556, MFA. 
 
 734. Kunstlicht und Farbenphotographie. 
 (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
 Feb. 14, 1906, Jahrg. 13, p. 89-90.) +MFA 
 
 Jupiter lamp. 
 
 735. Légier, Alphonse. Le “photochrome” 
 de la Société du photochrome. illus. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 184-186.) 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 Apparatus for exposing three plates. 
 
 736. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Beitrage 
 zur Theorie und Praxis der direkten Far- 
 benphotographie mittels stehender Licht- 
 wellen nach Lippmanns Methode... Frei- 
 burger Bris Co Tromer,: 19067 sav, 895. 
 tables. illus. 8°. MFF p.v.54, no.5 
 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Nov. 30, 1906, v.53, p. 946-947, MFA. 
 
 737. —— Neue Untersuchungen tiber Lipp- 
 mann-Photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1906, Halle a. S., 1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 49- 
 53.) MFA 
 
 738. Lippmann, Gabriel. Des divers prin- 
 cipes sur lesquels on peut fonder la pho- 
 tographie directe des couleurs. Photogra- 
 phie directe des couleurs fondée sur 
 la dispersion prismatique. (Académie des 
 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, July 30, 
 
 1906, tome 143, p. 270-274.) * EO 
 Translation in British ie a phot 
 
 London, Aug. 17, 1906, v. 53, 644-645, 
 
 ae in Nature, London, Gen 30, 1906, v. | 
 p. 459, 
 
 739. La photographie des couleurs sur 
 plaques sensibilisées aux sels de chrome. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 287- 
 288.) MFA 
 
 740. A Lumiére one-lens one - exposure 
 camera. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
 plots) MFA 
 
 Abstract of patent. 
 
 
 
4? THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1906, continued. 
 
 741. Mareschal, G. La pinatypie. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, année 16, 
 p. 96-97.) MFA 
 
 742. Mees, Charles 
 Three-colour at the Croydon Camera 
 Club. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 4, 1906, v. 53, p. aE 
 
 Discusses filters, spectrum tests of filters, and 
 screens for general work. 
 
 743. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 S. E. SHepparp. The estimation of the 
 
 Edward Kenneth. 
 
 colour-sensitiveness of plates. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, March, 
 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 110-131.) MFA 
 
 744. Monpillard, Félix. Essai d’étalonnage 
 des écrans colorés. illus. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 231-240.) MFA 
 
 745. Essais du pinacyanol et de la 
 dicyanine des Farbwerke vorm Meister 
 Lucius et Briining de Hoechst-sur-Mein. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1906, série 2, tome 22, p. 132- 
 143.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in Photographic journal, London, June, 
 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 260-261, MFA. 
 
 746. Neame, S. E. The _ possibility of 
 portraiture in colour. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1906, v.53, p. 259, 
 278.) MFA 
 
 
 
 Demonstrates Sanger Shepherd process. Abstract 
 
 and comment in Photographic news, London, 1906, 
 Teo sates, toy lero Lo. wi A 
 747. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichver- 
 
 fahren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik ftir 1906, Halle a. S., 
 1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 11-14.) MFA 
 
 748. A New three-colour printing process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 30, 1906, v.53, p. 944-945.) MFA 
 
 Invention of Dr. Traube of Berlin. 
 
 749. Newton, A. J. Pigments for three- 
 colour processes. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, May 25, 1906, 
 
 
 
 v. 53, p. 406-408.) MFA 
 750. Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 910-911.) MFA 
 7451. Three-colour process work. 
 
 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 30, 1906, v.53, p.248-249.) MFA 
 
 752. Norman, Albert. ,;The Sanger Shep- 
 herd process.; (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 11, 1906, v. 53, BB, 
 
 Demonstration of making transparencies before 
 the Royal Photographie Society. 
 
 753. Novak, Franz. Rapidlichtfilter fiir Drei- 
 farbenphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 285- 
 
 287.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of Lpehoar pene, 
 London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505, MFA 
 
 754. Ozobrome and three-colour work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 27, 1906, v. 53, p. 581.) MFA 
 
 755. Pector, S. Léon Vidal. port. (So- 
 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 
 Paris, 1906, tome 22, p. 457-459.) MFA 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 756. Pfaundler, Leopold. © Die Young- 
 
 Helmholtzsche Farbentheorie und die 
 
 Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
 
 fiir Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
 nik ftir 1906, Halle a. S., 1906, Jahrg. 20, 
 p. 53-58.) MFA 
 
 757. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1906, v. 53, p. 139, 178-179.) MFA 
 
 Comments on the Jumeaux process. 
 
 Traces patent history of reflector cameras. For 
 criticisms of E. T. Butler and E. J. Wall, see above 
 publication March 9, 1906, v.53, p. 197. 
 
 758. 
 eras, 
 
 
 
 Trichromatic one-exposure cam- 
 illus. (Photographic news, London, 
 
 April 20, 1906, v.50, p. 308-309.) MFA 
 Has list of patents. 
 759. Professional colour photography. illus. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1906, v. 53, p. 366-368, 391, 419, 438.) MFA 
 
 Reference to studios of Heath & Stoneman, the 
 Rotary Company, and Otto Pfenninger. 
 
 760. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Observa- 
 tions et remarques sur les travaux photo- 
 graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (VI 
 
 Congresso internazionale di chimica appli- 
 cata, Roma, 1906. (Atti v26, p. sak a 
 P 
 
 Translation in Photographic journal, London, new ~ 
 
 series, v. 30, p. 304-306, MFA. Suggests preservation 
 of plates by rapid drying. 
 
 761. Rheinberg, Julius. Photography in 
 natural colours. (Nature, London, Nov. 
 
 29, 1906, v.75, pita MFA 
 
 Admits patent priority to F. Cheshire. 
 
 762. Sallwuerk, Edmund von. Farbenpho- 
 tographie und Kunst. (Photographische 
 Kunst, Mtinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 243- 
 248.) +MFA 
 
 763. Saville-Kent, W. The photography 
 of colour as applied to obtaining correct 
 colour records of natural history subjects. 
 (Royal Asiatic Society. — Ceylon Branch. 
 Journal, Colombo, 1906, v. 18, p. 435-445.) 
 
 *OAA 
 
 < a * 
 Various well-known processes described. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 43 
 
 1906, continued. 
 764. Schmidt, Hans. Eine Dreifarben- 
 Momentkamera. illus. (Photographische 
 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 
 579-582.) MFA 
 
 765. Das Dreifarben - Photographie- 
 Verfahren, System N. P. G. (VI Congresso 
 internazionale di chimica applicata, Roma, 
 1906. Atti, v.6, p. 36-52.) PKR 
 
 Process of the Neue photographische Gesellschaft. 
 Partial abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 March, 1907, v.14, p. 110-112, MFA. 
 
 
 
 766. —— Three-colour prints by the car- 
 bon-film process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 15, 1906, v. 53, p. 
 
 469-470.) MFA 
 Abstract. 
 767. ——— Ueber Farbenphotographie mit 
 
 besonderer Berticksichtigung des Systems 
 
 
 
 N. P. G. (Photographische Kunst, Mtin- 
 chen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 345-350.) } MFA 
 768. Uber Kameras fiir Dreifarben- 
 
 photographie. illus. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 
 $31-535.) MFA 
 
 769. Scoble, Walter A. The red sensitive- 
 
 ness of dyed films. illus. (Photographic 
 journal, London, May, 1906, new series, 
 v. 30, p. 190-197.) MFA 
 
 770. Seddig, M. A suggested method of 
 colour sensitometry. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 629-630.) MFA 
 
 771. Smith, John H. The bleach-out proc- 
 ess of colour-photography. (British jour- 
 nal of ee any: London, June 8, 1906, 
 v. 53, p. 459.) MFA 
 
 States that he has Riloned the Szezepanik proc- 
 ess in favor of the Smith-Merckens process. 
 
 772. Smith, John H., and W. MERCKENS. 
 rNatural-colour printing out paper.; (Pho- 
 tographic journal, London, May, 1906, new 
 
 series, v.30, p. 197-200.) MFA 
 Abstract only. 
 
 773. —— Uber ein direkt in Farben kopie- 
 
 rendes Papier (Uto-Papier). (Photo- 
 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
 
 Jahre. 43, p. 385-388.) MFA 
 
 Also printed me Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 
 1906-07, Jahrg. 5, p. 109-111, MFA. 
 
 774. Smith, J. H., & Co. Direct-colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Oct. 12, 1906, v. 53, core 
 
 Reference to improvements in “Uto” paper; also 
 
 to combination of owners of Smith-Merckens and of 
 
 Szezepanik patents. 
 
 775. The “Solgram” colour process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 2, 1906, v. 53, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 776. Some notes on the bleach-out process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Hep. 23,1906, v.53, p. 146.) MFA 
 
 Brief description of Szczepanik process. 
 
 777. Some notes on the gum _ process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 18, 1906, v.53, p. 388-390.) MFA 
 
 778. Stable colours for three-colour prints. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jane O06 Sr So peli) MFA 
 
 M. Pacini recommends the use of picric acid, car- 
 mine, and Prussian blue. 
 
 779. The Szczepanik bleach-out process of 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 12, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 26-27.) MFA 
 
 Translation of manufacturer’s instructions. 
 
 780. The Technics and practice of the 
 Lumiére starch grain process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March 9, 
 1906, v. 53, p. 190-191.) MFA 
 
 781. Three-colour without filters. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
 12, 1906, .¥553, p221.) MFA 
 
 Description of C. J. Drac’s patent. 
 
 782. Three-colour photographs of the solar 
 eclipse. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505.) MFA 
 
 Brief paragraph referring to work of Professor 
 Mengarini of Rome. 
 783. Three-colour prints on “Autotype” 
 trichrome tissues. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 106.) MFA 
 
 784. Three-colour transparencies by the 
 pinatype process. (British journal of .pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, p. 6- 
 7) MFA 
 
 Detailed instructions. 
 
 785. Three -colour transparencies by the 
 Sanger-Shepherd process. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, June 29, 1906, 
 Ww. 50, Dp, 506)) MFA 
 
 786. A Two-colour printing process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
 7806, ve53: ps /05) MFA 
 
 Abstract of German patent of J. K. Henberger. 
 787. Valenta, Eduard. Pinachrom and Pina- 
 
 cyanol als Rotsensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
 Jahrg. 43, p. 132-134.) MFA 
 
 788. Vidal, Léon. Colour photography. A 
 modern pinatype method. (British journal 
 of photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 
 53, p. 390-391.) MFA 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
 1906, v. 13, p. 447-448, MFA. 
 789. The Lippmann and Lumiére proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. Cate 
 
 
 
44 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1906, continued. 
 
 790. W., J. Death of M. Léon Vidal. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 24, 1906, v. 53, p. 672.) MFA 
 
 791. The late Léon Vidal. port. (Pho- 
 
 tographic journal, London, 1906, new se- 
 
 ries, v. 30, p. 316-317; port. opp. p. 339.) 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 792. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 
 
 process. (Photographic news, London, 
 
 July 20, 1906, v.50, p. 574.) MFA 
 Brief reference to patent of Mezaro. 
 
 793. —— Colour photography. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 9, 
 1906, v.53, p. 117-118.) MFA 
 
 Replies to Dr. Griin regarding disputed features 
 of the Color Photography Exhibition. 
 
 794. Colour sensations. (Photographic 
 news, London, Sept. 21, 1906, v. 50, eae 
 A 
 
 
 
 Scientific basis of color photography upset by dis- 
 coveries of Professor Raehlmann. 
 
 795. —— An exhibition of colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 53, p. 64-67.) MFA 
 
 796. How to take portraits in natural 
 colours. (Photographic news, London, 
 1906, v. 50, p. 388-389, 426-427, ri 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 797. Natural colour P. O. P. (Photo- 
 
 graphic news, London, May 4, 1906, v. 50, 
 
 D351 MFA 
 Smith process. 
 
 798. A new process of three-colour 
 
 printing. (Photographic news, London, 
 
 Dec. 7, 1906, v.50, p. 983.) MFA 
 
 Traube process. 
 
 799. The pinatype camera. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 105.) MFA 
 
 800. —— Pinatype and Rotary Co.’s super- 
 imposed carbon colour tissues. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, April, 1906, new 
 series, v.30, p. 144-146.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of lecture delivered before the Royal 
 Photographic Society. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 195, MFA. 
 
 
 
 801. —— The present status of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy. London, July 27, 1906, v.53, p. 588— 
 592.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Dec., 1906, v. 
 17, p. 352-364, MFA. 
 
 802. A treatise on Lippmann colour 
 photography. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 30, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 946-947.) MFA 
 
 Review of Hans Lehmann’s book on color photog- 
 raphy. 
 
 
 
 Die Pietznersche 
 (Photographische 
 
 803. Walter, Gustav. 
 Farbenphotographie. 
 
 Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 5, p. 321- 
 323.) +MFA 
 804. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie. 
 
 (Photographische Kunst, Mtinchen, 1905- 
 06, Jahrg. 4, p. 400-404, 425-434.) +MFA 
 
 Historical outline. 
 
 805. Yerbury, S. G. The “Sinop” process 
 in colour photography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 
 53, “p. 78.) MFA 
 
 Recommends “Sinop’” simplified collotype plates 
 to obviate “blobby” appearance of prints. 
 806. Three-colour printing by the Si- 
 nop process. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 106-107.) MFA 
 
 807. Zander, C.G. The Zander four-colour 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 397.) MFA 
 Claims that his process is not based on Hering’s 
 theory. 
 808. The Zander four-colour process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 7, 1906, v. 53, p. 719.) MFA 
 
 809. The Zander complementary colour 
 reproduction process. ae journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
 p. 14.) MFA 
 810. Zander’s four-colour process. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 
 11, 1906, ¥°53, "pear MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1907 
 
 811. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 The autochrome process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, 
 v. 54, p. 804-805.) - MFA 
 
 _ From the Journal of the Royal Photographic So- 
 ciety. 
 
 812. The Achromatism of lenses for colour 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 42-43.) MFA 
 
 813. Albert, E. Three-colour without fil- 
 ters. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 55.) MFA 
 
 814. Alleged anticipations of the Warner- 
 Powrie process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v.54, p. 
 812-813.) MFA 
 
 815. Another American discovery in colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 53.) MFA 
 Invention of Charles Gilbert of Chicago. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY A5 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 816. Another well-known worker in colour- 
 photography, Dr. Gustav Selle. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 5, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p.55.) MFA 
 
 Brief obituary notice. 
 
 817. Art and colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
 1907, v.54, p. 781-782.) MFA 
 
 818. Atkinson, E. H. C. Section-cut half- 
 tone screens. 
 raphy, London, Nov. 22, 1907, v. 54, p. 894.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Brief suggestion for the Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 819. Autochrome items. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 
 54, p. 839-840.) - MFA 
 
 Cause of green stains. Reversing, intensification, 
 residues. 
 
 820. Autochrome plates under modified 
 treatment. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Oct. 11, 1907, v.54, p. 772- 
 f73:) MFA 
 
 821. The Autochrome process in a nutshell. 
 (Photographic news, London, Sept. 27, 
 1907, v. 52, p. 304.) MFA 
 
 From revised book of instructions. 
 
 822. Autochromes from autochromes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 15, 1907, v. 54, p. 858.) MFA 
 
 823. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The colour 
 sensitising of gelatine and collodion emul- 
 sions and the relation of the colour of a 
 dye to its sensitising action. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, April, 1907, new 
 series, v.31, p. 207.) MFA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 824. Bardorf. Uber Jougla’s Autochrom- 
 platte “Omnicolor.” (Photographische 
 Welt, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 147-148, 
 167-168.) MFA 
 
 825. Bauer, Otto. A camera for three- 
 colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
 v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 Jl.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of specification. 
 
 826. Bayley, R. Child. Color photography. 
 (Photo-miniature, New York, Sept., 1907, 
 v.7, p. 449-455.) MFA 
 
 Manipulation of autochromes. 
 
 827. Copying autochromes in the 
 camera. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, p. 831.) MFA 
 
 828. Beck, Conrad. ,Lumiére starch grain 
 process.; (Royal Microscopical Society. 
 Proceedings, London, 1907, p. en; 
 
 
 
 Brief reference to examination of plates under the 
 microscope. See also Nature, London, Dec. 26, 1907, 
 wears, p. 188, OA ; 
 
 (British journal of photog-- 
 
 829. Blackburn, H. E. The pinatype proc- 
 ess of color photography. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Dec., 1907, v. 14, p. 515- 519.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 830. A rapid three-color carbon proc- 
 ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
 
 1907, v. 14, p. 273-276.) MFA 
 
 831. Brasseur, Charles L. A. Weather 
 conditions and colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 8, 1907, p. 843.) MFA 
 
 832. Burchardt, Ernest A. Three-colour 
 printing with bichromated size. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 5, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 25-26.) MFA 
 
 833. Cajal, S. R. The Lippmann process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 
 
 Sept. 13, 1907, v.54, p. 691-692.) MFA 
 Abstract. 
 834. Die Struktur der Lippmannschen 
 
 
 
 Photochromien. illus. (Zeitschrift ftir 
 wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 
 1907, Bd. 5, p. 213-245.) PLC 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 59- 61, 69- 714 77-79, MFA. 
 
 835. Uber die Polychromie mikro- 
 skopischer Metallkérnchen. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
 zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 137-140.) PLC 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 
 
 836. Calmels, H., and Tobe GlERCyeiza te 
 production photographique des couleurs. 
 Paris. Le Procedé ,1907;. 2. p14 1329p. 
 illus. 8°. (Bibliotheque des procédés 
 photomécaniques.) MDS 
 
 837. Chéron, André. Improvements in the 
 prismatic dispersion process. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 675-677.) MFA 
 
 838. Chevrier, Henri. Observations sur le 
 traitement des plaques autochromes. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 477-485.) 
 
 
 
 MFA 
 839. —— Traitement des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 
 1907, année 18, p. 21-26.) MFA 
 840. Claudy, Carl Harry. Autochrome 
 
 color photography. (Bulletin of photog- 
 raphy, Philadelphia, Dec. 11, 1907, v.1, p. 
 347-348.) +MFA 
 
 Advice to professionals. 
 
 841. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Development 
 of three-colour negatives. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
 v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 29.) MFA 
 
46 THE NEW: YORK PUBLIC CISRARY, 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 842. Colour curves and how to control 
 them. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 5, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, v.54, p.30.) MFA 
 
 843. Colour photography. (Photographic 
 news, London, June 21, 1907, v.51, p. Me 
 MF 
 
 Explains difference between Sanger Shepherd fe 
 Lumiére processes. 
 
 844. Colour processes. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 54, 
 p,. 855.) MFA 
 
 Formulas for pinatype process. 
 
 845. Comley, Henry J. The bichromated 
 size process. (British journal.of photog- 
 raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 46.) MFA 
 
 Gives formula for sizing. 
 
 846. Three-colour carbon and the 
 autochrome process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1907, v.54, p.853- 
 854, 875.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Southampton 
 Camera Club. 
 
 847. Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, June 
 21, 1907, v. 54, p. 471.) MFA 
 
 Describes author’s camera and process. Abstract 
 of paper read before South London Photographic So- 
 ciety. 
 
 Also printed in Photographic news, London, July 
 12,1907, v: 52; p. 31, MEA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 848. The Connection between duration of 
 development, fog, and colour rendering. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 March 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 19-21.) MFA 
 
 849. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
 couleurs: les plaques a filtres trichromes. 
 (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 27, 1907, an- 
 née 17, p. 101-107.) MFA 
 
 Lumiére, Krayn, Ramon y Cajal, Berton & Gambs, 
 Smith, and Ducos du Hauron processes. 
 850. Photographie des couleurs; le 
 procédé trichrome par éléments juxta- 
 posés. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 1907, 
 série 5, v. 8, semestre 2, p. 237-241.) OA 
 
 851. Crémier, Victor. Les plaques auto- 
 chromes et la stéréoscopie. (Photo - ga- 
 zette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1907, année 17, p. 186- 
 189.) MFA 
 
 852. Didier, Léon. A simplified pinatype 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 
 
 853. Direct half-tone three-colour nega- 
 tives. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 87.) MFA 
 
 Formulas from Klimsch’s Jahrbuch. 
 
 
 
 854. The Donisthorpe three-colour print- 
 ing process. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography ‘supplement, Dp. 71.) MFA 
 
 855. Duchenne, Paul. Chassis-magasin a 
 poses multiples pour la trichromie. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 121- 
 122.) MFA 
 
 856. ——- A multiple three-colour back. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of French patent. 
 
 857. Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. DE 
 Berceco,. The Du Hauron one-plate proc- 
 ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, May 3, 1907, v.54, Colour photogra- 
 phy supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 
 
 858. “Ensign” chemical outfit for auto- 
 chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
 p. 926-927.) MFA 
 
 859. The “Ensign” viewing stand for auto- 
 chrome transparencies. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 95.) MFA 
 
 860. Exécution de contretypes par la pina- 
 type. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 
 189-190.) MFA 
 
 861. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, Oct. 18, 1907, v. 54, p. 782.) MFA 
 Reference to patent of Hans Lehmann. 
 862. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 918.) MFA 
 
 863. Fairchild, Thomas J. Colour prints 
 and transparencies. (British journal of 
 photon London, June 21, 1907, v. 54, 
 p. 473.) MFA 
 
 Directions for producing greens and yellows from 
 ordinary negatives. 
 
 864. Flower studies in colour. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
 1907, v. 54, p. 822.) MFA 
 
 Comments on Lumiére process. 
 
 865. Fraprie, Frank Roy. Simple color 
 photography achieved. (American pho- 
 tography, Boston, Aug., 1907, v.1, p. 59- 
 64.) MFA 
 
 Brief description of autochrome, with formulas. 
 
 866. Frederking, H. Das neue Verfahren 
 
 der Naturfarbenphotographie von A. und 
 L. Lumiére. (Dinglers polytechnisches 
 Journal, Berlin, 1907, Bd. 322, p. 713-716.) 
 
 VA 
 
 YY oe 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY | 47 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 867. Gamble, William. Colour photogra- 
 phy by the Warner - Powrie screen - plate 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 4, 1907, v. 54, p. 748-750.) 
 MFA 
 
 Chromographe Nachet- 
 Geisler. illus. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, 
 tome 23, p. 271-276.) MFA 
 
 869. Gill, William. Professional colour 
 photography: does it pay? (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, May 3, 1907, 
 v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 33-34.) MFA 
 
 870. Grant, Thomas K. The autochrome 
 
 process. (Photographic journal, London, 
 
 Dec., 1907, new series, v. 31, p. 395-401.) 
 MFA 
 
 Demonstration at the Royal Photographic Society. 
 With discussion. 
 
 868. Geisler, Louis. 
 
 871. Gravier, Charles. Observations nou- 
 velles sur les plaques autochromes. (So- 
 cieté francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 475-476.) 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 87 1a. La photographie des couleurs 
 sur les plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 415-417.) MFA 
 
 872. Grills, E Notes on the pinatype 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 
 
 873. Screen-plate colour photography 
 by the Warner-Powrie process. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 meyer t), 1907, v.54, p. 763-765.) MFA 
 
 874. The three-colour tissue process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 
 
 875. Guébhard, Adrien. Sur le procédé de 
 photographie des couleurs de MM. A. & L. 
 Lumiere. (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
 rendus, Paris, Nov. 11, 1907, tome ek Dp. 
 792-795.) EO 
 
 Suggests that by the application of the principle of 
 reversal the chemical method used in Lumiére pro- 
 
 cedure might be avoided. Brief abstract in British 
 cose of photography, Nov. 29, 1907, v. 54, p. 898, 
 
 
 
 
 
 876. Sur le rdle de l’inversion dans le 
 procédé de photographie des couleurs, de 
 MM. A. et L. Lumiére. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 534-537.) MFA 
 
 877. Harberisser. Autochrome filters. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, p. 816.) MFA 
 
 
 
 878. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 spectrum and three-colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 26, 1907, v.54, p. 315-316.) MFA 
 
 879. An Interview with M. Louis Ducos du 
 Hauron. port. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 880. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A color screen 
 color meter. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
 nal, Philadelphia, Dec., 1907, v. 164, p. 421- 
 
 423.) VA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 19, MFA. 
 
 881. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
 in the diffraction process of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 89.) 
 MFA 
 Abstract of paper read before London and Provin- 
 cial Photographic Association. 
 882.-——— :Chree-,color interference pic- 
 tures. (Physical review, New York, Jan., 
 1907, v.24, p. 103-107.) PAA 
 Also piited in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Feb. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 10-12, MFA. 
 
 883. J.. C. A new method of colour pho- 
 tography. (Nature, London, Oct. 24, 1907, 
 v. 76, p. 642.) OA 
 
 Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 
 
 884. Single-plate colour-photography. 
 (Nature, London, Aug. 1, 1907, v.76, p. 
 317.) OA 
 
 Simple account of the Lumiére process. 
 
 885. Jougla, J. Nouvelles plaques ‘“Omni- 
 colore” reproduisant par développement 
 toutes les couleurs de la nature. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 221-223.) MFA 
 
 886. ——- The omnicolore plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 7, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 46.) MFA 
 
 887. Klein, Henry Oscar. Ueber die Be- 
 deutung richtiger Expositionsratia in der 
 Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
 fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
 nik fir 1907, Halle a. S.) 1907, Jahegagr 
 p. 88-91.) MFA 
 
 Penrose ratiometer. 
 
 888. Koenig, Ernst. The keeping proper- 
 ties of bathed plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 1, 1907, v. 54, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. om 
 
 Experiments with pinachrome and pinacyanol in 
 semi-alcohol bath. 
 889. A new method for preparing 
 three-colour transparencies. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, 
 v.54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 13.) MFA 
 
 Uses pinatype process. 
 
 
 
4g THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 890. Non-screen orthochromatic and 
 panchromatic plates by bathing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
 1907, v. 54, p. 786.) MFA 
 
 Prepared from ordinary plates. 
 
 891. The permanency of pinatype 
 prints. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 1, 1907, v.54, p.23.) MFA 
 
 892. The Krayn screen-plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 13, 
 1907, v. 54, p. 944.) MFA 
 
 893. The Krayn screen - plate process of 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee 
 
 San Francisco, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, 
 March, 1908, v. 15, p. 109, MFA. 
 
 894. Kruegener, R. Die neue Farbenpho- 
 tographie von Auguste und Louis Lumiére 
 in Lyon. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 45, p. RI aN 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Welt, Leipzig, 
 
 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 113-115, 131-133, MFA. 
 
 895. Lasareff, P. Uber das Ausbleichen 
 von Farbstoffen im sichtbaren Spektrum. 
 (Annalen der Physik, Leipzig, 1907, Folge 
 4, Bd. 24, p. 661-671.) PAA 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 38-40, MFA. 
 
 896. Latest developments in screen - plate 
 
 colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 13, 1907, 
 
 v. 54, p. 688-691.) MFA 
 Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 Also printed@in American photography, Boston, 
 
 Oct., 1907, v. 1, p. 186-192, MFA 
 
 Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
 1907, v. 14, p. 503-504, MFA. 
 897. The Latest on Warner-Powrie. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 18, 1907, v. 54, p. 783.) MFA 
 
 Experiments; also comparisons with Lumiére plates. 
 
 898. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Uber die 
 direkten Verfahren der Farbenphotogra- 
 phie nach Lippmann und Lumieére. illus. 
 (Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, 
 Jahrg. 8, p. 842-849.) PAA 
 
 Also printed in Deutsche physikalische Gesellschaft. 
 Berichte, Berlin, 1907, Jahrg. 5, p. 624-638, PAA. 
 
 899. Uber eine neue kornlose Platte 
 fiir Lippmann-Photographie. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
 zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 279-283.) PLC 
 
 900. Leiber, Ferdinand. A _ three-colour 
 positive transparency process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 84-85.) MFA 
 
 -Glass transparencies 
 process. 
 
 
 
 by the triple subtractive 
 
 901. Le Roy, George A. Rectification des 
 épreuves sur plaques autochromes. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 473.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 11, MFA. 
 
 902. Vernis pour plaques autochromes. 
 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 
 letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 472.) 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 11, A, 
 
 
 
 903. Lueppo - Cramer. 
 dyes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 50.) MFA 
 
 Deals with the action of dyes in hydrosols of the 
 silver halides. 
 
 
 
 904. Zur Photochemie der Photoha- 
 loide und Theorie der Poitevinschen 
 Photochromie. (Photographische Korres- 
 
 pondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 376-382, 
 439-444.) MFA 
 
 905. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louris LUMIERE. 
 Notice de MM. Lumiére sur le mode d’em- 
 ploi des plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 358-368.) MFA 
 Full directions. 
 906. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Methods 
 
 of control in the development of autochrome 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 90-93.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in American photography, Boston, 
 Feb., 1908, v. 2, p. 93-102, MFA. 
 
 907. —— Sur le développement des plaques 
 autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, 
 tome 23, p. 515-528.) MFA 
 
 908. The Lumiére autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 51-53, 65-68.) MFA 
 
 Directions for manipulating. 
 
 909. Lumiéres Verfahren der Photographie 
 in nattirlichen Farben mittels Autochrom- 
 platten. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. Sn, 
 
 910. Mackenstein, H. Déclenchement auto- 
 matique des obturateurs par le déclic auto- 
 matique H. B. illus. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 
 2, tome 23, p. 386-387.) MFA 
 
 911. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
 leurs par les plaques autochromes Lu- 
 miére. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
 1907, année 17, p. 121-123.) MFA 
 
 The behaviour of ~ 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 49 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 912. Martin-Duncan, F. Autochromes of 
 nature subjects. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 
 834-835.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of lecture before the Blenheim Club. 
 
 913. The microscopic appearance of 
 the Warner-Powrie plate. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 83-84.) MFA 
 
 914. Some notes on the microscopic 
 appearance of the Lumiére autochrome 
 plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 915. Martiny, Gaston. Quelques consé- 
 quences de l’emploi des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
 1907, année 17, p. 165-167.) MFA 
 
 Difficulties to be overcome. 
 
 916. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. Mo- 
 saic and linear colour plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 5, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 49-50.) MFA 
 
 917. Preparing colour-duplicates by 
 the Warner-Powrie process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
 1907, v. 54, p. 708-710.) MFA 
 
 918. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 J. H. Piepcr. Printing and copying from 
 screen-plate colour negatives and posi- 
 tives. (British journal of photography, 
 Lendon, Oct. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 
 
 919. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 S. H. Wratten. Rapid filter blue. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
 2, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 62.) MFA 
 
 
 
 920. Mente, Otto. Ueber die neue Omni- 
 colore Platte. (Photographische Chronik, 
 feape a, o., July 3, 1907, Jahre. 14, p. 334— 
 387%) +MFA 
 
 921. Millochau, G. Photography of the 
 infra-red solar spectrum. (British journal 
 of photography, London, May 17, 1907, v. 
 54, p. 364-365.) MFA 
 
 922. Monpillard, Félix. Ecrans colorés 
 pour la microphotographie. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 177-179.) MFA 
 
 923. Natural colour photographs of inter- 
 ference effects in glass under stress. (En- 
 gineering, London, Jan. 11, 1907, v. 83, p. 
 56.) | VA 
 
 Abstract in Photographic news, London, Jan. 25, 
 1907, v.51, p. 71, MFA. 
 
 924. Neuhauss, Richard. History of the 
 bleachout process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 
 
 p. 262.) MFA 
 
 States that process was used as early as 1899 by 
 Liesegang. 
 
 925. —— A note by Dr. Neuhauss on the 
 bleachout process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 14-15.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Refers to new paper introduced by Dr. J. H. Smith 
 & Co. of Zurich. 
 
 926. Newton, A. J. The Warner-Powrie 
 screen - plate from the photo - engraver’s 
 point of view. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 27, 1907, v. 54, say 730- 
 731.) MFA 
 
 927. A Note on varnishing autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. 859.) MFA 
 
 928. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
 Farbenphotographie nach dem Warner- 
 Powrie-Verfahren. illus. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 
 533-538.) MFA 
 
 929. Neuerungen in der Dreifarben- 
 photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Pho- 
 tographie und Reproductionstechnik fir 
 1907, Halle a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 129- 
 141.) MFA 
 
 Brief abstracts of periodical articles. 
 
 
 
 930. One-plate colour processes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 13.) MFA 
 
 A review of patents issued. 
 
 931. Le Papier Uto pour obtention d’i- 
 mages polychromes par décoloration. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 190-192.) 
 MFA 
 
 932. Patents in colour-photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
 30, 1907, v.54, p. 666, 681-682.) MFA 
 
 Discussion between Frederic E. Ives and Otto 
 Pfenninger as to patent priority of refraction com- 
 pensator. 
 
 933. Payne, Arthur. Stereoscopic photog- 
 raphy with autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1907, v. 
 54, p. 784-785, 803-804.) MFA 
 
 934. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber ein Mo- 
 dell zur mechanischen Versinnbildlichung 
 der MHeringschen Farbentheorie. illus. 
 (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle a. S., roe 
 Jahrg. 21, p. 20-21.) "MF 
 
 935. The Pinatype process. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, March 1, 
 1907, v.54, supplement, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 Description of French patent 337,054. 
 
50 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 936. Das Pinatype-Verfahren der Hochster 
 Farbwerke. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., Aug. 4, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 397 
 398.) +MFA 
 
 937. Piper, Charles Welborne. Duplicates 
 of autochromes by contact printing and 
 copying. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 1, 1907, v.54, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 81-82.) MFA 
 
 938. Plauderei tiber die Farbenphotogra- 
 phie nach Lumiére. (Photographische 
 Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 18, 1907, Jahrg. 
 14, p. 423-425.) +MFA 
 
 939. Pledge, John H. Photo-micrographs 
 of starch grains in the Lumiére auto- 
 chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 54, 
 no /2l,) MFA 
 
 940. Poirée, Georges. Méthode de photo- 
 graphie des couleurs par analyse et synthése 
 au moyen d’objectifs non achromatiques. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 
 61-66.) MFA 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, March 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 21-22, MFA. 
 
 941. A Precaution in the autochrome proc- 
 ess. Securing white in autochromes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 11, 1907, v. 54, p. 761-762.) MFA 
 
 942. Precautions in the use of liquid col- 
 our-filters. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, p. Sieg 
 
 FA 
 
 943. “Pyro-Reeb,” révélateur spécial pour 
 plaques autochromes. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, 
 série 2, tome 23, p. 529-531.) MFA 
 
 944. Quentin, H. Comment on obtient une 
 photographie. en couleurs. Procédés tri- 
 chromes, méthodes par réseaux poly- 
 chromes, procédé par dispersion spectrale. 
 Paris: Ch. Mendel ,1907?;. 1 pl, 69 p. 
 1253 MFV 
 
 945. The mercury fog in interference 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 
 
 946. The R. P. S. progress medal-award 
 
 for colour photography. port. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 
 
 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
 
 ment, p. 12.) MFA 
 Award to E. Sanger Shepherd. 
 
 947. Raymond, R. Photography in col- 
 ours by prismatic dispersion. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 5-6, 18-19.) MFA 
 
 
 
 948. Real color photography. (Outlook, 
 
 New York, 1907, v. 87, p. nue *DA 
 Autochromes. 
 949. Reducing three-colour negatives. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 6, 1907, v.54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 71.) MFA 
 
 “‘Sanzol”’ process. 
 
 950. Reeb, Henri. De l’estimation du 
 temps de pose sur plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 490- 
 495.) MFA 
 
 951. Riley, Phil Madison. Color-photog- 
 raphy near. A new one-plate process for 
 the ordinary camera. (Photo-era, Boston, 
 Dec., 1907, v.19, p. 307-309.) MFA 
 
 Joly process. 
 
 952. Rothé, E Practice of Lippmann’s 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 3.) MFA 
 
 Does away with mercury mirror. Method of work- 
 ing is described. 
 
 953. Schmidt, Hans. Ueber Dreifarben- 
 negative. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle a. S., 
 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 10-13.) MFA 
 
 954. Screen-plate photography by the War- 
 ner-Powrie process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1907, v. 54, nee 707- 
 708, 730.) MFA 
 
 955. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. The col- 
 our of dye solutions. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, 
 p. 819.) MFA 
 
 956. Sims, W. A. Three-colour printing 
 process by means of the Rotary Photo- 
 graphic Company’s films. (Photographic 
 journal, London, Jan., 1907, new series, v. 
 31, p. 4-8.) MFA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 957. Smith, John H. The copying of col- 
 our-screen plates on bleach-out paper. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 62-63.) MFA 
 
 958. Direct colour-photography by the 
 Smith screen plate. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, 
 p. 6.) MFA 
 
 959. Smith, John H., and W. MERCKENs. 
 Ausbleichverfahren und direkte Farben- 
 photographie. (Jahrbuch fir Photogra- 
 phie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1907, 
 Halle a. S., 1907, Jahre. 21) petite ee 
 
 Szezepanik process. MFA 
 
 
 
 960. Some points in the manipulation of 
 Lumiére’s autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
 1907, v.54, p. 746-747.) MFA 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 54 
 
 1907, continued. 
 
 961. Stark, J. Latente Fluoreszenz und 
 optische Sensibilisation. (Physikalische 
 Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 8, p. 248- 
 Zou.) PAA 
 
 Translation with comments in British journal of 
 photography, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 44-46, MFA. 
 
 962. Steadman, Frank Morris. Color pho- 
 tography with Lumiére autochrome plate. 
 illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
 1907, v. 14, p. 395-400.) MF 
 
 Portraits of the inventors. 
 
 963. Stenger, Erich. Aus der Praxis der 
 Dreifarbenphotographie.' (Photographische 
 Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 161- 
 167, 201-207, 323-329, 361-365; 1906-07, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jahrg. 5, p. 173-179.) +MFA 
 964. Die Autochromplatte. illus. 
 (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
 graphie, Leipzig, 1907, Bd..5, p. 372-382.) 
 PLC 
 965. Film thickness and colour sensi- 
 tiveness. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Dec. 13, 1907, v.54, p. 932-933.) 
 MFA 
 
 Brief abstract. Claims increasing color sensitive- 
 ness with increasing thickness of film. 
 
 966. Lippmann-Photographie. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 21, 
 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 431-432.) +MFA 
 
 967. Three-colour cameras. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 8, 1907, v. 54, p. 99-100.) MFA 
 
 Apparatus of Hans Schmidt and of M. Geisler. 
 
 
 
 968. Three-colour Lippmann photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 18, 1907, v.54, p. 36-37.) F 
 
 Brief reference to Herbert E. Ives’ 
 duplication. 
 
 969. Tilney, F. C. Colour reproduction 
 from the point of view of the man in the 
 street. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 
 
 970. The “Times” on colour processes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 20, 1907, v.54, p. 718.) MFA 
 
 Account of exhibition in which Lumiére pictures 
 are compared with some of the older processes. 
 
 971. Traube, Artur. Colored tones by the 
 Traube iodide process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 15, 1907, v. 
 54, p. 196-197.) MFA 
 
 972. Three-colour prints by the Traube 
 iodide process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, ‘Col. 
 our photography supplement, Dp. 26-28) 
 
 method of 
 
 
 
 973. Valenta, Eduard. Sensibilisierungs- 
 versuche mit diversen Farbstoffen der 
 Cyaningruppe. (Photographische Korre- 
 spondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 449- 
 450.) MFA 
 
 Also ae in British journal of Ree 
 London, Oct. 4, 1907, v.54, p. 751, MFA 
 
 974. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 
 process. (Photographic news, London, 
 Dec. 6, 1907, v. 52, p. 547.) MFA 
 
 Brief description of the Krayn process. 
 
 
 
 975. Another three-colour printing 
 process. (Photographic news, London, 
 Sépt..6, 1907, ve5Z, p. 231.) MFA 
 
 Lieber process. 
 
 . 976. —— The circulating portfolios of the 
 
 Society of Colour Photographers. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, April 
 5, 1907, v. 54, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 Coanments on work submitted by several colour 
 photographers. 
 
 977. ——- Latent fluorescence and optical 
 
 sensitising. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v.54, Colour 
 
 photography supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 
 Comments on paper by J. Stark. 
 
 978. 
 (Photographic news, 
 L907 ots 56) Os O50) 
 
 Brief description. 
 
 979. The Lumiére autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 
 980. A new three-colour camera. 
 (Photographic news, London, Jan. gee 
 
 vanced Oe pea BRR 
 Schmidt apparatus. 
 
 —-— The Lumiére autochrome plate. 
 London, July 19, 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 981. ——- The omnicolore plate. (Photo- 
 graphic news, London, May 10, 1907, v. 51, 
 p. 379.) MFA 
 
 982. —— The Powrie-Warner colour proc- 
 ess. (Photographic news, London, Oct. 4, 
 1907, v. 52, p. 329.) MFA 
 
 Brief ese stom: 
 
 983. A review of the exhibition. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. an 5: MFA 
 
 984. A review of recent eae in col- 
 our sensitising. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1907, v.54, p. 365-367, 
 386-388, 406-407, 464-466.) MFA 
 
 Footnote citations to a number of references. 
 
 985. A simpler method of working 
 autochrome plates. (Photographic news, 
 London, Nov. 8, 1907, v.52, p.451.) MFA 
 
 Gravier process. 
 
 986. Some notable features of the 
 Warner-Powrie process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 
 54, p. 710-711.) MF 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
52 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1907, continued. 
 987. —— Some notes on colour filter 
 making. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Jan. 4, 1907, v.54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 4-5.) MFA 
 
 988. Three-colour carbon work. (Brit- 
 ish journal:of photography, London, Feb. 
 1, 1907, v.54, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 9-10.) MFA 
 
 989. Three-colour Lippmann pictures. 
 (Photographic news, London, Feb. 8, 1907, 
 egal Ry. ceny) BO he MFA 
 
 Ives process. 
 
 990. Three-colour negative-making as 
 an evening amusement. (British journal 
 of photography, London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. nal 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Suggestion for a panchromatic flashlight. 
 
 991. Wallace, Robert James. Studies in 
 sensitometry. illus. (Astrophysical jour- 
 nal, Chicago, 1907, v.25, p. 116-150; v. 26, 
 Dp. 298-325.) OMA 
 
 1: The daylight sensitometry of photographic plates, 
 and a suggested standard dispersion piece. 2: Ortho- 
 chromatism by bathing. 
 
 992. Wallon, Etienne. Appareil pour la 
 photographie des couleurs par dispersion 
 prismatique de M. Chéron. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p.537-542.) MFA 
 
 993. Paysages autochromes. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1907, année 17, p. 
 221-225.) MFA 
 
 994. La photographie des couleurs et 
 les plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1907, série 2, tome 23, p. 336-358.) MFA 
 
 995. La photographie des couleurs et 
 les plaques autochromes; conférence faite 
 devant la Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie le 27 juin 1907, par E. Wallon; suivie 
 d’une Notice sur le mode d’emploi des 
 plaques autochromes, par MM. Lumiere. 
 Paris: Gauthier-Villars, 1907. 39 p. table. 
 4°. MFF p.v.54, no.6 
 
 996. Watkins, Alfred. Actinometers and 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 82-83.) MFA 
 
 997. Exposure of autochromes by ac- 
 tinometer. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. Ze 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 998. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Einige 
 Beitrage zur Autochromphotographie. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 461-464.) MFA 
 
 999, Einige Versuche mit der neuen 
 Autochromplatte. (Photographische Chro- 
 nik, Halle a. S., Sept. 1, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 
 447-448.) +MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1000. Experiments with the bleach- 
 out printing process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. coe 
 
 
 
 1001. .Naturfarbige Kopien auf Papier. 
 
 (Photographische Welt, Leipzig, April, 
 
 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 49-51.) MFA 
 Uto paper. 
 
 1002. Worel, Karl. Direkte Farbenpho- 
 tographie. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik fir 1907, Halle 
 
 S.,.1907, Jahre. 2) eo. ee MFA 
 Describes Uto paper. 
 1003. ——- New-comers in colour photog- 
 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 36-37.) MFA 
 
 Reviews recent advances. 
 
 1004. Wratten & Wainwright. M screens. 
 (Nature, London, April 18, 1907, v.75, p. 
 592.) OA 
 
 Reference to their booklet on photomicrography and 
 plates supplied by them. 
 
 1005. A Year of colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, p. 918-919.) MFA 
 
 1908 
 
 1006. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 A one-exposure three-colour camera. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1908, 
 
 new series, v. 32, p. 331-333.) MFA . 
 
 Also Shea in British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. re MFA. 
 
 1007. Auerbach, Herbert. Ein kurzer Ueber- 
 blick uber die Entwicklungsgeschichte 
 der Photographie in nattirlichen Farben. 
 (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
 1908, Jahrg. 15, p.295-298, 323-325, 339- 
 341, 347-349.) +MFA 
 
 1008. The Autochromes at the new gallery. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 25, 1908, v.55, p: 734-735.) MFA 
 
 Comments on London exhibition. 
 
 1009. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
 diamidophénol en liqueur acide au dé- 
 veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 55- 
 58.) MFA 
 
 1010. Bayley, R. Child. Lantern slides of 
 autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, May, 1908, v.15, p. 177-180.). 
 MFA 
 1011. Blackburn, H. E. Filters for three- 
 plate color photography. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Sept., 1908, v. 15, p. 335—- 
 342.) MFA 
 
 ee 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 53 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1012. Brown, Edward Lumsden. On di- 
 rect colour-photography by the Lumiére 
 
 process. (Royal Scottish Society of Arts. 
 Transactions, Edinburgh, 1908, v. 18, p. 
 154-157.) VA 
 
 1013. Calmels, H. Ecrans colorés de 
 Wratten and Wainwright pour ortho- 
 chromatisme, trichromie, photomicrogra- 
 phie, usages scientifiques. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 340-343.) MFA 
 
 1014. The Campbell anti-frilling dish. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 1015. Carpentier, J. La photographie des 
 couleurs par les plaques autochromes de 
 MM. Lumiére fréres. (Société des ingé- 
 nieurs civils de France. Mémoires, Paris, 
 1908, série 6, année 61, p. 962-972.) VDA 
 
 1016. Carrara, Achille. An improved non- 
 screen panchromatic plate by bathing. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 6, 1907, v.54, supplement, p. 89-90; 
 Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, supplement, p. 7-8.) 
 MFA 
 
 1017. Carter, Charles M. Painting and 
 color photography. (American annual of 
 photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
 v. 13, p. 41-42.) MFA 
 
 1018. Chaboseau, Robert. Observations 
 sur l’emploi des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 349- 
 358.) MFA 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Oct. 2, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, MFA. ; 
 1019. Chéron, André. A modified appara- 
 tus for the prismatic dispersion process. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
 
 raphy supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 1020. Chevrier, Henri. Montage des 
 épreuves obtenues sur plaques auto- 
 chromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
 graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, 
 tome 24, p. 257.) MFA 
 
 1021. Claudy, Carl Harry. The autochrome 
 plate and the microscope. (Bulletin of pho- 
 tography, Philadelphia, 1908, v.2, p. 105- 
 
 106, 125-126, 145-146.) +MFA 
 1022. Clifton, William E. A_ simplified 
 system of developing autochromes. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 14, 1908, v.55, p. 130-131.) MFA 
 
 1023. Colour in autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 9, 
 1908, v.55, p. 765.) MFA 
 
 Editorial rejoinder to criticism of autochromes at 
 the Salon. 
 
 1024. ,Colour photographs of rock sec- 
 tions.; (Nature, London, Jan. 2, 1908, v. 
 77, p. 206.) OA 
 
 Brief reference to Lumiére photographs taken by 
 J. W. Patterson. 
 
 1025. Colour photography and _ crime. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 
 
 Reference to blood-stained garments photographed 
 by autochrome process. 
 
 1026. Colour transparencies by artificial 
 light. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 
 
 1027. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The “Thames” 
 one-exposure colour plate. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 20, 
 1908, v.55, p. 884-886.) MFA 
 
 1028. Courtellemont, G. Autochromes on 
 tour. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 46.) MFA 
 A record of 1,300 pictures taken in the Near East. 
 Brief reference to exposures required; also of de- 
 velopment. 
 1029. Coustet, Ernest. Conseils pratiques 
 sur lVemploi des plaques autochromes. 
 (Photo-gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 1908, année 
 18, p. 72-78.) 
 
 1030. La photographie en couleurs sur 
 plaques a filtres colorés. Paris: B. Tignol 
 11908). viii, 91 p. 12°.. (Bibliotheque des 
 actualités industrielles. no. 118.) MFV 
 1031. Le procédé Diachrome. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1908, année 18, p. 
 197-200.) MFA 
 
 Traube’s process. 
 
 1032. Le temps de pose des plaques 
 autochromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
 25, 1908, année 18, p. 111-115.) MFA 
 
 1033. Crémier, Victor. Détermination du 
 temps de pose pour autochromes. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1908, année 19, p. 
 5-15.) MFA 
 
 1034. Cundall, J. Tudor. Advances in color 
 photography. (American photography, 
 Boston, Aug., 1908, v. 2, p. 437-445.) MFA 
 _ Paper read before the Edinburgh Photographic So- 
 ciety. 
 
 1035. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. FInray. 
 The examination of the positive of the 
 Thames colour plate. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
 v.55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 96.) MFA 
 
 1036. A Development accessory for auto- 
 
 chromes, panchromatic plates, etc. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 
 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 
 ment, p. 16.) MFA 
 Developing tank of Messrs. Beck. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1037. The Development of autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 
 
54 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1038. Didier, Léon. Pinatype prints from 
 autochrome and other screen-plate trans- 
 parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 35-37.) MFA 
 
 1039. Dillaye, Frédéric. Autochromes of 
 bluish tones. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 20, 1908, v.55, p. 
 ae1.) MFA 
 
 1040. Doncaster, E. D. The latest im- 
 
 provements and applications of the 
 
 Sanger-Shepherd process of colour-pho- 
 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 
 photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 
 Abstract. 
 
 1041. Dowier, Charles A. Acid amidol for 
 the development of autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 3, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1042. Downes, William Howe. 
 of the autochrome process upon art. 
 (Photo-era, Boston, Jan., 1908, v. 20, p. 41- 
 42.) MFA 
 
 1043. Drake-Brockman, H. G. Autochrome 
 photography for the tourist. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 5, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions as to developing equipment. 
 
 1044. Blueness with autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 8, 1908, v. 55, p. 371.) MFA 
 
 1045. Yellow light for the develop- 
 ment of autochromes. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. rer 
 
 1046. The Dufay screen-plate process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 51- 52.) MFA 
 
 1047. Dye mordants. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
 p. 110.) MFA 
 
 1048. Edgson, Hugh. Washing autochrome 
 plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v.55, supple- 
 ment, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 Influence 
 
 
 
 
 
 1049. Emery, C. F. Autochrome plates in 
 landscape work. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
 
 MFA: 
 
 Inquires why tones are colder in early summer 
 than in September. 
 1050. The “Ensign” clock for autochrome 
 development. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 
 
 1051. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 12, 1908, v.55, p. 449.) MFA 
 
 Second exhibition of the Society of Colour Photog- 
 raphers. 
 
 1052. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 10-11.) MFA 
 
 1053. Fabry, Charles. La photographie 
 des couleurs. (Société scientifique indus- 
 trielle de Marseille. Bulletin, Marseille, 
 
 1908, année 36, fascicule unique, p. 7-21.) 
 
 “ VA 
 1054. Ferrars, Max. Die Autochrom- 
 Platte von Lumiére. (Photographische 
 
 Welt, Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 2.) 
 MFA 
 
 Suggestions for exposure. 
 
 1055. Weitere Erfahrungen mit der 
 Autochromplatte. (Photographische Welt, 
 Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 
 1056. Finlay, C. L. ;The Thames colour- 
 screen plate.; (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 17, 1908, v. 55, eee 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 
 
 1057. Gimpel, Léon. Autochromes from 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 61.) MFA 
 
 1058-1059. Reproduction sur plaques 
 autochromes des épreuves obtenues sur 
 ses mémes plaques. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 Oct. 25, 1908, année 18, p. 222-225.) MFA 
 
 Also in Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 317-320, MFA. 
 
 1060. Goerz. Chassis spécial pour plaques 
 autochromes de Lumiére. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 308-310.) MFA 
 
 1061. Goldberg, E. Farbenphotographie 
 und Farbendruck. Leipzig: Deutscher 
 Buchgewerbeverein, 1908. 84p.,12pl. 16°. 
 (Monographien des Buchgewerbes... Bd. 
 jy MFV 
 
 La photogra- 
 
 
 
 1062. Goldschmidt, Robert. 
 phie des couleurs. (Université ;libre; de 
 Bruxelles. Revue, Bruxelles, 1908, année 
 13, p. 317-336.) * EM 
 
 Also printed in Société chimique de Belgique. 
 Bulletin, Gand, 1908, v. 22, p. 20-37, PKA. 
 
 1063. Goutcher, A. Winton. The fixing 
 bath in autochrome work. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, March 20, 
 1908, v. 55, p. 227.) MFA 
 
 1064. Grant, Thomas K. Autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 20, 1908, v.55, p. 895-896.) MFA 
 
 Lecture before the Croydon Camera Club. Discusses 
 exposure, intensification, and avoidance of spots. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 55 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1065. Gravier, Charles. . Daylight develop- 
 ment of autochromes by the Gravier 
 method. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 10, 1908, v. 55, p. 
 34, Colour photography supplement, Jan. 3 
 1908, p. 34.) MFA 
 
 1066. Gray, Edward. An amateur’s first 
 experience with autochrome plates. (Cam- 
 _ era craft, San Francisco, April, 1908, v. 15, 
 
 p. 132-134.) MFA 
 
 1067. Grimsehl, E. Ein eigentiimlicher 
 stereoskopischer Effekt. illus. (Physika- 
 lische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1908, Jahrg. 9, 
 p. 109-110.) PAA 
 
 Professor von Rohr comments upon this effect in 
 Physikalische Zeitschrift, 1908, Jahrg. 9, p. 201-202. 
 There is a translation of these two contributions in 
 British journal of photography, April 24, 1908, v. 55, 
 p. 328-329, with comments on p. 338, 350, MFA. 
 
 “Interesting, not only because it suggests a pretty 
 way of obtaining stereoscopic diagrams, but also be- 
 cause it may explain why the coloured starch grains 
 are sometimes so noticeable when viewing autochrome 
 pictures in the stereoscope.”’ 
 
 1068. Guébhard, Adrien. Ueber den Lu- 
 miéreschen photographischen Farbenpro- 
 zess. illus. (Jahrbuch fir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle 
 a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 164-167.) MFA 
 
 1069. Holme, Charles, editor. Colour pho- 
 tography, and other recent developments 
 of the art of the camera. London, Paris 
 and New York: Offices of “The Studio,” 
 1908. 4 p.1.,9(1) p., 113 pl. (18 col’d.). 4°. 
 
 +MFV 
 
 1070. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 colour properties of the autochrome plate 
 and the processes of producing auto- 
 chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 82-85.) 
 MFA 
 
 1071. The colours of the autochrome 
 pictures in regard to their production. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 93-95.) MFA 
 
 1072. Die Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 
 tographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
 Jahrg. 45, p. 446-450.) MFA 
 
 Names various characteristics of the autochrome 
 plate. 
 
 1073. On the sensitiveness of the auto- 
 chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 
 
 1074. Temperature in development. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1075. —— The theory of the autochrome 
 plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 5-7.) MFA 
 
 1076. Zur Charakteristik der modern- 
 
 
 
 en Farbenphotographie. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
 Jahrg. 45, p. 496-502.) MFA 
 
 1077. Husnik, Jaroslav. Meine Erfahr- 
 ungen mit Lumiéres Autochromplatten. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 49-57.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 20, MFA. 
 1078. Ueber die gleichmassige Far- 
 benempfindlichkeit bei Autochromplatten. 
 (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
 Jahrg. 22, p. 127-128.) MFA 
 
 1079. Intensification of the autochrome. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 76.) MFA 
 
 Suggests Monkhoven’s silver cyanide process. 
 
 1080. Ives, Herbert Eugene. An experi- 
 mental study of the Lippmann color pho- 
 tograph. (Astrophysical journal, Chicago, 
 1908, v.27, p. 325-352.) OMA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1908, v.55, p. 942-944, 965-967, 979-982, 
 MFA, and in Zeitschrift fir wissenschaftliche Pho- 
 tographie, Leipzig, 1908, v. 6, p. 373-406, PLC. 
 
 1081. Jones, Chapman. Autochrome plates. 
 (Knowledge & scientific news, London, 
 May, 1908, new series, v. 5, p. 104.) OA 
 Method of intensifying apparently useless plates. 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 46, MFA. 
 1082. Kinematography in natural col- 
 ours. (Nature, London, May 7, 1908, v. 78, 
 p. 21 OA 
 Brief account of G. Albert Smith’s method. 
 1083. The photography of colour. 
 (Science progress, London, 1908, v. 2, p. 
 349-368. ) OA 
 
 An excellent historical article. 
 
 1084. Jones, T. H. Simplified development 
 of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, v.55, p 
 17) MFA 
 
 1085. Juhl, Ernst. A Hamburg view of the 
 work of Miller and the Hofmeisters. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Octé. 2;- 19080 555, pi 752-753a,) MFA 
 
 1086. Koenig, Ernst. Die Autochrom- 
 Photographie und die verwandten Dreifar- 
 benraster-Verfahren. Berlin: G. Schmidt, 
 1908. 3 p.1., 60 p. 8°. (Photographische 
 Bibliothek. Bd. 23.) MFV 
 
 1087. Laurvik, John Nilsen. The new color 
 photography. illus. (International studio, 
 New York, 1908, v. 34, p. xxi-xxiii.) fMAA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
We THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1088. Law, E. F. Application 
 photography to metallography. 
 Steel Institute. Journal, London, 
 v. 76, p. 151-154.) 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 For comments see British journal of photography, 
 London, July 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 54, MFA. 
 
 1089. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Ad- 
 vances in the taking, viewing, and projec- 
 tion of the Lippmann colour photographs. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 
 
 Editorial comment is appended. 
 
 1090. 
 
 of colour 
 (Iron and 
 
 1908, 
 VHA 
 
 The Purkinje phenomenon in 
 photographic plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. a 
 
 
 
 
 
 1091. Ueber die Abstimmung der 
 Lippmann - Platte. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 
 fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. as 
 164.) MF 
 
 1092. Lenses for colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Homocentric lenses from Ross, Ltd. 
 
 1093. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Zur Ge- 
 schichte der Farbenrasterfilms. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 
 22, p. 147-151.) MFA 
 
 1094. Limmer, Fr. Uber Farbenausbleich- 
 
 papiere. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 
 denz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. uate 
 A 
 
 1095. Litchfield, Charles. Exposure in 
 autochrome work and the use of different 
 compensation filters. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, pre 
 
 1096. Locquin, René. Autochromes by 
 artificial light. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. lee eg 
 
 Recommends a blue viewing screen between the 
 autochrome and the source of light. 
 
 1097. ——- Simplifying the handling of 
 autochrome plates. (Bulletin of photog- 
 raphy, Philadelphia, Oct. 21, 1908, v. 3, p. 
 259.) +MFA 
 
 1098. Lohmeyer, R. The gradation of 
 plates in different colored lights. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 1, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 1105. 
 
 1099. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LuMIERE. 
 Chromodiascope. Appareil pour la vision 
 des photographies polychromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 486-487.) MFA 
 
 1100. A new method of developing 
 
 autochrome plates. (American photogra- 
 
 phy, Boston, July, 1908, v. 2, p. ag 
 A 
 
 1101. Lumiére, Auguste, and _. others. 
 Screen-plate processes of colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 
 
 1102. Ueber die Entwicklung der 
 Autochromplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 179- 
 188.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 197-207, MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1103. Luther, R. Some points in stereo- 
 scopic photography with the autochrome 
 plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 
 
 1104. McIntosh, J. Along the Thames 
 with the autochrome plate. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, 
 v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 65-66. ) MFA 
 
 Interview in which the author gives some details of 
 development. 
 
 
 
 The light filter in autochrome 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 Takes exception to statements of Alfred Watkins 
 in above journal, Oct. 2, 1908, v.55, supplement, p. 
 4, 
 
 1106. Mareschal, G. La cuvette “Marbach” 
 pour développement en plein jour des 
 plaques autochromes. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 289-291.) MFA 
 
 1107, Emploi de plaques autochromes 
 en voyage. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
 1908, année 18, p. 130-131.) MFA 
 
 Experiences of Gervais-Courtellemont. 
 
 1108. Nouvelle méthode de développe- 
 ment des plaques autochromes. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, June 25, 1908, année 18, p. 
 152-1590) MFA 
 
 1109. Marriage, Ernest. Autochrome lan- 
 
 tern slides. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, Dec. 16, 1908, v. 55, p. AT 
 FA 
 
 
 
 
 
 ‘ ae for correcting deficiency of blue in lime- 
 ight 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, May, 1909, v. 16, 
 p. 187, MFA. 
 
 1110. Martin-Duncan, F. The autochrome 
 plate applied to natural science. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, April, 1908, new 
 series, v. 32, p. 172-178.) MFA 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 57 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1111. The autochrome plate in natural 
 science. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 1.) MFA 
 
 
 
 Suggestions for working plates in a biological lab- 
 
 oratory. 
 
 1112. Massiot, G. Matériel complet pour 
 la projection des vues en couleurs sur 
 plaques autochromes. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, 
 série 2, tome 24, p. 207-208.) MFA 
 
 1113. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
 construction of one-exposure cameras for 
 three-colour photography. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 58-60.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
 graphic Society. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1114. rA one - exposure three - colour 
 camera.; illus. (Photographic journal, 
 London, July, 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 
 276-280.) MFA 
 1115. - The photography of coloured 
 
 objects in principle and practice. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 1908, v. 55, p. 735-737, 754-756, 770-772, 
 MFA > 
 
 788-791.) 
 1116. —— Screen-plate colour photogra- 
 phy. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
 
 Jan. 17, 1908, v. 56, p. 195-205.) VA 
 With discussion. 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 ce. 1908, v. 55, p. 41-42, supplement, p. 12-15, 
 
 1117. Some measurements of Uto 
 paper. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. re ape 
 
 1118. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 S. H. Wratten. Plates sensitised with di- 
 cyanin and photography of the infra-red. 
 illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 25-37.) MFA 
 
 1119. A Modified’ method for the assem- 
 bling of three-colour prints on rotary 
 stripping film. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 1, 1908, v.55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 
 
 Use of carbon-stripping films supplied by Rotary 
 Photographic Co., Ltd. 
 
 1120. Monpillard, Félix. Methods of de- 
 velopment and after-treatment. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 3, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 49-51.) MFA 
 
 As applied to autochrome positive. 
 
 1121. Observations sur la technique 
 des manipulations des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 
 24, p. 231-242.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1122. Munro, L. Walker. Screen - plate 
 processes. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Appreciation of the Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 1123. Namias, Rodolfo. The preparation 
 of non- filter orthochromatic plates by 
 bathing. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 
 
 Experiments with Konig’s formula. 
 
 1124. Eine Neue Lumiéresche Farbraster- 
 platte. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 372-373.) MFA 
 
 1125. The New lLumiére screen - plate. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1908, v. 21, 
 p. 196-197, MFA. 
 
 1126. A New Lumiére screen-plate process. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 July 24, 1908, v.55, p. 557-558.) MFA 
 Abstract of French patent no. 386,147. 
 
 1127. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Zur 
 Farbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
 fiir Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
 nik fir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 
 223-232.) MFA 
 
 Principally devoted to Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 1128. Peaucellier, A. An exposure meter 
 for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 27.) 
 MFA 
 
 1129. Permanganate stains on _ auto- 
 
 chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, June 19, 1908, v. 55, p. 465.) 
 MFA 
 
 1130. Personnaz, Antonin. A propos des 
 autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, 
 tome 24, p. 179-183, 368-378.) MFA 
 
 Time of exposure and development for outdoor 
 work. 
 
 1131. Poulenc Fréres. Lanterne spéciale 
 pour plaques autochromes, construite par 
 les Etablissements Poulenc. illus. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 487-488.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 1132. Power, H. D’Arcy. Autochrome 
 notes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 
 1908, v. 15, p. 31-33.) MFA 
 
 Various suggestions for working. 
 
 1133. Color photography. (Camera 
 craft, San Francisco, 1908, v. 15, p. 311, 353; 
 1909, v. 16, p. 29, 73-74, 186-187, 321, 369.) 
 
 Notes on progress. MFA 
 1134. The Lumiére autochrome plate. 
 
 (Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 1908, 
 v. 15, p. 20-23.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
58 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1135. A new color plate. (Camera 
 crait, San Francisco, June, 1908, v. 15, p. 
 229-230.) MFA 
 
 1136. A new method of developing 
 autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, Sept., 1908, v.15, p. eta be 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lumiére’s new instructions. 
 
 sas We Progress in autochrome color 
 work. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
 1908, v. 15, p. 228.) MFA 
 
 1138. Screen-plate color photography. 
 (Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
 1908, v. 15, p. 110-111.) MFA 
 
 An epitome of opinions on development of auto- 
 chromes. 
 
 1139. Simplified development of auto- 
 
 chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 June, 1908, v.15, p. 215-216.) MF 
 
 1140. Powrie, John H. The Warner- 
 Powrie process of screen plate colour 
 photography. illus. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, 
 p. 3-10.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 928-929, MFA. 
 
 1141. Rawlins, G. E. H. Persulphate v. 
 permanganate as the reversing solution 
 for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 5, 1908, v.55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. Ss 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Sept., 1908, 
 
 v. 21, p. 109-111, MFA. 
 
 1142. Raymond, R. Paper prints from 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v.55, p.97- 
 98.) MFA 
 
 1143. Removing black spots from auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 96.) MFA 
 
 1144. Rockwood, George A. Color pho- 
 tography direct in the camera — impres- 
 sions of a veteran professional. (Bulletin 
 of photography, Philadelphia, July 8, 1908, 
 v. 3, p. 30-31.) +MFA 
 
 Autochrome process. 
 
 1145._S.,_J. C. The autochrome process. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 
 supplement, p. 72.) MFA 
 Deals with sulphide toning. 
 
 1146. Sacco, Giulio. Aberrazioni e rifles- 
 sioni nocive prodotte dai filtri di luce negli 
 apparechi fotografica. illus. (Reale ac- 
 cademia delle scienze di Torino. Atti, To- 
 rino, 1907-08, v.43, p. 767-782, 856-874.) 
 
 Translated abstract in British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, p. 53-56, MFA. 
 
 (1151. Schmidt, Hans. 
 
 1147. Schaum, Karl. On the colour of un- 
 toned photographic films. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, 
 ¥.55, D.15/—158,) 
 
 1148. Scheffer, W. Mikroskopische Unter- 
 suchungen der Autochromplatten. illus. 
 (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
 Jahrgicz2s 0: 96-110.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 25-27, MFA, 
 1149, Stripping iutcehre ment (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 87-88.) MFA 
 
 1150. Schinzel, Karl. Methoden der Kata- 
 chromie. (Chemiker Zeitung, Cothen, July 
 11, 1908, Jahrg. 32, p. 665-668.) tt VOA 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, supplement, p. 61-64, 
 under the title: Suggested catalytic methods of screen- 
 plate photography. 
 
 
 
 Das Dreifarben- 
 raster-Verfahren der Deutschen Raster 
 Gesellschaft. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle 
 a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 95-96.) MFA 
 
 1152. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. On the 
 optical and sensitising properties of the 
 isocyanin dyes. (Photographic journal, 
 London, Aug., 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 
 300- 318.) MFA 
 
 Latter part of paper in British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v.55, p. 678-681, MFA. 
 
 1153. Shivas, E. The autochrome process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 Complains that his blacks are blues. 
 suggestions. 
 
 1154. Simmen, Charles. An amidol for- 
 mula for development of autochromes by 
 inspection. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.9-10.) MFA 
 
 1155. Possibilité de développer les 
 plaques autochromes en lumiére rouge, 
 jaune ou verte. Variation de leur sensi- 
 bilité. Appréciation du temps de pose. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 24, p. 36— 
 43.) MFA 
 
 1156. Smillie, Thomas W. Recent prog- 
 ress in color photography. illus. (Smith- 
 sonian Institution. Annual report nah . 
 Washington, 1908, p. 231-237.) 
 
 1157. Smith, G. Albert. Animated noe 
 graphs in natural colours. (Royal Society 
 of Arts. Journal, London, Dec. 11, 1908, 
 v.57, p. 70-76.) VA 
 With discussion. 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, Dec. 18, 1908, v.55, p. 960-961, MFA, and in 
 Nature, London, Jan. 14, 1909, v.79, p. 314, OA. 
 
 Editorial 
 
 
 
 MFA . 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 59 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1158. Smith, John H. Leuco dyes v. the 
 bleach-out process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ie 
 
 
 
 1159. Sensitisers and desensitisers for 
 bleach-out dyes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v.55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. pee: 
 
 1160. The “Uto” bleach-out process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 
 
 1161. Spots on autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 95.) MFA 
 aise printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 
 1909, v. 16, p. 29-30, MFA. 
 1162. Stained hands in autochrome work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 87.) MFA 
 
 1163. Steichen, Eduard J. Colour photog- 
 
 
 
 raphy. illus. (Camera work, New York, 
 1908, no. 22, p. 13-24.) +MFA 
 1164. Colour photography with the 
 
 
 
 autochrome plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 17, 1908, v. a 
 p. 300-302.) MF 
 
 Notes on development and artificial lighting. 
 1165. Stenger, Erich. The Krayn screen- 
 plate process. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. Beare 
 
 
 
 
 
 1166. Linienrasterplatten ftir Farben- 
 photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., Feb. 16, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 87- 
 90.) +MFA 
 1167. Mosaic or line screen - plates 
 from three-colour negatives. (British 
 
 journal of photography, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, Dp. 30-31) 
 
 1168. Die Transparenz der neuen Farb- 
 rasterplatten. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., April 15, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 193- 
 194.) . MFA 
 
 1169. Stenger, Erich, and Frrpinanp LEI- 
 BER. On the preparation of copies of 
 screen-plate transparencies. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 1908, 
 v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 69-72, 76-79.) MFA 
 1170. The preparation of paper prints 
 from autochrome plates by means of the 
 leuco bases. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, Dp. 34-35.) ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 1171. Stieglitz, Alfred. Formalin for ob- 
 viating the frilling of autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 53-54.) MFA 
 
 1172. Stobbe, Hans. Die Photochemie 
 organischer Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir Elektrochemie, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahre. 
 14, p. 473-483.) PKA 
 
 1173. Stolze, F. Belichtungsverhaltnisse 
 fur Dreifarbenfilter. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1908, 
 Jahrg. 15, p. 379-380.) MFA 
 
 1174. ——— Farbenerscheinungen bei Gela- 
 tineemulsionen. (Photographische Chro- 
 nik, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 431-432.) 
 
 +MFA 
 
 1175. Szczepanik, Jan. Transformation 
 photographs on autochrome plates. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 2, 1908, v.55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 80.) MFA 
 
 1176. The Thames colour plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1908, v. 
 55, p. 765, 802; Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 24, 72.) MFA 
 
 1177. The Thames one-exposure colour 
 process. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. eneriy 
 
 1178. Thieme, Paul: Alcohol as an after- 
 bath in colour-sensitising dry plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 
 
 Describes a variation of procedure recommended 
 
 by Valenta for rapid bath-sensitising of gelatine 
 plates. 
 
 1179. Three-colour filters. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, 
 v. 55, p. 111-112.) MFA 
 
 Several questions answered editorially and formulas 
 for red, green, and blue given. 
 
 1180. Tilney, F. C. Exhibition of photo- 
 graphic pictures in colours by T. and O. 
 Hofmeister and H. W. Miller. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
 1908, v.55, p. 752-753.) MFA 
 1181. Where we stand in pictorial col- 
 our photography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 66-68.) 
 
 
 
 MFA 
 
 1182. Torchon, Paul. A new method of 
 developing autochrome plates. (Bulletin 
 of photography, Philadelphia, Aug. 19, 
 1908, v. 3, p. 117-118.) +MFA 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Nov., 1908, 
 
 v. 21, p. 222-223, MFA. 
 
 1183. —— Sulphide toning in autochrome 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 7, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 60.) MFA 
 
60 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1908, continued. 
 
 1184. Traut, H. Beitrage zur Geschichte 
 der Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 26, 
 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 49-54.) +MFA 
 ee the work of Joseph Alberts from 1874 to 
 
 1185. Tschoerner, Ludwig. Uber Otto 
 Pfenningers Photographien in nattrlichen 
 Farben. illus. (Photographische Korres- 
 pondenz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 496- 
 502.) MFA 
 
 1186. L’Unichrome. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 5, 1908, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 47.) MFA 
 A universal developer especially designed for auto- 
 chrome plates. 
 1187. Valenta, Eduard. Experiments on 
 the sensitising power of some new dyes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 1188. Two varnish formulae. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March 6, 
 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 20.) MFA 
 1189. —— Uber die Autochromeplatte. 
 illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 24-29.) MFA 
 Description and development directions. 
 1190. Zur Kenntnis der Autochrom- 
 platten. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 
 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 143-145.) MFA 
 
 1191. Van Deventer, J. G. The Warner- 
 Powrie method. (Nature, London, Aug. 
 20, 1908, v. 78, p. 376.) OA 
 
 Abstract. 
 
 1192. Wall, Edward John. A diagramma- 
 tic explanation of the autochrome process. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 3, 1908, v.55, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 55-56.) MFA 
 1193. A green-light carbon. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 
 1194. The H. & D. number of the auto- 
 chrome plate. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, July 3, 1908, v.55, 
 Colour photography stipplement, ©. 56.) 
 MFA 
 1195. The Society of Colour Photog- 
 raphers’ exhibition. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 41.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MFA 
 1196. Wallace, Robert James. The auto- 
 chrome plate. (Popular astronomy, 
 
 Northfield, Minn., 1908, v. 16, p. 83-91.) 
 OMA 
 
 Partial reprint in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 6, 1908, v.55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 21-23, MFA. 
 
 Gives results of precise measurements, 
 
 1197. ——- The function of a color - filter 
 and isochromatic plate in astronomical 
 photography. (Astrophysical journal, Chi- 
 cago, 1908, v.27, p. 106-124.) OMA 
 
 1198. Wallon, Etienne. Autochromie et tri- 
 chromie. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, série 2, tome 
 24, p. 381-402.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 1908, 
 année 19, p. 23-30, MFA. 
 
 1199. Warburg, J. C. Monsieur Meys’ 
 autochrome pictures. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 33-34, tha 
 
 Description of exhibition at Cannes. 
 
 1200. Ward, John J. A remedy for flat 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, p. te 
 
 1201. The Warner - Powrie screen - plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 72.) MFA 
 
 1202. Watkins, Alfred. The light filter in 
 autochrome photography. (British jour- ~ 
 nal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
 v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 96.) MFA 
 
 1203: A simple autochrome method. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 2, 1908)over5o) se alone photography 
 supplement, p. 7374 4.) MFA 
 Suggestions for exposure and development. 
 Also printed in Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 
 
 phia, Nov. 4, 1908, v. 3, p. 293-296, *MFA, and 
 Photo-era, Boston, Feb., 1909, v. 22, p. 83-89, MFA. 
 
 1204. The Watkins special Bee meter for 
 autochrome plates, made by the Watkins 
 Meter Co., Hereford. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee 
 
 
 
 1205. Worel, Karl. Das Verfahren mit den 
 Autochromplatten der Gebrtider Lumiére. 
 illus. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik ftir 1908, Halle a. S., 
 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 49-53.) MFA 
 
 1206. Zeiss autochrome accessories. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
 10, 1908, v. 55, p. 30-31.) MFA 
 
 Reference to camera and to carrier for light filter. 
 
 1909 
 1207. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 
 Exposures for colour negatives. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, Oct., 1909, new 
 series, v. 33, p. 341-342.) MFA 
 
 Also pented in British journal of photography 
 London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, p. 2-3, Mrd : 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 61 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1208. Adan, R. Nouveau procédé d’obten- 
 tion de plaques, pour la photographie des 
 couleurs, de M. Szczepanik. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 331-333.) MFA 
 
 1209. Alcide Ducos du Hauron. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 80.) MFA 
 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 1210. The Aurora colour plate. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 1211. Autochrome plates. (British journal 
 of photography, London, March 26, 1909, 
 wD, P. 257.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to reduction in price. 
 
 1212. Bayley, R. Child. Color plates com- 
 
 pared. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
 
 Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 89-90.) 
 +MFA 
 
 Comparison of Thames and Omnicolore plates. 
 
 1213. ——- Comparisons of colour screen- 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 29, 1909, v.56, p.89.) MFA 
 
 Praises the autochrome. 
 
 1214. The complete photographer. 
 New York: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1909. 
 aye 410 po. 1 1, 60 pl., 5 ports. 3. ed. illus. 
 Se. MFE 
 
 Clear account of autochrome principle, p. 283-291. 
 
 1215. Reproduction par contact et par 
 réduction des chromotypes sur plaques 
 autochromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
 graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, 
 tome 25, p. 325-329.) 
 
 1216. Bennett, Colin N. The Thames plate 
 as a fix-out process. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, 
 v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 57-59.) MFA 
 
 Non-reversal duplication process. 
 
 ee ae Thames plates and colour ad- 
 justments. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 89-90.) MFA 
 
 1218. The Bleachout process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 Refers to German patent no. 209993 of Dr. H. 
 Stobbe. 
 
 1219. Bordeaux, Jules. La photographie 
 et les couleurs. (Revue générale, Bru- 
 xelles, 1909, v. 90, p. 905+922.) * DM 
 
 1220. Bourke, Walter. An autochrome ex- 
 perience. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 17, 1909, v. 56, p. 735.) MFA 
 
 Asks why the color disappeared from an auto- 
 chrome plate after having been finished in the usual 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 way. Answers from three correspondents in above 
 journal, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 80. 
 
 1221. Bourrée, M. H. Practical notes on 
 the autochrome process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, March 5, 1909, 
 v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 22.) MFA 
 
 Directions for developing, reducing, and drying. 
 
 1222. Calmels, H. Nouveaux écrans colo- 
 rés de Wratten and Wainwright, Ltd. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 409- 
 410.) MFA 
 
 1223. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The intensi- 
 fication of autochromes. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 
 56, Colour photography supplement, pag 
 
 1224. Chéron, André. Appareil pour la 
 photographie et la projection en couleurs 
 par sélection trichrome. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1909, série 2, tome 25, p.117-121.) MFA 
 Also printed in Photo-gazetie, Paris, April 25, 1909, 
 année 19, p. 109-112, MFA. 
 1225. —— A portable camera for one-ex- 
 posure colour photography. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 20-21.) MFA 
 
 1226. Collodion emulsion. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 17, 
 1909, v. 56, p. 730.) MFA 
 
 Tells how to avoid spots. 
 
 1227. Colour photography at the Dresden 
 Exhibition. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 
 
 1228. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
 phy. (In: J. B. Schriever, Complete self- 
 instructing library of practical photogra- 
 phy. Seranton, 1909, 8°). vi8)p. hse 
 
 Detailed instructions for autochromes, three-color 
 photography, and pinatype. 
 
 1229. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Studio por- 
 traiture with the Thames plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 65-66.) MFA 
 
 1230. ——- Uto prints from the Thames 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 5, 1909, v. 56, p. are 
 
 1231. Coustet, Ernest. Les plaques omni- 
 colores. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 April 25, 1909, année 19, p. 101-108.) MFA 
 
 Details of exposure and development. 
 
 1232. Crémier, Victor. Pour les débutants 
 “Autochromistes.” (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 Sept. 25, 1909, année 19, p. 190-195.) MFA 
 
 Exposure and development. 
 
62 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1233. Some essential points in the 
 autochrome process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. oe 
 
 1234. Sur la traduction des couleurs 
 par la plaque “autochrome.” (Photo- 
 ‘ gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1909, année 20, 
 p. 4-12.) MFA 
 
 1235. Dalmas, R., comte de. Produit pour 
 inversion des plaques autochromes en 
 voyage. (Société francaise de _photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 
 
 25, p. 102-103.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 40, MFA. 
 
 1236. Damry, A. On the intensification of 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 
 
 1237. Daur, Guido. Mixtures of dyes. as 
 sensitisers of gelatine plates. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 1909, 
 v. 56, p. 572-575, 592-595, 610-612, 630-633, 
 649-652.) MFA 
 
 An abridged translation of thesis presented at the 
 University of Munster. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1238. Developing panchromatic plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 546.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to acid developer for red sensitive 
 plates. German patent granted to R. Krayn. 
 1239. Devices for the automatic demonstra- 
 tion of facts of light, colour, and photog- 
 raphy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, 1909, v.56, p. 476-480, 499- 
 501.) MFA 
 Devices used by Dr. Goldberg at the Dresden Exhi- 
 bition. 
 1240. Dillaye, Frédéric. Le développe- 
 ment surveillé des plaques autochromes. 
 
 illus. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
 graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p. 108—- 
 117.) MFA 
 
 1241. Exposé et critique d’un nouveau 
 mode de traitement des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
 graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p.117- 
 124.) MFA 
 
 1242. D’Osmond, H. Le portrait instan- 
 tané sur autochromes. illus. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, June 25, 1909, année 19, p. 
 141-146.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, p. 60-61, MFA. 
 
 1243. Drake - Brockman, H. G. Auto- 
 chromes and extremes of contrast. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 1, 1909, 
 ment, p. 73.) 
 
 Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 1910, année 20, p. 86-89, MFA. 
 
 
 
 March 25, 
 
 v. 56, Colour photography supple- — 
 MFA > 
 
 1244. The Dufay dioptichrome  screen- 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 39.) MFA 
 
 1245. Engelken. Ozo-pinatype in mono- 
 chrome and colour photographs. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 7, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photeg are supple- 
 ment, p. 36-37.) MFA 
 
 1246. Facsimile reproduction of coloured 
 originals. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, April 23, 1909, v. 56, p. sae 
 
 Editorial comment that Dr. Mees’s book omits a 
 certain process. Dr. Mees answers in the issue of 
 April 30, 1909, v. 56, p. 348. 
 
 1247. The Fading of the autochrome col- 
 our screen. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, July 9, 1909, v. 56, p. ga | 
 
 1248. Farbige Kinematographen - Aufnah- 
 
 men (Kinemacolor). (Photographische 
 Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 120- 
 1Zi3) MFA 
 
 1249. Farmer, Howard. The reproduction 
 of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. seeks 
 
 1250. Fenske, E. The Aurora colour filter- 
 plate. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1251. —— A method of producing positives 
 direct on gelatine plates. (British journal 
 of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
 56, Colour photography supplement, Rank 
 
 1252. Flashlight autochrome portraits. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 
 supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 Method of Mr. B. J. Falk. 
 
 1253. Forestier, E. Photographie des cou- 
 leurs. Trichromie. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 Oct. 25, 1909, année 19, p. 208-212.) MFA 
 
 Geisler process. 
 
 1254. Four-colour stereoscopic photogra- 
 phy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Jan. 29, 1909, v. 56, p. eels, 
 
 British patent no. 28764 of 1907. For comments 
 
 see issue of Feb. 25, 1909, v. 56, p. 98 
 
 1255. Frank, Max. Die Farbenphotogra- 
 phie auf der Dresdener Ausstellung. (Pho- 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Oct. 13, 
 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 513-515.) +MFA 
 
 1256. Friedburg, L. H. Ueber die Photo- 
 graphie in Farben. illus. (Technologist, 
 New York, 1909, v. 14, p. 137-157.) VA 
 
 Historical. 
 
 WE i, 
 ne 3 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY rar) 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1257. Fritz, Felix. A suggested modifica- 
 tion of the Krayn screen-plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 8. MFA 
 
 1257a. Gargam de Moncetz. Formule de 
 sensibilisation chromatique pour le rouge 
 extréme et le commencement de l’infra 
 rouge. (Académie des sciences. Comptes 
 “ieee Paris, Nov. 15, 1909, tome 149, rT) 
 851-852.) * EO 
 
 1258. Gebhard, Kurt. Eine Bemerkung zum 
 Ausbleichverfahren. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, Feb., 1909, Bd. 46, 
 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 p. 63-65.) 
 1259. Nachtrag zur Theorie des Aus- 
 bleichverfahrens. (Photographische Kor- 
 
 poet, Wien, Dec., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
 557.) MFA 
 
 1260. Notiz zum Ausbleichverfahren. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 June, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 280.) MFA 
 
 1261. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichens 
 organischer Farbstoffe. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, April, 1909, Bd. 46, 
 p. 185-186.) MFA 
 
 1262. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 
 fahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 457-470, 508- 
 Sly, 553-557.) MFA 
 
 1263. Gephard, Karl. A contribution to 
 the chemistry of the bleach-out process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 1264. Gilchrist, Charles A. Color photog- 
 raphy. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, 1909, v. 4, p. 379-380; v. 5, 
 p. 8-9, 38-41.) +MFA 
 
 General article. 
 
 1265. The Goerz autochrome dark - slide. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 5, 1909, v.56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 1266. Goldsmith, Alfred Norton. Modern 
 practice in color photography. (School of 
 Mines quarterly, New York, 1909, v. 30, p. 
 130-138.) OA 
 
 1267. Gravier, Charles. 
 des couleurs simplifiée. 
 de photographie. Bulletin, 
 série 2, tome 25, p. 411-412.) 
 
 Simplification of autochrome procedure. 
 
 1268. A Half - guinea autochrome outfit. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 Plates, filter, chemicals, measures, etc., supplied 
 by The Lumiére N. A. Co. 
 1269. The Henderson award. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 La photographie 
 (Société francaise 
 Paris, 1909, 
 
 MFA 
 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 80.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to grant to Mr. C. L. Finlay for 
 his work in connection with the Thames plate. 
 
 1270. Die Herstellung des Rasters der Om- 
 nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Haliesa.S., May.5,.1909, Jahre. 16, 9.227.) 
 
 +MFA 
 
 1271. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. An auto- 
 chrome hint. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 
 
 Method of overcoming blueness. 
 
 1272. Houdaille. Recherches expérimen- 
 tales sur la détermination du temps de 
 pose des plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 292-297.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 5, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 69-71, MFA. 
 
 1273. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 compensation filter for the autochrome 
 plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 14-15, 17-18.) MFA 
 1274. The correct orthochromatic 
 light-filter. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. ba A 
 
 
 
 Author employs the sector-disc apparatus of Abney 
 for measuring the luminosities of the colored papers 
 used in making the test chart. 
 
 1275: The effect of illumination on 
 exposure and viewing of autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 26-29.) MFA 
 
 1276. rMetallic screens for auto- 
 chromes., illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.47.) MFA 
 
 eae The sensitiveness of dyes to 
 light. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 63-64.) MFA 
 
 Use of glycerine, salts of arsenic, and other sub- 
 stances to promote bleaching. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1278. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photo- 
 graphic optics and colour photography, in- 
 cluding the camera, kinematograph, opti- 
 cal lantern, and the theory and practice of 
 image formation... London: Ward & 
 Co., 1009 cesses alluss 34 MFH 
 
 1279. Jougla, J., the younger. Sur les 
 plaques ‘Omnicolores” de la Société 
 Jougla. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 
 25, p. 199-203.) MFA 
 
 1280. Klein, Henry Oscar. My experience 
 with the autochrome plate. (American 
 annual of photography for 1910, New 
 York, 1909, v. 24, p. 130-133.) MFA 
 
64 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1281. Knowles, Hugh C. Screen plate 
 color photography. (American annual of 
 photography for 1910, New York, 1909, 
 v. 24, p. 38-41.) MFA 
 
 Discusses different commercial plates. 
 
 1282. The Latest color plate —the Omni- 
 colore. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 88-89.) 
 
 +MFA 
 
 1283. Lefort, V. Les peintres et la photo- 
 graphie des couleurs. (Photo - gazette, 
 Paris, May 25, 1909, année 19, p. eae 
 
 Relation of color photography to art. 
 
 1284. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Highly 
 reflecting lantern screens for autochrome 
 and other projections. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 4, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 44-47.) MFA 
 
 1285. A three-colour projection lan- 
 tern. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 1286. —— Ueber einen neuen Projektions- 
 schirm mit metallischer Oberflache fiir 
 
 
 
 farbige und lichtswache Bilder. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1909, 
 Jahrg. 16, p. 245-248, 256-260.) +MFA 
 
 1287. Lelong, Adrien. 
 without a dark-room. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. oe 
 
 Describes developing dish and development. 
 1288. A suggested method of obtain- 
 ing paper prints from_ screen - plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome work 
 
 
 
 1289. Lenses for colour work. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
 1909, v. 56, p. 804.) MFA 
 
 Recommends the Zeiss Apochromatic Tessar. 
 
 1290. Leon, L. C. An unsuspected cause 
 of failure in autochrome work. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 64.) MFA 
 
 Chromatic aberration due to unscrewed cell of lens. 
 
 1291. Letouzey, V. Appareil pour voir par 
 transparence les plaques a réseau poly- 
 chrome, construit par M. E. Lorillon. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 83- 
 84.) MFA 
 
 1292. Limmer, Fr. Eine Betrachtung tiber 
 die Fixierung von Farbenanpassungsbil- 
 dern. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 226-227.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1293. Ein Fortschritt auf dem Gebiete 
 der indirekten Farbenphotographie. (Zeit- 
 schrift fiir angewandte Chemie, Leipzig, 
 1909, Jahrg. 22, p. 14-15.) PKA 
 
 Szcezepanik process. 
 
 1294. Sensibilisatoren ftir das Farben- 
 anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Jahrg. 46, p. 
 4-14.) MFA 
 
 Comment on Dr. Smith’s article in British journal 
 
 of photography on sensitizers and desensitizers for the 
 bleachout process. 
 
 1295. Die Szczepanik-Hollborn-Vera- 
 colorplatte. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, Aug., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
 373-379.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 2, 1909, v.56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 49-51, MFA, 
 
 1296. Eine Zusammenstellung der fiir 
 das Farbenanpassungsverfahren wichtigen 
 Literatur. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, March, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 104— 
 106.) MFA 
 
 Bibliography covering years 1801-1908. 
 
 1297. Loewy, Alfred. Uber Dunkelkam- 
 merbeleuchtung, Haltbarkeit der Auto- 
 chromplatten und anderes aus der Praxis 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 der Autochromphotographie. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, 
 Bd. 46, p. 121-123, 159-166.) MFA 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 37-38, FA. 
 
 Deals with darkroom safety light, a three-solution 
 pyro formula, intensifying and reducing, tests for 
 permanency, and the action of heat upon the plate. 
 
 1298. Lotus, H. Nouveau procédé de fab- 
 rication de plaques en couleurs. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 1909, année 20, p. 
 36-37.) MFA 
 
 Szcezepanik process. 
 
 1299. Lumiére, Auguste. Traitement 
 simplifié des plaques autochromes. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 449-451.) 
 MFA 
 
 1300. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 A magazine apparatus for the viewing of 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Communication to the Société francaise de photo- 
 
 
 
 graphie. Apparatus is called the chromodiascope. 
 1301. Note sur un dispositif permet- 
 tant de reproduire, par contact, des 
 
 chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
 chromes. illus. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 
 2, tome 25, p. 457-459.) MFA 
 
 1302. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Sur 
 la correction de la surexposition et de la 
 sousexposition au cours du développe- 
 ment dans le traitement simplifié des 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 65 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 plaques autochromes. 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, 
 série 2, tome 25, p. 210-213.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 3, 1909, v.56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 67, MFA: 
 
 1303. Ueber die Moglichkeit, den Ex- 
 positionsgrad der Autochromplatten absu- 
 schatzen und die Zusammensetzung des 
 Entwicklers im Laufe der Entwicklung zu 
 modifizieren, um die tiber- oder unterex- 
 ponierten Bilder zu verbesseren. (Jahr- 
 buch ftir Photographie und Reproduc- 
 tionstechnik fir 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, 
 Jahrg. 23, p. 27-31.) MFA 
 
 1304. Luther, R. A new colour process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 Process of Russian inventor Loundin. Claims that 
 instantaneous exposures may be given. 
 
 Also printed in Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 
 phia, Dec. 29, 1909, v. 5, p. 408, ;MFA. 
 
 1305. Makers’ instructions for the use of 
 the “omnicolore” plates. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Translated abstract of booklet issued by Messrs. 
 Jougla. 
 
 (Société francaise 
 
 
 
 1306. Making autochromes by enclosed arc 
 light. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 29, 1909, v.56, p.86.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to filter. 
 
 1307. Malby, H. T., and others. The auto- 
 chrome process in many hands. (Photo- 
 graphic journal, London, March, 1909, new 
 series, v. 33, p. 136-142.) MFA 
 
 1308. Mareschal, G. The effect of develop- 
 ing solution on the sensitiveness of the 
 autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 1309. Emploi des plaques auto- 
 chromes ayant subi l’action du développe- 
 ment. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1909, 
 année 19, p. 213.) MFA 
 
 1310. Persistance de la_ sensibilité 
 chromatique des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 410- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 411.) MFA 
 7311. Reproduction des plaques en 
 couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 
 
 1909, année 20, p. 37-38.) MFA 
 
 Results of prize contest by the journal La Vulgari- 
 sation scientifique. 
 
 1312. Martin-Duncan, F. Some further 
 experiments with the autochrome plate. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, eos.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions as to development. Use of special 
 Lumiére screen made for microphotography with the 
 electric arc. 
 
 1313. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
 Characteristics of the ‘“omnicolore” screen- 
 plate. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, Dp. 9-11.) MFA 
 
 1314. Color and photography. (Ameri- 
 can annual of photography for 1910, New 
 York, 1909, v. 24, p. 20-23.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 131s: The photography of coloured 
 objects. New York:,. Tennant & Ward 
 r1909;. vi, 69° p. “illus. 8°. MFK 
 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, April 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 311, MFA. The Library 
 also has 4th edition entered under Eastman Kodak 
 Company. 
 
 1316. A report on the present condi- 
 tion of sensitometry. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
 p. 685-687.) MF FA 
 
 See section on color sensitometry. 
 
 
 
 1317. Meister Lucius & Briining. Instruc- 
 tions for the use of Hoechst filter dyes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 79.) . MFA 
 
 1318. Merckens, W. Colour prints on 
 paper by the bleachout process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 Suitable dyes for the purpose. Translation of part 
 of an article in the Revue technique et industrielle. 
 
 1319. Miethe, Adolf. Photographische 
 Aufnahmen vom Ballon aus. Nach einer 
 Serie von Vortragen, die im Auftrag des 
 Berliner Vereins ftir Luftschiffahrt gehal- 
 ten worden sind. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm 
 
 Knapp, 1909. 3 p.1., 70 p., 1 pl. 8°. (En- 
 cyklopadie der Photographie. Heft coe 
 
 Contains a chapter on three-color aerial photogra- 
 phy, for a translation of which see British journal of 
 aha edee ony: London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 86, MFA. 
 
 1320. Unter der Sonne Oberagyptens 
 neben den Pfaden der Wissenschaft. Ber- 
 lin: Dietrich Reimer, 1909. 4 pL, mae p. 
 illus. 8°. LF 
 
 “These [the illustrations] are not only in mono- 
 chrome, but include some fifty examples of colour 
 photography from nature by the three-exposure 
 method, which Professor Miethe may be said to have 
 used more extensively and to better effect than any- 
 one else as a result of_his introduction of the iso- 
 cyanine sensitisers.”” — From a review in the British 
 journal of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 56, MFA, 
 
 
 
 1321. Miller, Malcolm Dean. The auto- 
 chrome process. (American annual of 
 photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
 v. 13, p. 77-78.) ; MFA 
 
66 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1322. Monpillard, Félix. Ecran pour la 
 microphotographie sur plaques auto- 
 chromes, avec la lumiére oxyhydrique. 
 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 245— 
 247.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 61-62, MFA. . 
 
 1323. Etude sur les dominantes colo- 
 rees en photographie autochrome. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 404-409, 
 419-426.) MFA 
 
 1324. Indoor autochrome portraits by 
 flashlight. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.51-52.) MFA 
 
 From the Bulletin of the Société francaise de 
 photographie, 
 
 1325. Mueller, Gustav. On the redevelop- 
 ment of autochromes which have practi- 
 cally disappeared in the fixing bath. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 1326. N., A.J. Imperfect register in three- 
 colour work. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 9, 1909, v. 56, p. 290.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 1327. Namias, Rodolfo. The conversion 
 of silver images into those of lead and 
 other metals and the use of the compounds 
 as mordants for obtaining prints in dif- 
 ferent colours. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 68- 
 69.) MFA 
 
 1328. Lead compounds as fixatives of 
 dyes in three-colour projection. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 91.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1329. New Lumiére plate. (Bulletin of 
 photography, Philadelphia, Dec. 29, 1909, 
 v. 5, p. 408.) ; +MFA 
 
 Brief reference to autostereoscopic plate. 
 
 1330. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Col- 
 oured films on metallic surfaces in relation 
 to colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. wae 
 
 Describes the experiments of Joseph Girard. 
 
 1331. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Drei- 
 farbenkameras fiir einmalige Exposition 
 u. a.— Die Dufay-Platte. illus. (Jahr- 
 buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
 technik fiir 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 
 23, p. 170-176.) MFA 
 
 1332. Die Omnicolor - Platte. © 
 graphische Welt, 
 Jahrg. 23, p. 49-51.) 
 
 Formulas for working. 
 
 (Photo- 
 Leipzig, April, 1909, 
 MFA 
 
 1333. The Omnicolore plate in practice. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photograph 
 supplement, p. 42-43.) MF 
 
 1334. The Omnicolore plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 4, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 1335. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 
 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 38-39.) MFA 
 
 1336. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 96.) MFA 
 
 “It is very evident that omnicolore transparencies 
 must be kept away from strong light if they are to be 
 preserved.”’ 
 
 1337. Die Omnicolore-Platte fiir Farben- 
 
 photographie. (Photographische Mittei- 
 lungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p.74.) MFA 
 1338. Palocsay, Albin von. Neue Erfah- 
 
 rungen aus der Praxis des Autochrom- 
 prozesses. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, Dec., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
 569-579.) MFA 
 
 Apparatus for viewing. 
 
 1339. Panchromatic collodion emulsion. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 557.) MFA 
 
 Uses pinaverdol and ethyl violet. 
 
 1340. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Color 
 photography as a paying proposition. 
 (American annual of photography for 
 1910, New York, 1909, v. 24, p. satire 
 
 1341. Personnaz, Antonin. Apropos of 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 67-68.) MFA 
 
 Defends autochromes as “art.” 
 
 1342. Pledge, John H. The properties of 
 the Dufay dioptichrome screen-plate and 
 the new Warner -Powrie screen - plate. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 81-83.) MFA 
 
 1343. Poulenc Fréres. Appareil pour 1’ex- 
 amen des vues par transparence et notam- 
 ment des vues sur plaques autochromes. 
 illus. (Société francaise de. photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1909, série 2, tome 25, p. 
 39-40.) MFA 
 
 1344. Power, H. D’Arcy. Bromide prints in 
 two or more colors. illus. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Oct., 1909, v. 16, p. peas 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 67 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1345. Simplified development of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 Uses rodinal or amidol for the first development. 
 
 1346. Powrie, John H. La “Florence helio- 
 chromic plate.” illus. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, sé- 
 rie 2, tome 25, p. 386-393.) MFA 
 
 1347. Practical methods of autochrome 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 
 
 1348. Quentin, H. Color photography. 
 The “omnicolor” plate. (Scientific Ameri- 
 can supplement, New York, 1909, v. 67, p. 
 359.) TT VA 
 
 1349, Reproduction of screen - plate 
 transparencies in paper. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. eres 
 
 
 
 
 
 Three negatives are made from autochrome plate 
 through appropriate screens and prints made by a 
 method such as the three-color carbon process. 
 
 1350. Renwick, F. F. Isolating the filter 
 cuts of a screen-plate. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, bier 
 
 1351. Reproductions of autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 96.) MFA 
 
 Warns against entrusting autochromes to photo- 
 engravers who are careless in regard to the heat from 
 arc lights. 
 
 1352. Revised prices of autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 Prices of different sized plates and of chemicals. 
 
 1353. Scheffer, W. Further notes on the 
 “omnicolore” plate. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, March 5, 
 
 
 
 1909, v. 56, p. 18-19.) MFA 
 1354. Notes on the degree of fineness 
 of colour screen-plates. illus. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 62-63.) MFA 
 
 1355. Die Omnicolore- Platte. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1909, Bd. 46, p. 318-322, 482-484.) MFA 
 
 1356. On a new type of Warner- 
 Powrie screen-plate. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, June 4, 1909, 
 v. 56,-Colour photography supplement, p. 
 43-44.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1357. —— The structure and properties of 
 the “omnicolore” plate. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 5, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 11-13.) MFA 
 
 1358. Schloemann, Eduard. Die neueren 
 
 Forschungen in der Farbenphotographie 
 
 nach Gabriel Lippmann. (Photographische 
 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 355- 
 
 372, 407-414.) MFA 
 Bibliography, p. 413-414. 
 
 1359. Seyewetz, A. Die Autochromplatte. 
 (Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
 1909, Bd. 46, p. 295-300, 309-312.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Congress of 
 Applied Photography in Dresden. 
 1360. Sforza, Francis. Autochromes and 
 the Sterry method. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 95-96.) 
 MFA 
 States that the Sterry solution is useless as re- 
 straining the development of autochrome plates. 
 1361. Suggested processes of helio- 
 chromy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 
 Hopes for “a sensitive film formed of a perfectly 
 combined mixture of three emulsions sensitised for 
 the three primary colours...to be developed by the 
 most simple treatment.”’ . 
 1362. Simplified treatment of autochrome 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 26.) MFA 
 Suggestions by the Lumiére N. A. Co. 
 
 1363. Smith, John H. Note on the influ- 
 ence of the presence of photographic de- 
 veloping agents in the bleachout process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 1364. Printing frame for autochrome 
 and other colour-screen positives. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 2-5.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1365. Spots on autochromes. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 1909, 
 ¥n00, Da / 6.) MFA 
 
 1366. Stereoscopic autochromes. (British 
 iournal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 59.) MFA 
 
 1367. Stobbe, Hans. Bleach-out colour 
 photographs. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of German patent. 
 
 1368. Stolze, F. Belichtung fiir die Schat- 
 ten und Belichtungsverhaltnisse ftir Drei- 
 farbenfilter. (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle a. S., March 3, 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 117- 
 118.) +MFA 
 
68 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1369. Streissler, Alfred. Ein neues Ras- 
 
 ter fiir die Farbenphotographie der Gebr. 
 
 Lumie€re. (Photographische Welt, Leip- 
 
 zig, ues 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 121- 122.) MFA 
 Dp: . No. 207750. 
 
 1370. Bean Jan. Protective varnishes 
 for the autochrome plate. (British journal 
 of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
 56, Colour photography supplement, vee 
 
 1371. The Thames colour plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 2, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 56.) MFA 
 
 Eetracts from instructions issued by the company. 
 
 1372. The Thames colour plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 66.) MFA 
 Suggested development for new combined form of 
 the plate. 
 1373. The Thames colour plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1909, v. 
 Sieh. 150,170; 180,.205.) MFA 
 
 1374. Thames Colour Plate Company. 
 Monochrome and colour results at one ex- 
 posure. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 1375. The Thames Colour Plate Co. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 80.) MFA 
 
 Brief account of their exhibition. 
 
 1376. The Thames Colour Plate, Ltd. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 96.) MFA 
 
 Gives a list of the incorporators. 
 
 1377. Thieme, Paul. Autochrom-Aufnah- 
 men auf Reisen. (Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 81-84.) 
 MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 40, A, 
 1378. Thovert, J. Instantaneous exposures 
 on the autochrome plate. (British journal 
 of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. a 
 
 1379. Three-colour projection. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 72.) MFA 
 _The mirror in the Ives kromskop is replaced by a 
 prism. 
 1380. Toch, Maximilian. The Lumiére 
 color process simplified. (American pho- 
 tography, Boston, May, 1909, v. 3, p.274— 
 278.) MFA 
 Suggestions for development. 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, July, 1909, v. 23, 
 p. 20-23, MFA. 
 
 1381. Valenta, Eduard. Einiges tiber Om- 
 nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Korres- 
 pondenz, Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 234— 
 236.) MFA 
 
 For colored illustration showing grains of auto- 
 chrome, omnicolore, Warner-Powrie, and Thames 
 plates, see November number, opp. p. 552. 
 
 1382. Meine Erfahrungen mit der 
 “Omnicoloreplatte.” (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 
 
 
 
 
 
 graphie und Reproductionstechnik fir 
 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 150- 
 1553) MFA 
 1383. Die Thames Farbenplatte. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 Jan., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 32-35.) MFA 
 
 1384. Vereinfachte Arbeitsanweisung fiir 
 die Entwicklung der Autochromplatten. 
 
 (Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
 1909, Bd. 46, p. 121.) MFA 
 1385. Wall, Edward John. Photography 
 
 in colours. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Nov., 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 379- 
 380.) MFA 
 
 Quotes from a four-page pamphlet in Spanish on 
 the Seebeck process. 
 
 1386. Warburg, J. C.’ Autochrome prices 
 —a protest. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v.56, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 1387. Ward, Henry Snowden. Orthochro- 
 matics, light-filtering, color photography. 
 (Photographic annual, London, 1909, 5th 
 ed., p. 30-45.) MFA 
 
 Recipes for various processes, including Lumiére, 
 autochrome, omnicolore, Thames, and two-color helio- 
 chromy. 
 
 1388. Waterhouse, James. The photo- 
 graphic work of Messrs. A. Lumiére et ses 
 fils, of Lyons. (Photographic journal, 
 London, March, 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 
 143-145.) MFA 
 
 1389. ———- Wiinsch’s researches on the pri- 
 mary components of white light. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 7, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 34-36.) MFA 
 
 1390. Watkins time thermometer for auto- 
 chrome work. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
 photography. supplement, p. 72.) MFA 
 
 1391. Wentzel, Fritz. Experiments in col- 
 our-sensitising chloride emulsions. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1909, v. 56, p. 5-7, 22-23, 41-44, wage, 
 
 1392. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Uber Far- 
 benphotographie und verwandte naturwis- 
 senschaftliche Fragen. Vortrag gehalten 
 auf der 80. Naturforscherversammlung zu 
 Coln a. Rh...am 24. September, 1908. 
 Leipzig: J. A. Barth, 1909. 88p.,3 pl. 8°. 
 
 MFV 
 
 Bibliography, p. 49-51. 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 69 
 
 1909, continued. 
 
 1393. Young, Sidney L. A three-lens one- 
 exposure colour camera. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 2, 
 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1394. Zavoda, Bohuslav. A daylight roll- 
 holder for three-colour exposures. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
 
 supplement, p. 87.) MFA 
 1395. Zu den neuen Farbrasterplatten. 
 illus. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
 
 Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 122-124.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome, Omnicolore, Thames, Warner-Powrie 
 plates. 
 1396. Zur Entwicklung der Autochrom- 
 platten. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
 Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 347-348.) MFA 
 
 1910 
 
 1397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 On the extinction of colour by reduction 
 of luminosity. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 1, 1910, v.57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ek 
 
 A 
 
 1398. Autochrome_ reversing solution. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, p. 91-92.) MF 
 
 Reference to suggestion by Comte Dalmas. 
 
 1399. Autochrome work. (British journal 
 of photography, London, July 22, 1910, v. 
 57, p. 563-564.) MFA 
 
 _ Correspondence regarding dark spot in centre of 
 
 picture. 
 
 1400. Beach, F. C. A new system of color 
 
 photography. illus. (American photogra- 
 
 phy, Boston, July, 1910, v. 4, p. 413-414.) 
 MFA 
 
 Frederic E. Ives’s process. 
 
 1401. Bennett, Colin N. Note on a pioneer 
 screen-ruled roll-film. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 
 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 66-67.) MFA 
 Describes a small sample which he thinks is of 
 German origin. 
 1402. On compensating screen-plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 17-19.) MFA 
 
 1403. Bouldoyre, R. The use of ordinary 
 plates in determining exposure for auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 86-87.) MFA 
 
 1404. Bouton, L., and J. Feytaup. La pho- 
 tographie stéréoscopique en couleur et ses 
 applications scientifiques. (Académie de 
 sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, May 30, 
 1910, tome 150, p. 1424-1425.) * EO 
 
 
 
 1405. Braham, A. C. The Dufay diopti- 
 chrome colour plate. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Gus 
 MF 
 
 Paper and discussion at the Royal stefan 
 Society. Working instructions are given. 
 
 1406. Burnham, J. Appleton. Observations 
 on the autochrome process. (Photo-era, 
 Boston, May, 1910, v. 24, p. 197-201.) MFA 
 
 1407. Casson, W. A. Exposure and de- 
 velopment in colour work. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, 
 v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 16.) MFA 
 
 1408. Colour photography at the Royal 
 Botanic Society. (British journal of pho- 
 
 togtapny,sondon, = Oct. 7,.- 1910, -¥. S7; 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 77.) 
 MFA 
 
 System attributed to Mr. E. T. Butler shown to be 
 covered by an earlier patent. 
 
 1409. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
 phy on paper as a commercial proposition. 
 illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, July, 
 1910, v. 17, p. 261-266.) MFA 
 
 1410. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Direct color 
 photography — newest color plate demon- 
 strated. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, Dec. 28, 1910, v. 7, p. 4 
 434.) +MFA 
 
 Dufay process. 
 
 1411. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 5, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 
 
 Directions for working. 
 
 1412. Screen-plate colour work. (Pho- 
 
 tographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, new 
 
 series, v. 34, p. 4-9 MFA 
 With discussion. 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 10, 1909, v. 56, p. 959-960, MFA. 
 
 1413. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
 couleurs; les plaques dioptichromes. (Re- 
 vue scientifique, Paris, 1910, série 5, année 
 48, semestre 1, p. 494-497.) OA 
 
 1414. Les plaques dioptichromes. illus. 
 (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1910, année 
 20, p. 101-107.) MFA 
 
 Dufay process. 
 
 1415. Crémier, Victor. 
 sur autochromes. illus. (Photo - gazette, 
 Paris, 1910, année 21, p. 21-26.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 9-10, M ‘A. 
 
 1416. Dalmas, R., comte de. Sujets en- 
 cadrés sur plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 396-398.) MFA 
 
 Also ppatee in Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1911, 
 année 21, 187, MFA, and British journal of pho- 
 tography, Perndon, Jan. 6, 1911, v.58, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 7-8, "MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Coucher de soleil 
 
70 THE NEW YORK ‘PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1910, continued. 
 
 1417. —— Utilisation des plaques auto- 
 chromes d’une ancienneté relative de fabri- 
 cation. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, 
 p. 102-103.) MFA 
 
 Suggests much increased exposure. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32, MFA. 
 
 1418. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. FINray. 
 Later modifications in the Thames colour 
 plate. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, p. 42-43.) MFA 
 
 1419. Didier, Léon. Paper prints from 
 omnicolore plates by the pinatype process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 1420. Dillaye, Frédéric. Les dioptichromes 
 “Dufay.” (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
 graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.130- 
 145.) MFA 
 
 1421. ——- Ecrans pour plaques auto- 
 chromes exposées a la lumiére artificielle. 
 (In his: Les nouveautés photographiques 
 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.112-114.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1422. Les omnicolores. (In his: Les 
 nouveautés photographiques 1910. Paris, 
 W104 3°. py. 125-127.) MFA 
 1423. Les plaques Thames a réseau 
 polychrome. (In his: Les nouveautés 
 photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. 
 p. 127-129.) MFA 
 1424. Reproduction par contact des 
 
 chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
 chromes. illus. (In his: Les nouveautés 
 photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910.° 8°. p. 
 122-124.) MFA 
 
 1425. Traitement simplifié des auto- 
 chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
 graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p.109- 
 112.) MFA 
 
 1426. D’Osmond, H. Instantaneous por- 
 traiture on Lumiére autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 76-77.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1427. Dufay, L. Les plaques dioptichromes. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 177- 
 181.) MFA 
 
 1428. The Dufay colour plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 4, 
 1910, v. 57, p. 847.) MFA 
 
 Correspondence regarding time of exposure. 
 
 1429. The Dufay dioptichrome colour plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 
 
 An abridgment of instructions published by the 
 makers. 
 
 1430. Edridge - Green, Frederick William. 
 The relation of photography to vision. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, 
 new series, v. 34, p. 10-17.) MFA 
 
 1431. Elliott & Fry. Exposures in studio 
 portrait photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. be 
 
 State that long exposures are unnecessary. 
 
 1432. Emmerich, Georg Heinrich, editor. 
 Lexikon ftir Photographie und Reproduk- 
 tionstechnik. Wien & Leipzig: A. Hart- 
 leben, 1910. xiv p., 1 1., 994 p., 35 pl., 1 port. 
 TCR. be MFD 
 
 _Considerable space given to color photography. 
 Biographies. 
 Bound in two volumes; title-pagé in v. 2. 
 
 1433. Estanave, E. Images changeantes a 
 deux et trois aspects sur plaque auto- 
 stéréoscopique. (Académie des sciences. 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 10, 1910, tome 
 150, p. 93-95.) * EO 
 
 1434. Evans, Frederick H. Colour pho- 
 tography v. painting. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ay 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, March, 1911, 
 v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. 
 
 1435. Faupel, Fritz. A German patent for 
 a screen-plate process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Wake 
 
 Abstract. 
 
 1436. Ford, A. D. The Dufay colour plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 88.) MFA 
 
 Complains of poor rendering of greens. Editorial 
 suggestions. 
 1437. Friese, H. Der Dreifarbendruck 
 unter besonderer Berticksichtigung der 
 Teilplatten mach Lumiereschen Auto- 
 chrom - Diapositiven. (Photographische 
 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 584— 
 588.) MFA 
 
 1438. Gimpel, Léon. Duplicates of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Oct. 7,-1910, 4. 57, College 
 photography supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 
 
 1439. Hanneke, Paul. Erfahrungen mit 
 Dioptichromplatten. (Photographische 
 Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 257- 
 262.) MFA 
 
 1440. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 
 photographischen Lichtfilter. Mit 5 Bei- 
 lagen und 18 Abbildungen im Text. Halle 
 
 a. S.: W. Knapp, 1910. viii, 109 p., 3 charts, 
 4 pl. 8°. (Encyklopadie der Photographie. 
 Heft 74.) PLC 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 71 
 
 1910, continued. 
 
 1441. The reproduction of auto- 
 chromes and other screen-plate transpar- 
 encies. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v.57, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 59-61.) MFA 
 
 Applies a simple geometrical method of investiga- 
 tion to the conditions which prevail when copying one 
 autochrome on another. 
 
 1442. Husnik, Jaroslav. 
 duktion von Autochromaufnahmen im 
 Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 tur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 34— 
 36.) MFA 
 
 1443. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new sys- 
 tem of trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
 2, 1910, v.57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 72.) MFA 
 
 Tells how his system differs from Bennetto’s. 
 
 1444. —— A new system of trichromatic 
 photography. (Society of Chemical In- 
 dustry. Journal, London, May 16, 1910, 
 v. 29, p. 542-544.) VOA 
 
 Uses bichromate fish-glue on amylacetate collodion 
 film; also dilute chromic dyes capable of local intensi- 
 fication or reduction. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 1, 1910, v.57, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 49- $1, FA, 
 
 1445. A new system of trichromatic 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 80, 88.) MFA 
 
 Attacks Pfenninger’s claims for Bennetto inven- 
 tion. 
 
 1446. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Some photo- 
 graphic phenomena bearing upon disper- 
 sion of light in space. (Astrophysical 
 journal, Chicago, March, 1910, v. 31, p. 157— 
 165.) OMA 
 
 The Library also has a separate copy in PED 
 p. v. 3, no. 15 
 
 1447. Klein, Henry Oscar. The applica- 
 tions of collodion emulsion to three-colour 
 photography, process work, isochromatic 
 photography and spectrographic work... 
 London: A. W. Penrose & Co., Ltd., 1910. 
 2500.2: ed. enl. illus. 8°. MFKD 
 
 1448. Koenig, Carl. Duplicates of auto- 
 chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 Soecaphy, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 5/7, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. hte 
 
 
 
 Ueber die Repro- 
 
 
 
 Use of magnesium light as suggested by Lumiére 
 and Seyewetz. 
 
 1449. Koenig, Ernst. Colour sensitisers 
 and filter dyes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan..7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. Sethi n 
 
 1450. Dyes in photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 15, 
 1910, v.57, p. 529-530.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1451. Kopierung von Farbenphotographien 
 
 auf Autochromplatten im Kontakt. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1910, Bd. 47, p. 115-117.) MFA 
 
 Review of work done in the Lumiére laboratory. 
 
 1452. Lederer, Otto. Photo-micrography. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 6, 1910, v.57, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 1453. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Colour 
 photography by the interference method 
 with a solid metal mirror. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, 
 v.57, Colour photography supplement, Dp. 
 8.) MFA 
 Abstract of a paper read in Germany. 
 1454. Le Mée, Alexandre. Trichrome prints 
 by a ferricyanide method. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, June 3, 1910, 
 v.57, Colour photography supplement, Dp. 
 41.) MFA 
 
 1455. Limmer, Fr. Beitrage zum Farben- 
 anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 182- 
 185, 280-282, 430-432; 1910, Bd. 47, p. 25- 
 31, 70-73, 211-219, 286-291, S35 1346 532- 
 536.) MFA 
 1456. —— Verfahren zur Herstellung von 
 
 Dreifarbenrasten ftir Farbenphotographie 
 nach D. R. P. 216610, Fritz Faupel in Ber- 
 
 Hie alas: (Photographische Chronik, 
 Halle’a.'S., Aug. 10, 1910, Jahre. 17, p.399— 
 400, 476-477.) +MFA 
 
 1457. Liquid safe-lights for the dark-room. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 
 
 Gives particulars of recent experiments with dyes. 
 
 1458. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 Kontaktkopien von Autochromaufnahmen. 
 (Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
 1910, Bd. 47, p. 22-24.) MFA 
 
 1459. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Flash- 
 powders for autochrome work. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 74-75. MFA 
 
 1460. Sur l’emploi des poudres éclairs 
 comme source de lumiére artificielle dans 
 la photographie sur plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p.285- 
 288. ) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
 Sept., 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 315-319, MFA, and 
 
 Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, 
 p. 324-327, MFA. 
 
 1461. Maisch, Fred D. The autochrome 
 plate in its relation to the colour-theory of 
 Young and Helmholtz. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1910, v. 
 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 5-6, 
 13-14.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, 1909, v. 23, p. 
 262-267; 1910, v. 24, p. 8- pt MFA. 
 
 
 
Ii THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1910, continued. 
 
 1462. The Manipulation of autochromes 
 when travelling. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v.57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. ails 
 
 1463. Mayer, Emil. Notes on experience 
 in the autochrome process. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 43-44, 
 52-53.) MFA 
 
 Deals with under-exposure with a view to making 
 hand camera exposures. 
 
 1464. Mazo, E. The Tauleigne - Mazo 
 stereo projection and three-colour proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 
 
 1465. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 J. H. Prence. On some experimental 
 methods employed in the examination of 
 screen-plates. illus. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, May, 1910, new series, v. 34, 
 p. 197-221.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1910, v.57, p. 45-48, 53-56, 62-64, 68-70, 
 MFA. 
 
 1466. Monpillard, Félix. A propos des 
 autochromes: leur emploi pour la repro- 
 duction des tableaux dans les musées; 
 multiplication des épreuves autochromes 
 par contact ou a la chambre noire. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1910, série 3, tome l, p. eee ay 
 
 Also printed in ee journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 11-12, MFA. 
 
 1467. On the causes of prevailing tints 
 in autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 10-12, 22.) MFA 
 
 1468. Sur un écran pour autochromes 
 permettant d’obtenir aisément les nuages 
 dans le ciel d’un paysage. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 103-104.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32, MFA. 
 
 1469. Sur Vutilisation des plaques 
 autochromes avec les lumiéres artificielles 
 pour la photographie directe et la repro- 
 duction. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, 
 p. 104-112.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 25-27, MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1470. Moreels, R. Two-colour effects in 
 
 prints. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, July 8, 1910, v.57, p. 514-515.) 
 MFA 
 
 1471. Namias, Rodolfo. Panchromatic 
 sensitising of plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. here 
 
 1472. Newton, A. J. The evolution of 
 photo-mechanical illustration. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 1910, 
 v.57, p. 580, 878; 1911, v. 58, p. 160.) MFA 
 
 1473. Novak, Franz. A dark-room light 
 filter. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 4, 1910, v.57, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 18.) MFA 
 
 Transmits green light for working red sensitive 
 collodion emulsion. 
 
 1474. Omnicolorplatten. (Photographische 
 Welt, Leipzig, Nov., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 166— 
 167.) MFA 
 
 1475. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
 Fortschritte und Erfahrungen betreffend 
 die Photographie mit Farbenrasterplatten. 
 illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
 Reproductionstechnik ftir 1910, Halle a. S., 
 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 177-210.) MFA 
 
 Progress during year 1909. 
 
 1476. Parker, G. H. Exposure of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 72.) MFA 
 
 1477. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Colour 
 photography as a paying proposition. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 1478. Pfaundler, Leopold. Studie tiber das 
 Spektrum, Farbenkreise und neuere Dar- 
 stellungsweisen der Farbenmischungsge- 
 setze. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1910, Halle 
 a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 64-82.) MFA 
 
 1479. Pfenninger, Otto. Kinematograph- 
 ische Projektion in Farben. (Jahrbuch 
 fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
 nik fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, 
 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 p. 29-32.) 
 1480. A new system of trichromatic 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 80, 87-88.) MFA 
 
 Discussion of the Ives-Bennetto claims. 
 
 1481. Piper, Charles Welborne. Stereo- 
 scopic colour transparencies. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 12-13.) MFA 
 
 1482. Practical application of interference 
 colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 83-86, 
 92-95.) MFA 
 
 Detailed description of Lippmann process with 
 latest apparatus; also a bibliography. 
 
 a ———— 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 73 
 
 1910, continued. 
 
 1483. Quentin, H. Colour effects in the 
 spectroscope. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 20-21.) 
 MFA 
 1484. A new Krayn screen - plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 77-78.) MFA 
 
 1485. Screen-plate colour photographs 
 on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 Reference to patent of Julius Rheinberg. 
 
 1486. A suggested new method of col- 
 our photography direct at one exposure. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 
 Experiments of R. Berthon with diaphragm plate 
 provided with red, green, and violet screens. 
 1487. The Tauleigne-Mazo process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 51-52.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1488. Recording the colours during ex- 
 posure. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions for marking slides. 
 
 1489. Regni, pseud. A new system of tri- 
 chromatic photography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v. 
 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 64.) 
 MFA 
 Conflicting claims of J. W. Bennetto and F. E. 
 ves. 
 1490. A Reservoir viewing instrument for 
 autochromes. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
 MFA 
 1491. Rheinberg, Julius. The Rheinberg 
 colour paper. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v.57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.24.) MFA 
 
 1492. S., G. L’amélioration des auto- 
 chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
 1910, année 20, p. 177-179.) MFA 
 
 1493. Saal, Alfred. Autochromplatten. 
 (jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik fiir 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, 
 Jahrg. 24, p. 212-215.) MFA 
 
 Autochromes in the tropics. 
 
 1494. Scheffer,;-W. Notes on the Krayn 
 new screen film. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 
 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 89- 
 90.) MFA 
 On the resolving power of the 
 illus. (British jour- 
 
 1495. } 
 autochrome emulsion. 
 
 
 
 nal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 1910, 
 v.57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 70-72.) MFA 
 
 1496. La photographie des couleurs 
 avec les plaques a réseaux colorés. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 70-86.) MFA 
 
 Discussion of different plates. 
 1497. Uber das Auflosungsvermégen 
 der Autochrom-Emulsion. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, 
 Bd. 47, p. 588-592.) MFA 
 
 1498. Schilling, Otto. Die Dioptichrom- 
 Farbenrasterplatte (System Dufay). 
 (Photographische Welt, Leipzig, Sept., 
 1910, Jahre.°24, p.129-131.) MFA 
 
 1499. Seyewetz, A. Copies of autochrome 
 transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1500. Sforza, Francis. A suggested method 
 of preparing coloured prints by an indirect 
 bleach-out process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 83.) 
 
 M 
 
 1501. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procédé 
 permettant la prise de vues instantanées 
 sur plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1910, série 3, tome 1, p. 275-278.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 65-66, MFA, Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 292-295, MFA, 
 and Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1910, année 20, 
 p. 214-218, MFA. 
 1502. Smith, John H. The bleach-out 
 process of colour-photography and Uto- 
 color paper. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, April, 1910, new series, v. 34, p.141- 
 151.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 34-39, MFA. 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 1503. Some effects on stale and on fresh 
 autochrome plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v.57, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ser 
 
 Found that old plates worked well and clearly. 
 
 1504. Stenger, Erich. Deutsche Farben- 
 films (System Krayn) der Neuen photo- 
 graphischen Gesellschaft. (Photograph- 
 ische Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 20, 1910, 
 Jahre 17, p. 575-577.) +MFA 
 
 1505. Stenger, Erich, and FERDINAND LEIBER. 
 Destroyers of colour-sensitiveness as 
 means for developing panchromatic plates 
 in a bright dark-room light. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 28, 1910, 
 v. 57, p. 61-63.) . MFA 
 
 The authors state that the use of metabisulphite 
 or sulphuric acid as a preliminary bath is not of much 
 service. 
 
74 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1910, continued. 
 
 1506. Stobbe, Hans. Fulgide dyes in mak- 
 ing colour prints by the bleachout process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 91-92.) MFA 
 
 1507. Tauleigne, A. The Tauleigne proc- 
 ess of trichromy. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 1508. Toch, Maximilian. The simplified 
 autochrome process. (American annual of 
 photography for 1910, New York, 1910, v. 
 24, p. 245-246.) MFA 
 
 1509. Villain, Alfred. On the reproduction 
 of autochrome transparencies. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 1, 
 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 27-28.) MFA 
 
 1510. Wall, Edward John. Screen plate 
 color photography. illus. (In: Photo- 
 graphic annual, London, 1910, 6th ed., p. 
 9-53.) MFA 
 
 Details for manipulating Autochrome, Omnicolore, 
 
 Dufay, and Thames plates, with a note on the Aurora 
 plate. 
 
 1511. Wallace, Robert James. Tri-color 
 filters and their cut-outs. illus. (Ameri- 
 can annual of photography for 1911, New 
 York, 1910, v.25, p. 272-282.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 5-7, MFA. 
 
 1512. Weissermel, W. Die Autochrom- 
 platte in der lichtarmen Jahrezeit. (Photo- 
 graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 
 47, p. 5-8.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 9-10, A. 
 
 1513. Winter, G. Duplicates of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, -Octa7, 1910, we57; Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 75.) MFA 
 
 1514. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie 
 durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fiir 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, ea 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 90, MFA. 
 
 1515. X. La reproduction des couleurs des 
 photographies en couleurs. (Photo-ga- 
 zette, Paris, Jan. 25, 1910, année 20, p. 46— 
 49.) MFA 
 
 Messrs. Gimpel and Villain took first prizes. in 
 picture contest by the journal La Vulgarisation scien- 
 tifique. In this article they explain their methods. 
 
 1516. Yerbury, S. G. The making of por- 
 traits in colors. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
 eiecor ug., 1010 weer p. 315-318.) MFA 
 
 1911 
 
 1517. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
 Colour blindness and the _ trichromatic 
 theory of colour-vision. illus. (Royal 
 Society of London. Proceedings, London, 
 1910, series A, v.83, p. 462-473; 1911, se- 
 ries AG v. 84, p. 449-464.) * EC 
 
 Also printed in Hehe journal, London, 
 July, 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 278-287; Aug., 1911, 
 new series, v. 35, p. 281-296, MFA. 
 
 1518. Adrien, Charles. Essais d’hyper- 
 sensibilisation au trempé des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, Dec., 1911, série 3, 
 tome 2, p. 400-402.) MFA 
 Uses Thovert formula. 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 
 don, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 Menta pe lay MFA, 
 
 1519. Albert, August. Farbenlichtdruck 
 und Farbenaufnahmen mit Autochrom- 
 platten usw. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
 und Reproductionstechnik ftir 1911, Halle 
 a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 103-104.) MFA 
 
 1520. Alteneder, J. V. Paper prints from 
 autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
 tography for 1911, New York, 1910, v.25, 
 p. 128) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 7, MFA. 
 1521. Antoine Lumiére. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, sé- 
 rie 3, tome 2, p. 195-196.) MFA 
 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 1522. Balmitgere, C. A stereoscope for the 
 direct observation of colour transparencies 
 without reversal. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, March 3, 1911, 
 v.58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 22-23.) MFA 
 
 1523. Bellieni, H. Utilisation, pour la 
 photographie ordinaire, des écrans desti- 
 nés aux plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 82-83.) MFA 
 
 1524. Bennett, Colin N. Filter absorptions 
 for two-colour. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, July 7, 1911, v.58, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 45.) MFA 
 
 1525. Benoist, L. Sur les contre-écrans 
 renforcateurs en photochromie. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 229-234.) MFA 
 
 mies printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 65— 67, MFA, 
 1526. Two hints on the autochrome 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 7.) MFA 
 
 Recommends white glazed paper against sensitive 
 film; also permanganate solution after second develop- 
 ment. 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 70 
 
 1911, continued. 
 
 1527. Blackburn, H. E. The Krayn color 
 screen film process. (Camera ‘craft, San 
 Francisco, Aug., 1911, v. 18, p. 369-372.) 
 MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 67-68, MFA. 
 1528. ——- The Tripak system in brief. 
 illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
 1911, v.18, p. 221-224.) MFA 
 
 Also Biinted in British journal of photography, 
 London, June 2, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 42-43, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 228-231, MFA. 
 
 1529. A Blue cast on autochromes. (Ama- 
 teur photographer & photographic news, 
 London, 1911, v. 54, p. 191, 265.) +MFA 
 
 1530. Boucher, L. Le ‘“‘Monobloc,” appa- 
 reil stéréo-panoramique, muni d’un dis- 
 positif spécial facilitant la photographie 
 en couleurs. illus. 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 
 3, tome 2, p. 108-111.) MFA 
 
 1531. Butler, Edwin T. Mr. E. T. Butler’s 
 methods of colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 3, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 14-16.) MFA 
 
 Paper read before the Society of Colour Photog- 
 raphers. 
 1532. Carpenter, Ford Ashman. Photo- 
 graphing “red snow” in natural colors. 
 San Diego: San Diego Society of Natural 
 History, 1911. 108-111 p., 1 pl. 4°. 
 
 QEI p.v. 19, no. 11 
 
 Repr.: San Diego Society of Natural History. 
 Transactions, v2, no. 3, 1911. 
 1533. Chataux, P. S. A note on the de- 
 velopment of autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 2, 
 111, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 43.) MFA 
 
 Uses pyro for developer. 
 
 1534. Clerc, Louis Philippe. A frequent 
 cause of failure in three-colour synthesis: 
 excess of red. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, Dp. 35°37.) 
 
 1535. Colour photographs of Saturn. 
 (Nature, London, Nov. 2, 1911, v. 88, p. yh 
 
 Belopolsky’s results with plates prepared on - 
 Tikhoff. 
 1536. Colour prints on paper. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 5, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 39-40.) MFA 
 Secret method worked out by A. Hamburger. 
 
 1537. Corke, H. Essenhigh. A new color 
 printing process. (Bulletin of photogra- 
 phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 22, 1911, v.9, p. 
 341-342.) +MFA 
 
 Utocolor. 
 
 (Société francaise de. 
 
 1538. Coustet, Ernest. La photographie 
 instantanée des couleurs. (Revue scien- 
 tifique, Paris, 1911, v. 49, p.239-240.) OA 
 
 1539. Crémier, Victor. L’automne et l’auto- 
 chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 
 1911, année 22, p. 11-15.) MFA 
 
 1540. Experiments with the diopti- 
 chrome colour screen-plate. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, May 5, 1911, 
 v.58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 37-38.) MFA 
 1541. Ordinary negatives from auto- 
 chrome and other screen-plate transpar- 
 encies. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 7, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 
 
 1542. A Curious case of frilling with auto- 
 chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p.52, 55-56.) MFA 
 
 An inquiry by Sir W. Herschel answered by sev- 
 eral correspondents. 
 
 1543. Dalmas, R., comte de. Du développe- 
 ment des plaques autochromes en voyage. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 106- 
 
 108.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 34-35, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 177-179, MFA. 
 1544. Observations sur le nouvel em- 
 ballage des plaques autochromes. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 271-272.) MFA 
 
 1545. Death of M. Antoine Lumiére. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 5, 1911, v.58, p. 343.) MFA 
 
 1546. Doglibert, F. Suggestion for a new 
 photographic colour screen plate. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 1911, 
 v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
 24.) MFA 
 
 Prismatic surfaces moulded on celluloid. 
 
 1547. Estanave, E. Photographies a cou- 
 leurs changeantes. (Académie des sciences. 
 Comptes rendus, Paris, May 1, 1911, tone 
 152;-p:- 1158-1159.) * EO 
 
 1548. Evans, C. Willard. Developing auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, © 
 London, Aug. 4, 1911, v.58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 
 
 Formula for tank development. 
 
 1549. Farmer, Howard. Autochromes and 
 their reproduction on paper. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 1550. Flash-light autochrome portraits. 
 (British journal of photography, London, ~ 
 March 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 
 Brief description of process used by B. J. Falk. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
76 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1911, continued. 
 
 1551. Franck, Charles E. Frilling of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 
 
 1552. Gebhard, Kurt. Theoretical notes on 
 the bleachout process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 50-51, 
 54-55.) MFA 
 
 1553. Uber die Veranderung von Farb- 
 stoffen im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. hero 
 
 A 
 
 1554. Gimpel, Léon. Amélioration dans 
 la reproduction et l’agrandissement des 
 plaques en couleurs. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 
 3, tome 2, p. 101-103.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 
 
 1555. —— Les anaglyphes sur autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p.211- 
 2125) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 51, MFA. 
 
 
 
 1556. —— La photographie en couleurs sur 
 papier a la portée de tous. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 407-411.) MFA 
 
 Utocolor process. 
 
 1557. Gravier, Charles. Plates for colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 
 
 Deals principally with development of autochromes. 
 
 1558. La trichromie en 1911. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 411-412.) MFA 
 
 1559. Green spots on autochromes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
 22UTIO TW 55, ore one) MFA 
 
 1560. Greene, J. Edward B. Pinachrome 
 for color values. (American annual of 
 photography for 1912, New York, 1911, 
 
 
 
 
 
 v. 26, p. 207-208.) MFA 
 1561. Hanneke, Paul. Farbenausbleichver- 
 fahren. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
 Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 337-340.) MFA 
 1562. Die neuen deutschen Farben- 
 films. 
 
 (Photographische Mitteilungen, Ber- 
 lin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 8-10. MFA 
 N. P. G. color films. 
 
 1563. Hinterberger, Hugo. Neuerungen in 
 der Fabrikation der Dioptichromplatten 
 und der deutschen Farbenfilms. (Photo- 
 graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 12, 
 1911, Jahrg. 18) pRis0s) +MFA 
 
 1564. A note on making photo-micro- 
 graphs of colour screen-plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
 
 
 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 MFA 
 
 ment, p. 60.) 
 
 1565. Die polychromen Streifenraster 
 und die neueste Dioptichrom-Dufayplatte. 
 (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
 Jan. 29, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 58-59.) FMFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1566. Die tonrichtige Aufnahme von 
 Farbrastern. illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photo- 
 graphie und Reproductionstechnik  ftr 
 
 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 158- 
 161.) MFA 
 
 1567. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour paper 
 prints. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Explains adaptation of Tripak process. 
 
 1568. Ives’ tripak plate pack. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 5, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 40.) MFA 
 1569. The Ives tripak process of col- 
 our photography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. ae 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1570. Tripak color photography. 
 (Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 1911, 
 v.18, p. 219-220.) MFA 
 
 1571. Ives’ Inventions, Ltd. The Ives tri- 
 pak system of colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1911, v.58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 19-22.) MFA 
 Copy of working directions issued by the firm. 
 
 1572. J.. M. J. Dufay colour plates. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 64.) MFA 
 
 Editorial reply to questions concerning troubles. 
 
 1573. Jones, Chapman. On the relation- 
 ship between the size of the particle and 
 the colour of the image. (British journal 
 of photography, London, 1911, v. 58, p. 
 339-343, 381-384.) MFA 
 
 Also eine in Photographic journal, London, 
 April, 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 159-174, MFA. 
 1574. Klein, E. Suggested methods of di- 
 rect colour photography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 
 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 49- 
 50.) MFA 
 
 Development of H. Vollenbruch’s theory that 2 
 
 silver halide precipitate along with the dye is capable — 
 
 of retaining certain coloring matters throughout de- 
 
 velopment, fixing, and washing. 
 
 1575. Kropf, Fritz. Possible methods of 
 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 40.) 
 MFA 
 
 Observations on methods suggested by R. Luther. 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 77 
 
 1911, continued. 
 
 1576. Kuemmell, G. Die Beschleunigung 
 des Ausbleichens von Farbstoffen durch 
 aromatische Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
 fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Pho- 
 tophysik und Photochemie, Leipzig, 1910, 
 Bd. 9, p. 54-64.) PLC 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, Nov. 
 4, 1910, v.57, Colour photography supplement, p. 81- 
 82, MFA. 
 
 1577. Kunz, William H. Color photogra- 
 
 phy. (American annual of photography 
 
 tor 1912, New York, 1911, v. 26, p. 28-32.) 
 MFA 
 
 Describes briefly processes in use. 
 
 1578. Lack of register in tri-colour filters. 
 ’ (British journal of photography, London, 
 fan. 2/, 1911, ¥. 58, p. 69.) MFA 
 
 1579. Legeret, E. Using autochrome plates 
 in . changing box. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 2, 1911, v.58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 
 
 M 
 
 1580. Leiber, Ferdinand. Making the best 
 of under-exposed autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 57.) MFA 
 
 1581. Le Mée, Alexandre. Paper colour 
 prints from screen-plate transparencies. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 7, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 30.) MFA 
 
 1582. The Light of Egypt: natural colour 
 photographs of the glorious effects of 
 Egyptian sunsets and sunrise. illus. (Il- 
 lustrated London news, London, Feb. 25, 
 1911, v. 138, supplement.) * DA 
 
 Six pictures by Gervais-Courtellement. 
 
 1583. Limmer, Fr. Das Farbenanpassungs- 
 verfahren (Ausbleichverfahren) eine Mo6- 
 glichkeit der direkten K6rperfarben Pho- 
 tographie. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Jan., 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 16-18.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 1584. Zur Geschichte des Ausbleich- 
 verfahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 307-311.) MFA 
 
 1585. Lueppo-Cramer. Das Silber als 
 Farbstoff. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 184-188.) MFA 
 
 1586. —— Uber die Farben der Photoha- 
 loide. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 33-37.) MFA 
 
 1587. Weitere Untersuchungen tiber 
 die Polychromie des Silbers. (Photo- 
 _graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1911, 
 Bd. 48, p. 403-409.) MFA 
 
 1588. Zur Farbenanpassung der Pho- 
 tohaloide. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 270-275.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1589. Luther, R. Possible methods of col- 
 our photography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 17-19.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Suggestions by himself and Herr Sforza, 
 
 1590. The Manners process of three-colour 
 
 printing with carbon tissues. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, July 7, 
 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 
 ment, p. 46.) MFA 
 British patent no. 25646 of 1910. 
 
 1591. Mareschal, G. Le cinematographe 
 en couleurs. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
 Oct. 25, 1911, année 21, p. 221-224.) MFA 
 
 Processes of Geisler and Friese-Greene. 
 
 1592. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
 effect of colour filters upon the definition 
 of a lens. (Knowledge, London, April, 
 1911, new series, v. 8, p. 155.) OA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 28, 1911, v.58, p. 330, MFA. 
 1593. The relation between the colour 
 of silver images, and the size of the par- 
 ticles which compose them. (Knowledge, 
 London, April, 1911, new series, v. 8, p. 
 154-155.) OA 
 
 1594. Miethe, Adolf, and B. Sreecert. Uber 
 qualitative Verschiedenheiten des von den 
 einzelnen Teilen der Mondoberflache re- 
 
 flektieren Lichtes. illus. (Astronomische 
 Nachrichten, Kiel, 1911, Bd. 188, p. 10-11, 
 
 
 
 239-246.) OMA 
 See colored illustration opp. p. 356. 
 1595. Monpillard, Félix. Simultaneous 
 
 opening of shutter and firing of flash- 
 powder in autochrome photography. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 1596. Moreels, R. Two-colour and three- 
 colour photography in two exposures of 
 the same time. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 7, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 25—28.) 
 MFA 
 Camera provided with a dark-slide allowing the 
 plates to be rapidly exchanged. 
 1597. Namias, Rodolfo. Some notes on 
 autochrome work. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Cee 
 
 Suggestions for development and after treatment. 
 
 1598. Natural colour photography: remark- 
 able results and how they are obtained. 
 (Illustrated London news, London, 1911, 
 v. 139, supplement to issue of Dec. uk 
 
 Has colored plate showing different stages. 
 
 1599. Ein Neues Farbraster. illus. (Pho- 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., April 9, 
 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 180-181.) +MFA 
 
 Ruth plate. ; 
 
78 
 
 1911, continued. 
 
 1600. A New colour paper. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, June 2, 1911, 
 v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 44.) MFA 
 
 Denver company employs a machine which passes 
 the paper through fifteen or more baths. 
 
 1601. A New Uto paper. (British journal 
 
 of photography, London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 
 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 62- 
 64.) MFA 
 
 Bleachout paper manufactured by Dr. J. H. Smith. 
 
 Gives full instructions. 
 1602. Novak, Franz. Gelbfilter fiir Auto- 
 chromblitzlichtaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 Titedolieetialle aco. NO) olahrore2 soa, 
 MFA 
 
 190.) 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 1, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 68, A, 
 
 1603. An Open field for colour photogra- 
 phers. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 
 
 Difficulties to be overcome and helpful suggestions. 
 
 1604. Le Palais de l’autochrome. illus. 
 (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1911, an- 
 née 21, p. 117-118.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 51-52, MFA. 
 
 Description of the studio of Gervais Courtellement, 
 Paris, especially of the flashlight apparatus. 
 
 1605. Palocsay, Albin von. Fremde und 
 eigene Versuche zur Abktirzung der Ex- 
 positionzeit bei Autochromaufnahmen. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1911, Bd. 48, p. 483-494.) MFA 
 
 1606. Shorter exposures with the auto- 
 chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 
 
 1607. Wichtiger Fortschritte und Er- 
 fahrungen betreffend die Photographie mit 
 Farbrasterplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fur 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahre. 25, p..194— 
 228.) MFA 
 
 1608. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Pictures 
 from autochromes. (American annual of 
 photography for 1912, New York, 1911, v. 
 
 
 
 
 
 26, p. 121-122.) MFA 
 Black and whites from autochromes. 
 1609. Personnaz, Antonin. L’autochromie. 
 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 58-61.) 
 MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 
 
 1911, année 22, p. 107-110, MFA. 
 
 1610. Pfenninger, Otto. Historisches tiber 
 die Farbenkamera. (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 
 graphie und Reproductionstechnik ftir 
 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahre: 25, p. 11-135 
 MFA 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1611. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. Gelbscheiben 
 fiir Autochromplatten. (Photographische 
 Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p.294— 
 298.) MFA 
 
 1612. Quentin, H. Le procédé Krayn. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 293- 
 300.) MFA 
 
 1613. Rheinberg, Julius. Suggestion for a 
 new colour screen-plate to act by diffrac- 
 tion. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1614. ——- Suggestion for a new screen- 
 plate. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Discussion of ideas of E. J. Wall, E. Doglibert 
 and of the Frauenfelder patent. 
 
 1615. Richard, A. Sur la photographie en 
 
 couleur chez M. G. Marionez. (Société 
 d’émulation de Cambrai. Mémoires, Cam- 
 brai, 1911, tome 65, p. 485-498.) * EN 
 
 1616. Russian colour-photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 17, 1911, v..$8,-p.82e7 MFA 
 
 Brief reference to Prokudin-Gorsky who claimed 
 to have spent his entire fortune in experiments, and 
 who petitioned the government to buy 2,000 of his pro- 
 ductions. 
 
 1617. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procédé 
 permettant la prise de vues instantanées 
 sur plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 382-383.) MFA 
 
 1618. -—- Quelques mots sur l’hypersensi- 
 bilisation des plaques autochromes. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 403-406.) 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, May 3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 17-18, MFA, 
 
 1619. Starr, William Ireland. Why not 
 make color photographs? (American an- 
 nual of photography for 1912, New York, 
 1911, v. 26, p. 228-234.) MFA 
 
 i ae experience with autochrome and Dufay 
 plates. 
 
 1620. Stenger, Erich. Das “Weiss” auf 
 Farbrasterplatten und weisse Farbraster. 
 (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
 May 17, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 247-248.) } MFA 
 
 1621. —— Zur Kenntnis der Autochrom- 
 platte. (Photographische Chronik, Halle 
 a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 499-502, 527, 543- 
 545, 605-607; 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 9-11, 37-39, 
 137-140, 247-248, 259-261, 283-286, 360-363, 
 395-397, 432-435, 446-448, 569-572, 593-595, 
 617-619; 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 97-99, 104-106, 
 
 132-135, 182-185, 191-193, 207-210, 317-319, 
 325-327, 433-437, 469-471, 481-483, 577-580; | 
 
 1910, Jahrg. 17, p. 9-13, 259-261, 283-285, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 79 
 
 1911, continued. 
 
 331-334, 367-370, 515-518, 527-529; 1911, 
 Jahrg. 18, p. 25-26, 35-37, 46-49, 206-208, 
 264-266, 307-308, 315-316, 331-332.) +MFA 
 
 After the first few numbers the title reads: Zur 
 Kenntnis der Autochromeplatte und 4hnlich gearter 
 Erzeugnisse. An excellent review of progress. 
 
 1622. Switkowski, Josef. Three -colour 
 prints by the oil process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 
 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 12- 
 13.) MFA 
 
 1623. “Tabloid” chemicals for screen-plate 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 Produced by Burroughs, Wellcome & Co. 
 
 1624. Thovert, J. Pinachrome as an extra 
 sensitiser of autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 7, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
 oh Paris, 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 383-389, 
 
 1625. Sensibilisation de plaques auto- 
 chromes: influence de la qualité de 1’éclaire- 
 ment sur la reproduction photographique 
 des couleurs. (Société francaise de pho- 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, série 3, 
 tome 2, p. 379-381.) MFA 
 
 1626. Tikhoff. Colour photography on 
 Mars. (Nature. London, Oct. 19, 1911, 
 7..8/, p.. 529:) OA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 64, MFA. 
 
 
 
 1627. Uto photographic paper. (Nature, 
 London, Nov. 9, 1911, v. 88, p. 50.) OA 
 1628. Valenta, Eduard. Uber die “Deutschen 
 Farbrasterfilms auf Krayn-Raster” der 
 Neuen photographischen Gesellschaft in 
 Berlin-Steglitz. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 41-44.) 
 . MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 30-31, MFA. 
 1629. Zur Kenntnis des “Utacolorpa- 
 pieres.” (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 624-627.) MFA 
 
 1630. Vallot, Emile. 
 
 
 
 Hypersensibilisation 
 des plaques autochromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1911, série 3, tome 2, p. 389-391.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Mitteilungen, 
 Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 369-371, MFA. 
 
 1631. A Vertical developing dish for auto- 
 chrome plates. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. eS 
 
 Designed by Seyewetz and sold by M. Leune, Paris. 
 
 1632. Wall, Edward John. Die Farbe 
 photographischer Bilder. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
 fir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 38—- 
 41.) MFA 
 
 1633. Suggestion for a new colour 
 screen-plate. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. aN 
 
 Reply to F. Doglibert. Cites United States patent 
 no, 747961 of Frauenfelder. 
 
 1634. Weimann, Arthur. Monochrome 
 Vergrosserung von Autochromen usw. 
 (Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
 1911, Bd. 48, p. 215-219.) MFA 
 
 1635. Winter, G. Hints on working the 
 autochrome process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ory 
 
 
 
 1636. Worel, Karl. Fortschritte in der 
 Farbenphotographie im: vorigen Jahre. 
 (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und Repro- 
 ductionstechnik ftir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, 
 Jahrg. 25, p. 3-5.) MFA 
 
 1637. Wychgram, Engelhard. Uber neuere 
 Farbraster. illus. (Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. Nees 
 
 Dufay and Krayn plates. 
 
 1912 
 
 1638. Autochrome light filter. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 3, 
 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Accurate filters made by Dallmeyer. 
 
 1639. Baker, Thomas Thorne. 
 tography by artificial light. Notes on the 
 screening of artificial illuminants. illus. 
 (Amateur photographer & photographic 
 news, London, March 4, 1912, v.55, p. 221- 
 Zoe.) +MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Nov., 1912, 
 v. 29, p. 240-241, MFA. 
 
 Colour pho- 
 
 Boston, 
 
 1640. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
 diamidophénol en liqueur acide au dé- 
 veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 371- 
 378.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 6-8, MFA. 
 
 1641. Bartlett, John. Autochromes and 
 
 art. (Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 
 
 phia, Sept. 11, 1912, v. 11) p. 373-374.) 
 +MFA 
 
20 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1912, continued. 
 
 1642. Bennett, Charles W. Glycerol as 
 sensitizer. (Eighth International Congress 
 of Applied Chemistry, Washington and 
 New York, 1912. Original communica- 
 tions, v. 20, section 9, Photochemistry, p. 
 121-122.) PKR 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 3, MFA. 
 
 1643. Bergeron. Bichromatic reversing 
 bath. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Suggested formula for autochromes. 
 
 1644. Blackburn, H. E. The Dufay diopto- 
 chrome plate. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
 cisco, May, 1912, v. 19, p. 215-220.) MFA 
 
 1645. The Krayn colour films. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
 2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Corrects a misprint in above periodical of Decem- 
 ber 8, 1911. 
 
 
 
 1646. Boucher, L. Renforcement des auto- 
 chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, June 25, 
 1912, année 22, p. 157-158.) MFA 
 
 1647. Brandlmayr, Georg. Uber Dreifar- 
 bengravure. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1912, Bd. 49, p. 553-555.) MFA 
 
 1648. Broum, Karl H. Die Autotypie und 
 der Dreifarbendruck. Die Anwendung des 
 Rasters zur Herstellung von Klischees ftir 
 den ein- und- mehr-farbigen Buchdruck, 
 nebst Anhang: Rastertiefdruck. Halle a. 
 Se VV anapp, 1912, vi, 192 p,,.5 ol. 8". 
 “ MDS 
 
 1649. Burchardt,-Ernest A. Three-colour 
 printing by the bichromated size process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 26-28.) MFA 
 1650. Busy, L. L’autochromie en voyage 
 de France au Tonkin. (Photo-gazette, 
 
 Paris, July 25, 1912, année 22, p. 177-178.) 
 MFA 
 
 1651. Color photography in relation to new 
 
 art movement in photography. (Bulletin 
 of photography, Philadelphia, Oct. 16, 
 19126 viel peas. } +MFA 
 
 1652. Colour prints from autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 31.) MFA 
 
 Commercial apparatus of Messrs. 
 Hitchins briefly referred to. 
 
 Balfour and 
 
 1653. Colour prints on paper: a simple 
 process in practical form. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, Aug. 30, 1912, v. 59, 
 p. 669-670.) MFA 
 
 Paget screen-plate process explained. 
 
 1654. A Colour transparency competition. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Conditions of the Société francaise de photographie. 
 
 1655. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The auto- 
 chrome process. (Photographic journal, 
 London, Dec., 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
 338-345.) MFA 
 
 1656. Cousin, Ernest. The development of 
 colour and other plates exposed through 
 ascreen. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 
 Paper read before the Société frangaise de photo- 
 graphie. 
 1657. Crémier, Victor. Hypersensibilisa- 
 tion simplifiée des autochromes. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, July 25, 1912, année 22, p. 
 171-176.) MFA 
 
 1658. Cust, Leopold. Notes upon the work- 
 ing of autochromes. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 1-3, 5-7.) MFA 
 
 1659. Dalmas, R., comte de. Enlévement 
 des points noirs sur plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 158- 
 159.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 36, MFA. 
 
 1660. David, Albert. 
 cation of autochromes. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 
 59, Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 
 
 MFA 
 1661. Intensification of autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 1662. Dillaye, Frédéric. L’autochromo- 
 scope Elgé. illus. (In his: Les nouveau- 
 tés photographiques 1911-1912. Paris, 
 1912.. 8°)  peligaiiga MFA 
 Viewing apparatus. 
 
 1663. Développement des plaques 
 
 autochromes en lumiére rouge trés vive. 
 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 
 letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. oer 
 MF 
 
 Also printed in British journal of ie 
 London, Aug. 2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 37-38, MFA. 
 
 Also in his Les nouveautés photographiques 1911- 
 1912, Paris, 1912, p. 115-125, MFA. 
 
 1664. L’écran jaune des plaques auto- 
 chromes. (In his: Les nouveautés photo- 
 graphiques 1911-1912. Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 
 104-109.) MFA 
 
 1665. Les grands contrastes avec 
 plaques autochromes. (in his: =456s 
 nouveautés photographiques 1911-1912. 
 Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 102-104.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 Chromium intensifi- — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 81 
 
 1912, continued. 
 
 1666. Direct colour photography. (Ama- 
 teur photographer & photographic news, 
 London, Oct. 28, 1912, v. 56, supplement, 
 p. 3-4.) MFA 
 
 General article on lens and filter. 
 
 1667. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 
 
 (Amateur photographer & photographic 
 
 news, London, Jan. 22, 1912, v. 55, p. 80.) 
 MFA 
 
 1668. Evans, Ulick R. An attachment for 
 simultaneous exposure in an _ ordinary 
 camera as a means of making the three 
 component negatives for the subtractive 
 processes of colour photography. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 45-48, 51-52; 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.4, 12.) MFA 
 
 1669. Farnau, FE. F., and J. M. Lower. Color- 
 
 photography of luminescence. (Eighth 
 
 International Congress of Applied Chem- 
 
 istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 
 
 Original communications, v. 20, section 9, 
 
 Photochemistry, p. 137-138.) PKR 
 Use of Dufay plates. 
 
 1670. Finlay, C.L. Lantern slides in nat- 
 ural colour by the Paget duplicating 
 method. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 49-51.) MFA 
 
 1671. Flashlight for screen colour plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
 
 Formula for screen liquid to be used with “Agfa’’ 
 blitzlicht powder. 
 
 1672. Florence. Ueber die optische Aus- 
 rustung fiir Autochrom und andere Farb- 
 rasterplatten - Verfahren. (Photograph- 
 ische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 27, 1912, 
 Jahrg. 19, p. 165-167.) +MFA 
 
 1673. G., G. S. A method of retouching 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 
 
 1674. Gaumont, Léon. Vues cinémato- 
 graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 370-371.) 
 MFA 
 
 1675. Gebhard, Kurt. Zusammenhang 
 zwischen Lichtempfindlichkeit und Kon- 
 stitution von Farbstoffen. (Jahrbuch fir 
 Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
 tar 1912, Halle a. S., 1912, Jahre. 26, p. 51- 
 67. ) MFA 
 
 1676. Gimpel, Léon. Le vérachromoscope. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 229- 
 Zoe.) MFA 
 
 1677. Grant, Thomas K. Extra-sensitised 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
 
 photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
 Tells how he worked the Simmen process. 
 1678. Hernandez - Mejia, Arturo. The 
 
 colorgraph process of colour cinematogra- 
 phy. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Oct. 8, 1912, v. 59, p. 805— 
 807.) MFA 
 
 1679. Colour cinematography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 6, 
 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 _ Abstract from the Morning telegraph. His inven- 
 tion known as the cinecolorgraph. 
 
 1680. Hilliard, F. M. Color photography 
 by flashlight. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
 cisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p. 21-22.) MFA 
 
 1681. Hollyer, Frederick T. The use of 
 grey in three-colour printing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 1682. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 production of pure whites in autochrome 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
 
 
 
 tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 
 1683. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Tripak 
 color-photography. (Photo-era, Boston, 
 Feb., 1912, v. 28, p. 57-58.) MFA 
 1684. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The present 
 condition of color photography. (Eighth 
 
 International Congress of Applied Chem- 
 istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 
 Original communications, v. 26, appendix, 
 sections 6a—1lb, p. 447-452.) PKR 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 21-22, 26, MFA, and in Journal of physical chem- 
 istry, Ithaca, N. Y., 1913, v.17, p. 41-46, PAA. 
 
 1685. Johnson and Sons. Correcting col- 
 our-rendering in autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March l, 
 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 12.) MFA 
 
 Unexposed gelatine plate is developed and dyed in 
 “‘photo-tints,” and used as a cover glass for the auto- 
 chrome. 
 
 1686. Knott, L. E. Colour plates and the 
 holiday. (Amateur photographer & photo- 
 graphic news, London, July 8, 1912, v. 56, 
 p. 47-48.) +MFA 
 
 Equipment for tour with no special plates mentioned. 
 
 1687. Koenig, Ernst. Die Farben-Photo- 
 graphie. Eine gemeinverstandliche Dar- 
 stellung der verschiedenen Verfahren’ 
 nebst Anleitung zu ihrer Ausfihrung. 
 Berlin: Union deutsche Verlagsgesell- 
 schaft, 1912.23) p.L, LOA eee Oa 
 (Photographische Bibliothek. Bd. Een 
 
82 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1912, continued. 
 
 1688. Leffmann, Henry. Color photogra- 
 phy. (Photo-era, Boston, June, 1912, v. 28, 
 p. 237-239.) MFA 
 
 Experiences with photomicrographs. 
 
 1689. Leggett, George H. Three -colour 
 negatives at one exposure. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, 
 v. 59, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 54-55; Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 1690. Leiber, Ferdinand. Three - colour 
 transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 
 1691. Le Mée, Alexandre. The new Uto- 
 color paper. (Photo-era, Boston, April, 
 1912, v. 28, p. 145-147.) MFA 
 
 1692. Lewis, Alfred Holmes. The auto- 
 chrome in winter. (Photo-era, Boston, 
 Jan., 1912, v. 28, p. 10-12.) MFA 
 
 1693. Lobley, Frank J. Screen-plate col- 
 our photography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.16.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of lecture delivered to the Chichester 
 Photographic Society. 
 
 1694. Lovelace, Marcus G. Screenless 
 
 color photography. (Wilson’s photo- 
 
 graphic magazine, New York, 1912, v. 49, 
 
 p. 531-536.) MFA 
 Directions for Lippmann process. 
 
 Also printed in American annual of photography, 
 1913, New York, 1912, v. 27, p. 9-20. 
 
 1695. Lucas, E. G. Handel. The use of 
 grey in three-colour printing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1912, v. 
 59, Colour photography supplement, p. 43- 
 44, 55-56.) MFA 
 
 1696. McIntosh, J. The autochrome proc- 
 
 ess. (Photographic journal, London, Nov., 
 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 320-329.) MFA 
 1697. Mackenstein Etablissements. Chro- 
 moscope classeur. illus. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 1698. Mairot, F. Developing autochromes 
 in green light. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 1699. Maleve, L. To determine the ex- 
 posure of autochrome plates. illus. (Bul- 
 letin of photography, Philadelphia, May 1, 
 1912, v. 10, p. 578-580.) +MFA 
 
 1700. Mareschal, G. Le vérachromoscope. 
 illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 1912, 
 année 22, p. 136-138.) MFA 
 
 1701. Marino, Algeri. Transmission des 
 photographies et des images a distance, 
 
 systéme Marino. illus. (La Lumiére élec- 
 trique, Paris, 1912, série 2, tome 19, tri- 
 mestre 3, p. 261-265.) VGA 
 
 Translated abstract in Scientific American, New 
 York, March 22, 1913, v. 108, p. 273, 7A 
 
 Deals with transmission of photographs in color. 
 
 1702. Messer, H. C. Showing autochrome 
 transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.54.) MFA 
 
 1703. Miethe, Adolf. Farbenphotographie 
 
 des Vollmondes. illus. (Photographische 
 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 357- 
 
 359.) MFA 
 Colored illustration opp. p. 356. 
 
 1704. Monpillard, Félix. Etude micro- 
 graphique du réseau des plaques omni- 
 colores. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 
 1912, année 22, p. 190-192.) MFA 
 
 1705. L’hypersensibilisation pratique. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1912, série 3, tome 3, p. 126- 
 133) MFA 
 
 1706. More points in autochrome work. 
 (Amateur photographer & photographic 
 news, London, Nov. 11, 1912, v. 56, supple- 
 ment, p. 3-4.) +MFA 
 
 Loading and exposure. 
 
 1707. Das Neue Utocolor - Rapid - Papier. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1912, Bd. 49, p. 308-310.) MFA 
 
 1708. Neues Utocolor- Papier. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, 
 Bd. 49, p. 160.) MFA 
 
 Formula for fixing bath. 
 
 1709. A New colour photography. With a 
 non-screen plate and one exposure. (Ama- 
 teur photographer & photographic news, 
 London, April 8, 1912, v. 55, p. 356.) #~{MFA 
 
 Rheinberg process. 
 
 1710. A New method of color photography. 
 (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 1912, 
 
 
 
 “v.19, p. 277-278.) MFA 
 
 Process of the Brothers Rheinberg. 
 
 1711. Newton, A. J. The use of grey in 
 three-colour printing. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1912, v.59, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 48, 56.) MFA 
 
 1712. Newton, A. J., and A. J. Butt. The 
 testing of lenses for three-colour and 
 process work. (Photographic journal, 
 London, March, 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
 91-98.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 5, 1912, v.59, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 14-15, MFA. 
 1713. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
 Fortschritte und Erfahrungen, betreffend 
 die Photographie mit Farbrasterplatten. 
 illus. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie und 
 Reproduktionstechnik fiir 1912, Halle a. S., 
 1912, Jahrg. 26, p. 250-276.) MFA 
 Progress from March, 1911 to April, 1912. 
 
 
 
 i eee ee a eT 
 
ea Ae 
 
 OR He ear aS 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 23 
 
 1912, continued. 
 
 1714. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The 
 color plate in geology. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p.35.) MFA 
 
 1715. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. The choice 
 and preparation of compensating light- 
 filters for the autochrome plate. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
 
 ment, p. 58-59, 61-62; 1912, Colour pho- 
 fee phy supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 
 For a correction of typographical error see above 
 
 periodical, v. 58, Nov. 3, 1911, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 64, 
 
 1716. Le Procédé diachrome. (Photo- 
 gazette, Paris, April 25, 1912, année 22, p. 
 110-113.) MFA 
 
 1717. Recapitulation of direct color process 
 by photography. (Bulletin of photogra- 
 phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 6, 1912, v. 11, p. 
 686-687.) +MFA 
 
 1718. Rheinberg, Julius. The micro-spec- 
 tra method of colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 
 3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Corrects a statement that Drac’s process is similar 
 to his own. 
 
 1719, Rheinberg, Julius, and ErNEest RHEIN- 
 BERG. The micro-spectra method of colour 
 photography by prismatic dispersion. illus. 
 (Photographic journal, London, April, 
 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 162-191.) MFA 
 
 Also eae in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 19-24, 28-31, 33-36, 38-40, MFA, and in Zeit- 
 schrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 
 1913, Bd. 12, p. 373-408, PLC. 
 
 1720. Schmidt, Fritz. Farbenphotogra- 
 phie; eine Sammlung von Aufnahmen in 
 naturlichen Farben. Heft 1. Leipzig: 
 E. A. Seemann ,1912?). illus. f°. tMFV 
 
 Attractive photographs. 
 
 1721. Starr, William Ireland. Colour pho- 
 tographs on the Dufay dioptichrome 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
 
 tography supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 
 Instructions in detail. 
 1722. Str. Das Utocolorverfahren. (Pho- 
 
 tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 3, 
 1912, Jahrg. 19, p. 333-335.) MFA 
 
 1723. Thieme, Paul. Autochromaufnahmen 
 bei nattirlichem und ktinstlichem Licht. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1912, Bd. 49, p. 135-137.) MFA 
 
 1724. Thovert, J. Hypersensitizing auto- 
 chrome plates. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, June 19, 1912, v.10, p.829- 
 833.) +MFA 
 
 1725. Valenta, Eduard. Die Photographie 
 in natirlichen Farben, mit besonderer Be- 
 rucksichtigung des Lippmannschen Ver- 
 fahrens sowie jener Methoden, welche bei 
 einmaliger Belichtung ein Bild in Farben 
 liefern. - Halle a. Si: W. Knapp, 1912. xi, 
 180 p., 6 pl. 2. ed. 8°. (Encyclopadie der 
 Photographie. Heft 2.) MFV 
 
 1726. Uber das Utocolorrapidpapier. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1912, Bd. 49, p. 361-362.) MFA 
 
 mies printed in Photographische Rundschau, Halle 
 .S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 341-342, MFA. 
 
 
 
 1727. Le Vérachromoscope. illus. (La 
 Nature, Paris, 1912, tome 40, semestre 2, 
 supplément, p. 19.) OA 
 
 1728. Wall, Edward: John. The micro- 
 
 spectra method of colour photography by 
 
 prismatic dispersion. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, June 7, 1912, v. 59, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ty 
 M 
 
 me that Charles Cros outlined the process in 
 1869. 
 
 1729. Weissermel, W. 
 posures by flashlight. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 5, 1912, v.59, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ray 
 
 Autochrome ex- 
 
 Uses a pyrocatechin developer. 
 
 1730. Zur Farbenphotographie mit 
 Autochromplatten u. a. (Photographische 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 58— 
 59.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome, Dioptichrome, Omnicolore, N. P. G. 
 plates. 
 
 
 
 1731. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Far- 
 
 bige Kinematographie. illus. (Photo- 
 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1912, 
 
 Bd. 49, p. 436-440.) MFA 
 Briefly describes various processes. 
 
 1732. Wood, Robert Williams. Selective 
 
 absorption of light on the moon’s surface 
 and lunar photography. (Astrophysical 
 journal, Chicago, July, 1912, v. 36, p.74- 
 84.) OMA 
 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 44, MFA. 
 
 1733. Worel, Karl. Mein verbessertes Ver- 
 fahren der Photographie in Korperfarben 
 durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch ftir 
 Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
 fir 1912, Halle a. S,, 1912. Jahres Z6ep, o- 
 15.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1734. Das Utocolorpapier. (Photo- 
 graphische Kunst, Munchen, 1911-12, 
 Jahrg. 10, p. 203-204.) +MFA 
 
QA THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1913 
 
 1735. Adrien, Charles. Notes sur la pho- 
 tographie en couleurs dans les glaciers. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 59-60.) 
 
 MFA 
 1736. Bawtree, A. E. A new colour trans- 
 parency process. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. Sr ne 
 
 Uses sensitized fish-glue solution. 
 Abstract in Amateur photographer & Meri Hees 
 news, London, Nov. 10, 1913, v.58, p. 430, ,MFA 
 
 1737. Berger, Arthur. Uber die Farben- 
 wiedergabe durch die Autochromplatte. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1913, Bd. 50, p. 357-358.) MFA 
 
 1738. Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice AuptI- 
 
 BERT. Das Kineidochrom. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, 
 Bd. 50, p. 391-396.) MFA 
 
 Authors’ process of cglor kinematography. 
 
 1739. Blaauw, A. H. De tropische natuur 
 in schetsen en kleuren.. Amsterdam: 
 Koloniaal Instituut, 1913. 3 pl. (i)x-—xi, 
 185 p., 28 col’d pl., 4 maps. illus. 8°. BFK 
 
 -—— = Amsterdam: Koloniaal Insti- 
 Prt 1 Jo, 191 pie Zed. allussci8ss 
 BFK 
 
 1740. Brown, George Edward. All about 
 color photography. illus. (Photo-minia- 
 ture, New York, July, 1913, v. 11, p.373- 
 411. ) MFA 
 
 General article describing eat known processes. 
 
 1741. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler tri- 
 colour single exposure camera. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 6, 
 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 22-23.) MFA 
 
 1742. Calmels, H. Le témoin de sélection 
 trichrome de Wratten & Wainwright. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 157- 
 159.) MFA 
 
 1743. Cobenzl, A. Farbenraster-Photogra- 
 phie. illus. (Photographische Korrespon- 
 denz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 242-247.) MFA 
 
 Compares various plates used for color photography. 
 
 1744. Farbige Photographien. (Pho- 
 tographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1912-13, 
 Jahrg. 11, p. 284-287.) +MFA 
 
 Comparison of Autochrome, Omnicolore, 
 and Thames plates. 
 
 1745. Coker, Ernest George. Colour pho- 
 tography of internal stress in bodies of 
 
 
 
 Dufay, 
 
 engineering form. illus. in color. (West 
 of Scotland Iron & Steel Institute. Journal, 
 Glasgow, 1913, v.20, p. 81-104.) VIA 
 
 1746. Colour photography by the Paget 
 duplicating method. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Soap 
 
 1747. Cominetti, Annibale. Farbige Kino- 
 
 aufnahmen und deren Projektion. illus. 
 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 
 1913, Bd. 50, p. 231-234.) MFA 
 Berthon & Audibert patent. 
 
 1748. Coonoor, pseud. On working the 
 autochrome plate in India. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, 
 v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 3-4.) MFA 
 
 1749. Cooper, James. Amateurs and the 
 autochrome. (Photo-era, Boston, Aug., 
 1913, v. 31, p. 80-85.) MFA 
 
 Has table and abacus for exposures. 
 
 1750. Cousin, Ernest. Contribution a l’ob- 
 tention des reproductions d’autochromes 
 sur autochromes. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 
 3, tome 4, p. 330-335.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 7, FA; and in Photographische Mit- 
 teilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 373-374, MFA. 
 
 1751. Developing autochromes by ruby- 
 light. (Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1913, v. 31, 
 p.213;) MFA 
 
 From circular issued by the Gaumont Co. 
 
 1752. Drake-Brockman, H. G. A drying 
 cupboard for hyper-sensitised screen- 
 plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 7, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. cae 
 
 1753. Eder, Josef Maria. Quellenschriften 
 zu den frithesten Anfangen der Photogra- 
 phie bis zum xvi. Jahrhundert...mit ftinf 
 heliographischen Portraten, zwei Licht- 
 drucktitelblattern und diversem Buch- 
 
 schmuk. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm Knapp, 
 1913. 1.p.L, 1871) p., 5S’ portesaiiteeee 
 + PKB 
 
 Facsimiles of papers by Fabricius, Croll, Boyle, 
 Balduin, Schulze, Hellot, Scheele, and Beccaria on 
 the chemical action of light. Interesting introduction. 
 
 1754. Enlarged negatives from  auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 1755. Fallowfield, Jonathan. Autochrome 
 correcting screens. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee 
 
 For sale by the above firm. 
 
 1756. Foersterling, K. Lichtfortpflanzung 
 
 in inhomogenen Medien; Theorie der Lipp- | 
 
 mannschen Farbenphotographie. (Physi- 
 kalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913, Jahrg. 
 14, p. 265-270.) PAA 
 
 
 
 ———— 
 
 er gee. er - 
 
ot. Sei et STS 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q5 
 
 1913, continued. 
 
 1757. Gebhard, Kurt. Notes on the chem- 
 istry of the bleaching-out of dyes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 38-40.) MFA 
 
 1758. Veranderung organischer Farb- 
 stoffe im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 118- 
 
 
 
 130.) MFA 
 1759. —— Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 
 fahrens (Utocolorpapier). (Photograph- 
 
 ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, 
 p. 76-77.) MFA 
 
 1760. Gérard, Louise. La retouche des 
 autochromes. (Société francaise de photo- 
 graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 
 4, p. 337-338.) MFA 
 
 1761. Grange. Black and green spots on 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v.60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 1762. Grove, J. M. C. Prismatic fantasies 
 of colour on autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 4.) MFA 
 
 1763. Heyne, W. Zur Kinematographie 
 in naturlichen Farben. (Photographische 
 Rupdschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 22- 
 26.) MFA 
 
 1764. Hind, H. Lloyd, and W. B. Ranp es. 
 Handbook of photomicrography. New 
 fore. Dutton & Co. ,1913.; xii, 292 
 p., 44 pl. 8°. OCG 
 
 See chapter 9: Colour screens and colour sensitive 
 
 plates; chapter 13: Colour photomicrography. Good 
 reproductions of autochromes. 
 
 1765. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
 Christensen (Agfa) screen-plate. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 4.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions as to light filter and reversing bath. 
 
 1766. The correction of prevailing 
 tints in autochromes by coloured screens. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 1767. Gelbscheiben fur Autochromauf- 
 
 nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
 Pietie a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 79.) MFA 
 
 1768. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit 
 der Autochromplatte. (Photographische 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, pe A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1769. Ihran, R. Sensitising methylene blue 
 for bleach-out pictures in the camera. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 11-12.) MFA 
 
 * 1775. Kuemmell, G. 
 
 1770. Intensifying autochromes. (Photo- 
 era, Boston, Aug., 1913, v. 31, p.105.) MFA 
 
 Agfa intensifier. 
 
 1771. Just, Alexander. Neuere Erfahrungen 
 auf dem Gebiete des Ausbleichverfahrens. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1913, Bd. 50, p. 168-179.) MFA 
 
 Thiosinamine derivatives as sensitisers. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 26-27, MFA. 
 
 1772. Koenig, Ernst. Farben - Kinemato- 
 graphie. (Photographische Rundschau, 
 Halle, S.,1915..Bd-50; p..3-5.) MFA 
 
 Kinemacolor and colorgraph processes. 
 
 1773. Ein neues Farbrasterverfahren. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1913, Bd. 50, p. 277-278.) MFA 
 
 Paget plate. 
 
 1774. Ein vereinfachtes Kopierver- 
 fahren mit Pinatypiefarbstoffen. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
 Bd. 50, p. 325-326.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 Weitere Untersu- 
 chungen tber die Beschleunigung des Aus- 
 bleichens von Farbstoffen. (Zeitschrift 
 flr wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
 zig, 1912, Bd. 11, p. 133-136.) PLC 
 
 Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Sept. 6, 1912, v.59, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 41-42, MFA. 
 
 1776. Le Mée, Alexandre. Colour prints 
 
 on opal. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
 
 tography supplement, p. 19-20.) MFA 
 1777. The Leto Photo Materials Co. A 
 new colour screen - plate — “The Leto.” 
 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 
 
 1778. Lueppo-Cramer. On reversal of the 
 image in making screen-plate colour trans- 
 parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Oct. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 
 
 Abstract in Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 171-172, MFA. 
 
 1779. Lugdunensis, pseud. A one-exposure 
 three-colour camera. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ciel 
 
 1780. Manners, Samuel. Colour prints by 
 the Raydex process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 
 
 MFA 
 1781. Martin, Karl. Ueber verbesserte Fil- 
 ter fiir Autochromaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch 
 
 fur Photographie und Reproduktionstech- 
 nik fur 1913, Halle a.cSi919)g Jahre: 27, 
 p. 103-104.) MFA 
 
86 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1913, continued. 
 
 1782. Meesterwerken der kleuren - photo- 
 graphie. Eene verzameling van opnamen 
 in de natuurlijke kleuren door middel van 
 Lumiéres autochroomplaten. Leiden: A. 
 WieoSiithori 11912-lo ol 2. parts sinial Vv. 
 col’d illus. 4°. Tt MFV 
 
 60 mounted plates and illustrated articles by Fritz 
 Schmidt and others. 
 
 1783. Monjauze, G. Emploi des lampes 
 électriques a incandescence pour le por- 
 trait sur autochromes. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 203-204.) MFA 
 
 1784. Monochrome prints from colour 
 negatives. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Special reference to Paget plates. 
 
 1785. Monpillard, Félix. Colour rendering 
 with extra-sensitised autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 18.) MFA 
 1786. Extra sensitising of autochromes 
 in practice. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, .jan.-3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1787. Morton, Arthur E. Conversion of 
 autochromes into Paget colour slides. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 
 
 1788. Exposure of colour plates: some 
 notes preparatory to a demonstration. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 
 
 Describes his process for exposing autochrome, Du- 
 fay, and Paget plates. 
 
 1789. Influences modifying colour 
 rendering. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 
 Importance of reflection and colour contrasts. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
 1913, v. 20, p. 535-536, MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1790. Namias, Rodolfo. Bemerkungen 
 und Beobachtungen aus der Praxis der 
 Autochromphotographie. (Jahrbuch fiir 
 Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
 fur 1913,. Halle a.’ §., 1913, Jahrewee en: 
 162-167.) | MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, June, 1914, v. 32, 
 p. 280-282, MFA. 
 
 1791. —— Fehler bei Autochromaufnahmen 
 und deren Abhilfe. (Photographische 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 47- 
 48.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
 S., Feb. 9, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 71-73, }-MFA. 
 
 1792. Eine Neue Farbenrasterplatte. (Pho- 
 tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
 Bd. 50, p. 144.) MFA 
 
 Leto plate. 
 
 1793. Photographs that have been made in 
 natural colors. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, Dec. 31, 1913, v. 13, p. 835— 
 836.) +MFA 
 
 Brief early history. 
 
 1794. Piper, Charles Welborne. The func- 
 tions of black and white in colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 1795. Pledge, John H. The Christensen 
 screen-plate. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 4.) 
 MFA 
 
 Photomicrographs of above plate and autochrome. 
 
 1796. The Paget screen-plate. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1797. Renger-Patzsch, Robert. Die Far- 
 benplatte der Paget Co. (Photographische 
 Rundschau, Halle a: SS. 1913, 8a e50e 
 363-364.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
 S., Nov. 12, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 613-614, ¢MFA. 
 
 1798. Rypinski, M. C. Color ata tie 
 (American annual of photography for 1914, 
 New York, 1913, v.28, p. 116-126.) MFA 
 
 Briefly describes Dufay, Paget, and Autochrome 
 processes. 
 
 1799. Schrott, Paul, Ritter von. Abschwa- 
 chen von Autochromplatten. (Photogra- 
 phische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 
 50, p. 397-400.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Société francaise de photographie. 
 aoe Paris, 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 170-171, 
 
 
 
 1800. Schwarzer, Ed. Grenzen des Auto- 
 chromverfahrens. (Photographische Welt, 
 Leipzig, Nov. 15, 1913, Jahrg. 27, p. 161- 
 162.) MFA 
 
 1801. Smith, John H. Recent investiga- 
 tions in the bleachout process of colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
 Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 400-405, MFA, Photo- 
 graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 255— 
 257, 267-268, MFA, and Société francaise de photo- 
 
 graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, série 3, tome 4, p. 
 267-275, MFA. 
 
 1802. Smitten, Howard M. Color plate 
 exposures. illus. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, Oct., 1913, v. 20, p. 475-476.) 
 MFA 
 Dial designed for use with the Wynne meter. - 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p.15, MFA. 
 
 : 
 | 
 
 
 
at 
 
 
 
 - Autochromplatte. 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q7 
 
 1913, continued. 
 
 1803. Sparkle in colour transparencies. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Suggestion for obviating. 
 
 1804. Spoerl, Hans. Utocolor-Rapidpapier. 
 (Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1912- 
 13, Jahrg. 11, p. 173-174.) +MFA 
 
 1805. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit der 
 
 (Photographische Chro- 
 
 wee tiaile a, >., April 23, 1913, Jahre. 20, 
 
 p. 214.) +MFA 
 Von Hitibl’s method. 
 
 1806. Stenger, Erich. The history of the 
 reversal process as used in screen-plate 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Ry 
 
 1807. Streissler, Alfred. Das Paget-Far- 
 benverfahren. (Photographische Welt, 
 merece, Oct. 15, 1913,. Jahre. 27, p. 146- 
 148.) MFA 
 
 1808. Das Rheinbergsche Verfahren 
 der Farbenphotographie. (Photogra- 
 phische Welt, Leipzig, May 15, 1913, Jae 
 27, p. 67-68.) MFA 
 
 1809. Substituting white paper for black 
 behind autochrome plates. (Photo-era, 
 Boston, Feb., 1913, v. 30, p. 95.) MFA 
 
 1810. Thoerner, W. A simple viewing 
 cabinet for autochromes. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 1, 
 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1811. Tobler, Friedrich. Einige Erfah- 
 rungen bei Autochromaufnahmen in den 
 Tropen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
 Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 297-300.) MFA 
 
 1812. Union photographique industrielle 
 Etablissements Lumiére & Jougla réunis. 
 Sensibilisieren von Ausbleichschichten. 
 (Chemisch-technisches Repertorium, Co- 
 then, May 17, 1913, Jahrg. 37, p.276.) VOA 
 
 D. R. P. 258241. Abstract only. Translation in 
 British journal of photography, London, June 6, 1913, 
 v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 24, MFA. 
 
 1813. Utocolour bleachout paper. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 5, 
 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 36.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to improved paper. 
 
 1814. Wallace, Robert James. Plain 
 versus color-sensitive plates... Questions 
 answered by the director of the Research 
 Laboratory of the G. Cramer Dry Plate 
 Co. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Feb., 
 1913, v. 20, p. 66-68.) MFA 
 
 1826. Brizet, André. 
 
 1815. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of col- 
 our plates. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, June 6, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Criticises Morton’s exposure scheme. 
 
 1816. The Watkins colour plate meter. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
 supplement, D2os,) MFA 
 
 1817. Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Fin- 
 LAY. A demonstration of the Paget colour 
 plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
 April, 1913, new series, v. 37, p. 142-148.) 
 MFA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 1818. Why are color Biaien not artistically 
 satisfactory? (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, July 23, 1913, v. 13, p.111-— 
 112) +MFA 
 
 1819. Wychgram, Engelhard. Autochrome 
 Tierphotographie an der Nordsee. (Pho- 
 tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
 Bd. 50, p. 229-231.) "MFA 
 
 1914 
 
 1820. Barker, J. W. The Paget color proc- 
 ess — making the positive. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 408— 
 409.) MFA 
 
 1821. Barton, E. A. A note on exposure 
 of autochrome plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. aoe 
 
 1822. Bawtree, A. E. Lead intensification. 
 illus. (Amateur photographer, London, 
 May 25, 1914, v. 59, p. 497-498.) +MFA 
 
 Partly reprinted in Camera eres San Francisco, 
 June, 1914, v. 21, p. 295-296, MFA 
 
 1823. Biermann, E. A. Individualised auto- 
 chromy. (Amateur photographer & pho- 
 NS news, London, July 20, 1914, v. 
 60, p. 56.) +MFA 
 
 Suggestions for exposure. 
 
 1824. Brand, John. The Raydex process 
 of colour photography on paper. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March 6, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 9.) MFA 
 
 1825. Breton, André. Photographies en 
 couleurs pouvant étre reproduites. Le 
 procédé Paget. (La. Nature, Paris, 1914, 
 année 42, semestre 2, p. 148-151.) OA 
 
 Exposure and de- 
 velopment of autochromes. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, May 1, 1914, 
 v. 61, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 19-20.) MFA 
 
28 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1914, continued. 
 
 1827. Broum, Karl H. E/iniges zur Drei- 
 farben-Autotypie. (Photographische Kor- 
 eee Wien, 1914, Bd. 51, p. ary 
 
 1828. Burton, H. M: Hints for new colour- 
 plate workers. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 37-38.) 
 MFA 
 
 1829. The Business aspect of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 25-26.) MFA 
 
 1830. Calmels, H. Procédé Paget - Color 
 pour la photographie des couleurs a un 
 nombre illimité d’exemplaires. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 186-197.) MFA 
 
 1831. Carr, Sydney Herbert. Notes on ex- 
 posure, etc., in the autochrome process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 1832. Carrara, Achille. A new quick-dry- 
 ing sensitiser:for three colour and ordinary 
 carbon tissues. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) 
 MFA 
 Ammonium bichromate and ethyl alcohol. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
 1914, v. 21, p. 293-294, MFA. 
 
 1833. Reproduction of autochromes 
 on paper by three-colour carbon printing. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 10.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Aug., 
 1914, v. 21, p. 407-408, MFA. 
 
 1834. Crémier, Victor. Chloranol as a de- 
 veloper for autochrome plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 3, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 26-27.) MFA 
 
 1835. Dawson, Alfred. Three-colour cam- 
 eras. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 Endeavors to explain lack of symmetry in images. 
 
 1836. Dearden, W. Autochrome hints. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1837. The Evolution of screen-plate colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 
 
 1838. An Exhibition of the work of Louis 
 Ducos du Hauron in colour photography. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 
 
 Gives a list of early negatives and prints. 
 
 1839. Fischer, R., and H. Siecrist. Uber 
 die Bildung von Farbstoffen durch Oxyda- 
 tion mittels belichteten Halogensilbers. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 
 1914, Bd. 51, p. 18-22, 208-211.) MFA 
 1840. Foersterling, K. Zur Theorie der 
 Lippmannschen Farbenphotographie. 
 
 (Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913- 
 14, Jahrg. 14, p. 265-270; Jahre. 15, p. 225— 
 234, 940-952.) PAA 
 
 1841. Gebhard, Kurt. Bildung und Zerst6- 
 
 rung von Farbstoffen im Licht. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1914, Bd. 51, p. 384-385.) MFA 
 
 1842. H., P. Zur Paget-Farbrasterplatte. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1914, Bd. 50, p. 124.) MFA 
 
 1843. Hamburger, Aron. The polychro-. 
 mide colour process. (Photographic jour- 
 nal, London, Nov., 1914, new series, v. 38, 
 p. 288-294.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 4, 1914, v. - Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 45-47; "Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, Dp. 45 MFA, Amateur pho- 
 ile tt & photographic news, London, Nov. 2, 1914, 
 
 60, p. 419, MFA, Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 Behe: 1915, v. 22, p. 82-83, MFA. 
 
 1844. Hamburger, W. S. Autochrome 
 flashlight portraiture. (American photog- 
 raphy, Boston, Aug., 1914, v. 8, p. re 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 34-35, MFA. 
 
 1845. Hargreaves, F. J. Focussing screens © 
 for color screen plates. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 409- 
 410.) MFA 
 
 1846. A new use for the Paget method 
 
 of color photography. (Camera craft, San 
 
 Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 140-141.) 
 MFA 
 
 
 
 For testing and demonstrating the orthochromatic 
 properties of plates and the efficiency of light filters. 
 
 1847. Hess, Henry. Direct colour photog- 
 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 An appreciation of the work of F. E. Ives. 
 
 1848. Hess-Ives Company. Three colour 
 
 prints. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 
 tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 1 aaa of French patent no. 461078 of Aug. 4, 
 0. 
 
 1849. Heydecker, W. A. Reproduction tri- 
 chrome d’autochromes. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, 
 série 3, tome 5, p. 172.) MFA 
 
 ad “ 
 aT 
 
 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 89 
 
 1914, continued. 
 
 1850. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. Some notes 
 on autochrome work in professional prac- 
 tice. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 22-23, 27.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Wilson’s photographic magazine, 
 New York, 1914, v. 51, p. 15-17, MFA. 
 
 1851. Honoré, C. Halet. Three colour 
 cameras. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1914, v.61, Colour pho- 
 
 tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 Discusses lack of symmetry in images. 
 1852. Ihran, R. Bleachout dyes. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, June 5, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 1853. Ives, Frederick Eugene. Three- 
 colour cameras. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.27.) MFA 
 
 Defends his patent against claims of Pfenninger. 
 
 1854. Three-colour prints. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 From negatives made at one exposure in trichro- 
 matic cameras patented by the author. 
 
 
 
 1855. Judging the quality of natural color 
 
 photography. (Bulletin of photography, 
 
 Philadelphia, July 8, 1914, v. 15, p. 48-49.) 
 +MFA 
 
 1856. Karl Wilhelm Wolf-Czapek. port. 
 (Photographische Kunst, Mtinchen, 1913- 
 14, Jahrg. 12, Tafel 78, opp. p. 249.) {MFA 
 
 1857. Kein, Wold. Retuschieren von Auto- 
 chrombildern. (Photographische Rund- 
 schau, Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p.17.) MFA 
 
 1858. Koenig, Ernst. A new colour sensi- 
 tiser. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 
 
 A red which is readily miscible with other cyanine 
 sensitisers with less prejudicial effect upon the whole 
 mixture. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
 1914, v. 21, p. 243-245, MFA. 
 
 1859. Simplified pinatype. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 1, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 20.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1860. Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de. A 
 system of colour photography. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour® photography 
 supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 
 
 The colors are filtered and selected by means of a 
 three-color diaphragm placed in the lens and by aid 
 of a half-tone screen placed immediately in front of 
 the sensitive panchromatic plate. 
 
 1861. Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis LUMIERE. 
 
 Color photography. (American photogra- 
 
 phy, Boston, June, 1914, v. 8, p. 358-364.) 
 MFA 
 
 Cros — Ducos du Hauron and Autochrome proc- 
 esses, 
 
 1862. Colour screen-plates. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of their French patent no. 
 March 21531913; 
 
 1863. McCord, Bennett. Why not the auto- 
 chrome? (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1914, 
 v. 18, p. 679-682.) MFA 
 
 Advantages and drawbacks. 
 
 1864. McIntosh, J. Some special methods 
 of dealing with screen plate transpar- 
 encies. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Jan., 1914, new series, v. 38, p. 5-13.) MFA 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 Abstract in British journal of photography, London, 
 March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 11-12, MFA. Last part of this abstract in 
 
 Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 
 139-140, MFA. 
 
 1865. Mann, A. Colour photography 
 simply explained. A series of articles for 
 the beginner on the theory and practice 
 of colour photography. (Amateur pho- 
 tographer & photographic news, London, 
 1914, v. 60, p. 36-37, 60-61, 84-85.) *MFA 
 
 Different processes explained. 
 
 1866. Massiot, G. La lanterne “Frigida,” 
 son but, son utilité pour la projection des 
 autochromes. illus. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, série 3, 
 tome 5, p. 224-226.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 40, MFA. 
 
 1867. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
 triple projection process of colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 
 
 1868. Miethe, Adolf. Zur Asthetik photo- 
 graphischer Farbenaufnahmen. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1914, 
 Bd. 51, p. 293-294.) MFA 
 
 1869. Monpillard, Félix. A cabinet for the 
 drying of hypersensitised autochrome 
 plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
 
 1870. Morton, Arthur E. On tour with 
 screen-plates. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 
 
 1871. Sunrise and sunset effects. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 47.) MFA 
 
 
 
 467128 of 
 
 
 
90 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1914, continued. 
 
 1872. Murdoch, Helen M. ,Colour photog- 
 raphy.; (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 Exposure and development in India. 
 1873. Colour photography in Ceylon. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 Exposure and development. 
 
 
 
 1874. A New Paget process for colour 
 prints on paper. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.20.) MFA 
 
 1875. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Telepho- 
 tography with autochrome plates. (Photo- 
 era, Boston, July, 1914, v. 33, p. ferry 
 
 Also printed in British journal of peas 
 London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 31-32, 33-34, MFA. 
 
 1876. Pfenninger, Otto. Three - colour 
 cameras. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Claims that Ducos du Hauron’s patent 2973 of 
 1876, and that of Cros, 9012 of 1892 are the bases 
 for Ives patent (4606 of 1892). 
 
 1877. Piper, Charles Welborne. The ray- 
 dex colour process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
 p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 1878. The Polychromide process of colour 
 photography on paper. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
 Colour photography supplement, ey 
 
 1879. Potonniée, G. Biographie de Louis 
 de Ducos du Hauron. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, sé- 
 rie 3, tome 5, p. 149-163.) MFA 
 Includes bibliography of works and patents. 
 
 1880. Power, H. D’Arcy. Experiences 
 with the Paget color plate. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 107- 
 109.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 17-18, MFA. 
 
 1881. Further notes on the Paget 
 color plate. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 April, 1914, v. 21, p. 193-194.) MFA 
 1882. The Reproduction of direct colour 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 29.) MFA 
 
 Reproduction by photo-engraving process. 
 
 1883. Rigg, Gilbert. Color photography 
 applied to the demonstration of the micro- 
 
 
 
 structure of ores. (Metallurgical and 
 chemical engineering, New York, Jan., 
 1914, v. 12, p. 30-31.) VOA 
 Abstract. 
 
 1884. Rypinski, M. C. Color photography. 
 (Illuminating Engineering Society. Trans- 
 actions, New York, 1914, v. 9, p. nee 
 
 Brief historical review and details of development. 
 Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
 New York, Feb. 27, 1915, v. 79, p. 134-135, VA. 
 
 1884a. Schultess-Young, H.S. Some notes 
 on the autochrome and Paget colour proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 41-42, 48.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in The Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, 
 v. 19, p. 191-192, MFA. 
 
 1885. Sheahan, David J. The making of 
 autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
 tography for 1915, New York, 1914, v. 29, 
 p. 284-286.) MFA 
 
 1886. Stands for the exhibition of colour 
 transparencies. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee 
 
 1887. Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Avsucu. 
 
 Bleach-out process. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, March 6, 1914, v. 61, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 12.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract of German patent 264207 of Sept. 10, 1912. 
 
 1888. Thieme, Paul. Die Paget - Prize- 
 Platte vom Standpunkte des Amateurs. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1914, Bd. 51, p. 65-67.) MFA 
 
 1889. Tobler, Friedrich. The autochrome 
 process in the tropics. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ek 
 
 Discusses keeping qualities of plates and develop- 
 ment. 
 
 1890. Valette, T., and R. Ferret. Colour 
 prints on fabrics. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.7.) MFA 
 Ayres of French patent no. 457446 of May 3, 
 
 1891. Wall, Edward John. Autochrome 
 formulae. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 42-44.) MFA 
 
 1892. ——_ The present status of color pho- 
 tography. (Photo-era, Boston, 1914, v. 33, 
 p. 126-129, 171-176.) MFA 
 1893. The structure of screen-plates. 
 
 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, ps 4.) MFA 
 
 1894. —— Zur Geschichte der Farbenpho- 
 tographie. (Jahrbuch ftir Photographie 
 und Reproduktionstechnik ftir 1914, Halle 
 a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 127-129.) MFA 
 
 
 
eee, 
 
 —_— 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 9] 
 
 1914, continued. 
 
 1895. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of auto- 
 chrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.27.) MFA 
 
 1896. Weidmann, U. Autochrom-Teleauf- 
 nahmen. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
 Berlin, 1914, Bd. 51, p. 204.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 27-28, MFA. 
 
 1897. Weissermel, W. Das neue Pinatypie- 
 verfahren. (Photographische Rundschau, 
 Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p. 72-73.) MFA 
 
 1898. Wenz, Emile. Pavillon pour exposer 
 les plaques autochromes. illus. (Société 
 francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 1914, série 3, tome 5, p. 127-129.) MFA 
 
 1899. Whatmough, W. A. The Raydex 
 process at the Society of Colour Photog- 
 raphers. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 1900. Wilkinson, W. T. Dark-room hints 
 for panchromatic plates and autochrome 
 development. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 1901. Woodhead, A. E. Photography in 
 colour. (Society of Dyers and Colourists. 
 Journal, Bradford, 1914, v. 30, p. 78-84.) 
 
 + VLG 
 
 1902. Worel, Karl. Das neue, verbesserte 
 Utocolorpapier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photogra- 
 phie und Reproduktionstechnik fiir 1914, 
 Halle a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 35-36.) MFA 
 
 1903-1904. Wright, H. W. Canning. The 
 raydex colour process. (British journal 
 of photography, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
 
 photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 1915 
 1905. Aeonchrome colour plate. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
 1915, v.62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 48.) MFA 
 
 Brief announcement of company’s organization. 
 
 1906. Allan, Sidney. The new kodachrome 
 process of color photography. (Bulletin of 
 photography, Philadelphia, May 26, 1915, 
 v. 16, p. 654-655.) +MFA 
 
 1907. Arch, John C. Hints on making ray- 
 dex colour prints. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. gee en 
 
 1908. Aron, Reinhold. Uber die Farben- 
 wiedergabe mit der Lippmannschen 
 Methode. illus. (Zeitschrift fiir wissen- 
 schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 
 15, p. 65-78, 97-125.) PLC 
 
 1909. Biermann, E. A. Autochrome work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 1, 1915, v.62, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 2-3.) MFA 
 
 Paper read before the Birmingham Photographic 
 Society. Shows departures from established practice. 
 1910. Autochromy up to date. (Ameri- 
 can annual of photography for 1916, New 
 York, 1915, ‘v. 30, p. 170-173.) MFA 
 
 1911. Black, Adam. Colour vision. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 48.) - MFA 
 
 
 
 1912. —— Degeneration of panchromatic 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 
 
 1913. Objections to panchromatic 
 plates. illus. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Dec. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 
 
 1914. Some notes on the working of 
 autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
 
 1915. Blochmann, Richard. Zur deutschen 
 
 
 
 
 
 Farbenplatte. (Photographische Rund- 
 schau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 53, p. 74-77.) 
 MFA 
 
 Amateur’s experience with Agfa plates. 
 
 1916. Brown, George Edward. The koda- 
 chrome process of colour. portraiture. 
 (Photographic journal, London, April, 1915, 
 new series, v. 39, p. 141-143.) MFA 
 
 1917. Burton, H. M. Making natural col- 
 our lantern slides by the Paget process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 
 
 1918. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The latitude 
 of the autochrome plate. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ot 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
 1915, v. 22, p. 204-205, MFA, and in Photo-era, 
 Boston, May, 1915, v. 34, p. 216, MFA. 
 
 1919. Notes on exposure in the auto- 
 chrome process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 
 
 1920. Croughton, G. Hanmer. The East- 
 man colour transparency process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p33 MFA 
 
 1921. Davidson, P. G. The pigment diffi- 
 culty in the three-colour processes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 7, 
 1915, v.62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 20.) MFA 
 
 
 
9? THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1915, continued. 
 
 1922. Davis, Vivian P. Notes on the im- 
 proved raydex colour-print process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 1923. The raydex process. 
 graphic journal, London, Nov., 
 series, v. 39, p. 266-272.) MFA 
 
 1924. Dr. Kurt Gebhart. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 63- 
 64.) MFA 
 
 (Photo- 
 1915, new 
 
 
 
 Portrait and obituary notice. 
 
 1925. Domony, R. B. An exposure meter 
 for colour and ordinary plates. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 Wynne Hunter instrument. 
 
 1926. Donaldson, Charles. Portraits in 
 color. illus. (American annual of photog- 
 raphy for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 
 78-83.) MFA 
 
 1927. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber farbenemp- 
 findliche Platten zur Spektrumphotographie 
 
 im Infrarot, Rot, Gelb und Griin. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1915, Bd. 52, p. 271-277.) MFA 
 
 1928. Fingerhuth, C. Schwarzweisskopien 
 von Autochromaufnahmen. (Photograph- 
 ische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 52, 
 p. 81-82.) MF 
 
 1929. Gamble, E. H. The difficulty in the 
 three-colour process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 5, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ieee 
 
 Discussion between author and C. Welborne Piper. 
 1930. The pigment difficulty in the tri- 
 colour process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 1931. Genthe, Arnold. Some remarks on 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. aay 
 
 Comments on artistic and commercial possibilities. 
 
 1932. Hanneke, Paul. 
 mit farbenempfindlichen Platten. 
 
 
 
 Zur Photographie 
 (Photo- 
 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
 Bd. 52, p. 167-169.) MFA 
 1933. Hess-Ives color photography. (The 
 
 Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, v. 19, p. 725- 
 726.) MFA 
 
 1934. Hess-Ives Corporation. The Hicro 
 colour process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 
 
 From booklet issued by the company. 
 
 1935. Hofrat Prof. Dr. J. M. Eder. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 
 52, opp. p. 100.) MFA 
 
 Portrait. 
 
 1936. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Three- 
 colour photography: with special reference 
 to three-colour printing and similar proc- 
 esses. Translated by Henry Oscar Klein... 
 London: P. Lund, Humphries & Co., Ltd., 
 1915. 138 p., 2 cold ploy 3ucoi tease 
 illus. “8° MFV 
 
 The Library also has edition of 1904 published in 
 London by A. W. Penrose & Co. 
 
 1937. An Important development in color 
 photography. (Scientific American, New 
 York, 1915, v. 112, p. 341, 350.) VA 
 
 Kodachrome process. 
 
 1938. Jones, Chapman. On colour sensi- 
 tised plates. illus. (Nature, London, 1915, 
 v.94, p. 676-677, 701-703.) OA 
 
 Also printed in Scientific Pig pe Ries ica 
 New York, April 10, 1915, v. 79, p. 
 
 1939. Jones, L. A. Colour bie of two 
 component mixtures. illus. (British BL hate 
 nal of photography, London, 1915, 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 6-8, 11, 
 13-14.) MFA 
 
 1940. Jones, L. A., and others. Relative 
 photographic and visual efficiencies of illu- 
 minants. illus. (Illuminating Engineering 
 Society. Transactions, New York, Dec. 30, 
 1915, v. 10, p. 963-986.) VOK 
 
 A study upon ordinary and color-sensitive plates of 
 various light sources. 
 
 Also prinieed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 42-44, 47- "48: v. 63, 
 supplement, p. 8. FA, 
 1941. Kine-Chromo, pseud. The difficulties 
 of colour cinematography. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 38-39.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 1942. Kodachrome. (Camera craft, San 
 Francisco, June, 1915, v. 22, p.248.) MFA 
 
 1943. The Kodachrome process of colour 
 portraiture. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, May 7, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 17-20.) 
 MFA 
 
 1916, Colour photography 
 
 Description and official directions. 
 
 1944. Koenig, Ernst. Farbenempfindliche 
 
 Platten. illus. (Photographische Rund- 
 
 schau, Halle a..S., 1915; Basg2an. beet, 
 M 
 
 1945. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Uber ein 
 Badeverfahren zur Herstellung von Lipp- 
 mann-Platten. (Photographische Rund- 
 schau, Halle a. S;, 1915, Baeza: megs 
 
 1946. —— Uber die Polychromie des Sil- 
 bers. (Zeitschrift fir wissenschaftliche 
 Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 14, p. 343- 
 346.) PLC 
 
 
 
1957. 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1915, continued. 
 
 1947. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenenipfindlich- 
 keit und Tiefenentwicklung. illus. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
 Ba. 52, p. 225-227.) MFA 
 
 1948. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
 kodachrome process of color portraiture. 
 (American annual of photography for 1916, 
 New York, 1915, v. 30, ‘:p. 9-21.) MFA 
 
 1949. Ein Neues Patent fiir ein altes Kon- 
 trollverfahren fiir die subtraktive Mehrfar- 
 benphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 115-118.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Comments on D. R. P. 276,645, Dec., 1912, to 
 
 Baugé, Dumez and Seauve. 
 
 1950. Pan Chromo, pseud. Control in tri- 
 chromy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p38.) MFA 
 
 1951. The supports of colour photo- 
 graphs. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, ae 30-31.) MFA 
 1 Urges experiments to secure an improvement upon 
 glass. 
 
 1952. Penrose, Frank. The use of auto- 
 chromes in bird photography with examples 
 of protective coloration, etc. (Photographic 
 journal, London, June, 1915, new series, v. 
 
 39, p. 215-218.) 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 27-28, MFA. 
 
 1953. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Interiors 
 in natural colours by reflected light. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, June 
 4, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 22-24.) MFA 
 
 Adaptation of autochromes for the work. 
 
 
 
 1954. Pfenninger, Otto. The polychromide 
 colour process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 
 1955. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour in 
 photography and in vision. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1915, 
 v. 62, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 41-42.) MFA 
 Also printed in Camera erate, San Francisco, Jan., 
 1916, v. 23, p. 29-30, MFA. 
 1956. Colour oo PES in colour proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 26-27.) MFA 
 Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
 1915, v. 22, p. 371-373, MFA. 
 Exposure with screen plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 o3 
 
 1958. The pigment difficulty in the 
 three-colour process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 5-6, 15-16.) 
 
 
 
 MFA 
 1959. Pope, Sir William Jackson. Colour 
 photography. (Engineering, London, 
 March 12, 1915, v. 99, p. 304-305.) VDA 
 
 General lecture. 
 
 Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
 New York, June 12, 1915, v. 79, p. 381, VA 
 
 1960. Power, H. D’Arcy. Color in pictorial 
 photography. illus. (American annual of 
 photography for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 
 30, p. 106-117.) MFA 
 
 Relation of color photography to color vision. 
 
 1961. Process for producing colored photo- 
 
 graphic prints. illus. (Scientific American, 
 
 New York, Dec. 11, 1915, v. 113, p. 524.) 
 VA 
 
 Process of Frederic E. Ives. 
 
 1962. Professor Dr. Richard Neuhauss. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1915, Bd. 52, p. 45-46.) MFA 
 
 Obituary notice. 
 
 1963. Schultess-Young, W. A. Color pho- 
 
 tography at its best. (American photogra- 
 
 phy, Boston, Dec., 1915, v. 9, p. 668-676.) 
 MFA 
 
 Brief directions for Paget and Autochrome plates. 
 
 1964. Sheahan, David J. The autochrome. 
 Possibilities of its use as a pictorial medium. 
 (American annual of photography for 1916, 
 New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 188-196.) MFA 
 
 Abridgment in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 15, MFA. 
 
 1965. The Society of Colour Photographers. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1906, v. 53, p. 831-832, 849, 936; 1907, v. 54, 
 p. 725, 767, 813, 828, supplement, p. 6, 30, 46, 
 54, 71, 73; 1908, v.55, p. 288, supplement, p. 
 88; 1910, v. 59, supplement, p. 24, 40; 1911, 
 v. 58, p. 88; 1912, v. 59, supplement, p. 12, 
 16, 25-26; 1913, v. 60, supplement, p. 12, 14, 
 23-24, 27-28, 32; 1914, v. 61, supplement, 
 p. 20-22, 28; 1915, v. 62, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 1966. Spiller, William H. Lantern slides in 
 natural colors. (Photo-era, Boston, 1915, . 
 v. 34, p. 60-61, 113-116.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome and Paget processes. 
 
 1967. Two-colour photography in patent 
 suit. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 Account of setting aside of British patent 26671 
 of 1906. 
 
 1968. W., L. T. Colour slides in lantern 
 lectures. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions for overcoming contrast to the bril- 
 liancy of the monochrome. 
 
94 
 
 1915, continued. 
 
 1969. Wall, Edward John. Kodachrome 
 and other two-colour processes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 29-30.) MFA 
 
 1970. Weston, A. W. H. Autochromes in 
 
 the reception room. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, June 4, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee, 
 
 1971. Xtensis, pseud. Panchromatic plates 
 and colour ratios. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ey 
 
 1916 
 
 1972. Baum, Ernst. Aus der Praxis des 
 Autochrom - Portrats vermittels Magne- 
 sium-Blitzlicht. (Photographische Kunst, 
 Miinchen, 1915-16, Jahrg. 14, p. 89-91.) 
 +MFA 
 
 1973. Biermann, E. A. The reproduction of 
 colour-screen transparencies. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 4, ies 
 
 1974. Black and white prints from auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1916, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1975. Brown, George Edward. Practical 
 instructions in color-photography. illus. 
 (Photo-miniature, New York, March, 1916, 
 v. 13, p. 98-138.) MFA 
 
 Autochrome, Paget, 
 processes. 
 
 Hicro, and Kodachrome 
 
 1976. Cabinet experiments in colour photog- 
 raphy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 42-44, 47-48.) MFA 
 
 1977. A Camera for two-colour photogra- 
 phy. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, June 2, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 
 
 Invention of Percy D. Brewster. 
 
 1978. Capstaff, J. G. The kodachrome 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 30-31.) MFA 
 
 Patent specifications. 
 
 1979. Two-colour subtractive cinema- 
 tography. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Sept. 1, 1916, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 
 
 Patent specification. 
 
 1980. Cobenzl, A. Agfa - Farbenplatte. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1916, Bd. 53, p. 323-328.) MFA 
 
 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1981. Commercial colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography. 
 MFA 
 
 supplement, p. 37-38.) 
 
 Some practical suggestions. 
 
 1982. Darling, Lloyd. Photography in 
 natural colors. illus. (Popular science 
 monthly, New York, 1916, v. 89, p. 102- 
 104.) *DA 
 
 1983. The Death is announced of Herr Rob- 
 ert Krayn. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 
 
 Traubes neues Farbeverfahren 
 (Photographische Kunst, 
 +MFA 
 
 1984. Dr. 
 fiir Diapositive. 
 Miinchen, 1916, Jahrg. 15, p. 9.) 
 
 1985. Donaldson, Charles. A bromoil trans- 
 fer process of three-colour printing. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, July 7, 
 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 25-26.) MFA 
 
 1986. Three-colour bromoil transfers. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 
 
 1987. A Double-negative camera which re- 
 produces images in natural colors. illus. 
 (Scientific American, New York, May 6, 
 1916, v. 114, p. 471, 495.) VA 
 
 Apparatus of Percy D. Brewster. 
 
 1988. Eldredge, Arthur G. Parallax in 
 Paget plates. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 1989. Farbrasterplatten mit Glaskornern 
 von MacDonough (1892) und ein verheim- 
 
 lichtes Quellenzitat. (Photographische 
 Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 23- 
 25) MFA 
 
 1990. Festenberg, Hans. 
 Praxis der Pinatypie. (Photographische 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 25- 
 Zr) MFA 
 
 1991. Fitzsimons, R. J., firm. Color pho- 
 
 tography with autochrom plates... New 
 York ,;1916;. 40 p. illus. 19. ed. nar. 16°. 
 MFG p.v. 4, no. 7 
 
 1992. Franck, Karl. Die Wirkungen der 
 einzelnen Spektralfarben auf die verschie- 
 denen lichtempfindlichen Schichten. illus. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1916, Bd. 53, p. 303-307.) MFA 
 
 1993. Fraprie, Frank Roy, editor. 
 make prints in colors... Boston: Ameri- 
 can Photographic Publishing Co., 1916. 66 
 p. 12°. (Practical photography. no. 4.) 
 
 Einiges aus der 
 
 How to _ 
 
 MFF (Practical v.4) _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ee a 
 
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1916, continued. 
 
 1994. Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. A 
 ratiometer for use in colour reproduction 
 work. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.9-11.) MFA 
 
 Communication 35 from the Research Laboratory 
 of the Eastman Kodak Co. 
 
 1995. Graham, James. System in experi- 
 mental work. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 27-28.) MFA 
 
 1996. Hess-Ives color photography. (Amer- 
 ican photography, Boston, Jan., 1916, v. 10, 
 p. 35-36.) MFA 
 
 1997. The Hess-Ives hiblock. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 40.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to this improvement. 
 
 1998. Hewitt, C. H. Three-colour bromoil 
 transfers. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 
 
 1999. Hnatek, Adolf. Versuche zur Anwen- 
 dung strenger Selektivfilter bei spektral- 
 photometrischen Untersuchungen. (Zeit- 
 schrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, 
 Leipzig, 1916, Bd. 15, p. 271-288.) PLC 
 
 2000. Is this actual color in photography 
 at last? (Popular science monthly, New 
 York, 1916, v. 88, p. 417.) *DA 
 
 2001. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Lippmann 
 films as means for securing monochromatic 
 light in photometry and optical pyrometry. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 2002. Ives, Herbert Eugene, and E. F. 
 Kincspury. The theory of the flicker photo- 
 meter. illus. (Philosophical magazine & 
 journal of science, London, Nov., 1914, se- 
 ries 6, v. 28, p. 708-728; April, 1916, series 
 6, v. 31, p. 290-321.) OA 
 
 2003. Lectures on colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Nov. 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 41-42.) | MFA 
 
 Suggestions for giving lectures. 
 
 2004. Lewisohn, John. A phantasy about 
 color-photography and colors. (American 
 annual of photography for 1917, New York, 
 1916, v. 31, p. 182-187.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions for possible improvements. 
 
 2005. Luckiesh, Matthew. A filter for 
 spectro-photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. eed 
 
 95 
 
 2006. Making trichrome negatives. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 5, 
 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 17-18.) MFA 
 
 Practical instructions. 
 
 2007. Marshall, Andrew. Lecturing with 
 colour slides. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.15-16.) MFA 
 
 Practical suggestions. 
 
 2008. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
 kodachrome process of color photography. 
 (Bulletin of photography, Philadelphia, Jan. 
 26, 1916, v. 18, p. 101-105.) +MFA 
 
 2009. Morris, Wayne. Color photography. 
 (American annual of photography for 1917, 
 New York, 1916, v. 31, p. 55-57.) MFA 
 
 Compares autochrome and Paget processes. 
 
 2010. Painter, F. W. The compensating 
 light - filter in the autochrome and other 
 screen plate processes. (British journal of 
 photography, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ry 
 
 2011. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Methods 
 of exhibiting color-photographs. illus. 
 (Photo-era, Boston, March, 1916, v. 36, p. 
 103-105.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 
 
 2012. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour sensitizing. 
 (Penrose’s annual, London, 1916, v. 21, p. 
 37-40.) MDSA (Penrose) 
 
 2013. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
 vision. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 
 
 2014. Criticism and colour perception. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 
 
 2015. The photography of soap bubbles. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 
 
 2016. Power, H. D’Arcy. Colour in pictorial 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Feb. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 
 
 2017. A Review of methods of direct color 
 photography. (Bulletin of photography, 
 Philadelphia, 1915, v. 17, p. 644, 675-676, 
 707-708, 739, 772; 1916, v. 18, p. 3-4, 35-36, 
 67-68, 132, 163-164, 209-210, 227-228, 259- 
 260, 291.) +MFA 
 
 2018. Rodman, G. H. The Paget colour 
 plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Dec., 1916, new series, v. 40, p. ee 
 
 
 
 
 
96 
 
 1916, continued. 
 
 2019. Salt, E. A.’ Rational panchromatism. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 
 
 2020. Smith, John H. A resumé of the 
 work on the bleach-out process of colour 
 photography. illus. (Manchester Literary 
 and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and 
 proceedings, Manchester, 1917, v. 60, no. 9, 
 p. 1-15. *EC 
 Bibliography. Pictures not given in the reprint. 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 39-40, 44, MFA. 
 
 2021. Thiem, W. Uber farbige Blitzauf- 
 
 nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
 Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 196-201.) MFA 
 
 2022. Thieme, Paul. Gedanken und Ver- 
 suche uber die neue Agfa- Farbenplatte. 
 illus. (Photographische Rundschau, 1916, 
 Bd. 53, p. 61-66.) MFA 
 
 2023. Valenta, Eduard. Die neue Farbras- 
 terplatte der Aktiengesellschaft ftir Anilin- 
 fabrikation in Berlin. illus. (Photograph- 
 ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, 
 p. 193-198.) MFA 
 Describes Christensen patent (D. R. P. no. 224456 
 of 1908, and 278043 of 1913) for the Agfa plate. 
 2024. Villain, Alfred. Historique de la pho- 
 tographie en couleurs sur tissus. (Associa- 
 tion générale des chimistes de l’industrie 
 textile. Bulletin, Paris, 1916, année 1914, 
 p. 15-99.) VLA 
 
 Extensive bibliography, p. 58—59. 
 
 2025. Vinzl, Hans. Wie ich meine Auto- 
 chrome entwickle. (Photographische Kor- 
 respondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 288-296.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 2026. Vom Daguerreotyp zur farbenemp- 
 findlichen Platte. Zur Geschichte der 
 Vogel - Obernetter - Eosin - Silberplatte. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1916, Bd. 53, p. 20-23.) MFA 
 
 2027. Wall, Edward John. Notes on the 
 processes of cinematography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 19-20, 
 22-24.) MFA 
 
 2028. Whidden, Guy C. Color photography 
 achieved. illus. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
 
 cisco, Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 3-8.) MFA 
 Hess-Ives process. 
 2029. Wieland, H., and others. Ceramic 
 
 colour screen plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
 Abstract of German patent 291575. MFA 
 2030. Wilkinson, W. T. Colour prints on 
 paper. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, Dp. 26-27.) MFA 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 2031. Williams, A. D. Developing auto- 
 chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 19-22.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 3, 1916, 'v. 63, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 12, MFA. 
 
 1917 
 
 2032. Anderson, Paul L. The Hess - Ives 
 process of color photography. (American 
 annual of photography for 1918, New York, 
 1917, v. 32, p. 56-63.) MFA 
 
 2033. Belden, Charles J. Making auto- 
 chromes by artificial light. (American an- 
 nual of photography for 1918, New York, 
 1917, v. 32, p. 88-92.) MFA 
 
 2034. A Bibliography on color for photog- 
 raphers. (Motion picture news, New York, 
 1917, v. 16, p. 298-300, 886.) +MFL 
 
 Short list of selected books and papers, with com- 
 ments. 
 
 2035. Briant, Travers J. Colour vision. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 36, 40, 44.) MFA 
 
 Reply to article by C. W. Piper. 
 meaning of ‘‘daylight.” 
 
 Discusses the 
 
 2036. Colour prints on silk fabrics. (Brit- 
 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 
 
 1917, v.64, Colour photography supplement, 
 
 p. 4.) MFA 
 Method of Vallette et Péret. 
 
 2037. The Commercial side of colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 11, 1917, v. 64, p. Meee 
 
 2038. Corbin, Thomas W. Marvels of sci- 
 entific invention; an interesting account in 
 non-technical language of the invention of 
 guns...colour photography, and many 
 other recent discoveries of science... Lon- 
 don: Seeley, Service & Co., Ltd., ‘1917. 1 
 
 5~251(1) p., 16 pl. diagrs. 8°, V 
 
 Color photography, p. 212-219. 
 
 2039. Davis, Vivian P. A modification of 
 the raydex process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 4, 1917, v. 64, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 17.) 
 MFA 
 A reply to H. E. Rendall. 
 
 2040. Deisch, Noel. Illumination of the 
 subject in determining the colour quality 
 of autochromes. (Photographic journal of 
 America, Philadelphia, Nov., 1917, v. 54, 
 p. 467-4 69.) M FA 
 
 Also printed in British Journal of photography, 
 
 London, Aug, 2, 1918) vo) 65, 
 supplement, D. 30-31, MFA. 
 
 Abstract in Camera craft, 
 1918, v. 25, p. 244-246, MFA. 
 
 das 
 
 Colour photography ~ 
 
 San Francisco, June, | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
re 
 
 aA ee 
 
 —. 
 oT 
 
 a 1 eS 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY Q7 
 
 1917, continued. 
 
 2041. A Device for testing photographic 
 color-filters. (Motion picture news, New 
 York, Aug. 4, 1917, v. 16, p. 887-888.) -_MFL 
 Spectrum projector of the Bausch & Lomb Optical 
 Company. 
 2042. Eder, Josef Maria. Colour sensitis- 
 ing dyes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
 1917, v. 24, p. 254-255, MFA. 
 2043. Fundamental hue scale for scientific 
 colour designation. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, July 6, 1917, v. 64, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 25-27.) 
 MFA 
 Result of experiments by the Eastman Kodak 
 Company. 
 2044. Grabado fotografico en colores. 
 ciedad de fomento fabril. 
 
 (So- 
 Boletin, Santiago, 
 
 Chile, 1917, afio 34, p. 444452.) VA 
 2045. Haines, Robert Thorne. Color pho- 
 tography. 
 
 (Photo-era, Boston, Dec., 1917, 
 v. 39, p. 290-291.) MF A 
 
 Possibility of coloring salts by cathode rays. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 2, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 29-30, MFA. 
 
 2046. Hirshberg, Leonard Keene. Color 
 photography. (American magazine of art, 
 Washington, 1917, v.8, p. 281-283.) MAA 
 
 2047. Hodgman, Charles D. Color and 
 color photography. (Cleveland Engineer- 
 ing Society. Journal, Cleveland, 1917, v. 10, 
 p. 127-141.) VDA 
 Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
 New York, Dec. 22, 1917, v. 84, p. 399-400, VA. 
 2048. Ilford, Ltd. Working formulae for 
 the new sensitol colour -sensitising dyes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 
 
 2049. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Hue differ- 
 ence and flicker photometer speed. illus. 
 (Philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
 ence, London, Aug., 1917, series 6, v. 34, 
 p. 99-112.) OA 
 2050. A polarization flicker photometer 
 and some data of theoretical bearing ob- 
 tained with it. illus. (Philosophical maga- 
 zine and journal of science, London, April, 
 1917, series 6, v. 33, p. 360-380.) OA 
 
 2051. Visual diffusivity. illus. (Philo- 
 sophical magazine and journal of science, 
 London, Jan., 1917, series 6, v. 33, p. LED 
 
 
 
 
 
 2052. Kilmer, T. W. Photography in 
 colors — the visual index. (Photo-era, 
 Boston, Dec., 1917, v. 39, p. 294-296.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions for making autochromes with soft 
 focus lens. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 25-26, MFA. 
 
 2053. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
 Notes from the research laboratory, East- 
 man Kodak Co. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
 nal, Philadelphia, 1917, v. 184, p. 311-312.) 
 VA 
 
 Photomicrographs in color. 
 
 2054. Photo-micrographs in colour. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 4, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 Communication no. 50 from the Research Labora- 
 tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 
 
 Also printed in American photography, 
 Aug., 1917, v. 11, p. 448-453, MFA. 
 
 2055. Merillat, Lou. Color photography. 
 (Photo-era, Boston, April, 1917, v. 38, p. 
 183-186.) ' MFA 
 
 General principles with brief descriptions of the 
 newer processes. 
 2056. Photo-micrographs in color. (Mining 
 and scientific press, San Francisco, Oct. 27, 
 1917, v. 115, p. 610.) VA 
 
 2057. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
 vision and colour photography. The spec- 
 trum and the Young- Helmholtz theory. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 9-10, 21-23, 29-31, 36, 40, 44. Preys 
 
 
 
 Boston, 
 
 
 
 2058. ‘The development of the science 
 
 of colour. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Jan. 5, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 
 
 raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 Historical review. 
 
 2059. Press, A. How are photographs made 
 
 in natural colors? illus. (Popular science 
 monthly, New York, 1917, v. 90, p. 254— 
 
 2555) *DA 
 2060. The Prizma four-colour process of 
 colour cinematography. illus. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, April 6, 
 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 14.) MFA 
 
 2061. Le Procédé versicolor Dufay pour la 
 photographie des couleurs. illus. (La 
 Nature, Paris, Nov. 10, 1917, v.45, p.292- 
 294.) OA 
 
 Translation in pares PEN, supplement, 
 New York, April 13, 1918, v. 85, p. Ab- 
 stract in British journal of pe eae London, 
 1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
 20-22, MFA. Partial translation in Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Oct., 1918, v. 25, p. 415, MFA. 
 
 2062. Rendall, H. E. A modification in the 
 raydex process. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, April 6, 1917, v. 64, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 7 
 
 For a reply by Vivian P. Davis see issue of May 4, 
 1917, Colour photography supplement, p. 17. 
 
 2063. Struss, Karl. Colour photography. 
 (American photography, Boston, Aug., 
 1917, v. 11, p. 437-444.) MFA 
 Hess-Ives process. 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 33-34, S735) MFA, 
 
98 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 1917, continued, 
 
 2064. The Technicolor process of two-col- 
 our cinematography. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Nov. 2, 1917, 
 v. 64, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 41-43.) MFA 
 
 2065. Villain, Alfred. Color photography 
 on fabrics. (Textile American, Boston, 
 1917, v. 28, Nov., 1917, p. 21-22.) 3-tf VLA 
 
 1918 
 
 2066. Additive and subtractive colour proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) ‘MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 March, 1919, v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. ! 
 
 2067. Austin, A. C. The autochrome plate 
 in photo-lithography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 
 MFA 
 
 2068. Bull, A. J. Some peculiarities of 
 
 colour and their bearing on photographic 
 
 work. (Photographic journal, London, 
 
 Jan., 1918, new series, v. 42, p.9-13.) MFA 
 With discussion. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 1, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 5-6, A, and in Scientific American 
 
 supplement, New York, 1918, v. 86, p. 69, VA 
 
 2069. Colour photography of the battlefield. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 7, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 Account of the work of F. Hurley in Flanders and - 
 
 Palestine. 
 
 2070. Decennia practica — colour photogra- 
 phy. illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 2-7, 11-12, 14-16, 18-20, 23- 
 24, 27-28, 31-32,- 35-36, 38-39, 43-44, 46-48; 
 1918, v.65, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 3-4, 6-8, 12, 14, 18-20, 23-24, 26-27, 31-32, 
 35-36, 39-40, 42-44, 47-48; 1919, v. 66, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 3-4, 7-8, 
 11-12, 20, 27-28.) MF 
 Brings together extracts from the British journal 
 
 almanac of the years 1906 to 1915 covering important 
 developments during that time. 
 
 2071. The Douglass process of cinematog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 2072. Fischer, Otto. Beitrag zur Kenntnis 
 der Chinocyanine (Pinacyanole, Dicya- 
 nine). (Journal fiir praktische Chemie, 
 Leipzig, 1918, N. BF. Bd. 98) p: ma 
 
 2073. Fox method of preparing positives 
 for subtractive two-color cinematography. 
 (Motion picture news, New York, April 6, 
 1918, v. 17, p. 2110-2112.) MFL 
 
 2074. Hess-Ives Corporation. Dichroic 
 films for selective transmission and reflec- 
 tive of colour rays. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, March 1, 1918, v. 65, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 9-11. ), 
 MF 
 
 - Sg of their patent specification 110089 of 
 eb., 191 
 
 2075. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The resolu-- 
 tion of mixed colours by differential visual 
 diffusivity. illus. (Philosophical magazine 
 and journal of science, London, May, ay 
 
 series 6, v. 35, p. 413-421.) 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1918, v. 65, ae photography supplement, 
 p. 33- 35, 38-39, MFA 
 
 2076. Meggers, W. F. Wave-length meas- 
 urements in spectra from 5600 to 9600 A. 
 illus. (United States. — Standards Bureau. 
 Bulletin, Washington, June 24, 1918, v. 14, 
 p. 371-395.) VBDA 
 
 See p. 376-377 for dyes used in photographing red 
 and infra red. 
 
 2077. A Pioneer in colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 Refers to Henry Collen. See entry under his name. 
 
 2078. Piper, Charles Welborne. Some 
 thoughts on coloured photographs and pho- 
 tographs in colour. (British journal of 
 photography, London, May 3, 1918, v. 65, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ee 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 
 Sept., 1918, v.25, p. 370-372, MFA. 
 
 2079. Prizma two-colour cinematography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 1, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Comments on article by A. S. Cory in Motion pic- 
 ture news of Jan. 12, 1918. 
 
 2080. Rounds, Will. Avoiding pitfalls in 
 making autochromes. (British journal of — 
 photography, London, June 7, 1918, v. 65, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. sy 
 
 2081. Rundle, B. Autochrome frames and 
 a few hints. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 1, 1918, v. 65, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. re 
 
 2082. Seyewetz, A. Dyes in colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 46-47.) MFA 
 
 
 
4 
 
 
 
 photography supplement, p. 36.) 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 99 
 
 1918, continued. 
 
 2083. Storr, B. V. Photographic materials 
 and processes. (Society of Chemical In- 
 dustry. Reports of the progress of applied 
 chemistry, London. v. 1, 1916, p. 298-315; 
 v. 2, 1917, p. 495-509; v. 3, 1918, p. 457-466.) 
 
 VOA 
 
 Reviews progress in color processes and cinema- 
 tography, especially with reference to patents. 
 
 The above are reprinted in British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1917, v. 64, p. 353-356, 364-366; 
 1919, v. 66, p. 13-15, 27-28, 605- 608, MFA. 
 
 2084. Warburg, Agnes B. “War-type” 
 (Bromoil-transfero-collotype). (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
 1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 37-38.) MFA 
 
 2085. Wilkinson, W. T. New method of 
 
 producing tri-color prints. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, April, 1918, v. 25, p. 157— 
 159.) MFA 
 
 1919 
 
 2086. Belden, Charles J. Autochrome pho- 
 tography by artificial light. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, July 4, 1919, 
 v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 25-26.) MFA 
 
 2087. —— Color photography by artificial 
 light. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1919, v. 
 23, p. 246-249.) MFA 
 
 2088. Books on colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, June 
 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 2089. Butler, C. P. The bleachout process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 4, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 2090. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler three- 
 colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, aa 
 
 2091. A Combined transparency viewing 
 apparatus and retouching stand. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 22-24.) MFA 
 
 _ 2092. Douglass, L. F. Douglass two-colour 
 
 cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 3, 1919, v. 66, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 
 
 Specification of his patent 117864 of 1918 
 (British). 
 
 2093. Expert, pseud. Dust and the Paget 
 colour process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, March 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 12.) MFA 
 
 2094. Fanstone, Robert M. Colour screen 
 hints. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 40.) MFA 
 
 Suggests greater care in calculating time of ex- 
 posure. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, 
 Feb., 1920, v. 27, p. 68, MFA. 
 
 2095. Essential features in apparatus 
 for colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Hints on cameras, lenses, filters, and exposure 
 meters. 
 
 2096. Lantern - slides by the screen- 
 plate process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Dec. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 
 
 2097. Notes on the Paget process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) F 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, 
 Oct., 1919, v.26, p. 403-404, MFA. 
 
 2098. Registering Paget transparencies. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 
 Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 San Francisco, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 San Francisco, 
 
 
 
 2099. Godbold, A. Vernon. Fourteen points 
 
 on colour. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, 1919, v. 66, p. 261-262, 275-276.) 
 MFA 
 
 2100. The Gorsky colour process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Nov. 7, 
 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference. 
 
 2101. Gross, Michael. The quest of color. 
 
 (Photo-era magazine, Boston, Feb., 1919, 
 
 v. 42, p. 64-68.) MFA 
 Historical. 
 
 2102-2103. H. Essenhigh Corke. (Photo- 
 
 graphic journal, London, March, 1919, new 
 series, v. 43, p. 102-103.) MFA 
 Obituary. 
 
 2104. Havelock, Bertram E. The light- 
 filter in autochrome photography. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera HED 
 Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 402-403, MFA 
 
 San Francisco, 
 
 2105. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new pho- 
 tographic mordant dye process. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 Has also specification of British patent no. 113617 
 
 of 1918 granted to author and the Hess-Ives Corpora- 
 tion. 
 
100 
 1919, continued. 
 
 2106. Koegel, P. R. Die Konstitution 
 organischer Farbstoffe und ihre Lichtemp- 
 findlichkeit unter dem Einfluss von Anethol 
 und anderer Sensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
 graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 
 56, p. 224-231, 258-270.) MFA 
 
 2107. Die theoretischen Grundlagen 
 eines neuen direkten farbenphotograph- 
 ischen Verfahrens mittels Korperfarben. 
 
 
 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1919, Bd. 56, p. 332-337.) MFA 
 2108. Kropf, Fritz. §Entwicklungsbilder 
 
 und Farbenempfindlichkeit verschiedener 
 
 Silbersalze. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
 
 respondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 56, p. 33-42.) 
 MFA 
 
 Abstract translation in British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photogra- 
 phy supplement, p. 36, MFA. 
 
 2108a. Lucas, E. G. Handel. Three-colour 
 photography. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 
 
 Suggests that tri-color photography must be de- 
 veloped and not scrapped as a “blind alley.” 
 
 2109. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. A 
 simplified method of developing autochrome 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 37.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 Dec., 1919, v. 26, p. 478-479, MFA. 
 
 2110. und, Carl H., and LL. EE. Wise. 
 Intermediates used in the preparation of 
 photosensitizing dyes. 2: Quaternary ha- 
 lides. (Journal of industrial & engineering 
 chemistry, Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, 
 p. 458-460.) VOA 
 
 2111. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 H. T. Crarke. A new yellow dye and light 
 filters made from it. illus. (Journal of 
 industrial & engineering chemistry, Easton, 
 
 Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 454-455.) VOA 
 
 211la. Meugniot. Une méthode simplifiée 
 de développement des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1919, série 3, tome 6, p. 341- 
 343.) MFA 
 
 2112. Miethe, Adolf, and Ericu STENGER. 
 Ultraviolettdurchlassige Filter. illus. 
 (Zeitschrift ftir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
 
 graphie, Photophysik und Photochemie, 
 
 Leipzig, 1919, Bd. 19, p. 57-68.) PLC 
 Has a list of references. 
 
 2113. Mikeska, L. A., and others. Inter- 
 
 mediates used in the preparation of photo- 
 sensitizing dyes. 1: Quinoline bases. (Jour- 
 
 ‘2117. Paget colour process. 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 nal of industrial and engineering chemistry, 
 Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 456-458.) 
 VOA 
 
 2114. Namias, Rodolfo. Enciclopedia foto- 
 grafica. Milano: Il Progresso fotografico, 
 1919. xxii, 1001 p. 6.ed. illus. 8°. MFD 
 
 Chapter 57: La fotografia in colori col processo di 
 tricromia fotografica, Chapter 58: La fotografia in 
 colori col processo di autocromia Lumiere e processi 
 analoghi. 
 
 2115. Newens, Frank R. A demonstration 
 of “Raydex.” (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 don, Dec., 1919, new series, v. 43, p. 238—- 
 241.) MFA 
 
 2116. Nicholson, John William. Energy 
 distribution in spectra. (Nature, London, 
 Aug. 21, 1919, v. 103, p. 495-498.) OA 
 
 (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, April 4, 1919, 
 v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 14.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions for keeping screens and filters clean. 
 
 2118. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The pho- 
 tography of coloured objects. (Manchester 
 Literary and Philosophical Society. Me- 
 moirs, Manchester, Oct. 24, 1919, v. 64, part 
 2, p. XXvili-xxx.) * EC 
 
 Abstract in Nature, London, Nov. 27, 1919, v. 104, 
 
 p. 346, OA. Account of dyestuffs prepared under the 
 author’s direction. 
 
 2119. Pseudo-colour processes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 4.) MFA 
 
 Brief references to ‘‘Mars-Star”? and Solgram proc- 
 esses. 
 
 2120. Rendall, H. E. Paget colour photog- 
 raphy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 2121. A review of colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 31-34.) MFA 
 
 Reviews paper printing processes. 
 
 
 
 2122. Where we stand in colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 21-22 MFA 
 Brief account of developments during war time. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 399-401, MFA, and Photo-era 
 magazine, Boston, Oct., 1919, v. 43, p. 186-188, MFA. 
 
 2123. Williams, S. H. <A new process of 
 printing on paper in natural colours. (Pho- 
 tographic journal, London, March, 1919, 
 new series, v. 43, p. 88-95.) MFA 
 
 Abstracts in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
 1919, v. 26, p. 201-202, MFA, and anes tM 
 pher, London, March 5, 1919, v. 47, p. 200 A. 
 
 * a 
 
 
 
A 
 : e 
 . 
 * 
 iB 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1919, continued. 
 
 2124. Three-colour Bromoil enlarge- 
 ments from negatives of the Joly type. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1919, v.66, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 15-16, 18-20.) MFA 
 Paper read before the Royal Photographic Society. 
 With discussion. 
 Also printed in Camera craft, 
 
 
 
 San Francisco, 
 Sept., 1919, v. 26, p. 359-361, MFA, without discus- 
 sion. 
 
 2125. Wise, Louis E., and others. Syn- 
 thesis of photosensitizing dyes; pinaverdol 
 and pinacyanol. (Journal of industrial and 
 engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., May, 
 1919, v.11, p. 460-463.) VOA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 
 
 2126. Yerbury,S.G. Is three-colour a blind 
 alley? (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 36.) MFA 
 
 2127. Yoshida, Usaburo. Methyl-violet as 
 a red sensitiser of the photographic plate. 
 illus. (Kyoto Imperial University. — Col- 
 lege of Science. Memoirs, Kyoto, 1917-19, 
 v. 3, p. 69-71.) OA 
 
 1920 
 
 2128. Arch, John C. Making and printing 
 carbon tissues for three-colour printing. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 2129. Arturo Hernandez. (British journal 
 
 of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 
 Notice of his death. MFA 
 
 2130. Autochromes of the lunar eclipse. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 40-minute exposure in telescopic camera of the 
 Société francaise de photographie. 
 
 2131. Barbier, H. Colorants sensibilisa- 
 teurs dérivés des quinoléines, quinaldines et 
 lépidines contenant les radicaux diméthyl- 
 amino et diéthylamino. (Société chimique 
 de France. Bulletin, Paris, 1920, série 4, 
 tome 27, p. 427-439.) PKA 
 
 2132. Blueness of water effects in the Paget 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 
 
 tography supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 
 2133. Burka, Samuel M. Hypersensitizing 
 commercial panchromatic plates. illus. 
 
 (Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, 
 1920, v. 189, p. 25-46.) VA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, 1920, v. 67, p. 479-481, 496-499, 514, MFA. 
 
 101 
 
 2134. Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Buttock. 
 A production of panchromatic sensitiveness 
 without dyes. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 26, 1920, v. 67, 
 
 p. 719-720.) MFA 
 
 Communication no. 92 from the Research Labora- 
 tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 
 
 2135. Claudy, Carl Harry. Color photog- 
 raphy. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1920, 
 v. 24, p. 406-411.) MFA 
 
 Ives’ processes of still and moving pictures. 
 
 Fred- 
 eric E. Ives, wizard of color and light, and 
 father of the half-tone. port. (Scientific 
 American, New York, July 31, 1920, v. 123, 
 p. 104, 112, 114.) VA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 
 London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 
 
 
 
 2137. Colour photography; the autochrome 
 and Paget methods described, and their 
 applicability compared. Duplicating colour 
 transparencies. Difficulties in the way of 
 colour work on paper. (Amateur photog- 
 rapher and photography, London, March 3, 
 1920, v. 49, p. 173-174.) +MFA 
 
 2138. Crémier, Victor. Developers for the 
 autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.31.) MFA 
 
 2139. Crowther, Raymond E. Photographic 
 materials and processes. (Society of Chem- 
 ical Industry. Reports of the progress of 
 applied chemistry, London, v. 4, 1919, p. 
 508-522; v. 5; 1920, p: 505-522.) VOA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, May 28, 1920, v. 0 p. 327-332; 1921, v. 68, 
 p. 478-480, 490- 491, MFA 
 
 2140. Davidson, Winn W. The future of 
 color photography. (Photo-era magazine, 
 Boston, Feb., 1920, v.44, p. 80-85.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 9-11, MFA. 
 
 2141. Death of Sir William Abney. port. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 10, 1920, v. 67, p. 755-756.) MFA 
 
 2142. Eastman Kodak Company. The pho- 
 tography of colored objects. Rochester, 
 N. Y.: Eastman Kodak Co., 19203. 1020p: 
 iilus, 4. ed, "8". MFK 
 
 2143. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting single 
 metal slides for the Paget colour process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 2144. —— Binding Paget colour transpar- 
 encies. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 
 
102 
 1920, continued, 
 2145. Clearing autochromes and fixing 
 
 
 
 after intensification. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 
 Colour photography supplement, eone 
 
 2146. —— Colour photography in portrai- 
 ture. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 25-27.) MFA 
 
 Suggestions as to lenses, backgrounds, and posing. 
 
 2147. The colour photography of 
 stained glass by the screen plate process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 
 
 2148. Flower photography in natural 
 colours by the screen-plate process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
 6, 1920, v. 67, p. 41-43.) MFA 
 
 2149. —— Identifying three-colour nega- 
 tives. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, p.16.) MFA 
 
 Directions for marking films. 
 
 2150. The intensification of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 2151, Lantern slides from Paget col- 
 
 our negatives. (British journal of photog- 
 
 raphy, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, p. Ore § 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2152. Monochrome prints from Paget 
 colour negatives. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 
 
 25S. A simple holder for three-colour. 
 light-filters. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 17-18.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 MFA 
 2154—,2155). Subject and lighting in 
 screen-plate colour photography. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 
 1920, v. 67, p. 7-8.) MFA 
 
 2156. Hervé. Le portrait sur autochromes 
 a l’atelier et en plein air. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1920, sé- 
 rie 3, tome 7, p. 34-36.) MFA 
 
 Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202-203, MFA. 
 
 2157. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dye-toning 
 with ferricyanide and chromic acid bleach. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 4, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 2158. A further development of Ives’ 
 mordant dye-image process. (British jour- 
 
 
 
 THE NEW YORK (PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, 
 v. 67, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 43.) MFA 
 
 2159. Jové. Notes pratiques sur l’hyper- 
 sensibilisation des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 198—- 
 199.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 4, MFA 
 
 2160. Knoche, Paul. Die physiologischen 
 Grundlagen der Farbenphotographie. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1920, Bd. 57, p. 287-290.) MFA 
 
 2161. Koegel, P. R. Dyes for the bleachout 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 2162. Uber die Verwendung der Blii- 
 tenfarbstoffe fiir die Farbenphotographie. 
 (Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
 1920, Jahrg. 57, p. 86-91.) MFA 
 
 2163. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
 1920, v.67, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 38-39.) MFA 
 
 _ Brief biography with chronological list of his inven- 
 tions. 
 
 
 
 2164. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenempfindlich- 
 keit und  Entwicklungsart. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920, 
 Bd. 57, p. 129-130.) MFA 
 
 2165. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. Sur 
 les propriétés sensibilisatrices d’une nou- 
 velle série de matiéres colorantes. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 182- 
 184.) MFA 
 
 2166. Mills, William Hobson, and P. E. 
 Evans. The cyanine dyes. Part 2: The 
 synthesis of O-aminocinnamylidenequinal- 
 dine methiodide. (Chemical Society. Trans- 
 actions, London, 1920, v. 117, p. ana ot: 
 
 2167. Mills, William Hobson, and F. M. 
 Hamer. The cyanine dyes. Part 3: The 
 constitution of pinacyanol. (Chemical So- 
 
 ciety. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
 p. 1550-1562.) PKA 
 
 2168. Mills, William Hobson, and Sir W. J. 
 Pore. Studies in photographic sensitisers. 
 illus. (Photographic journal, London, 1920, 
 new series, v. 44, p. 183-202, 253-267.) 
 MFA 
 
 Part 1: The isocyanine dyestuffs. 
 Part 2: The carbocyanines. 
 
 2169. Mills, William Hobson, and R. S. 
 WisHart. The cyanine dyes. Part 1: The 
 constitution of the isocyanines. (Chemical 
 Society. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
 p. 579-587.) PKA 
 
 
 
Ve a Se 
 
 5. 
 an 
 af 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1920, continued. 
 2170. Newens, Frank R. Raydex three- 
 colour photographic printing process. 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 3, 1920, v. 67, p. 740.) MFA 
 
 eee of paper read before the Croydon Camera 
 ub. 
 
 2171. Offer, Thomas J. Direct colour pho- 
 tography of stage plays. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. aE 
 MFA 
 
 Practical suggestions. 
 
 2172. Plotnikov, Ivan Stepanovich. Allge- 
 meine Photochemie, ein Hand- und Lehr- 
 buch ftir Forschung, Praxis und Studium. 
 Berlin: Vereinigung wissenschaftlicher 
 Verleger, 1920. xiv, 729 p. illus. 8°. PLC 
 
 See p. 689-699, 703: Farbenphotographie. Includes 
 a chronology. For translation of section on the 
 bleachout process, see British journal of photography, 
 March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 12, MFA. 
 
 2172a. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Impor- 
 tance of colour photography for schools and 
 the community in general. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, 1920, v. 67, 
 p. 13-15, 19-20.) MFA 
 
 2173. Rendall, H. E. Approximately cor- 
 rect colour photography. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
 1920, v.67, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 45-46.) MFA 
 
 Suggests use of two colors and of a black key plate. 
 2174. Experiment in colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 
 
 
 
 tography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 Suggests lines of development. A 
 2175. Rimmer, John Brown. Simplified 
 
 autochrome work. (American photogra- 
 phy, Boston, Sept., 1920, v. 14, p. 516-519.) 
 MFA 
 Also peroted in British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 1920, v. 67, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 59-40, MFA, . 
 
 2176. Toulon, Pierre. Les projections sté- 
 
 réoscopiques par la lumiére polarisée. illus. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1920, série 3, tome 7, p. 112- 
 117.) MFA 
 
 2177. Vies, Guilliam de. Autochrome work 
 in tropical Africa. (Amateur photographer 
 and photography, London, March 24, 1920, 
 v. 49, p. 236.) +MFA 
 
 2178. W., L. T. Colour photography by 
 the latest process. illus. (Work, London, 
 1920, v. 58, p. 290.) VA 
 Paget process. 
 2179. Wall, Edward John. Truthful colour 
 rendering. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, D. 36.) MFA 
 
 103 
 2180. Wilcox, Walter Dwight. Autochrome 
 photography... A paper read...at the 
 
 annual meeting of the American Alpine 
 Club January 3, 1920, and directed to be 
 printed for distribution to the members. 
 tCanada:; The American Alpine Club ,;1920). 
 Oat:.tl gto MFF p.v. 51, no. 11 
 
 1921 
 
 2181. Adrien, Charles. Note sur la désensi- 
 bilisation des autochromes. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
 April, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 110- 1425 
 MFA 
 
 2182. ———- Notes sur la stéréoscopie auto- 
 chrome sur plaques 9 x 12 et divers acces- 
 soires de chambre noire. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, sé- 
 rie 3, tome 8, p. 24-26.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. sf 1921 ave Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 8, MFA, and Camera ee San Fran- 
 cisco, March, 1921, v. 28, p. 94-95, MFA 
 
 2183. The Auto colour camera. (British 
 journal of photography, London, March 4, 
 1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 11-12.) MFA 
 
 Simplicity claimed for the apparatus of F. Donis- 
 thorpe. 
 
 2184. Bennett, Colin N. Principles of colour 
 photography in simple language. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 6, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 19-20.) MFA 
 
 Reprint of article in the Kinematograph weekly. 
 Largely historical. 
 
 2185. Burchardt, Ernest A. Negatives for 
 three-colour printing from autochromes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Sept, 2, 1921; v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 
 
 2186. Clay, Reginald S. A suggestion for 
 a new method of photography in colour. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 
 
 Suggests a diffraction grating based upon Newton’s 
 rings. 
 
 2187. A Colour camera. (British journal 
 
 of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 
 MFA 
 
 Brief reference to apparatus of Hiram C. Deeks. 
 
 2188. Crabtree, J. I. A method of produc- 
 ing reversed dye images. (Camera craft, 
 San Francisco, Nov., 1921, v. 28, p. 374- 
 3/7.) MFA 
 
 Communication no. 97 from the Research Labora- 
 tory of the Eastman Kodak Co. 
 
104 
 
 1921, continued. 
 
 2189. Davis, Raymond. A new method for 
 the measurement of photographic filter fac- 
 tors. Washington: Gov. Prtg. Off., 1921. 
 1 p.l., 79-89 p. illus. 4°. (United States. 
 — Bureau of Standards. Scientific papers. 
 no. 409.) PAH (U.S.) 
 
 2190. Desensitising autochrome plates. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 15, 1921, v. 68, p. 418.) MFA 
 
 2191. Direct colour photography in medi- 
 cine. (Lancet, London, May 28, 1921, v. 
 200, p. 1146.) WAA 
 
 Brief account of colored lantern slides at the Royal 
 Society of Medicine. 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 28, MFA. 
 
 2192. Eder, Josef Maria. Pinaflavol, ein 
 neuer Sensibilisator ftir Griin. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 
 
 Bd. 58, p. 87-90.) MFA 
 
 2193. Espitallier, M. R. Autochrome de- 
 velopment. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 March, 1921, v. 28, p. 95, MFA. 
 
 2194. F., W. B. William de Wiveleslie Ab- 
 
 ney. port. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
 
 don, Jan., 1921, new series, v. 45, p. laa 
 Brief biography. MF 
 
 2195. Fanstone, Robert M. Autumn foli- 
 age by the screen-plate processes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
 1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 37-38.) MFA 
 
 2196. Clouds in autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 3, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 
 p. 24. ) MFA 
 
 ae. Colour rendering in the screen- 
 plate process. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 
 Suggestions for overcoming defects. 
 2198. Intensifying autochromes. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
 2, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 45-46.) MFA 
 
 2199. Pictorial photography in colours. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 27-28.) MFA 
 Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
 N. H., March, 1922, v. 48, p. 143-144, MFA. 
 2200. Spotting and taking out defects 
 from screen-plate colour transparencies. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, 
 Aug., 1921, v. 28, p. 271-273, MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 San Francisco, 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 2201. Fielitz, Otto. Beitrage zur Frage 
 des farbenphotographischen Papierbildes. 
 (Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
 1921, Bd. 58, p. 311-314, 329-331.) 
 
 2202. Gamble, W. Penrose. A new three- 
 colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 Patent of A. Roland Trist. From Penrose’s An- 
 nual, 1922. 
 
 2203. Gimpel, Léon. La projection en relief 
 a la portée de tous par anaglyphes sur 
 plaques autochromes. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, 
 tome 8, p. 194-204.) MFA 
 
 2204. Hodgman, Charles D. Color filters 
 for photographic uses. (Physical review, 
 Lancaster, Penn., 1921, series 2, v. 17, p 
 
 246-249.) PAA 
 Gives a long list of dye solutions. 
 2205. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 
 
 Theorie und Praxis der Farbenphotogra- 
 phie mit Autochrom- und anderen Raster- 
 
 farbenplatten. Hallea.S.: W. Knapp, 1921. 
 74 p. illus. 5. ed. 8°. (Enzyklopadie der 
 Photographie. Heft 60.) MFV 
 
 ones Library also has 1st ed. (1908) and 2d ed. 
 
 2206. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dyeing sensi- 
 tive films for relief prints. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 
 MFA 
 
 2207. New bleach formulae for the Ives 
 mordant dye-toning process. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, 
 v. 68, Colour photography supplement, ee or 
 
 
 
 2208. Ives’s medico-chromograms. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, April 1, 
 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 
 p.16.) MFA 
 A two-colour plus process for use in hospitals. 
 
 Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202, MFA. 
 
 2209. Jones, Chapman. Sir William de 
 Wiveleslie Abney. (Photographic journal, 
 London, July, 1921, new series, v. 45, p. 296- 
 310.) MFA 
 
 With bibliography. 
 
 2210. Koenig, Ernst. Pinaflavol, ein neuer 
 Sensibilisator ftir Griin. Coe ee 
 Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, Bd. 58, p.8 
 81.) MFA 
 Also printed in British journal of ph otOer ens 
 London, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, an 
 Francisco, June, 1921, v. 28, p. 203-204, MFA. 
 
 221%. Die Verwendung des Pinaflavols 
 in der Farbenphotographie. (Photo- 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 
 Bd. 58, p. 193-196.) MFA 
 
 
 
 MFA — 
 
 
 
 oe Se ee ee ee ea ae es aero 
 
 ol al a ae 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ee ee a a ee ar a 
 

 
 K 
 ; 
 ce 
 ‘sh 
 ee. 
 ay 
 A 
 4 
 -: 
 S 
 7 
 ag £ 
 be 
 ae 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1921, continued. 
 
 2212. Leventon, L. M. ° Improving auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 For weak negatives suggests binding them up with 
 a second color screen. 
 
 2213. Liabeuf, H. Appareil automatique de 
 prise de vue par sélection trichrome 13 x 18. 
 illus. (Société francaise de photographie. 
 Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 167— 
 168.) MFA 
 
 2214. Lighting and exposure in autochrome 
 work. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 3, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 
 
 2215. The Loudine colour process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 40.) MFA 
 
 2216. Louis Ducos du Hauron. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 4.) MFA 
 
 2217. Lumiére, Auguste, and others. 
 sensitising autochromes before develop- 
 ment. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 
 Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
 N. H., Dec., 1921, v. 47, p. 297-300, MFA. 
 2218. Experiments on _ desensitisers. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 1921, v. 68, p. 351-354, 370-371.) MFA 
 
 Portion dealing with color-sensitive plates in 
 Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 1921, v. 28, p. 
 307-309, MFA. 
 
 2219. Panchromatic sensitising dyes. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77.) MFA 
 
 2220-21. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
 Color photography. illus. (Photo-minia- 
 ture, New York, July, 1921, v. 16, p. 97- 
 T1;) MFA 
 
 “Authoritative summary of progress made,..with 
 a clear explanation of the principles underlying the 
 methods of today and tomorrow.” 
 
 2222. Namias, Rodolfo. The Bromoil proc- 
 
 ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77-78.) MFA 
 
 2223. Newens, Frank R. Rambles with the 
 Paget colour plate. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Nov. 25, 1921, v. 68, p. 
 709.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper read before the Croydon Camera 
 Club. Some corrections are made in the above jour- 
 nal, Dec. 2, 1921, p. 724. 
 
 2224. Paget Prize Plate Company. The 
 Paget process of colour photography. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, p. 724.) MFA 
 
 Some comparisons with the Ilford and Wratten 
 plates as to filters. 
 
 De- 
 
 
 
 
 
 105 
 
 2225. Parolini, C., and G. Perron. Colour 
 cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 
 Abstract of their patent (not as yet accepted). 
 
 2226. Power, H. D’Arcy. Inventors’ re- 
 wards in colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 3, 
 1921, v.68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 24.) MFA 
 
 2227. The Prizma process. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 32.) 
 
 Brief reference to camera invented by W. Van 
 Dorn Kelley. 
 
 2228. The Prizma process of colour cinema- 
 tography. (British journal of photography, 
 London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 
 
 2229. Rendall, H. E. Remarks on raydex. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June “3, 1921, v.° 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 
 
 2230. Three-colour reflector cameras. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 
 Descriptions of patents of Walter White, J. W. 
 Bennetto, and E. T. Butler. 
 2231. Rose, S. W. Paget colour-screen 
 plates. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 17, 1921, v. 68, p. 361.) MFA 
 
 Abstract of paper and discussion before the Croy- 
 don Camera Club. 
 
 2232. Schitz, C. Détermination automa- 
 tique du temps du pose en autochromie. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 320- 
 s22:) MFA 
 
 2233. Pour corriger la dominante bleue 
 des autochromes. (Société francaise de 
 photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, 
 tome 8, p. 22-24.) MFA 
 
 2234. Screen-plate pictures of the “old 
 masters.” (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 Defects due to discoloration of the varnish. 
 
 
 
 
 
 2235. Screen-plate renderings of fashion- 
 able complexions. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Oct. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.40.) MFA 
 
 Face powdering at Deauville. 
 
 2236. Teamer, C.. K.,. and Ex Ea Mitre: 
 Three-colour lantern transparencies. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 13-15.) MFA 
 
 2237. Triadochrome colour process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, May 6, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 p: 20:) MFA 
 Invention of J. F. Shepherd. No details given. 
 
106 
 
 1921, continued. 
 
 2238. Two-colour studio portraits. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 Dp. 39-40.) MFA 
 
 Process of J. Newlands Thomson. 
 
 2239. The Uva-chrom process of color pho- 
 tography. (Scientific American, New York, 
 Sept. 24, 1921, v. 125, p. 225.) VA 
 
 2240. Wagner, R. Pinatypie. (Photo- 
 
 graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920. 
 Bd. 57, p. 330-334.) MFA 
 wee printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
 
 , June, 1921, v. 46, p. 297-300, MFA. 
 
 2241. | Wall, Edward John. Clerk Maxwell’s 
 theory and practice. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 4748. i 
 
 2242. —— Colour sensitising by mineral 
 salts. (British journal of photography, 
 London, March 4, 1921, v. 68, p. PESTA 
 
 2243. A forgotten page in the history 
 of colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. alle se 
 MFA 
 A review of Levi L. Hill’s work A treatise on helio- 
 chromy. 
 2244. Relief processes for colour work. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 30-32, 34-36.) MFA 
 
 Three processes described in detail with biblio- 
 graphical references. 
 
 2245. Wallon, Etienne. L’oeuvre de Louis 
 Lumiére. (Société francaise de photogra- 
 phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, 
 p. 225-249.) MFA 
 
 p. 237-241: 
 
 2246. Walters, Francis Marion, and Ray- 
 MOND Davis. Studies in color sensitive 
 photographic plates and methods of sensi- 
 tizing by bathing. Washington: Gov. Prtg. 
 Of 1921 li gle wesdor ore a ss. 4", 
 (United States. — Bureau of Standards. 
 Scientific papers. no. 422.) PAH (U.S.) 
 
 2247. Watkins, H. S. Colour photography. 
 (Photographic journal, London, June, 1921, 
 new series, v. 45, p. 277-287.) MFA 
 
 General principles. Paget, Dufay, Raydex, and 
 Autochrome processes. Abstract in British journal 
 of photography, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 20, MFA. 
 
 With discussion. 
 
 2248. Watteville, C. de. Gabriel Lippmann. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, 1921, série 3, tome 8, p. 330- 
 341. y MFA 
 
 Frontispiece portrait. 
 
 2249. A Whirler for autochrome plates. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Photographie des couleurs. 
 
 THE NEW YORK GPUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
 Description and diagram of drying apparatus. 
 
 2250. Woods, L. Tennant. The Hillotype 
 process of colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
 Disa) MFA 
 
 A review of criticisms. 
 
 2251. Wright, H. W. Canning. Exposing 
 autochrome plates on interiors in winter. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour bhotara 
 supplement, p. 12% FA 
 
 2252. Yerbury, S. G. Three-colour and 
 direct heliochromy. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. sere 
 
 Refers to Hill process. 
 
 1922 
 
 2253. Adolf Miethe. port. (Zeitschrift ftir 
 wissenschaftliche Photographie. Leipzig, 
 1922, Bd. 21, p. 193-196.) PLC 
 
 A brief biography with list of his principal works. 
 
 2254. Arch, John C. Three-colour repeat- 
 ing backs. illus. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.21.) MFA 
 
 2255. Campbell, H. J. Raydex three-colour 
 printing. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 
 
 2256. Carteron, J. Desensitising in the de- 
 velopment of the autochrome plates. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, June 2, 
 1922, v.69, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 23-24.) MFA 
 
 2257. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Colour pho- 
 tography. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, p.16.) MFA 
 
 Development tests on autochromes by the Société 
 francaise de photographie. 
 2258. -—— Colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, July 14, 
 1922, v. 69, p. 414-415.) MFA 
 
 Brief notes on the exhibition of the Salon du Gout 
 Frangais; the new process of the Dufay Company; 
 and endeavors to purchase the Uvachrome process. 
 
 2259. Colour cinematography with non- 
 intermittent film. illus. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 46-48.) 
 
 Specification of Edouard Belin. MFA 
 
 2260. Colour prints by dye conversion of 
 screen-plate negatives. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 29-30.) 
 M 
 
 Obergassner’s patent. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 . 
 | 
 | 
 
chrome work. 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 1922, continued. 
 
 2261. Elmslie, E. K. Developer for auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 2262. Fanstone, Robert M. Autochrome 
 lantern slides. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 
 
 2263. Colour photography in small 
 sizes. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 
 
 2264. The display of screen-plate trans- 
 parencies. (British journal of photography, 
 London, June 2, 1922, v.69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 
 2265. Garden photography by the 
 screen-plate process. (British journal of 
 photography, London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 2266. Making Paget colour negatives 
 in a small roll-film camera. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, June 2, 
 1922, v.69, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 24.) MFA 
 2267. A plate-holder for the Paget 
 colour process. illus. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. aera 
 
 
 
 
 
 Some causes of failure in auto- 
 (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, May 5, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
 photography supplement, p.17-18.) MFA 
 
 2269. Gamble, William. A new method of 
 making colour prints. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. Beas 
 
 2268. 
 
 
 
 Improvement of the Lewisohn process. 
 
 2270. Gimpel, Léon. Le centiéme de 
 seconde en autochromie et l’instantané noc- 
 turne sur plaques noires avec l|’éclairage 
 ordinaire par l’ultrasensibilisation de M. F. 
 
 Monpillard. (Société frangaise de photo- 
 graphie. Bulletin, Paris, May, 1922, série 
 3, tome 9, p. 130-145.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 26-27, MFA. 
 
 2271. The Gorsky camera for colour cine- 
 matography. illus. ‘(British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. fae 
 
 2272. Hamburger, Aron. Three - colour 
 cameras. (British journal of photography, 
 
 ~ London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 147-148.) 
 
 MFA 
 
 Protests against statements made in the book Bye- 
 
 paths of colour photography. 
 
 107 
 
 2273. The Hamburger process of colour 
 cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 23.) MFA 
 
 2274. Herzberg, John. Apparatus for the 
 demonstration of additive colour mixture. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 2275. Hewitt, John Theodore. Synthetic 
 colouring matters; dyestuffs derived from 
 pyridine, quinoline, acridine and xanthene. 
 London & New York: Longmans, Green & 
 Co., 1922. x1,. 405 p: 8°. -(Monographs 
 on industrial chemistry.) VOR 
 
 2276. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Inventions in 
 colour photography. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 27, 1922, v. 69, 
 p53!) MFA 
 Butler’s application for patent on Kromoscope, 
 already patented. 
 2277. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photog- 
 raphy in colours... London: G. Routledge 
 & Sons, Ltd., 1922. xiv, 318 p. illus. 4. ed. 
 rey. & enl, 12°. : MFV 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, June 23, 1922, v. 69, p. 374, MFA. 
 The Library also has Ist ed. (1911), 2d ed. (1914), 
 new & rev. ed. (1917). 
 2278. Koegel, P.R. The bleach-out process. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 2279. Lacroix, J. Autochromes and sun 
 spots. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 
 
 2280. Ladd-Franklin, Christine. Tetrachro- 
 matic vision and the development theory of 
 color. (Science, Utica, N. Y., May 26, 1922, 
 Vd Dood D00.) OA 
 
 2281. Massiot, G. Application a la projec- 
 tion des autochromes de l’éclairage intégral 
 par incandescence. Lanterne “Caméléon.” 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Sept., 1922, série 3, tome 9, p. 271- 
 27a.) MFA 
 
 2282. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
 G. GuTEKuUNST. Some new sensitizers for 
 the deep red. (Journal of industrial and 
 engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., Nov., 
 1922, v. 14, p. 1060-1061.) VOA 
 
 2283. A Modified two-colour process. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
 1922, v. 69, Colour photography supplement, 
 ties) MFA 
 Describes British patent 169533 to J. F. Shepherd 
 and Colour Photography, Ltd. 
 2284. Monpillard, Félix. Extra-sensitising of 
 autochrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, July 7, 1922, v.69, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 
 
 Copy of a sealed note deposited with the Société 
 francaise de photographie in 1913. 
 
108 
 
 1922, continued. 
 
 2285. Muller, Eugéne. Blueness of auto- 
 chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 
 
 2286. Desensitising in the autochrome 
 process. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 
 
 2287. Offer, Thomas J. Colour photo- 
 graphs of stage plays. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, 
 p. 26-27.) MFA 
 
 2288. A One-exposure three-colour camera. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 33-35.) MFA 
 
 C. E. Bredon’s specification. 
 
 2289. Raleigh, Charles. Reminiscences of 
 commercial colour cinematography — its 
 possibilities. (British journal of photogra- 
 phy, London, 1922, v. 69, Colour photogra- 
 phy supplement, p. 30-32, 35-38.) MFA 
 
 2290. Rendall, H. E. Facts and fallacies in 
 colour photography. illus. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, March 3, 1922, 
 v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 9-10.) MFA 
 Criticism of book by “O. Reg.” 
 2291. Screen-plate rendering of the sea. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 June 2, 1922, v. 69, Colour . photography 
 supplement, p. 24.) MFA 
 
 
 
 2292. Screen-plates with divisible colour 
 elements. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 
 
 S. Schapovaloff’s specification. 
 
 2293. Shepherd, J. F. Natural colour pho- 
 tography. (Photographic journal, London, 
 Aug., 1922, new series, v. 46, p. aS ee 
 
 Outline of physical principles of tricolor process. 
 
 2294. Stoakley, F. J. Rise and progress of 
 the technique of colour photography. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, March 
 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 12.) MFA 
 2295. Thiem, W. Die Farbenplatte und 
 
 das Farbensehen. (Photographische Rund- 
 schau, Halle a. S., 1920, Bd: 57):0. earch 
 
 Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
 N. H., 1922, v. 49, p. 28-31, 85-87, MFA. 
 2296. Thovert, J. La photographie des cou- 
 leurs. (Chimie & industrie, Paris, August, 
 1922, v. 8, p. 312-315.) VOA 
 
 Present condition of the art and possibilities. 
 2297. Traube, Artur. The Uvachrome proc- 
 ess. (British journal of photography, 
 London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 
 
 THEONEW YORK, PUBLICCLIGRARY 
 
 2298. The Triadochrome process of making — 
 
 three-colour prints. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 
 MFA 
 
 2299. Triadochrome three-colour prints by 
 transfer and chemical toning. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, April 7, 1922, 
 v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 15-16.) MFA 
 
 Describes British patent 175003 to J. F. Shepherd 
 and Colour Photography, 
 
 2300. Triple composite plates for three- 
 colour negative making. (British journal 
 of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. eee 
 
 E. A. Lage’s specification. 
 
 2301. The Trist three-colour camera. illus. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 3-4.) MFA 
 
 2302. Tutton, Frederic G. Three - colour 
 transparencies by combined chemical ton- 
 ing and dye printing. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ae 
 MF 
 
 Correction in Dec. 1st number of above supplement, 
 p. 48. 
 
 2303. A Two-colour process of additive col- & 
 (British jour- 
 
 our cinematography. illus. 
 nal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, 
 v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 39-40.) MFA 
 
 2304. Ultra-sensitising. 
 photography, London, June 16, 1922, v. 69, 
 
 (British journal of 
 
 p. 349.) MFA 
 
 Brief reference to Monpillard’s process for auto- 
 chromes. 
 
 2305. A Variation of the screen-plate proc- _ 
 
 ess. illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, April 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
 
 raphy supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA ; 
 
 Invention of Miss Florence M. Warner. 
 
 2306. Wall, Edward John. A chronology 
 of the photochromoscope. illus. 
 journal of photography, London, 1922, v. 69, 
 Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14, 
 
 18-20.) 
 2307. ———- Leuco-bases in colour photogra- 
 phy. (British journal of photography, 
 
 London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 146-147.) 
 MFA 
 
 Denies novelty for Didier’s process (French patent _ 
 
 524143, 1919). 
 
 2308. Practical color photography. 
 
 Boston: American Photographic Publish- 
 
 ing Co., 1922. vii, 248 p. diagrs. 8°. 
 Bibliography, p. 238-240. 
 
 Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
 don, Oct. 20, 1922, v. 69, p. 640, MFA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 (British — 
 
 MFA — 
 
 MFV — 
 
 ee ee 
 
 CLL fe ygeeores Civ sant peers 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 109 
 
 1923 
 
 2309. Adrien, Charles. Lanterne de projec- 
 tion portative et écran démontable pour 
 autochromes. (Société francaise de pho- 
 
 tographie. Bulletin, Paris, April, 1923, sé- 
 
 rie 3, tome 10, p. 114-116.) MFA 
 
 2310. Backstrom, Helmer. Development 
 of autochrome plates in white light with 
 ferrous oxalate. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p. 2.) MFA 
 
 2311. Bartlett, T. W. Notes on exposure 
 - and development of autochromes. (British 
 journal of photography, London, April 6, 
 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 16. ‘| MFA 
 
 2312. Beardsley, A. H. Natural-color pho- 
 tography for the amateur. (Photo -era, 
 = yvolteboro, N. H., July, 1923, v. 51, p. 30- 
 31.) MFA 
 
 Raylo process. 
 
 2313. Bidault des Chaumes, A. La photo- 
 graphie en couleurs sur pellicules versi- 
 colores par les procédés Louis Dufay. (Gé- 
 nie civil, Paris, June 9, 1923, v. 82, p. 543- 
 545.) VA 
 
 2314. Bullock, E. R. Chemistry of the 
 _kodachrome bleach. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Aug. 10, 1923, v. 70, 
 p. 491-492.) MFA 
 
 2315. Carrara, Achille. ‘Blueness in screen- 
 _ plate photography. (British journal of pho- 
 - tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
 our photography supplement, p.4.) MFA 
 
 - 2316. De Mille, Cecil Blount. The chances 
 of cinematography in natural colors. 
 -_ (American photography, Boston, Jan., 1923, 
 ' v. 17, p. 14-16.) MFA 
 
 5 Also pee in British journal of photography, 
 _ London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
 _ plement, p. a MFA, 
 
 ‘ 2317. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting a 
 film pack adapter as a slide for the Paget 
 
 colour process. illus. (British journal of 
 
 photography, London, July 6, 1923, v. 70, 
 - Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 
 f MFA 
 2318. After-treatment of defective auto- 
 _chromes. (British journal of photography, 
 -_ London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
 _ raphy supplement, p. 15.) MFA 
 
 _ 2319. Autochrome filter attachment. 
 4 (British journal of photography,: London, 
 Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
 . _ plement, p. 4.) MFA 
 a - 2320. Autochromes in the dark-room. 
 _ (British journal of photography, London, 
 _ March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
 _ supplement, p. 12.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Zone Colour contrast and exposure in 
 screen-plate colour photography. (British 
 journal of photography, London, May 4, 
 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 20.) MFA 
 
 Zoce. The lens and colour rendering. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, Dp. 20.) MFA 
 
 2323. Mounting commercial colour 
 transparencies. (British journal of photog- 
 raphy, London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
 photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 
 
 2324. Supplementary filters and the 
 colour rendering of the autochrome plate. 
 (British journal of photography, London, 
 Aug. 3, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
 plement, p. 31.) MFA 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2325. Feulgen, R. Ein Verfahren zur Her- 
 stellung verzerrungsfreier Gelatinereliefs 
 nach dem Chrom-Gelatineverfahren, beson- 
 ders fur die Zwecke der subtraktiven Drei- 
 farbenphotographie. (Zeitschrift fir wis- 
 senschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, 
 Bd. 22, p. 98-103.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 
 
 2326. Fouchet, J. La pose et le développe- 
 ment des autochromes. (Société francaise 
 de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 1923, 
 série 3, tome 10, p. 19-23.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, p. 9-10, MFA. 
 
 2327. Gamble, William. Photography in 
 colours. (In: L. C. Martin, Colour, and 
 methods of colour’ reproduction...with 
 chapters on colour printing and colour pho- 
 tography, by William Gamble. London: 
 Blackie & Son, Ltd, 19237 87. p.160— 
 171.) PEX 
 
 Reviews various processes. 
 
 2328. Gannon, Joseph W. The Raylo proc- 
 ess. illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
 
 July, 1923, v. 30, p. 305-310.) MFA 
 
 Two samples of work shown. 
 
 2329. Gimpel, Léon. Application du pro- 
 cédé Artigue (a deux plaques) a la repro- 
 duction en noir des plaques autochromes. 
 (Société francaise de photographie. Bul- 
 letin, Paris, Jan., 1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 
 23-26.) MFA 
 
 2330. Hourst, comte. Colour prints from 
 autochrome transparencies. (British jour- 
 nal of photography, London, May 4, 1923, 
 v. 70, Colour photography supplement, p. 
 19-20.) MFA 
 
 2331. Houstoun, Robert Alexander. Colour 
 photography and stereoscopy. (In _ his: 
 Light & colour. London, 1923. 8°. p.96- 
 116.) PEX 
 
110 
 
 1923, continued. 
 
 2332. Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Cie. Pro- 
 cédé de photographie et de cinématographie 
 des couleurs K. D. B. illus. (Société fran- 
 caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 
 1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 26-29.) MFA 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, 
 London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 10-11, MFA, 
 
 2333. Manners, Samuel, and H. E. RENDALL. 
 Raydex methods. (British journal of pho- 
 tography, London, 1923, v. 70, Colour pho- 
 tography supplement, p. 21-22, 25-26.) 
 
 MFA 
 2334. Muller, Eugéne. Control methods in 
 the development of autochromes. (British 
 
 journal of photography, London, Feb. 2, 
 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 8.) MFA 
 
 2335. Multi-colour printing in a single emul- 
 
 sion. illus. (British journal of photogra- 
 
 phy, London, May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
 
 photography supplement, p.17-19.) MFA 
 Patent of W. Van Doren Kelley. 
 
 2336..Naumann, Helmut. Autochrom und 
 Agfarraster. illus. (Zeitschrift ftir wissen- 
 schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, Bd. 
 22, p. 85-91.) PLC 
 
 2337. A New method of copying auto- 
 chromes on paper in colour. illus. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
 1923, v.70, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 34-36.) MFA 
 
 Patent of Emile Bueno. 
 
 2338. Newens, Frank R. Varying the com- 
 pensation filter in screen-plate colour proc- 
 esses. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 
 
 2339. Northall - Laurie, D. Photomicro- 
 graphs in colour taken with polarized light. 
 (Photographic journal, London, Feb., 1923, 
 new series, v. 47, p. 48-49.) "MFA 
 
 2340. A One-exposure camera for colour 
 photography and projection. illus. (Brit- 
 ish journal of photography, London, June 
 1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 
 ment, p. 23-24.) MFA 
 
 Patent of Gioacchino Russo. 
 
 2341. Rendall, H. E. Dye correction 
 methods in three-colour printing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Aug. 3, 
 1923, v.70, Colour photography supplement, 
 Dene) MFA 
 2342. ———- Variable compensation filters. 
 illus. (British journal of photography, 
 London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
 raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 
 
 2343. Rowe, Ernest H. He chased the 
 rainbow —and put it to work. Frederic 
 Eugene Ives, prolific inventor, father of 
 
 THE, NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 (Industry illus- — 
 Aug., 1923, p. 
 VA 
 
 half-tone engraving. illus. 
 trated, Cooperstown, N. Y., 
 11, 63-72.) 
 
 2344. Sectional colour sensitive films. (Brit- — 
 ish journal of photography, London, April 
 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 
 
 ment, p. 16.) MFA © 
 
 2345. Three-colour prints by projection dye- — 
 printing. illus. (British journal of photog- — 
 raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour — 
 photography supplement, p. 6-7.) MFA — 
 
 Patent of H. C. J. Deeks. 
 
 2346. Tutton, Frederic G. Dye correction — 
 methods in three-colour printing. (British 
 journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
 p. 36.) MFA 
 
 2347. Intensification of the colours in ~ 
 three-colour carbon transparencies, with its 
 possibilities in three-colour prints. (Photo- — 
 graphic journal, London, July, 1923, new — 
 series, v. 47, p. 325-330.) MFA 
 
 ee printed in British journal of photography, bs 
 70, Colour photography = 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 London, July 6, 1923, v. 
 supplement, p. 26-27, [F A, 
 2348. The Paget colour process. 
 
 
 
 (British journal of photography, London, ~ 
 Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- — 
 plement, p. 3-4.) MFA | 
 2349. Ventujol, Emmanuel. Exposure of — 
 autochrome plates. (British journal of 
 photography, London, Sept. 7, 1923, v. 70, — 
 Colour photography supplement, p. ie 
 
 2350. L’héliochromie nouvelle. (So- 
 ciété francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
 Paris, July, 1923, série 3, tome 10, p. 193- — 
 197.) 
 
 
 
 MFA — 
 
 2351. Wall, Edward John. The chances of } 
 
 color photography in moving pictures. — 
 (American photography, Boston, March, — 
 1923, v. 17, p. 166-170.) MFA — 
 
 Also printed in British journal of photography, : P 
 London, June 1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
 supplement, p. 22-23, MFA, ; 
 2352: A new system of color photogra- — 
 phy. illus. (American photography, Bos# — 
 ton, July, 1923, v. 17, p. 402-410.) MFA — 
 
 Raylo process. 
 2353. Three-colour prints by projection — 
 dye-printing. (British journal of photog- — 
 raphy, London, Aug. 3, 1923, v.70, Colour ~ 
 photography supplement, p. 29-30.) aE a 
 
 Raylo process. g 
 2354. Warburg, J. C. Possibilities in colour 
 photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- — 
 don, April, 1923, new series, v. 47, p. 192-— 
 195. ) - MFA 
 
 2355. Wastell, W. L. F. Colour photogra- 
 
 
 
 
 
 phy. illus. (In: A. E. Conrady, Photog- 
 raphy as a scientific implement. London, 
 1923. 8°. p.432-454.) *R-MFS— 
 
 Good review of various processes, with a color plate 
 showing the autochrome principle. 
 
 
 
ae a 
 
 ed 
 ‘3 
 A 
 ‘ 
 , 
 + 
 4 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * Bennett, C. N., 
 
 AUTHOR INDEX 
 
 
 
 Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 
 
 A 
 
 Aarland, G., 625. 
 
 Abney, Sir W. de W., 99-100, 107-108, 110, 121-122, 
 126, 158, 268, 293-295, 323-325, 362-363, 397- 
 398, 448, 484, 556, 626-627, 811, 1006, 1207, 
 13297, 1517. . 
 
 Acland, S. A., 628. 
 
 Adan, R., 1208. 
 
 Adrien, Charles, 1518, 1735, 2181-2182, 2309. 
 
 Albert, August, 1519. 
 
 Albert, E., 813. 
 
 Albert, Josef, 105. 
 
 Allan, Sidney, 1906. 
 
 Alteneder, J. V., 1520. 
 
 Anderson, P. L., 2032. 
 
 Antisell, Thomas, 45. 
 
 Arch, J. C., 1907, 2128, 2254. 
 
 Aron, Reinhold, 1908. 
 
 Atkinson, E, H. C., 818. 
 
 Aubuch, F. See Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch. 
 
 Audibert, Maurice. See Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice 
 Audibert. 
 
 Auerbach, Herbert, 
 
 Austin, A. C., 2067. 
 
 1007. 
 
 B 
 
 Backstr6m, Helmer, 2310. 
 
 Baker, T. T., 521, 558-560, 631, 698-699, 823, 1639. 
 
 Balagny, Georges, 1009, 1640. 
 
 Balfour, Graham, 159. 
 
 Balmitgere, C., 1522. 
 
 Barbier, H., 2131. See also Lumiére, Auguste, and 
 others. 
 
 Barbieri, D., 399. 
 
 Bardorf, 824. 
 
 Barker, J. W., 1820. 
 
 Barker, Johnson, 632. 
 
 Barrett, Thomas, 48. 
 
 Barstow, Montagu, 449. 
 
 Bartlett, John, 1641. 
 
 Bartlett, T. W., 2311. 
 
 Barton, E. A., 1821. 
 
 Bauer, Otto, 825. 
 
 Baum, Ernst, 1972. 
 
 Bawtree, A. E., 1736, 1822. 
 
 Bayley, R. C., 249-251, 826-827, 1010, 1212-1215. 
 
 Beach, F. C., 1400. 
 
 Beardsley, A. H., 2312. 
 
 Beck, Conrad, 828. 
 
 Beckers, Fritz, 633. 
 
 Becquerel, Edmond, 13-14, 37, 79, 176-177, 364. 
 
 Bedding, Thomas, 167.+ 
 
 Belden, C. J., 2033, 2086-2087. 
 
 Belin, Edouard, 700. 
 
 Bellieni, H., 1523. 
 
 1216-1217, 1401-1402, 1524, 2184. 
 
 Bennett, C. W., 1642. 
 
  Benoist, L., 1525-1526. 
  Bercegol, R. de. 
 
 See Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and 
 R. de Bercegol. 
 
 | ' Berger, Arthur, 1737. 
 
 
 
 
 Bergeron, 1643. 
 
 _ Berget, Alphonse, 178-179. 
 
 Berkeley, H. B., 127. 
 
 Berthier, A. A., 252. 
 
 Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice Audibert, 1738. 
 
 Bevan, E. J. See Green, A. G., and others. 
 
 Bidault des Chaumes, A., 2313. 
 
 Biermann, E. A., 1823, 1909-1910, 1973. 
 
 Blaauw, A. H., 1739. 
 
 Black, Adam, 1911- 1914, 
 
 Blackburn, H. E., 829-830, 1011, 1527-1528, 1644- 
 1645. 
 
 Blane, A., 365. 
 
 Blochmann, Richard, 1915. 
 
 Boardman, F. R., 701. 
 
 Bolas, T., 400, 412. 
 
 Bonacini, Carlo, 296. 
 
 Boothroyd, Jabez, 206, 366. 
 
 Bordeaux, Jules, 1219. 
 
 Bosch, A., 522. 
 
 Bothamley, C. H., 269. 
 
 Boucher, L., 1530, 1646. 
 
 Bouldoyre, R., 1403. 
 
 Bourke, Walter, 1220. 
 
 Bourrée, M. H., 1221. 
 
 Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud, 1404. 
 
 Bow, R. H., 93. 
 
 Braham, A. C., 702-703, 1405. 
 
 Brand, John, 1824. 
 
 Brandlmayr, Georg, 1647. 
 
 Brasseur, C. L. A., 450, 831. 
 
 Breton, André, 1825. 
 
 Brewster, Sir David, 6. 
 
 Brant wet Gacuoos 
 
 Brizet, André, 1826. 
 
 Brothers, Alfred, 367. 
 
 Broum, K. H., 1648, 1827. 
 
 Brown, E. L., 1012. 
 
 Brown, G. E., 561, 1740, 1916, 1975. 
 
 Bull, A. J., 562, 634, 2068. See also Newton, A. J., 
 and A. J. Bull. 
 
 Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley, 563. 
 
 Bullock, E. R., 2314. See also Capstaff, J. G., and 
 E. R. Bullock. 
 
 Burchardt, E. A., 832, 1649, 2185. 
 
 Burka, S. M., 2133. 
 
 Burnham, J. A., 1406. 
 
 Burton, H. M., 1828, 1917. 
 
 Buss, Otto, 451. 
 
 BUSY.) la LOo0: 
 
 Butler, C. P., 2089. 
 
 Butler, E. T., 635, 704-706, 1531, 1741, 2090. 
 
 Cc 
 
 CG... Ri, 36k 
 
 Cajal, S. R., 833-835. 
 
 Calmels, H., 1013, 1222, 1742, 1830. 
 
 Calmels, H., and L. P. Clere, 636, 836. 
 
 Galvért, PuiCy, 61. 
 
 Campbell, H. J., 2255. 
 
 Campbell, James, 34-35. 
 
 Capstaff, J. G., 1978-1979. 
 
 Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Bullock, 2134. 
 
 Carpenter, F. A., 1532. 
 
 Carpentier, J., 1015. See also Cros, Charles, and J. 
 Carpentier. 
 
 Dilla 
 
112 
 
 Carr, S. H., 1223, 1831, 1918-1919. 
 
 Carrara, Achille, 1016, 1832-1833, 2315. 
 
 Carter, C. M., 1017. 
 
 Carteron, J., 2256. 
 
 Casson, W. A., 1407. 
 
 Chaboseau, Robert, 1018. 
 
 Chapelain, 564. 
 
 iGhataix 7 bso elLoos: 
 
 Chéron, André, 707, 837, 1019, 1224-1225. 
 
 Chevreul, E., 62. 
 
 Chevrier, Henri, 838-839, 1020. 
 
 Clarke, H. T. See Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke. 
 
 Clarke, S., 52, 
 
 Claudy, C. H., 840, 1021, 2135-2136. 
 
 Clay, R. S., 2186. 
 
 Clerc, L. P., 369, 565, 841, 1534, 2257-2258. See 
 also Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc. 
 
 Clifton, W. E., 1022. 
 
 Cobenzl, A., 1743-1744, 1980. 
 
 Coker, E. G., 1745. 
 
 Collen, Henry, 63-64. 
 
 Cominetti, Annibale, 1747. 
 
 Comley, H. J., 711, 845-847, 1228, 1409. 
 
 Coonoor, pseud., 1748. 
 
 Cooper, James, 1749. 
 
 Corbin, T. W., 2038. 
 
 Corke, H. E., 523, 1027, 1229-1230, 1410-1412, 1537, 
 1655. 
 
 Cornu, A., 180-181. 
 
 Courtellemont, G., 1028. 
 
 Cousin, Ernest, 1656, 1750. 
 
 Coustet, Ernest, 712-713, 849-850, 1029-1032, 1231, 
 1413-1414, 1538. 
 
 Crabtree, J. I., 2188. 
 
 Crémier, Victor, 851, 1033, 1232-1234, 1415, 1539- 
 1541, 1657, 1834, 2138. 
 
 Cros, Charles, 82, 101, 111-112. 
 
 Cros, Charles, and J. Carpentier, 123. 
 
 Cross, C. F. See Green, A. G., and others. 
 
 Croughton, G. H., 1920. 
 
 Crowther, R. E., 2139. 
 
 Cundall, J. T., 405, 1034. 
 
 Cust, Leopold, 1658. 
 
 D 
 Dalmas, R., comte de, 1235, 1416-1417, 1543-1544, 
 1659. 
 Dalziel, Harvey, 524. 
 Damry, A., 1236. 
 
 Darling, Lloyd, 1982. 
 
 Daur, Guido, 1237. 
 
 David, Albert, 1660-1661. 
 
 Davidson, Lascelles, 639.. 
 
 Davidson, P. G., 1921. 
 
 Davidson, W. W., 2140. 
 
 Davis, Raymond, 2189. See also Walters, F. M., and 
 Raymond Davis. 
 
 Davis, V. P., 1922-1923, 2039. 
 
 Dawson, Alfred, 1835. 
 
 Dawson, George, 142. 
 
 Dawson, O. S., and C. L. Findlay, 1035, 1418. 
 
 Day, baG7 15. 
 
 Dearden, W., 1836. 
 
 Debenham, W. E., 148. 
 
 Deisch, Noel, 2040. 
 
 De Mille, C. B., 2316. 
 
 Didier, Léon, 852, 1038, 1419. 
 
 Dillaye, Frédéric, 226-227, 253, 640, 1039, 1240- 
 1241, 1420-1425, 1662-1665. 
 
 Doglibert, F., 1546. 
 
 Domony, R. B., 1925. 
 
 Donaldson, Charles, 1926, 1985-1986. 
 
 Donath, Bruno, 526, 716. 
 
 Doncaster, E. D., 1040. 
 
 Donisthorpe, Wordsworth, 98. 
 
 THE NEW: YORK’ PUBLIC LIBRARY: : 
 
 D’Osmond, H., 1242, 1426. 
 Douglass, L. F., 2092. 
 Dove, H. W., 53. i 
 Dowier, C. A., 1041. : 
 Downes, W. H., 1042. 
 Drake-Brockman, H. G., 1043-1045, 1243, 1752. 
 Drecker, J., 452. 
 
 Dubois, Louis, 453. 
 
 Dubois-Raymond, Cl., 254. 
 
 Duchenne, Paul, 855-856. 
 
 Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 83. 
 
 Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. de Bercegol, 857. 
 Dufay, L., 1427. 
 
 Dumoulin, Eugéne, 102. 
 
 Dunmore, Edward, 228. 
 
 
 
 eS Ss. SL ee 
 
 “a ee Ps 
 
 E 
 
 Eastman Kodak Co., 2142. 
 
 Eder, J. M., 129, 143, 168, 271, 488-489, 644-645, 
 717, 1753, 1927, 2042, 2192. 
 
 Edgson, Hugh, 1048. 
 
 Edridge-Green, F. W., 1430. 
 
 Eldredge, A. G., 1988. 
 
 Elliott and Fry, 1431. 
 
 Elmslie, E. K., 2261. 
 
 Emery, C. F., 1049. 
 
 Emmerich, G. H., 1432. 
 
 Engelken, 1245. 
 
 Espitallier, M. R., 2193. 
 
 Estanave, E., 1433, 1547. 
 
 Evans, C. W., 1548. 
 
 Evans, F. H., 1434. 
 
 Evans, P. E. See Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans. 
 
 Evans, U. R., 1668. 
 
 Expert, pseud., 2093. 
 
 FE. W. Ba 2138) 
 
 Fabry, Charles, 1053. 
 
 Fairchild, fT. J., 865. 
 
 Fallowfield, Jonathan, 1755. 
 
 Fanstone, R. M., 2094-2098, 2143-2155, ea fetinn ss 
 2262-2268, 2317-2325, 
 
 Farmer, Howard. 454-455, 646, 718, 1249, 1549. 
 
 Farmer, Howacl and Guy Symmons, 456, 567. 
 
 Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr, 1669. 
 
 Faupel, Fritz, 1435. 
 
 Fawcett, E. D., 407, 457. 
 
 Fenske, E., 1250-1251. 
 
 Feret, R. See Valette, T., and R. Feret. 
 
 Ferrars, Max, 1054-1055. 
 
 Festenberg, Hans, 1990. 
 
 Feulgen, R., 2325. 
 
 Feytaud, J. See Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud. 
 
 Fielitz, Otto, 2201. 
 
 Fingerhuth, C., 1928. . 4 
 
 Finlay, C. L., 1056, 1670. See also Davos O85 
 and C, e Finlay; Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. 
 Finlay. 
 
 Fischer, Otto, 2072. 
 
 Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist, 1839. 
 
 Fitzsimons, R. J., 1991. 
 
 Florence, 529, 1672. 
 
 Foersterling, K., 1756, 1840. 
 
 Ford, A. D., 1436. 
 
 Forestier, E., 1253. 
 
 Forrest, Mark, 408-409. 
 
 Fouchet, J., 2326. 
 
 Fourtier, H., 229. i 
 
 Fowler, J. B., 89. 
 
 Fowler, R. J., 65. 
 
 Franck, C. E., 1551 
 
 Se a Fe eee ee Oe ee ee eRe eee re 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 Franck, Karl, 1992. 
 Frank, Max, 1255. 
 Fraprie, F. R., 865, 1993. 
 Frederking, H., 866. 
 Freshwater, T. E., 647. 
 Friedburg, L. H., 1256. 
 Friese, H., 1437. 
 
 Fritsch, Gustav, 490, 568. 
 Fritz, Felix, 1257. 
 
 Fuerst Brothers, 370. 
 Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton, 1994. 
 
 G 
 
 G., G. S., 1673. 
 
 Gaedicke, J., 169-170. 
 
 Gage, F. B., 54. 
 
 Gamble, E. H., 1929-1930. 
 
 Gamble, W. P., 2202. 
 
 Gamble, William, 302, 329, 648, 867, 2269, 2327. 
 
 Gannon, J. W., 2328. 
 
 Gargam de Moncetz, 1257a. 
 
 Garrod, Edward, 49. 
 
 Gaumont, Léon, 1674. 
 
 Gebhard, Kurt, 1258-1262, 1552-1553, 1675, 1757- 
 1759, 1841. 
 
 Geisler, Louis, 719-720, 868. 
 
 Genthe, Arnold, 1931. 
 
 Gephard, Karl, 1263. 
 
 Gérard, Louise, 1760. 
 
 Gibson, J. S., 272, 330. 
 
 Gilchrist, C. A., 1264. 
 
 Gill, William, 869. 
 
 Gilles, E., 649. 
 
 Gimpel, Léon, 1057-1059, 
 2203, 2270, 2329. 
 
 Gitchell, Corwin, 230, 
 
 Glan, Paul, 273. 
 
 Godbold, A. V., 2099. 
 
 Goddé, G., 458. 
 
 Goerz, 1060. 
 
 Goethe, J. W. von, 3. 
 
 Goldberg, E., 1061. 
 
 Goldschmidt, Robert, 1062. 
 
 Goldsmith, A. N., 1266. 
 
 Gothard, Eugen von, 183. 
 
 Goutcher, A. W., 1063. 
 
 Graby, A., 303, 331, 410-411. 
 
 Graham, James, 1995. 
 
 Grange, 1761. 
 
 Grant, T. K., 459, 870, 1064, 1677. 
 
 Gravier, Charles, 332, 492, 532, 721, 871-871a, 1065, 
 1267, 1557-1558 
 
 Gray, Edward, 1066. 
 
 Grebe, C., 371. 
 
 Green, A. G., and others, 184. 
 
 Greene, J. E. B., 1560. 
 
 Grills, E., 872-874. 
 
 Grimsehl, E., 1067. 
 
 Gross, Michael, 2101. 
 
 Grotthuss, Theodor von, 722. 
 
 Grove, J. M. C., 1762. 
 
 Gruen, E. F., 650, 723. 
 
 Grun, Ernst, 569. 
 
 Grune, Wilhelm, 84. 
 
 Guébhard, Adrien, 875-876, 1068. 
 
 Gunther, H. E., 171. 
 
 Gutekunst, G. See Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst. 
 
 1438, 1554-1556, 1676, 
 
 H 
 
 H., P., 1842. 
 
 Haberkorn, Fritz, 724. 
 Haines, R. T., 2045. 
 
 Hale, W. H., 460. 
 Hamburger, Aron, 1843, 2272. 
 
 Is 
 
 Hamburger, W. S., 1844. 
 
 Hamer, F. M. See Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer. 
 
 Hanneke, Paul, 493, 1439, 1561-1562, 1932. 
 
 Hansen, Fritz, 651. 
 
 Harberisser, 877. 
 
 Harding-Warner, W., 160, 185. 
 
 Hargreaves, F. J., 1845-1846. 
 
 Harrison, W. H., 149. 
 
 Harrison, W. J., 150. 
 
 Hatzfeld, Albert, 186. 
 
 Havelock, B. E., 2104. 
 
 Heicke, Richard, 725. 
 
 Henderson, Peter, 39, 66. 
 
 Hernandez-Mejia, Arturo, 1678-1679. 
 
 Herschel, A. S., 144. 
 
 Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 7-9, 11, 73. 
 
 Herschell, Sir W. J., 461. 
 
 Hervé, 2156. 
 
 Herzberg, John, 2274. 
 
 Hess, Henry, 1847. 
 
 Hess-Ives Corporation, 1848, 1934, 2074. 
 
 Hewitt, C. H., 1998. 
 
 Hewitt, J. T., 2275. 
 
 Heydecker, W. A., 1849. 
 
 Heyne, W., 1763. 
 
 Hill, L. L., 17-18. 
 
 Hilliard, F. M., 1680. 
 
 Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randles, 1764. 
 
 Hinterberger, Hugo, 1563-1566. 
 
 Hirshberg, L. K., 2046. 
 
 Hitchcock, Romyn, 231, 462, 494. 
 
 Hitchins, A. B., 1271, 1850. 
 
 Hnatek, Adolf, 1999. 
 
 Hodgman, C. D., 2047, 2204. 
 
 Hollyer, F. T., 1681. 
 
 Holme, Charles, 1069. 
 
 Honoré, C. H., 1851. 
 
 Hopkins (?), 232. 
 
 Houdaille, 1272. 
 
 Hourst, comte, 2330. 
 
 Houstoun, R. A., 2331. 
 
 Howdill, C. B., 414, 463. 
 
 Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 333, 415-416, 533, 570- 
 571, 726-730, 878, 1070-1076, 1273-1277, 1440- 
 1441, 1682, 1765-1768, 1936, 2205. 
 
 Hunt, Robert, 20, 29, 38. 
 
 Husnik, Jaroslav, 109, 464, 652, 1077-1078, 1442. 
 
 I 
 
 Thran, R., 1769, 1852. 
 
 Ilford, Ltd., 2048. 
 
 Ives, F. E., 145-146, 161, 163-164, 172, 187-189, 
 209, 221-222, 233-237, 257-258, 274, 304-305, 
 334-335, 417, 465-466, 880, 1443-1445, 1567- 
 1570, 1683, 1853-1854, 2105, 2157-2159, 2206- 
 2207, 2276. 
 
 Ives, H. E., 731, 881-882, 1080, 1446, 1684, 2001, 
 2049-2051, 2075. 
 
 Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kingsbury, 2002. 
 
 J 
 
 J., C., 883-884, 
 
 J... Mo j.4.1572: 
 
 Johnson, G. L., 495, 1278, 2277. 
 
 Johnson & Sons, 1685. 
 
 Jolley, A. C. See Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley. 
 
 Joly, John, 239, 275, 336. 
 
 Jones, Chapman, 374, 419, 573, 653, 1081-1083, 1573, 
 1938, 2209. 
 
 Jones, L. A., 1939-1940. 
 
 Jones, T. H., 1084. 
 
 Jougla, J., 885-886. 
 
 Jougla, J., the younger, 1279. 
 
 Jourdain, P. E. B., 338, 375-376, 420-421, 467. 
 
114 
 
 Jové, 2159. 
 Juhl, Ernst, 1085. 
 Just, Alexander, 1771. 
 
 Kaiserling, Carl, 535. 
 
 Kauffmann, Hugo, 536. 
 
 Kein, Wold, 1857. 
 
 Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Cie., 2332. 
 
 Kelvin (1st baron), William Thomson, 277. 
 
 Kenah, A. V., 468-469. 
 
 Kieser, Karl, 654. 
 
 Kilmer, T. W., 2052. 
 
 Kine-Chromo, pseud., 1941. 
 
 Kingsbury, E. F. See Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kings- 
 bury. 
 
 Klein, E., 1574. 
 
 Klein, H. O., 574, 655, 887, 1280, 1447. 
 
 Knoche, Paul, 2160. 
 
 Knott, L. E., 1686. 
 
 ' Knowles, H. C., 1281. 
 
 Koegel, P. R., 2106-2107, 2161-2162, 2278. 
 
 Koenig, Carl, 1448. 
 
 Koenig, Ernst, 575-579, 656-658, 732-733, 888-891, 
 1086, 1449-1450, 1687, 1772-1774, 1858-1859, 
 1944, 2210-2211. 
 
 Krone, Hermann, 210. 
 
 Kropf, Fritz, 1575, 2108. 
 
 Kruegener, R., 894. 
 
 Kuchinka, Eduard, 470, 581. 
 
 Kuemntell, G., 659, 1576, 1775. 
 
 Kunz, W. HH. 1577. 
 
 L., 424. 
 
 Labatut, 190. 
 
 Lacan, Ernest, 67. 
 
 Lacroix, J., 2279. 
 
 Ladd-Franklin, Christine, 2280. 
 
 Lambert, F. C., 308, 378. 
 
 Lang, William, 151. 
 
 Lasareff, P., 895. 
 
 Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de, 1860. 
 
 Laurvik, J. N., 1087. 
 
 Law, E. F., 1088. 
 
 Lea, M. C., 153-154. 
 
 Lederer, Otto, 1452. 
 
 Leffmann, Henry, 1688. 
 
 Lefort, V., 1283. 
 
 Legeret, E., 1579. 
 
 Leggett, G. H., 1689. 
 
 Legier, Alphonse, 735. 
 
 Lehmann, J. M., 660, 736-737, 898-899, 1089-1091, 
 1284-1286, 1453. 
 
 Leiber, Ferdinand, 900, 1580, 1690. See also Stenger, 
 Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber. 
 
 Lelong, Adrien, 1287-1288. 
 
 Le Mée, Alexandre, 1454, 1581, 1691, 1776. 
 
 Leonel G., 1290. 
 
 Le Roy, G. A., 901-902. 
 
 Leto Photo Materials Co., 1777. 
 
 Letouzey, V., 1291. 
 
 Leventon, L. M., 2212. 
 
 Levy, Max, 583. 
 
 Lewis, A. H., 1692. 
 
 Lewisohn, John, 2004. 
 
 Liabeuf, H., 2213. 
 
 Liesegang, R. E., 1093, 1945-1946. 
 
 Limmer, Fr., 1094, 1292-1296, 1455-1456, 1583-1584. 
 
 Lippmann, Gabriel, 191-192, 211-215, 241, 278-279, 
 339, 379, 661-663, 738-739. 
 
 Litchfield, Charles, 1095. 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 Lobley, F. J., 1693. 
 
 Locquin, René, 1096-1097. 
 
 Loebel, Leopold, 585, 664. 
 
 Loescher, Fritz, 425. 
 
 Loewy, Alfred, 1297. 
 
 Lohmeyer, R., 1098. 
 
 Lohr, J. M. See Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr. 
 
 Lotus, H., 1298. 
 
 Lovelace, M. G., 1694. 
 
 Lucas, E. G. H., 1695, 2108a. 
 
 Luckiesh, Matthew, 2005. 
 
 Lueppo-Cramer, 426, 471, 903-904, 1585-1588, 1778, 
 1947, 2164. 
 
 Lugdenensis, pseud., 1779. 
 
 Lumiére, Auguste, 666, 1299. 
 
 Lumiére, Auguste, and Louis Lumiére, 259-260, 340, 
 472, 586-588, 665, 905, 1099-1100, 1300-1301, 
 1458, 1861-1862. 
 
 Lumiére, Auguste, and others, 906-907, 1101-1102, 
 1302-1303, 1459-1460, 2109, 2165, 2217-2219. 
 
 Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise, 2110. 
 
 Luther, R., 1103, 1304, 1589. 
 
 M 
 
 McCord, Bennett, 1863. 
 
 McFarland, J. H., 261. 
 
 McIntosh, J., 1104-1105, 1696, 1864. 
 
 Mackenstein, H., 910. 
 
 Mackenstein Etablissements, 1697. 
 
 Mairot, F., 1698. 
 
 Maisch, F. D., 1461. 
 
 Malby, H. T., and others, 1307. 
 
 Maldiney, 667. 
 
 Maleve, L., 1699. 
 
 Mann, A., 1865. 
 
 Manners, Samuel, 1780. 
 
 Manners, Samuel, and H. E. Rendall, 2333. 
 
 Mareschal, G., 224, 341, 428, 668, 741, 911, 1106- 
 1108, 1308-1311, 1591, 1700. 
 
 Marino, Algeri, 1701. 
 
 Marriage, Ernest, 1109. 
 
 Marshall, Andrew, 2007. 
 
 Martel, Charles, 55. 
 
 Martin, Karl, 1781. 
 
 Martin-Duncan, F., 912-914, 1110-1111, 1312. 
 
 Martiny, Gaston, 915. 
 
 Mascart, E. E. N., 193. 
 
 Massiot, G., 1112, 1866, 2281. 
 
 Maxwell, J. C., 47, 56. 
 
 Mayer, Emil, 1463. 
 
 Mazo, E., 1464. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., 742, 916-917, 1113-1117, 1313-1316, 
 1592-1593, 1867, 1948, 2008, 2053-2054, 2220. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke, 2111. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst, 2282. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge, 918, 1465. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., and S. E. Sheppard, 743. 
 
 Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wratten, 919, 1118. 
 
 Meggers, W. F., 2076. 
 
 Meister Lucius & Briining, 589, 1317. 
 
 Meldola, R., 282. 
 
 Mente, Otto, 920. 
 
 Merckens, W., 1318. Ses also Smith, J. H., and W. 
 Merckens. 
 
 Mercury, pseud., 30. 
 
 Merillat, Lou, 2055. 
 
 Meslin, G., 216. 
 
 Messer, H. C., 1702. 
 
 Meugniot, 211la. 
 
 Miethe, Adolf, 473, 498-499, 538, 590-594, 
 1320, 1703, 1868, 2112. 
 
 Miethe, ‘Adolf, ‘ane B. Seegert, 1594. ie 
 
 Mikeska, L. ae and others, 2113. 
 
 Miller, E. E. See Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller. 
 
 Miller, M. D., 1321. 
 
 1319- 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 4) 
 
 P 
 ; 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 Millochau, G., 921. 
 
 Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans, 2166. 
 Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer, 2167. 
 Mills, W. H., and Sir W. J. Pope, 2168. 
 
 Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart, 2169. 
 Monjauze, G., 1783. 
 
 Monpillard, Félix, 343-344, 381, 430, 501, 595, 669- 
 671, 744-745, 922, 1120-1121, 1322-1324, 1466- 
 1469, 1595, 1704-1705, 1785-1786, 1869, 2284. 
 
 Moreels, R., 1470, 1596. 
 
 Morris, Wayne, 2009. 
 
 Morse, S. F. B., 32. 
 
 Morton, A. E., 1787-1789, 1870-1871. 
 
 Mueller, Gustav, 1325. 
 
 Muller, Eugéne, 2285-2286, 2334. 
 
 Munro, L. W., 1122. 
 
 Murdoch, Helen M., 1872-1873. 
 
 N 
 
 hae. J., 1326, 
 
 Namias, Rodolfo, 382, 431-432, 672, 1123, 1327-1328, 
 1471, 1597, 1790-1791, 2114, 2222. 
 
 Naumann, Helmut, 2336. 
 
 Neame, S. E., 746. 
 
 Neuhauss, Richard, 262, 283, 345-347, 383, 474-475, 
 502, 540, 596, 675, 747, 924-925. 
 
 Newens, F. R., 2115, 2170, 2223, 2338. 
 
 Newton, A. J., 749-751, 926, 1472, 1711. 
 Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. 
 
 Newton, A. J., and A. J. Bull, 598, 1712. 
 
 Nicholson, J. W., 2116. 
 
 Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 22, 40, 57, 74-75. 
 
 Niewenglowski, G. H., 242, 284, 384, 1330. 
 
 Noack, 349. 
 
 See also 
 
 Me Norman, Albert, 541, 752. 
 
 a ea 
 
 Northall-Laurie, D., 2339. 
 Novak, Franz, 753, 1473, 1602. 
 Nutting, P. G., 503. 
 
 O 
 
 Obermayer, Albert, Edler von, 676, 928-929, 1127, 
 Peods 
 
 _ Obernetter, E., 165. 
 
 Oe a eee 
 
 
 
 erter, I. J., 2171, 2287. 
 Ogonowski, E., conte, 195. 
 
 Pp 
 
 Paage, A., 80. 
 
 Paget Prize Plate Co., 2224. 
 
 Painter, F. W., 2010. 
 
 Palocsay, Albin von, 1338, 1475, 1605-1607, 1713. 
 
 Pan Chromo, pseud., 1950-1951. 
 
 Parker, G. H., 1476. 
 
 Parolini, C., and G. Perron, 2225. 
 
 Payne, Arthur, 677, 933. 
 
 Pearce, C. E., 155. 
 
 Peaucellier, A., 1128. 
 
 Hector, S., 755+ 
 
 Penrose, Frank, 1952. 
 
 Perkins, H. F., 1340, 1477, 1608, 1875, 1953, 2011. 
 
 Perron, G. See Parolini, C., and G. Perron. 
 
 Personnaz, Antonin, 1130, 1341, 1609. 
 
 Pfaundler, Leopold, 477, 599, 756, 934, 1478. 
 
 Pfenninger, Otto, 757-758, 1479-1480, 1610, 
 1954, 2012. 
 
 Pim, Greenwood, 132. 
 
 Piper, C. W., 937, 1481, 1794, 1877, 1955-1958, 2013- 
 2016, 2057-2058, 2078. 
 
 1876, 
 
 - Plaskett, J. S., 505. 
 4 Plé, Charles, 58. 
 
 Lig 
 Pledge, J. H., 939, 1342, 1795-1796. See also Mees, 
 C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge. 
 
 Plotnikov; 1.) S53, 2272. 
 
 Poirée, Georges, 940. 
 
 Poitevin, L. A., 69. 
 
 Pope, Sir W. J., 1714, 1959, 2118. 
 Werk and site \ View) oeope: 
 
 Potonniée, G., 1879. 
 
 Poulenc fréres, 1131, 1343. 
 
 Power, H. D’A., 543-544, 600, 1132-1139, 1344-1345, 
 1880-1881, 1960, 2016, 2226. 
 
 Powrie, J. H., 679, 1140, 1346. 
 
 Precht, J., 601-603, 680. 
 
 Press, A., 2059. 
 
 PretzleAve Dito. 
 
 Prilejaeff, Alexandre, 1611, 1715. 
 
 Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de, 760, 2172a. 
 
 Pumphrey, Alfred, 545. 
 
 See also Mills, 
 
 Q 
 Quentin, H., 434, 944-945, 1348-1349, 1483-1487, 
 1612. 
 R 
 R., H., 604. 
 
 Raleigh, Charles, 2289. 
 
 Randles, W. B. See Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randles. 
 
 Rawlins, G. E. H., 1141. 
 
 Rayleigh (3d baron), J. W. Strutt, 162, 166. 
 
 Raymond, R., 947, 1142. 
 
 Reeb, Henri, 950. 
 
 Regni, pseud., 1489. 
 
 Reising, H., 681. 
 
 Rendall, H. E., 2062, 2120-2121, 2173-2174, 2229- 
 2230, 2290, 2341-2342. See also Manners, Sam- 
 uel, and H. E. Rendall. 
 
 Renger-Patzsch, Robert, 1797. 
 
 Renwick, F. F., 1350. 
 
 Reynolds, E. J., 70. 
 
 Rheinberg, Julius, 605, 761, 1491, 1613-1614, 1718. 
 
 Rheinberg, Julius, and Ernst Rheinberg, 1719. 
 
 Richard, A., 1615. 
 
 Richard, G. A., 289. 
 
 Rigg, Gilbert, 1883. 
 
 Riley, P. M., 951. 
 
 Rimmer, J. B., 2175. 
 
 Rockwood, G. A., 1144. 
 
 Rodman, G. H., 2018. 
 
 Rood, O. N., 138. 
 
 Rose, S. W., 2231. 
 
 Ross, William, 41-42. 
 
 Rothé, E., 606, 682, 952. 
 
 Rounds, Will., 2080. 
 
 Rowe, E. H., 2343. 
 
 Rundle, B., 2081. 
 
 Rypinski, M. C., 1798, 1884. 
 
 Si tar 492: 
 
 So Jena aae 
 
 Saal, Alfred, 1493. 
 
 Sacco, Giulio, 1146. 
 
 Sachse, J. F., 290. 
 
 Saint Florent, E. de, 94, 312, 607. 
 Sallwuerk, Edmund von, 762. 
 Salt, E. A., 2019. 
 
 Sanger Shepherd & Co., 546. 
 Satori, Karl, 608. 
 Saville-Kent, W., 763. 
 
116 
 
 Sawyer, J. R., 124. 
 
 Schaum, Karl, 1147. 
 
 Scheffer, W., 1148-1149, 1353-1357, 1494-1497. 
 
 Schilling, Otto, 1498. 
 
 Schinzel, Karl, 683, 1150. 
 
 Schitz, C., 2232-2233. 
 
 Schloemann, Eduard, 1358. 
 
 Schmidt, Hans, 684-685, 764-768, 953, 1151. 
 
 Schmitz, Fritz, 1720. 
 
 Schrott, Paul, Ritter von, 1799. 
 
 Schuett, F., 291. 
 
 Schultess-Young, W. A., 1884a, 1963. 
 
 Schultz-Sellack, Carl, 86-87. 
 
 Schwarzer, E., 1800. 
 
 Scoble, W. A., 769. 
 
 Scott, Albert W., 198. 
 
 Seddig, M., 770. 
 
 Seebeck, J. T., 4-5. 
 
 Seegert, B. See Miethe, Adolf, and B. Seegert. 
 
 Selle, Gustav, 609. 
 
 Senior, Edgar, 412, 506, 610. 
 
 Seyewetz, A., 1359, 1499, 2082. 
 Auguste, and others. 
 
 Sforza, Francis, 1360-1361, 1500. 
 
 Sheahan, D. J., 1885, 1964. 
 
 Shearer, J. S., 479. 
 
 Shepherd, E. S., 387-389, 436, 507, 547. 
 
 Shepherd, J. F., 2293. 
 
 Sheppard, S. E., 955, 1152. See also Mees, C. E. K., 
 and S. E. Sheppard. 
 
 Shivas;"E.,) 1153. 
 
 Siegrist, H. See Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist. 
 
 Simmen, Charles, 1154-1155, 1501, 1617-1618. 
 
 Sims, W. A., 956. 
 
 Smillie, T. W., 1156. 
 
 Smith, G.A., 1157. 
 
 Smith, J. H., 771, 957-958, 1158-1160, 1363-1364, 
 1502, 1801, 2020. 
 
 Smith, J. H., and W. Merckens, 772-773, 959. 
 
 Smith, J. H., & Co., 774. 
 
 Smith, Stephen, 313. 
 
 Smitten, H. M., 1802. 
 
 Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud., 264. 
 
 Snelling, H. H., 23-24. 
 
 South, C. W., 611. 
 
 Spiller, John, 95, 103. 
 
 Spiller, W. H., 1966. 
 
 Spoerl, Hans, 686, 1804. 
 
 St., 508. 
 
 Staats, Georg, 157. 
 
 Stark, J, 961. 
 
 State ov else lolol. 
 
 Steadman, F. M., 962. 
 
 Steichen, E. J., 1163-1164. 
 
 Stenger, Erich, 687-689, 963-966, 1165-1168, 1504, 
 1620-1621, 1806. See Precht, J. (entries 603, 
 680); see Miethe, A. (entry no. 2112). 
 
 Stenger, Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber, 1169-1170, 
 1505. 
 
 Stieglitz, Alfred, 1171. 
 
 Stoakley, F. J., 2294. 
 
 Stobbe, Hans, 1172, 1367, 1506. 
 
 Stokes, G. G., 139. 
 
 Stolze, F., 218, 549, 690, 1173-1174, 1368. 
 
 Storr;-B- V., 20383. 
 
 Stryel7zes 
 
 Streissler, Alfred, 1369, 1807-1808. 
 
 Struss, Karl, 2063. 
 
 Strutt, J. W., 71. 
 
 Sutton, Thomas, 90. 
 
 Swan, J. We 150: 
 
 Swinton, A. A. C., 125. 
 
 Switkowski, Josef, 1622. 
 
 Symmons, Guy. See Farmer, Howard, and Guy 
 Symmons. 
 
 Szezepanik, Jan, 612, 1175, 1370. 
 
 Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch, 1887. 
 
 See also Lumiére, 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 T., H., 480. 
 
 Talbot, H. F., 12. 
 
 Talboys, A. E., 550. 
 
 Tallent, A. A. K., 354, 412, 481. 
 Tauleigne, A., 1507. 
 
 Taylor, J. T., 72. 
 
 Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller, 2236. 
 Testud de Beauregard, 44. 
 
 Thames Colour Plate Co., 1374. 
 Thiem, W., 2021, 2295. 
 
 Thieme, Paul, 1178, 1377, 1723, 1888, 2022. 
 Thoerner, W., 1810. 
 
 Thomas, R. W., 85. 
 
 Thorp, Thomas, 438. 
 
 Thovert, J., 1378, 1624-1625, 1724, 2296. 
 Thwing, C. B., 200. 
 
 Tikhoff, 1626. 
 
 Tillman, S. D., 59. 
 
 Tilney, F. C., 969, 1180-1181. 
 Tiphaigne de la Roche, C. F., 1. 
 Tobler, Friedrich, 1811, 1889. 
 
 Toch, Maximilian, 1380, 1508. 
 Torchon, Paul, 1182-1183. 
 
 Toulon, Pierre, 2176. 
 
 Townsend, C. F., 693. 
 
 Traube, Artur, 614, 694, 971-972, 2297. 
 Traut, H., 1184. 
 
 Trillat, A., 440. 
 
 Triplice, 551. 
 
 Tschoerner, Ludwig, 1185. 
 
 Tutton, F. G., 2302, 2346-2348. 
 
 U 
 
 Union photographique industrielle établissements Lu- & 
 miére & Jougla réunis, 1812. 
 United States. — Patents Committee, 36. 
 
 V 
 
 Valenta, Eduard, 243, 355, 441, 615, 787, 973, 1187-— 
 1190, 1381-1383, 1628-1629, 1725-1726, 2023. 
 
 Valette, T., and R. Feret, 1890. 
 
 Vallot, Emile, 1630. 
 
 Van Beek, H., 482. 
 
 Van der Weyde, 81. 
 
 Van Deventer, J. G., 1191. 
 
 Ventujol, Emmanuel, 2349-2350. 
 
 Versnaeyen, M. K., 115-116. 
 
 Vidal, Léon, 106, 117-118, 201, 219, 244, 314-317, — 
 356, 390-394, 512-513, 552, 788-789. . 
 
 Vies, Guilliam de, 2177. 
 
 Vieuille, G., 357. 
 
 Villain, Alfred, 1509, 2024, 2065. 
 
 Vinzl, Hans, 2025. 
 
 Vogel, H. W., 91, 96-97, 133-134, 140-141, 147, 174, 
 202-203, 245, 317, 358-359. 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 WAL Ss 0925 
 
 W., J., 790-791. : 
 
 W., L. T., 1968; 2278: 
 
 Wagner, R., 2240. 
 
 Wall, E. J., 265-266, 292, 483, 553-554, 616-619, 
 792-802, 974-990, 1192-1195, 1385, 1510, 1632— 
 2244, 2306-2308, 2351-2353. ; 
 
 Wallace, R. J., 514, 991, 1196-1197, 1511, 1814. 5 
 1633, 1728, 1891-1894, 1969, 2027, 2179, 2241— 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Waller, Augustus, 10. 
 
 Wallon, Etienne, 318, 360, 442,.515, 621, 992-995, 
 1198, 2245. 
 
 Walter, Gustav, 803. 
 
 Walters, F. M., and Raymond Davis, 2246.’ 
 
 arburg, Agnes B., 2084. 
 
 Warburg, J. C., 1199, 1386, 2354. 
 
 Ward, J. J., 1200. 
 
 Warnerke, Leon, 225, 247. 
 
 pwastell, W. L. F., 2355. 
 
 Waterhouse, James, 104, 622, 1388-1389. 
 Watkins, Alfred, 444, 996-997, 1202-1203, 1815, 1895. 
 Watkins, H. S., 2247, 
 
 Watteville, C. de, 2248. 
 
 Weidert, Fr., 623. 
 
 Weidmann, V., 1896. 
 
 _ Weimann, Arthur, 1634. 
 
 - Weissermel, W., 1512, 1729-1730, 1897. 
 
 - Wentzel, Fritz, 1391. 
 
 _ Wenz, Emile, 1898. 
 
 Weston, A. W. H., 1970. 
 
 -Whatmough, W. A., 1899. 
 
 _ Whidden, G. C., 2028. 
 
 _ Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Finlay, 1817. 
 Wieland, H., and others, 2029. 
 
 - Wiener, O. H., 175, 267, 361, 395, 1392. 
 
 _ Wilcox, W. D., 2180. 
 
 _ Wilkinson, W. T., 1900, 2030, 2085. 
 Williams, A. D., 2031. 
 
 _ Williams, S. H., 2123-2124. 
 
 Wilson, E. L., 248. 
 
 Winstanley, D., 204. 
 
 _ Winter, G., 1513, 1635. 
 
 Wise, L. E. See Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise. 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 Diy 
 
 Wise, L. E., and others, 2125. 
 
 Wishart, R. S. See Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart. 
 
 Wolf-Czapek, K. W., 998-1001, 1731. 
 
 Wood, Sir H. T., 320-322. 
 
 Wood, R. W., 396, 445-446, 624, 1732. 
 
 Woodhead, A. E., 1901. 
 
 Woods, C. R., 135. 
 
 Woods, L. T., 2250. 
 
 Worel, Karl, 516, 555, 695, 804, 1002-1004, 1205, 
 1514, 1636, 1733-1734, 1902. 
 
 Wratten, S. H. See Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wrat- 
 ten. 
 
 Wratten & Wainwright, 1004. 
 
 Wright, H. W. C., 1903, 2251. 
 
 Wuensch, C. E., 2. 
 
 Wychgram, Engelhard, 1637, 1819. 
 
 x 
 
 Wo, LOLS 
 Xtensis, pseud., 1971. 
 
 Me 
 
 Yerbury, S. G., 805-806, 1516, 2126, 2252. 
 Yoshida, Usaburo, 2127. 
 Young, S. L., 1393. 
 
 Z 
 
 Zander, C. G., 696, 807-808. 
 Zavoda, Bohuslav, 1394. 
 Zenker, Wilhelm, 205, 447. 
 
SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 Abney, Sir W. de W., 114, 128, 163, 548, 2141, 2194, 
 
 2209. 
 Abney’s color disc, 699. 
 Actinometers, 996-997, 
 Additive process, 2066. 
 Aeonchrome plate, 1905. 
 Aerial photography, 1319. 
 
 Agfa plate, 1765, 1795, 1915, 1980, 2022-2023, 2336. 
 
 Albert, Joseph, 114, 120, 1184. 
 Albumin, 123, 215. 
 Allochrome plates, 697. 
 
 Amateur work, 428, 469, 550, 617, 664, 679, 1066, 
 
 1232, 1268, 1686, 1749, 1865, 
 Anethol, 2106. 
 Aniline. See Coal tar colors. 
 Animals, photography of, 1819. 
 Anti-frilling dish, 1014. 
 
 Art and color photography, 159, 762, 817, 1017, 1283, 
 
 1341, 1434, 1641, 1651, 1868, 1931. 
 
 Astronomical uses, 1197, 1535, 1594, 1626, 1703, 1732, 
 
 2130,-2279. 
 Aurora plate, 1210, 1250, 1510. 
 
 Autochromes, 586-588, 593, 621, 665-666, 668, 811, 
 846, 849, 866, 870-871a, 884, 894, 909, 911-912, 
 938, 948, 962, 964, 978-979, 994-995, 998-999, 
 1012, 1015, 1018, 1029, 1055, 1068, 1070-1073, 
 1078, 1134, 1137, 1144, 1175, 1190, 1192, 1196, 
 1198, 1205, 1214, 1233-1234, 1280, 1307, 1321, 
 1359, 1395, 1406, 1416, 1512, 1519, 1609, 1619, 
 1621, 1655, 1696, 1730, 1737, 1798, 1800, 1850, 
 1863, 1918, 1970, 1991, 2000, 2046, 2114, 2180, 
 
 2247-2355, 
 Actinometers, 996, 
 Anaglyphs, 1555. 
 Backing, 1809. 
 Blacks, 1153, 2329. 
 Blacks and whites from, 1608, 1974. 
 Bluish tones, 1039, 1044, 1271, 1529, 2233, 2285. 
 Changing box, 1579. 
 Cloud effects, 2196. 
 Color, 1023, 1323, 1467, 1762. 
 
 Comparison with other processes, 789, 897-898, 970, 
 1003, 1086, 1213, 1744, 1861, 1884a, 2009, 2137, 
 
 2336. 
 Contrast, 1243, 1665. 
 Dark room, 1131, 1297, 1900. 
 Dark slide, 1265. 
 Daylight development, 1065, 1106, 1287, 2310. 
 Defects, 1220, 1290, 1659, 1791, 2268, 2318. 
 Desensitizing, 2181, 2217, 2256, 2286. 
 Deterioration, 1799. 
 Difficulties, 915, 2080. 
 Drying, 2249. 
 Enlargements, 1634, 1754. 
 
 Exposure, 862, 950, 1028, 1032-1033, 1052, 1054, 
 1064, 1095, 1128, 1130, 1194, 1203-1204, 1232, 
 1272, 1275, 1403, 1463, 1476, 1605-1606, 1699, 
 1706, 1723, 1749, 1788, 1821, 1823, 1826, 1831, 
 
 1895, 1919, 2214, 2232, 2311, 2349. 
 Exposure in artificial light, 2033. 
 Exposure (instantaneous), 1501, 1617, 2270. 
 Fading, 1247. 
 
 Filters, 1095, 1105, 1202, 1273, 1306, 1602, 1611, 
 
 1638, 1715, 1766-1767, 2104, 2319, 2324. 
 
 [118]. 
 
 Autochromes, continued. 
 
 Flashlight, 1324, 1459-1460, 1604, 1729. © 
 
 Flatness, 1200. 
 
 Flowers, 864. 
 
 Frilling, 1171, 1542, 1551. 
 
 Grain, 828, 914, 939, 1021, 1148, 1381. 
 
 Hypersensitization, 1518, 1618, 1624-1625, 1630, 
 1657, 1677, 1724, 1768, 1785-1786, 1869, 2159, 
 2284, 2304. 
 
 Illumination of subject, 2040, 2086, 2214. 
 
 Improvements, 2212. : 
 
 Intensification, 819, 1064, 1079, 1081, 1223, 1236, 
 1660-1661, 1770, 2145, 2150, 2198. 
 
 Landscapes, 993, 1049, 1468. 
 
 Lantern slides, 1010, 1109, 1966, 2262. 
 
 Lens (soft-focus), 2052. 
 
 Metallic screens, 1276. 
 
 Mounting, 1020, 1060. ; 4 
 
 Old plates, 1417, 1503. a 
 
 Optics, 1672. = 
 
 Outfits, 858, 1268. 
 
 Packing, 1544. 
 
 Pinatype prints, 1038. 
 
 Portraits, 1242, 1550, 1783, 1844, 1972, 2156. 
 
 Price, 1211, 13525-1385. 
 
 Printing frame, 1364. 
 
 Projecting, 1284, 1866, 2203, 2281. q 
 
 Reproduction, 827, 937, 1142, 1170, 1215, 1249, 
 1301, 1351, 1424, 1437-1438, 1466, 1499, 1509, 
 1513, 1520, 1549, 1652, 1833, 1849, 2185, 233759 
 
 Residues, 819,  F 
 
 Retouching, 1673, 1760, 1857. 
 
 Reversing, 819, 875-876, 1141, 1235, 1398, 1643. 
 
 Rock sections, 1024. 
 
 Screens, 1664. s 
 
 Stains and spots, 819, 1064, 1129, 1143, 1161, 1365, 
 1399, 1559, 1761. 
 
 Stereoscopic, 851, 1366, 2182. 
 
 Stripping, 1149. 
 
 Sulphide toning, 1145, 1183. 
 
 Sunsets, 1415. 
 
 Telephotography, 1875. 
 
 Theory, 1075, 1461. 
 
 Thermometer, 1390. 
 
 Underexposure, 1580. 
 
 Use in ordinary photography, 1523, 1541. 
 
 Varnish, 902, 927, 1370. 
 
 Viewing: 859, 1096, 1164, 1275, 1300, 1338, 1343, 
 1421, 1490, 1662, 1702, 1810, 1898, 2081. 4 
 
 Washing, 1048, 
 
 Whites, 941. 
 
 Working of, 780, 820-821, 826, 838-840, 865, 901, 
 905-908, 910, 943, 960, 985, 1009, 1022, 1028, 
 1036-1037, 1041, 1045, 1048, 1050, 1063-1066, 
 1074, 1077, 1084, 1097, 1100, 1102, 1106, 1108, 
 1120-1121, 1132, 1136, 1138-1139, 1154, 1155, 
 1162, 1164, 1182-1183, 1186, 1189, 1203, 1221, 
 1228, 1232, 1240-1241, 1267, 1287, 1299, 1302— 
 1303, 1308-1310, 1312, 1325, 1345, 1347, 1360, 
 1362, 1380, 1384, 1396, 1425, 1492, 1495, 1497 
 1508, 1510, 1533, 1548, 1557, °1597, 1632,920em 
 1640, 1646, 1658, 1663, 1685, 1698, 1751, 1790, 
 1826, 1834, 1836, 1885, 1891, 1909, 1910, 1914, 
 1963, 1975, 2025, 2031, 2109, 2111a, 2138, 2175 
 2193, 2205, 2257, 2261, 2311, 2320, 2326, 2334, 
 
 Zeiss accessories, 1206. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 Autochromes for amateurs, 1066, 1749. 
 Autochromes and art, 1042, 1341, 1956, 1964. 
 Autochromes in astronomy, 2130, 2279. 
 
 Autochromes from autochromes, 822, 1057-1059, 1441- 
 
 1442, 1448, 1451, 1458, 1750. 
 Autochromes in autumn, 1539. 
 Autochromes of birds, 1952. 
 Autochromes of interiors, 1953, 2251. 
 Autochromes in microphotography, 1312, 1322. 
 Autochromes in museums, 1466. 
 Autochromes in travelling, 1028, 1043, 1107, 1377, 
 1462, 1543, 1650. 
 Autochromes in tropics, 1493, 1748, 1811, 1889, 2177. 
 Autochromes in winter, 1692, 2251, 
 Autochromoscope, 1662. 
 Autotype, 702, 783, 1648, 1827. 
 
 B 
 
 Backs (repeating), 2254. 
 
 Balduinus, C. Adolphus, 1753. 
 
 Battlefield photography, 2069. 
 
 Baumgartner’s process, 298. 
 
 Beccaria, Giovanni Battista, 1753. 
 
 Becquerel’s process, 15, 26, 35, 50, 68, 101, 136, 248, 
 267-269, 282, 364, 467. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Bennetto’s process, 287-288, 310, 326-327, 402, 1443, 
 1480, 1489. 
 
 Berton and Gambs process, 849. 
 
 Bibliography, 2034, 2088. 
 
 Bichromated size process, 845, 1649. 
 
 Bierstadt, E., 255. 
 
 Bird photography, 1952. 
 
 Black and white prints from autochromes, 1928, 1974. 
 
 Blacks, 501. 
 
 Bleachout process, 502, 516, 540, 555, 571, 596, 643, 
 659, 675, 694, 713, 730, 747, 771, 773-774, 776, 
 797, 849, 895, 924-925, 931, 957, 959, 1000- 
 1003, 1094, 1117, 1160, 1218, 1230, 1258-1263, 
 1292, 1294, 1296, 1318, 1363, 1367, 1455, 1500, 
 1502005 14.) 1537.-1552,. 1556, 1561, 1576, 1583= 
 1584, 1601, 1627, 1629, 1691, 1707-1708, 1722, 
 1726, 1733-1734, 1757, 1759, 1769, 1771, 1775, 
 1801, 1804, 1812-1813, 1852, 1887, 1902, 2020, 
 2089, 2161, 2278. 
 
 Blue, 451, 919. 
 
 Body colors, 361, 2107. 
 
 Bonnaud’s process, 115. 
 
 Boyle, Robert, 1753. 
 
 Brasseur and Sampolo’s process, 299, 450, 476. 
 
 Brewster’s (P. W.) camera, 1977, 1987. 
 
 Burroughs, Wellcome & Co., 1623. 
 
 Butler’s process, 435, 706, 1531, 1741, 2090, 2276. 
 
 Cc 
 
 Cadett plates, 387-388. 
 
 Cajal’s process, 849. 
 
 Camera, History, 1610. 
 
 Camera, Reflector, 757, 2230. 
 
 Camera, Single-exposure, 635, 639, 683, 690, 706, 
 710, 740, 758, 1006, 1113-1114, 1225, 1393, 1486, 
 1668, 1689, 1709, 1779, 1854, 2288, 2340. 
 
 Campbell, James, 26. 
 
 Carbon processes, 513, 703, 766, 800, 830, 988, 2128. 
 
 Catalysis, 1150. 
 
 Cathode rays, 2045. 
 
 Cellerier’s process, 148, 152, 156. 
 
 Celloidine paper, 312. 
 
 Ceramic screen-plates, 2029. 
 
 Ceylon, taking photographs in, 1873. 
 
 Chamby, M., 77. 
 
 Chassagne’s process, 293, 297, 301-302, 320-321. 
 
 119 
 
 Chloranol, 1834. 
 
 Chlorophyl, 161. 
 
 Christensen screen-plate. See Agfa plate, 
 
 Chromodiascope, 1099, 1300. 
 
 Chromoscope, 1697, 2276, 2306. 
 
 Chronométre, 111. 
 
 Cinematography, 401, 708, 1082, 1157, 1248, 1479, 
 1501, o1674,° 1678, 1679, 1731,-1738,. 1747, 17463; 
 1772, 1941, 2027, 2060, 2071, 2083, 2092, 2225, 
 2259, 2273, 2289) 2al6, 2332, 2351. 
 
 Coal tar colors, 165, 184, 355. 
 
 . Collen, Henry, 2077. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Collodion, 138, 570, 615, 1226, 1447, 1473. 
 
 Color curves, 842. 
 
 Color discs, 397. 
 
 Color meters, 880. 
 
 Color scale, 2043. 
 
 Color sensitiveness, 471, 489, 743, 770, 965, 1947, 
 1992, 2164. 
 
 Color sensitizers, 437, 441, 464, 498, 610, 619, 622, 
 636, 645, 654, 700, 728, 739, 823, 961, 977, 984, 
 991, 1159, 1178, 1316, 1391," 1449; 51642, 1705, 
 1724, 1786, 1805, 1832, 1858, 1938, 2012, 2106, 
 2131, 2133, 2165, 2246, 2282, 2304. 
 
 See also Dyes. 
 
 Color theory, 2-3, 47, 55-56, 99, 104, 124, 158, 205, 
 207, 218, 262, 295, 313, 324, 328, 362, 413, 415, 
 419,504, 568, 715, 722, 727, 756, 934, 1115, 1219, 
 1314, 1389, 1397, 1430, 1478, 1911, 1939, 1955, 
 1960, 2013-2014, 2035, 2047, 2051, 2068, 2075, 
 2099, 2160, 2242, 2274, 2280, 2295. 
 
 Comley’s camera, 847. 
 
 Cooper-Hewitt lamp, 569. 
 
 Corke ei 2.2102: 
 
 Cornu, 338. : 
 
 Crime and color photography, 1025. 
 
 Croll, Oswald, 1753. 
 
 Cros’s process, 82, 113, 116-117, 172, 332, 478, 551, 
 640, 1728, 1861, 1876. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Crum, Walter, 70. 
 
 Crystalline reflection, 139, 162. ; 
 
 Cyanin, 503, 579, 726, 973, 1118, 1152, 2072, 2166- 
 2169. 
 
 D 
 
 Daguerrotype (colored), 81. 
 
 Dansac-Chassagne process. See Chassagne’s process. 
 Dark rooms, 693, 714, 1297, 1457, 1473. 
 
 Davidson, Lascelles, 401, 581. 
 
 Daylight, 680. 
 
 Deeks’s process, 2187, 2345. 
 
 De Lubicz’s process, 449. 
 
 Delvalez, 467. 
 Desensitizers, 1159, 
 2256, 2286. 
 Diachrome process. 
 
 Diaphragms, 609. 
 
 Dichroic films, 2074. 
 
 Dichrooscope, 53. 
 
 Dicyanine, 745. 
 
 Diffraction process, 375, 396, 445-446, 624, 731, 881. 
 
 Direct processes, 270, 376, 379, 420, 452, 487, 493, 
 502, 600, 738, 774, 853, 958, 1666, 1717, 1847, 
 201s, ce aes 
 
 Dittmar’s process, 309, 348, 467. 
 
 Donisthorpe printing process, 854, 2183. 
 
 Drac process, 710, 781, 1718. 
 
 Drying apparatus, 1752, 1869, 2249, 
 
 Ducos du Hauron, Alcide, 1209. 
 
 Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 537, 879, 1838, 1879, 2163, 
 2216. 
 
 1505, 2181, 2190, 2217-2218, 
 
 See Traube’s process. 
 
120 
 
 Ducos du Hauron’s process, 83, 116, 120, 140, 172, 
 332, 357, 360, 428, 442, 470, 478, 515, 640, 849, 
 857, 1861, 1876. 
 
 Dufay process, 1046, 1244, 1331, 1342, 1405, 1410- 
 1411, 1413- 1414, 1420, 1427-1429, 1436, 1439, 
 1498, 1510, 1540, 1563, 1565, 1572, 1619, 1637, 
 1644, 1667, 1669, 1721, 1744, 1788, 1798, 2061, 
 2247, 2258, 2313. 
 
 Dyes, 108, 289, 371, 512, 533, 536, 559-560, 576, 903, 
 O55e 7 1047, male. LIOs lessen Leds Lols—lLoloy 
 1449-1450, 1553, 1574, 1675, 1758, 1852, 2042, 
 2048, 2082, 2105-2106, 2110-2111, 2113, 2118, 
 2125, 2131, 2157-2158, 2161-2162, 2204, 2206— 
 2207, 2219, 2275, 2341, 2346. 
 
 E 
 
 Eastman transparency process, 1920. 
 
 Eclipse, 78, 782. 
 
 Eder, Josef Maria, 467, 534, 1935. 
 
 Educational uses, 2172a. 
 
 Edward’s process, 89. 
 
 Egyptian scenes, 1320, 1582. 
 
 Electric light, 1193. 
 
 Enlargements, 725. 
 
 Eosine, 130, 133. 
 
 Exhibitions, 566, 718, 723, 793, 795, 861, 983, 1008, 
 1051, 1180, 1199, 1227, 1239, 1255, 1375, 1886, 
 2011, 2213, 2258, 2264. 
 
 Exposure, 1407, 1895, 1919, 2094, 2311. 
 
 Exposure meters, 1128, 1204, 1802, 1815-1816, 1925, 
 2095. 
 
 Exposures (instantaneous), 303, 331, 354, 764, 1242, 
 1304, 1378, 1426, 1501, 1538, 1617, 2270. 
 
 F 
 
 Fabricius, Georgius, 1753. 
 
 Fabrics, color prints on, 1890, 2024, 2036, 2065. 
 
 Ferricyanide method, 1454. 
 
 Film (screen-ruled), 1401. 
 
 Films (colored), on metallic surfaces, 1330. 
 
 Films (untoned), color of, 1147. 
 
 Films, marking of, 2149. 
 
 Pigment, 655. 
 
 Filters, 374, 490, 499, 521, 538, 562-563, 580, 589- 
 590, 598, 618, 669, 689, 698-699, 709, 753, 877, 
 919, 942, 987, 1011, 1105, 1146, 1173, 1179, 1197, 
 1202, 1273-1274, 1306, 1317, 1368, 1440, 1511, 
 1524, 1592, 1602, 1638, 1781, 1846, 1999, 2005, 
 2010, 2041, 2095, 2104, 2111-2112, 2153, 2189, 
 2204, 2319, 2324, 2338, 2342. 
 
 Fish glue, use of, 1736. 
 
 Fixing, 51, 77. 
 
 Flashlights, 990, 1252, 1324, 1459-1460, 1550, 1595, 
 1604, 1671, 1680, 1729, 1844, 2021. 
 
 Florence plate, 1346. 
 
 Flowers, 864, 2148. 
 
 Focussing screens, 1845. 
 
 Foliage, 2195. 
 
 Four-color process, 717, 721, 727, 807, 1254. 
 
 Fraschbourg’s process, 581. 
 
 Freshwater, T. E., 328. 
 
 Friese-Greene’s process, 386, 1591. 
 
 Fulgide, 1172, 1506. 
 
 G 
 
 Gaedicke, J., 171. 
 
 Garchey’s process, 435. 
 
 Garden’s, 2265. 
 
 Gebhart, Kurt, 1924. 
 
 Geisler’s process, 341, 967, 1253, 1591. 
 See also Nachet-Geisler process. 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 Gelatin, color phenomena, 1174. 
 Geology, use in, 1714. 
 Gervais-Courtellement, 1582, 1604. 
 Gilbert’s process, 815. 
 
 Giphantia (title), 1 
 
 Glaciers, 1735. 
 
 Glycerol, 1642. 
 
 Glycinroth, 433. 
 
 Goethe, J. W. von, 491. 
 
 Gorsky process, 2100, 2271. 
 Gradation, 653, 1098. 
 
 Grain structure, 393-394, 835, 939, 1381, 1573, 1593. 
 Grating films, 438. 
 
 Gray’s process, 232. 
 
 Grays, 501, 1681, 1695,)17135 
 Green, 392, 863, 2192. 
 Grenier-Villard process, 352. 
 Gum process, 777. 
 
 Gurtner’s process, 581. 
 
 H 
 
 Hallotype, 45-46. 
 
 Hamburger’s process, 1536. 
 
 Heliochromes, 20, 22, 34. 
 
 Hellot, Jean, 1753. 
 
 Henberger’s patent, 786. 
 
 Henderson award, 1269. 
 
 Henry, Charles, experiments, 300. 
 
 Hering’s theory, 934. 
 
 Hernandez, Arturo, 2129. 
 
 Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 68. 
 
 Hesekiel’s process, 424, 637. 
 
 Hess-Ives process, 1933-1934, 1975, 1996-1997, 2028, 
 2032, 2063. 
 
 Hicro process. See Hess-Ives process. 
 
 Hill process, 16-19, 21, 23-24, 26-28, 30-33, 36, 43, 
 155, 528, 2243,922505) 22525 
 
 History, 72, 102, 125, 127, 144, 150, 170, 177-178, 
 186, 240, 245, 255, 308, 322, 367, 399, 412, 462, 
 487, 495, 514, 543, 644, 712, 804, 970, 1007, 1083, 
 1093, 1184, 1256, 1472, 1584, 1610, 1753, 1793, 
 1806, 1837, 1884, 1894, 2017, 2026, 2058, 2070, 
 2083, 2101, 2172, 2184, 2220, 2294, 2306. 
 
 Hofmann’s process, 439. 
 
 Hollborn plate, 1295. 
 
 Homocol sensitizer, 691. 
 
 Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 311, 520. 
 
 Huebl’s process, 652. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 Hunt, Robert, 68. 
 See also Author index. 
 Hydroquinone, 444. 
 
 Illuminants, 1940, 2040. 
 Images (three-color), symmetry, 1835, 1851. 
 India, Taking photographs in, 1872. 
 Indirect processes, 376, 381, 450. 
 Industrial applications, 453. 
 Interference bands, 166. 
 Interiors, 1953. 
 Irradiation, 567. 
 Isenmann’s process, 630. 
 Isochromatic plates, 1197. 
 Ives, Frederic E., 203, 207-208, 220, 230, 238, 530, 
 932, 1847, 1876, 2136, 2343. 
 Processes, 209, 238, 266, 304-306, 316, 335, 367, 
 
 373, 377, 418, 422-423, 461, 470, 1400, 1443— 4 
 
 1445, 1480, 1489, 1961, 2135, 2158, 2207-2208. 3 
 See also Author index. es 
 Ives, H. E., Duplication method, 968. 
 
 
 
 
i i id ac 
 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 
 
 J 
 
 Joly’s process, 254, 266, 290, 307, 323, 329-330, 338, 
 353, 405, 413, 427, 443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 
 605, 673, 679, 951, 2124. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Jougla process. See Omnicolor. 
 
 Jumeaux process, 757. 
 
 Jupiter lamp, 734. 
 
 K 
 
 Kitz, 467. 
 
 Kodachrome process, 1906, 1916, 1937, 
 1948, 1969, 1975, 1978, 2008, 2314. 
 
 Koenig’s process, 616« 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Kopp’s process, 217. 
 
 Krayn, Robert, 1983. 
 
 Krayn’s process, 403, 849, 892-893, 974, 1165, 1257, 
 1484, 1494, 1504, 1527, 1612, 1628, 1637, 1645. 
 
 1942-1943, 
 
 L 
 
 Landscapes, 343, 556, 993, 1049, 1468. 
 
 Lantern slides, 389, 1010, 1109, 1670, 1917, 1966, 
 1968, 2007, 2096, 2236, 2262. 
 
 Laroche’s process, 92. 
 
 feaCarey-.13/, 151,267, 292. 
 
 Lead intensification, 1822. 
 
 Lectures, suggestions for, 2003. 
 
 Lehman’s patent, 861. 
 
 Lenses, 484, 582, 812, 940, 1092, 1289, 1592, 1712, 
 2095. 232. 
 
 Lenses (soft-focus), 2052. 
 
 Leto plate, 1777, 1792. 
 
 Leuco bases, 576, 585, 1158, 1170, 2307. 
 
 Lewisohn process, 2269. 
 
 Lieber process, 975. 
 
 Light: 
 
 Chemical action, 4-12, 37-38, 40, 52, 69, 74, 79, 
 86-87, 91, 93, 95-97, 121-122, 129, 141, 143, 
 149, 157-158, 175, 190, 193, 402, 440, 503, 644, 
 660, 680, 1585-1587, 1753, 1839, 1841. 
 
 Dispersion, 1446. 
 
 Polarized, 180, 2339. 
 
 Lippmann, Gabriel, 246, 531, 2248. 
 
 Lippmann process, 176, 178-179, 186, 189, 194, 196, 
 197, 200, 202, 210, 216, 222, 224-225, 231, 235- 
 236, 242-243, 249-253, 256, 262, 269, 277, 
 282-283, 291-292, 317-318, 329, 345-347, 358, 
 365, 370, 383, 385, 395, 405-407, 412, 420, 426, 
 458, 461, 467, 474-475, 478, 496, 506, 584, 599, 
 604, 606, 661, 676, 709, 736-737, 789, 802, 833- 
 834, 898-899, 945, 952, 966, 968, 989, 1003, 
 1080, 1089, 1091, 1358, 1453, 1482, 1694, 1725, 
 1756, 1840, 1908, 1945, 2001. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Loewenstamm and Hoffert, 641. 
 
 London Camera Club, 507. 
 
 Loundin’s process, 1304, 2215. 
 
 Lueppo-Cramer, 451. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Lumiére, Antoine, 1521, 1545. 
 
 Lumiére, Antoine, and Louis Lumiére, 962, 1388. 
 
 Lumiére, Louis, 2245. 
 
 Lumiére processes, 223, 225, 235-236, 247, 285, 459, 
 480, 497, 740, 843, 1124-1126, 1329, 1369, 1862. 
 
 See also Autochromes; also Author index. 
 
 Luminescence, photographs of, 1669. 
 
 Luther, R., methods, 1575. 
 
 121 
 
 M 
 
 McDonough’s process, 263, 280-281, 408-409, 427, 
 443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 494, 679, 1989. 
 
 Manners’ process, 1590. 
 
 Marionez’s process, 1615. 
 
 Mars-Star process, 2119. 
 
 Mascart, E. E. N., 338. 
 
 Maxwell, J. C., 338, 413, 504, 2241. 
 
 Medicine, use in, 2191, 2208. 
 
 Meister Lucius & Briining, 577, 595, 671, 678, 745. 
 
 Melano’s chromoscope, 380, 429, 442. 
 
 Meslin, 467. 
 
 Metallography, 1088, 1745, 1883. 
 
 Methyl-violet, 2127. 
 
 Meyer, Bruno, 594. 
 
 Meyer’s camera, 342. 
 
 Mezaro’s patent, 792. 
 
 Microphotographs, 922, 1021, 1088, 1312, 1322, 1452, 
 1564, 1688, 1704, 1764, 2053-2054, 2056, 2339. 
 
 Micro-spectra process. See Rheinberg’s process. 
 
 Miethe, Adolf, 518, 557, 2253. 
 
 Miethe’s Egyptian scenes, 1320. 
 
 Miethe’s process, 485, 510, 519, 522, 525, 542, 549, 
 561, 642. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 N 
 
 N. P. G. process, 685, 765, 767, 1562, 1730. 
 Nachet-Geisler process, 719, 868. 
 Nachet’s stereochromoscope, 266, 315, 391. 
 Natural history records, 763, 1110-1111. 
 Neuhauss, Richard, 1962. 
 Neuhauss’s process, 467, 486, 493. 
 Newton’s rings, 2186. 
 Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 25-26, 35, 61-62, 
 65, 68, 88, 136, 248. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Niewenglowski’s heliochromoscope, 266, 284. 
 
 O 
 
 Ocean photography, 2291. 
 
 Oil of pinks, 60. 
 
 Omnicolor, 824, 885-886, 920, 981, 1212, 1231, 1270, 
 1279, 1282, 1305, 1313, 1332-1337, 1348, 1353, 
 1355, 1357, 1381-1382, 1387, 1395, 1419, 1422, 
 1474, 1510, 1730, 1744. 
 
 One-plate processes, 930. 
 
 Opal, photographs on, 1776. 
 
 Optics, 417, 454-455, 465-466, 481, 483, 1278, 1672. 
 
 Orthochromatic plates, 434, 890, 1123, 1846. 
 
 FP 
 
 Paget process, 1653, 1670, 1746, 1773, 1784, 1787- 
 1788, 1796-1798, 1807, 1817, 1820, 1825, 1830, 
 1842, 1846, 1874, 1880-1881, 1884a, 1888, 1917, 
 1963, 1966, 1975, 1988, 2009, 2018, 2093, 2097- 
 2098, 2117, 2120, 2132, 2137, 2143-2144, 2151- 
 2152, 2178, 2223-2224, 2231, 2247, 2266-2267, 
 2317, 2348. 
 
 Panchromatic plates, 433, 608, 664, 697, 890, 1016, 
 1238, 1339, 1471, 1900, 1912-1913, 1971, 2019, 
 2133-2134, 2219. 
 
 Paper prints, 545-546, 553, 577, 592, 632, 772-773, 
 1170, 1288, 1318, 1327, 1344, 1349, 1491, 1520, 
 1536, 1581, 1600, 1653, 1833, 1874, 2030, 2121, 
 2123, 2201, 2260, 2330. 
 
 Penrose ratiometer, 887. 
 
 Perscheid’s process, 581. 
 
 Pfenninger, Otto, 932, 1185, 1853. 
 
 Photometry, 2001-2002, 2049-2050. 
 
122 
 
 Photomicrographs. See Microphotographs. 
 
 Pietzner’s process, 803. 
 
 Pinachrome, 575, 589, 597, 613, 633, 787, 888, 1560, 
 1624. 
 
 Pinacyanol, 658, 745, 787, 888, 2072, 2125. 
 
 Pinaflavol, 2192, 2210-2211. 
 
 Pinatype, 656, 657, 671, 678, 732, 741, 784, 788, 799- 
 800, 829, 844, 852, 860, 872, 889, 891, 935, 936, 
 1038, 1228, 1245, 1774, 1859, 1897, 1990, 2240. 
 
 Pinaverdol, 2125. 
 
 Plates, 145-146, 161, 165, 206, 265, 489, 499, 643, 
 916, 1124, 1814, 1818, 1944. 
 
 See also names of plates, as: Autochromes, Thames, 
 Dufay, ete. 
 Keeping properties, 888. 
 Preservation, 760. 
 Plates (composite), 2300. 
 Poitevan’s process, 67, 76, 169, 267, 904. 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Pollock’s process, 435. 
 
 Polychromide process, 1843, 1878, 1954. 
 
 “Popular” works, 2038. 
 
 Portraits, 539, 590, 692, 701, 746, 796, 1242, 1252, 
 1324, 1431, 1516, 1550, 1844, 1926, 1972, 2146, 
 2156022335; 2230; 
 
 Positives on gelatine plates, 1251. 
 
 Pouncy’s process, 142. 
 
 Powel, Samuel, 160. 
 
 Powrie-Warner process. See Warner-Powrie process. 
 
 Prieur and Dubois’ process, 430, 581. 
 
 Prismatic dispersion, 837, 944, 992, 1019. 
 
 Prizma process, 2060, 2079, 2227-2228. 
 
 Professional work, 646, 679, 869, 1340, 1409, 1477, 
 1829, 1850, 1931, 1981, 2037. 
 
 Projection apparatus, 526, 601, 674, 681, 1112, 1224, 
 1284-1286, 1328, 1379, 1464, 1866-1867, 2176, 
 2203, 2281, 2309. 
 
 Prokudin-Gorsky’s process, 
 
 Purkinje effect, 1090. 
 
 ‘““Pyro-Reeb,” 943. 
 
 Pyrometry (optical), 2001. 
 
 1616. 
 
 R 
 
 Raehlmann, 794. 
 
 Ratiometer, 1994. 
 
 Raydex process, 1780, 1824, 1877, 1899, 1903-1904, 
 1907, 1922-1923, 2039, 2062, 2115, 2170, 2229, 
 DOA TAZA aS 
 
 Rayleigh, Lord, 338, 420, 467. 
 
 Raylo process, 2312, 2328, 2352-2353. 
 
 Reade, Dr., 70. 
 
 Red, 100, 433, 622, 698, 714, 729, 769, 787, 1257a, 
 1534, 1858, 2127, 2282. 
 
 Refraction compensator, 932. 
 
 Registration, 613, 1326, 1578. 
 
 Reichel’s process, 351, 614, 686. 
 
 Relief processes, 501, 2206, 2244, 2325. 
 
 Research, 1995, 2124. 
 
 Retouching stand, 2091. 
 
 Reversal of dye images, 2188. 
 
 Rheinberg’s processes, 1485, 1491, 1709-1710, 1718- 
 1719, 1728, 1808. 
 
 Rock sections, 1024. 
 
 Roll-holders, 1394. 
 
 Rothe’s process, 604. 
 
 See also Author index. 
 
 Ruth plate, 1599. 
 
 Ss 
 
 Sampolo’s process. See Brasseur and Sampolo’s 
 process, 
 
 Sanzol reduction process, 949. 
 
 Scheele, Carl Wilhelm, 1753. 
 
 Schmidt camera, 967, 980. 
 
 THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Schuett, F., 467. 
 
 Schulze, Johann Heinrich, 1753. 
 
 Scientific requirements, 294, 448, 738, 794, 1603, 
 2103 m2126; 
 
 Screen plate processes, 1101, 1116, 1151, 1166-1169, 
 1281, 1288, 1350, 1354, 1402, 1412, 1435, 1456, 
 1465, 1475, 1485, 1607, 1613-1614, 1620, 1623, 
 1633, 1693, 1713, 1743 1752: 1792, 1806, 1837, 
 1862, 1870, 1893, 1957, 1989, 2023, 2154, 2197, 
 2205, 2292, 2305,°2315, 2ociaeoose 
 
 See also names of plates, as: Watner-Powrie, Lu- 
 miére, Paget, etc. 
 
 Screens, 144, 233, 265, 271, 276, 314, 337, 356, 398; 
 404, 479, 567, 583, 629, 664, 670, 720, 744, 818, 
 922, 1004, 1013, 1525, 1566, 1648, 1656, 1664, 
 1755, 1766, 2094. 
 
 Screens (celluloid), 1546. 
 
 Seebeck, Johann Thomas, 267. 
 
 Seebeck’s process, 1385. 
 
 Selle, Gustav, 816. ° 
 
 Selle’s process, 286, 435. 
 
 Sensitol dyes, 2048. 
 
 Shepherd, E. S., 946. 
 
 Shepherd, E. Sanger, process, 374, 378, 460-461, 541, 
 544-546, 551-552, 581, 627-628, 746, 752, 785, 
 843, 1040. 
 
 Silver salts, 607, 1839, 1946, 2108. 
 
 Sinop process, 805-806. 
 
 Slavik’s process, 623, 637. 
 
 Smith-Merckens process, 771, 774. 
 
 Smith’s (J. H. & Co.), process. 
 ess. 
 
 Smith’s screen plate, 958. 
 
 Soap bubbles, 2015. 
 
 Society of Colour Photographers, 705, 711, 976, 1195, 
 1965. 
 
 Solgram, 611, 638, 775, 2119. 
 
 Sparkle, avoidance of, 1803. 
 
 Spectrotelescope, 273. 
 
 Spectrum, 13-14, 97, 107, 110, 135, 143, 488, 605, 
 631, 699-700, 878, 921, 1483, 1927, 2057, 2076, 
 2116. 
 
 Stage plays, 2287. 
 
 Stained glass windows, 463, 2147. 
 
 Stereochromoscope, 244. 
 
 Stereoscopic photography, 933, 1067, 1103, 1254, 1329, 
 1404, 1433, 1464, 1481, 1522, 1530, 2176, 2182, 
 2331. 
 
 Stripping films, 1119. 
 
 Studios, 651, 759. 
 
 Subtractive process, 900, 1949, 2066, 2073. 
 
 Sunrise and sunset effects, 1871. 
 
 Szcezepanik’s process, 482, 572, 771, 774, 776, 779, 
 959, 1208, 1293, 1295, 1298. 
 
 See Bleachout proc- 
 
 fi 
 
 Tauleigne-Mazo process, 1464, 1487, 1507. 
 
 Technicolor process, 2064. 
 
 Telephotography, 1875, 1896. a 
 
 Thames process, 523, 1027, 1035, 1056, 1104, 1176- 
 1177, 1212, 1216-1217, 1229-1230, 1269, 1371- 
 1376, 1381, 1383, 1387, 1395; 1418, 14237°1510; 
 1744. 
 
 Thermometers, 1390. 
 
 Thin membranes, 300. 
 
 Thorpe’s process, 435, 509. 
 
 Three-color back, 855-856. 
 
 Three-color printing, 325, 333, 349, 359, 363, 432, 
 473, 521, 524, 650, 748, 778, 783, 806, 832, 956, 
 1833, 1848, 1936, 1985- 1986, 1998, 2084-2085, 
 2128, 2185, 2341, 23450235475 
 
 Three- Baise prism process, 98, 112. 
 
 Three-plate processes (early), 63-64, 228, 292. 
 
 Thwing, C. B., 467. 
 
 Tissue process, 874. 
 

 
 
 
 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 123 
 
 Transmission, electric, 1701. 
 
 Transparencies, 416, 752, 784-785, 863, 1026, 1169, 
 1291, 1481, 1654, 1690, 1736, 1778, 1864, 1973, 
 
 2091, 2200, 2302, 2323, 2347. 
 
 Traube’s process, 748, 798, 971-972, 1031, 1716, 1984. 
 
 Triadochrome process, 2237, 2298-2299, 
 Tripak process, 1528, 1567-1571, 1683. 
 Triple projection process, 1867. 
 
 Trist’s camera, 2202, 2301. 
 
 Two-color process, 786, 1387, 1470, 1524, 1967, 1977, 
 1979, 1987, 2064, 2073, 2173, 2238, 2283, 2303. 
 
 U 
 
 Uto process. See Bleachout process. 
 Uva-chrom process, 2239, 2258, 2297. 
 
 V 
 
 Valenta, Edouard, 527. 
 Valenta’s process, 236, 467. 
 See also Author index. 
 Vallot process, 493. 
 Varnish, 1188, 1370. 
 Vaucamps, 565. 
 Verachromoscope, 1676, 1700, $727, 
 Veracolor plate, 1295. 
 Verak’s process, 198. 
 Veress’s process, 168, 170-171, 173, 183. 
 Verrill’s process, 511. 
 Vidal, Léon, 755, 790-791. 
 Vidal’s process, 89-90, 92, 106. 
 Views, books of, 1320, 1582, 1720, 1739, 1782. 
 Vogel, H. W., 368, 372. 
 Vogel’s process, 99, 104, 126, 134, 147, 188, 2026. 
 Vollenbruch’s theory, 1574. 
 
 WwW 
 
 Wall, E.. J., 328, 620, 
 
 War time developments, 2122. 
 
 Warner-Powrie process, 679, 814, 818, 867, 873, 883, 
 896-897, 913, 917, 926, 928, 954, 982, 986, 1122, 
 1127, 1140, 1191, 1201, 1356,.1381,. 1395. 
 
 Warner’s (Miss), process, 2305. 
 
 Warnerke, Leon, 131. 
 
 Weather conditions, 831. 
 
 Whites, 941, 1682. 
 
 Wiener, Otto, 181. 
 
 Wiener’s theory, 348, 461, 467. 
 
 Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm, 1856. 
 
 Wood’s process, 390, 405, 425, 477, 673, 731. 
 
 Worel’s process, 493, 508, 517, 600. 
 
 Wothly’s process, 185. 
 
 Wratten and Wainwright, 697, 1013, 1222, 1742. 
 
 xX 
 X-rays, 135. 
 
 Y 
 
 Yellow, 863, 2111. 
 Young-Helmholtz theory, 727, 756, 1461, 1517, 2057. 
 
 Z 
 
 Zander’s process, 696, 721, 807-810. 
 
 Zenker’s theory, 262, 338, 345, 347, 420, 451, 461, 
 467, 506, 599, 676, 
 
 Zink’s photo-polychromoscope, 266.